Home

Start 2012 - User manual

1. The opening of this dialog window allows a large number of data export and import configurations following the product s instructions for use manual Export to Spac Start is already configured so you can simply press Execute to complete the operation It is possible to determine which parts of the project are to be extracted Export SPAC Impianti Estensione 3 Export delle distribution Tutte Ok OjDa acer El ZE El Rapporto With All extrapolation takes place completely This operation generates 7 new files with IMP extension in the job order folder Power feed Busbar Circuits Infogen Param Paths and Qt imp Using the Import Single feed Diagram command the development of the single feed diagram and completion of the data table take place completely automatically 16 2 Import Single feed Diagram This command allows you to obtain the automatic drawing of the single feed functional diagram complete with both the graphic part and the data tables The Import Data Single feed Diagram function uses the files with IMP extension in the current job order folder To automatically obtain completion of the data tables with the calculation results obtained by Caneco Data Export from Caneco is firstly Sc CANECO Calculation Single feed Diagram It is important to save the Caneco project in the job order folder containing the IMP files to be imported 16 Caneco 243
2. nnnnnnnoannnnnenneennnnennnnn 332 Index e 387 DOO fo Sennen tore tee ee ttiee deer eerie eters soe ee Ne toe eee eae 257 Beeler 250 Duplicate Secom rnise a 291 DAF FIE apa A A 53 A A rn nt Scene reorere 162 Edit eat 134 Edit Cross Heterence 148 eler 175 OE MACIO e lali 170 Edit multiple terminals iniciara 133 Belle tuell 238 385 Editterminal DIOCK EE 130 Element height E 330 333 Element a osado 327 Element Gvmbol 224 236 EMP MOG CS EE 333 E MPV EE 308 Enter Siored E 51 En a ed ee eee ee A ce en 176 Example of Cross Reference oooocccccccccnononccnos 145 146 EXPO O ct octal 53 00 88 calida 361 Export Database cccccccssssseeeeceeeeeseseeeeeeeenaeeees 160 EXPO DICMISCS EE 365 EXDOM OCUINGS ad 69 Extended Vi Wii 350 352 Favourite Symbols ooooccccccccccccooncconnncnonoonncnonnncnnnanos 240 o asa a dance acon teat umanaes 108 CHD AM cies A at Real 169 DEER 324 Fill Calculator da 324 leie Beeler 169 A eect Al aA cree eet aseeiaet evs 286 Free Element 381 Ao EE 381 E e A 288 FUNCTION Jegend 92 195 Functional Drawing coccccoccccccccconcncnonononos 25 39 245 Furnishing Zvmbols 373 A tev citaer etree en rtnee Ear 264 lo AAA E 16 o a dedta EY 11 Hardware protection key cccssecccesseeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeees 16 A E E E A E E A 148 Hidden component management 169 e le 267 PIGS IOMA ii eg ee 169 HIS Wallis Tarta cdi 263 MOOK Ele Menta oda 380 Hygiene facilities A
3. Caneco is an optional software not supplied with Spac Start 16 Caneco 241 Export data from Planimetry The data are exported from the planimetric drawing made with Spac Start to Caneco The function asks you to choose the power feed from which to extract the data of the circuits connected m CANECO Planimetric Diagram Calculation Export dati per Caneco Riferimento LGBT Laneco ET sl Air Annulla The Export Data function generates files with IMP extension in the current job order folder In the previous Spac Start versions the data were stored in the Linee txt Lines txt and Utilizz txt Use txt files Caneco is compatible for importing these files Importing data to Caneco It is necessary to access the Caneco environment and open a new job from the Caneco File menu choose the command New Ctrl N The following window is shown to be completed with the base settings which are redefined by the subsequent data import IMP file Modifica le alimentazioni Pressing the Calculate Ret Alimentazion Collegament button and then confirming Riferimento ALIMENTAZION Ticu Trasfo Lunghezza m with Ok you reach the table Regime del N TN C 5 zl Carat secondo Fie i ete Cavi of the General Panel LV ZE ces sl Fie Lueszm 2 ama Rame which is completely empty Tensione BT o Lol 420 Vee trastoz E Posa fe El It is important to save Pot HT A EE Mal 500 Potenzackva BE File ci cavi the Caneco pr
4. Spac Start 20 1 2 User Manual May 2011 SDProget Industrial Software Via delle Industrie 8 10040 ALMESE TO ITALIA Tel 39 011 9346666 Fax 39 011 9351193 Internet E mail sdprogetOsdproget it Internet WEB pages http www sdproget it List of Contents LIST OF CONTENTS asta lianas 1 AAPP 11 1 1 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE HEOUIDEMENTS 11 For 32 bit Operating SyStemMS nora nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnns 11 For 64 bit operating E E rr 12 lA ORAC OMAR O ETOP r ile a 13 Te eres ela E E A E sce ite A A A inlet ine S 14 S AOE Na le 16 PTOI e e 16 Installation and configuration of the licensed server AND 17 Installation and configuration of the licensed client AND 17 Installation and configuration of the licensed server TC 18 Installation and configuration of the licensed client TC 18 Data migration and CUSTOMIZATIONS utility ooccoonncccnnoconnoconoconnononoonononannonanonnnnonannonanonanons 19 Database MIO ANON EE 19 Libraries Migration EE 19 A PPP APP E 20 ESOO SU da 20 SI e SEO O UU OO Reon etia natn Peter nai 20 T3 RELEASE 2012 OT ET 21 2 PASIGOS EEN 23 ere Re 23 SEENEN 23 Pa MOLTE o E iO E S 24 EE 24 FUNCIONO MIES as 25 o A e ee NU E ae 25 2A I AA A o A e 26 2 5 SPAC JOB ORDER MANAGEMENT 27 E HIS SOD A 27 NEWJOD OST sico ideado 28 en e ee 29 KRIER 20 Open Multi sheet eee eeccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesuceeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeeeeesseeeaa
5. AJ Use this type of return when you want to make the values of the wire or of power feed lines editable 101 O This family of returns was not present in the Spac versions prior to 2001 Cross in line Start and Destination Feed and Connection with the possibility of immediately inserting the corresponding destination return on a chosen page see Power Feed Returns par 4 4 and 4 5 This setting also acts with the Delete Symbol command during the deletion of a start return as you are asked if you want to immediately delete the corresponding destination return as well see par 15 4 Choice of the Destination Return position R Cross in Line of Returns 2 7 Be On the sheet and in the segment established in the centre in addition to the destination return also a part of wire or power feed is 29 w drawn 10mm in length already correctly numbered and provided already with Cross Reference So it will suffice to lengthen the existing lines directly with the Grips 7 2 7 e or using the AutoCAD Stretch command without having to number Lio the wires again Destination Returns Cross in line of Returns updates the situation of Start and Destination returns on line The use of AutoCAD commands to make changes or moves causes the presence of information that might be inconsistent In these cases it is necessary to run a check through complete processing of the 7 1 Cross Reference com
6. After confirming with OK the indication in the example TR1 0 3 1x1 5 is updated with the addition of 20 see par 18 2 or if it does not exist its insertion point is requested Select Information insertion point Not dimensioned Pressing N on the keyboard obtains the list of the sections that have been drawn without association to Type Brand and Model and which remain to be dimensioned An undimensioned section is not counted in the calculation of the Bill of Materials To simplify the search for the raceway that interests you you can use filters on the manufacturer s name and type Ms e i EJA EE a P m Manufacturer Loge Description Rectangular race Prefabricated raceways By type means viewing only the circular rectangular or prefabricated raceways in the list Fill Calculation This function calculates the percentage of space occupied by the cables that run in a section The percentages calculated and shown in graphic form are two the first is based on the cross section of the raceway radius x radius x 3 14 the second on the square section diameter x diameter We should like to remind you that raceways formed of pipes in view or laid under plaster must have a minimum inside diameter of 10 mm this diameter must be at least 1 3 times the circumscribed diameter of the cable bundle contained in the pipe itself Raceways formed of circular pipes must have a minimum inside diameter o
7. Edit plug connector CN1 Control Panel Connector 1 ll Save allows you to save on file the changes made for P11 542513 P11CN18 each connector P11 542814 P11 HL48X1 P1ICN15 4 A new scan proposes the gee lists changed previously SE only when the Update P115A3814 function has been used SA3 23 which is helpful for transferring the changed Sa data from the file to the Ze drawing i e replacing the EES values in the terminal ae symbols on the diagram Update is fundamental for making changed data coincide with those of a new scan SD rra 3H18X2 Manufacturer Nessuno Nessuno 12 Poli AMPHENOL 105L 3P 105L 35 AMPHENOL 145 6P 145 65 4 ang AMPHENOL 18 15 18 1P HORS ITT CANNON 10 6P 10 65 ITT CANNON 14 12P 14 125 ITT CANNON 14 19P 14 195 NOTE NumM represents the number of every connector pin The pins marked with a have not been drawn for example PE while the unmarked connector pins are really present on the drawing Those marked with e containing incongruent values this occurs in the case of manual changes carried out incorrectly to the data contained in the symbol attributes O Selecting a new model from the list and pressing Change Type pin conversion and replacement takes place automatically be careful not to choose a connector with a lower pin number as this would cause the removal of existing data in excess 134 Spac Start 2012 Change pin NumM Num and NumO
8. If the changes saved are not given on the drawing with Update the next scan will present the list of Terminal Blocks and Connectors not Updated Edit terminal blocks and connectors not updated The example in the figure pe Name scripti shows how to recover the TERMINAL BLOC XM2 changes not updated on the TERMINAL BLOC XM3 drawing of terminal blocks XM2 and XM3 For the remaining terminal blocks and connectors the data changed previously with the edit function are lost Use the Ctrl key on the keyboard to make multiple selections List of Terminal Blocks Saved and not Updated It is possible to immediately obtain with no further checks using Customize or Edit output on the Drawing Table or extraction of the CSV File of all the terminal blocks and connectors in the list The table output is normally used for connectors while for terminal blocks the graphic output which includes jumpers is preferable 6 Terminals and Connectors 127 Terminal block drawing This is the option that allows you to draw the terminal blocks according to the parameters set in the Spac settings under Terminal and Connector Database and Terminal Block see par 4 2 Pressing Output to Drawing after selecting one or more terminal blocks from the list the terminal blocks are generated with the graphics configured showing only the required data W 1 n LJ IL S E UI 101 101 AD KL Pa a 103 E
9. This Error message occurs only during Cross reference with Pin marking option 16 Caution Parent with fixed Register reference In the symbol in question there are also Reg attributes for hosting Sub element registrations example block C1031R coil with fixed internal reference of CEI15 Symbols library These symbols do not need the presence of Code and Offset attributes This Caution message changes to Error when Pin marking is executed 17 Caution Invalid Parent Offset attribute The content of the attribute does not comply with the syntax recognised by Cross Reference Offset indicates in which position to insert the Reference symbol given in the Code in relation to the Parent insertion point such as for example valid default value on coil 0 10 0 valid default value on three pole switch 15 5 0 Cross reference is not performed on symbols with this message 18 Caution Parent without Sub elements The Parent symbols indicated in this way are those on which the Reference symbol will not be inserted declared in the Code attribute as sub elements to be registered do not exist This is a warning that should not be confounded with an Error message 19 Caution Code and References inconsistent The Code attribute on the parent symbol states a value that differs from the real register reference already present normally due to a manual change the message can be seen in the Parents Report The problem i
10. To change the color or type of character of the numbers act on the size blocks 1 in the Libraries Symbols directory with the name Blcor_Dx and Blcor Sx dwg The Distance is that between the wire number and the line that represents the line itself normally 1 mm Position configures the number at the right or left of the wire This variable is valid only for vertical wires on horizontal wires the number is always located above the line and is not rotated Represents the input wire number in the terminal Numo Represents the output wire number from the terminal Represents the Terminal Number Rotation only acts for the numbers located on vertical wires on horizontal ones the number is always at 0 degrees In some cases the 90 right combination is not accepted Numbering Position In terms of operating logic this type of wire numbering leads to Positional Tagging of the elements i e the value assigned to the wires derives from the composition between the page number the segment where the wire is located and an incremental numerical value Let us suppose we number sheet 3 positionally examining the wires drawn in segment 5 wire numbers will be allocated like 351 352 353 etc Still on sheet 3 at segment 6 wire numbers will be allocated like 361 362 363 etc Numbering position allows you to have an infinite amount of reserve numbers for every sheet This is advantageous in the case of changes to the
11. 17 5 Beams This command allows you to draw the beams rested on the pillars see 77 4 Columns present in the planimetric diagram Spac draws the beams on the same layer as the pillars called Columns The function requests Select the first Column select Select the second Column select The function continues with the following window The more frequently used Base and Thickness are stored pressing the Default button and they will be proposed the next time the command is used The height for the beam position is suggested according to the highest value between the two columns measured The beam is drawn still starting from the column central point in such a way that several beams in a straight line never intersect The system variable PIENO FILL stores the fill status of the faces On Off It is necessary to execute the AutoCAD REGEN command after any change to this variable 256 e Spac Start 2012 17 6 Doors and Windows This command is used to draw doors and windows They are only inserted if already drawn walls are present For these drawings Spac uses the specific layer called Doors and Windows Door Window Features I The more frequently used Width and 3 Height are stored pressing the Default button and they will be proposed the next time the command is used It is possible to draw normal single or double doors single or double sliding doors normal openings pass
12. Example of Element List made in table form The Code Description and Manufacturer columns are empty if the component has not been associated with any material see par 23 2 328 Spac Start 2012 21 2 Change Elements d Laying height This command allows you to change the vertical position laying height of a symbol at the same time as the length of the sections connected to it It works in the same way as the command for changing sections 18 6 Change laying height at ends The function requests Select an Element a Section or a Node selection Section Selecting the section all the symbols connected to the end nearest the point used for selection are listed Node The node is selected when you want to view all the symbols connected to it In the example in the figure the socket is at 18 cm let us suppose we want to move it to a height of 230 cm Selecting XS1 the following is shown Selected height to change pe Installation Description Element Presa 16A 2P PE Hemert Intemuttore unipolare Section GENERALE Section ILLUMINAZIONE The replacement of 18 with the new laying value 230 causes the result of the second figure The 3D view of the installation is very effective for immediately seeing the result obtained with this operation Socket height 230 cm The change acts simultaneously on both the element and on the ends of the section Use Multiple laying height to si
13. Secondary setup does not include the Libraries and common files as these are already installed in the First Setup complete making it possible to select the Job Order and Library folders shared in the LAN e Setup installation e Setup change e Restore setup e Remove setup The files on the release storage media are compressed therefore to install Spac Start it is necessary to use the installation Setup programme CAUTION It is possible to install Spac Start 2072 in a system containing previous versions It is not necessary to remove the previous version see Data migration and customizations utility Several installations of the same version on a single machine are not allowed 1 Setup 13 Only insert hardlock key USB when the installation program asks for it The Setup programme is run by the DVD drive The procedure described below refers to drive D if necessary replace D with the letter of the DVD drive used Insert the Spac Start DVD in drive D DVD drive and double click on the install SPACStart2012 exe programme and follow the instructions in the dialog boxes Or choose Execute from the Windows Start menu and type D SPACStart2012 Choose the setup language from those available Read the Information about the setup that is about to be carried out Read the Licence Contract Setup can only take place after acceptance of the terms given in the text
14. The command allows you to dynamically page through all the symbols contained in the Libraries BIk folder of Spac including those contained in any sub folders unlike the direct command which only views the established ones User block Director Psi ee Ezz i a EXAMPLEO1 EXAMPLEO2 EXAMPLEO3 OPTICAL FIBRE r Description Three pole switching device operated by motor with a spring storage a OK Cancel BLK Unlike the direct command example 1 20 consideration is also taken i of the symbols that have a name other than BLK 1 20 2 40 An error message is shown if the presence of symbols with the same name is detected even if they are stored in different folders The Spac Libraries Blk folder is generated during programme set up any sub folders must be generated by the user using the normal tools of Windows The symbols with a name other than BLK and contained in the various sub folders of LibrariesiBlk are not protected automatically during software updating 216 Spac Start 2012 15 Symbols 15 1 Symbol Categories This paragraph describes how to organise a series of attributes to make a symbol compatible with operation of the SPAC Start application The various symbols are subdivided into categories every category has different attribute requirements and characteristics during the insertion of a symbol there is no visual difference between a block belonging to
15. With real symbols priority is given to the block and the dimensions are ignored With generic symbols the symbol is drawn with its set dimensions Real symbols are those drawn with the real dimensions of the component real sizes whereas generic symbols are those drawn to 1x1x1 sizes Rules do not exist to identify beforehand real symbols from generic symbols Symbols installed with Spac can normally be identified by their names i e those with a LY_ prefix are generic whereas those with a LY prefix are real 8 Bill of Materials 165 Electrical BLK Making a double click on an existing code it is possible to display and change its characteristics Modifica componente Ni 2 x Generale Mote tecniche Layout BLE elettrico Stradi Blocchi per schema elettrico Blocco IEC O11 Sfoglia KIT eet TTT TTT D Blocco JIC HEMA Um Sfoglia Blocca Fluidi o Sfoglia Blocco Unifilare weng IEEE Blocca Altri O Sfoglia OF nella kee See 8 4 DbCenter Each single Code can correspond to a graphic symbol of the four main libraries IEC and Single wire plus a generic configuration called Other Blocks which permits any symbol to correspond to the code being part of the Spac libraries for example a Blk created by the user See 14 1 Bik Symbols This configuration is used by Drawing Mode in DbCenter see pa
16. see par 5 2 NumM renumbering proves to be particularly helpful when much use is made of stored sheets or if after renumberfrom 1 renumber from 100 heavy changes on the drawing this value is required to be restored Selection sequence consecutively Ser Input Wire Number in the del SC terminal OPZIONI MACCHINA Output Wire Number from the terminal Terminal Number Manual selection of the terminals does not compromise the scan criterion O The new numbering does not intervene on the connectors as in this case NumM represents the Pin value NumM Numl This configuration allows you to copy the value of Numl in NumM of the same terminal Terminal board Action Working in this way the start NumM and setting XG coto Has al and the choice of the scan sequence have no M1 renumber using NumM Numl effect AMZ renumber using MumM Numl O The possibility of using the NumM as parameter for sorting the terminals in the terminal block is lost after the use of this function CAUTION The coincidence between NumM and Numl values is lost if a new wire numbering is repeated after this operation 140 Spac Start 2012 6 7 Numl and NumoO settings This command is used to change the status of the variable Input same or different from Output see par 4 2 contained in the terminals or connectors already drawn on the diagram therefore you can set whether the wire that goes into the t
17. segments numbered with only one digit no higher than 9 in order to avoid inconsistencies of the following kind the number 1213 can be interpreted in three different ways 119 112 A Sheet 12 segment 1 number 3 Sheet 1 segment 21 number 3 Example of automatic positional numbering Sheet 1 segment 2 number 13 Segments of only one digit dispenses with the inconsistency of case 2 but in order to obtain unequivocal reading 10 wires should not be exceeded from O to 9 for each segment to avoid the reading of case 3 5 Wire numbering 111 5 3 Used numbers list ps d This command generates the list of the wire numbers used which is helpful also for checking any double numbers repeated by mistake With the list of wires sorted by Number all the wire numbers used on the project are listed consecutively regardless of the page With the list of wires sorted by Sheet the page numbers are listed consecutively and the wire numbers contained for each of them LINIFILARE MULTIFILARE With the list of Repeated numbers any double numbers are filtered from the list With the list of Returns the wire numbers generated by a return symbol numbers on the power feed arrow returns are filtered from the list Summary see par 3 1 The function starts the search pressing Scan Multi sheets and ends with the list of the wires shown on the screen while Use last list
18. value referring to the part of cable left available in the box for the various connections The default of 40 cm takes account of 20 cm at the start and 20 cm at destination Options Prefix management for cable referencing Cable reference The cable reference is always proposed automatically and is composed of a prefix default C and an incremental number New prefixes can be set using the Options button to access the following dialog window It is possible to type new prefixes to be used for the name of cables composed of a maximum of 6 characters the new prefix is placed in the list pressing Add Using Delete it is possible to remove the prefixes that have not been used in the drawing In some cases the prefix of the cable is changed by the user to correspond with the type of installation Example AU Audio AL Alarm etc Revision The function checks the highest number used for each prefix present on the current drawing in order to build a new index essential for proposing the immediately successive values for the references of new cables The function does not change the references already used on the drawing so it is not possible to regenerate a referencing of the cables that has not been carried out consecutively Supposing we delete from the drawing cables C100 C101 and C102 New index If this command is used immediately after deleting cables the index is restored The name of the next cable
19. A single hardware key enables several sessions of the protected program to run simultaneously according to the maximum number of authorized licenses e Floating The program user license can be used blocked by any computer on which the software has been installed and configured WARNING The licensed computer server should preferably not also be a client on which the product will be run If possible use a 24 hour access computer on which to install and configure the protection key If a computer is intended to function either as a licensed network server in which the protection key is to be installed physically or as a client on which will run follow the instructions for the Licensed SERVER and then for the Licensed CLIENT The following operations must be performed only if there is a network hardware key doing so with a local hardware key will impair software operation if in doubt you are advised not to proceed 16 Spac Start 2012 Installation and configuration of the licensed server ANP a ee i ON DO 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Operating system Windows XP Vista Logon as Administrator Start Explorer Create a directory entitled ANP on the hard drive Share usage of this directory using shared name ANP thereby giving complete control rights to enabled users Insert DVD and run SDI EXE from Key Utility folder Use USB section Press Install to install the local dr
20. Complete the following fields Customer Information A Wi I User Name Please enter your information Company Name Serial No Enter pour first name surname company name and Serial Nurpber To receive the Sang Number send the registration has with the following code how A1 OUDADGEN User Name Serial No this number is given by Company Name SDProget In the request it is E oompany SETUP CODE proposed to you tl see the position highlighted in INSERT HERE YOUR INSTALLATION CODE mm the figure The Serial number is released by SDProget request takes place by Fax using the special registration form contained in the package specifying the SETUP CODE shown in the interactive window Press the Primary Setup button to proceed with setup on a single station or for the main station in a LAN This setup includes shared Libraries and common files Press the Secondary Setup button to set up on the other stations in the LAN This setup does not include shared Libraries and common files as they have already been installed with the Primary Select the setup Folder avoiding overwriting the previous version if installed You are advised to use the folders proposed as default C Programmi Spac Start 2012 14 Spac Start 2012 Select the Job Orders setup Folder Job Orders In the case of Secondary Setup choose the Job Orders Folder shared in the LAN Select t
21. Cross EE 143 Cross Reference Corse 153 Cross Reference On retum 146 CRF E 147 Beams SE EE EE 256 CSV File 33 130 182 299 318 328 354 Bill of materials filter eneen 168 SEENEN 59 GE 166 213 216 Customer Fields 0ccccecceccescerceccesceteseescesseseererearens 35 BIK SYMDO S TE 213 Customer Management 34 BOM Table EE 180 Customerg cescececceccececceccecesceccetestersatestercatervareatenee 34 BP Favourite Gwmboke EN 240 Cut Table 209 A 95 97 Break Gechon 290 Bundle database o ccccccccssccscssssssessessesseessesseesesseesesssen 322 DATie 50 207 DAT Files 34 88 Dala MOON E 19 Cabinet EEN 205 Database Utility GEELEN 170 Cabinet Exterior EE 205 A 183 Cabinet Interor 207 De i 115 139 Cable bundleS EE 322 Define a filter an 167 Cable Categories ENEE 322 Delete Circut 359 Cable database ENEE 321 Delete NUM DOS ccccccccccsccceceseccecescecsesucececteeesecseeee 114 Cable laying E 311 Delete CGheet 46 o E E E EE 318 Delete symbol NENNEN 237 Cables ARO 311 Deva eee 290 Calculation En 241 355 DES FICS ceeccccccccsccsesesssessesssesesessesseseseesesevsessessveseeeeee 77 Caneco DEE 241 355 Dimension Raceways e 393 Caneco CIC EEN 357 SE E EE A 390 Caneco Power Feed ENEE 396 Disconnected Cables ccccccccceecececeecscececteeesecseeees 321 Caneco Viewer EEN EEN 363 Disconnected E nalea e 339 Ceiling LAYING EE 284 DOC Hie 176 Change blocks dimension
22. Example with prefix A E Off obtains 1 2 3 etc ORDINE N ORDER ND FOGLIO SHEET M On obtains A1 A2 A3 etc COMMESSA0RDER SEGUE FOLLOW DISEGNATORE DESIGNER TOT SHEETS To change the colour or the style of the numbers it is necessary to act on the size blocks 1 in the Symbols folder with the name NUMFG NUMFGP NUMFGS and NUMFGT dwg These symbols have a central insertion point their colour is 4 cyan with Romand style and font d 56 Spac Start 2012 The function is called automatically by the functions that need it like 3 1 Create Multi sheet or by the draw Table command after the creation of new pages 3 16 Print Sheets This command manages the automatic printing in series of the sheets belonging to the multi sheets of the same job order PLOT Fogli automatico Multifogli Pesce Stampante LAYOUT LIST OPZIONI MACCHINA Dati progetto Impostazioni di pagina attive Lista Fogli O da DWG Alimentazione generale Alimentazioni ausiliarie personalizzate prp Motori Circuiti di emergenza Stampante DWG To PDF pc3 Ausiliari 110 VAC Carta ISO 43 420 x 297 mm 0 JO MA UN Comandi Tesys U Stile Yariatore di velocita Stampa centrata 10 Ausiliari 24 YDC Area da estensioni 11 Simottico PLC Non ruotato 12 Ingressi PLC v Tutta la Commessa Aggiungi Opzioni file Raggruppamento Tutta la commessa Va Multifoglio Fg Descrizione ELECTRICAL DIAGRA
23. No to the question Do you want to confirm the delete operation for every sheet selected the following confirmation Are You Sure is valid for all the sheets To delete a page quickly double click on the number of the page to be deleted and confirm the operation This takes you to the previous sheet if the current work sheet is deleted Deleting Sheet 0 is not allowed fae see 3 5 Add Sheet lt should be underscored that this command does not clear the contents of the pages but removes them physically from the drawing file O CAUTION The AutoCAD Cancel command does not allow the recovery of pages after closing a Multi sheet 46 Spac Start 2012 3 7 Shift Sheet This command shifts the entire content of all the pages starting from the sheet indicated on the previous or next sheets e Shift Forward e Shift Backward e Checks The default starting sheet to be shifted is the current one it is necessary to indicate from which page you want to start with the shift that will also concern all the sheets following the one indicated The number of positions determines by how many sheets to move the contents of the drawings This function should be used with due care as it changes the page numbers Forward This parameter indicates the type of shift let us suppose we have 5 sheets numbered from 1 to 5 11213145 If you make the shift from sh 1 forward by 1 position 2
24. Return for options 1 point the start symbol is to be selected DESTINATION Select Element Section or Node Return for options 2 point the destination symbol is to be selected With the 1 and 2 point the laying heights are taken from the symbols selected these values were stated during insertion of the components on the drawing see par 28 2 Options mb Pressing Return at the request for START or DESTINATION the EE Options menu opens pressing on Select Point a point with the related height is requested it replaces the selection of the start or destination element This is the condition used when no reference symbol exists points not restrained by elements If there are difficulties in selecting the section for example because it is perpendicular to the current view the use of Search is necessary which makes it possible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it If with 1 and 2 point existing sections are selected the derivations are executed automatically the existing section is broken into 2 sub sections keeping the original reference If the 1 or 2 point is on the end point of an existing section the section selected is continued automatically a new sub section is added to the existing section which keeps the original reference If nodes are selected with 1 and 2 point the list of the components that form them is
25. XB4BVWB3 SI 10 ZBY0101 i XB4BVB3 ecaniq 10 ZBY0101 KU 915 1 QG 6 Est ge Geer eh ll eh ek wb zl l aP au aa 3 ch 1 1 sl ek ll gt eh ll ech d ek eh web leEcnmea manta Tee Ggs a N B The F m button is not enabled in some versions of Spac Start Edit This allows you to change the data of a component of the list Edit opens a second dialog window The changed data can be shown on the drawing using the Update function The function shows the start data of the chosen component if the component was without codes the top part of the window is empty Edit material Code HL5 710011 0101 18604 After entering the new Socket SCHUKO 2P T 1016A Rod Manufacturer Code and oe E Description the operation is General purpose relay OV AC euer 2CO 10A General purpose relay 24 VDC 2 C0 10A Clamp teminel 12 240 V AC 50 60 Hz DC 60 62 series ee i gg DA LED diode module 624 V DC Voltage signal indicator Ceiling light KST90 18W 220V White NG125A 3P 1004 C circuit breaker continued by 1 pressing Replace The new data replace the existing ones 2 pressing Add The new data are added to those already existing forming a local macrocode Edit does not act on Terminals and Connectors To replace the commercial data of these two families of components the specific Edit terminal block function must be used see par 6 3 8 B
26. command Close it is possible to join the last piece of wall with the first one drawn during the same command session From the main dialog window pressing the Options button accesses the possibility to change the wall thickness or the generating line without interrupting the command Cancel deletes the last piece of wall drawn without quitting the function Pressing the End button ends the command and quits the function Materials for Spac Render optional set the type of material to be assigned to the object drawn Pressing Select object it captures the kind of material to an existing object while Change is already associated with the material change 17 General commands e 253 Options The Options of the 17 3 Walls command allow you to configure a series of automated features Wall ends Auto the function automatically draws the two ends of the wall LL LA Start the function automatically draws Auto UN only the first end CSS End the function automatically draws Start only the last end Esseg Auto OFF the function does not draw any End wall end In normal working conditions this variable EEEF is set with Auto active Auto OFF Hook walls It is possible to set the hooking of new PERT walls with aready existing ones Sensitivity is adjustable from 1 to 10 y Normally hooking is active at 3 or 4 OFF ON Anchor value This is the value for adjusting the Hook walls sensitivity Thi
27. neutral P N PE 1 pole neutral ground DAN 1 pole neutral 3P PEN 3 poles PEN 2P 2 poles 2P PE 2 poles ground Description Field corresponding to the description of the circuit max 36 characters Length Circuit length in metres This length must correspond to that of the farthest load max 4 characters whole values only The length is calculated automatically 358 Spac Start 2012 Input Input of the loads The units of measurement accepted by the Caneco calculation programme can be chosen among those of the following list Ampere Kilo Watt Watt Volt Ampere Kilo Volt Ampere Reactive Kilo Volt Ampere Change circuit The function asks you to select the symbol that identifies the circuit to be changed or one of the equipment symbols of the circuit in question The characteristics that were entered during the creation of the New circuit can all be changed except the frozen ones This condition depends on the circuit style and general situation of the network In the case of circuits with style Panel Sub Busbar Busbar and Transformer it is not possible the change the style of the circuit in this case it is necessary to delete and if necessary restore the circuit with the correct characteristics Delete Circuit The function asks you to select the symbol that identifies the circuit to be deleted or one of the equipment symbols of the circuit in question It is possible to delete a circuit only
28. 3AB3 etc The wire number thus the terminal Num and NumoO is associated with a prefix and or suffix with a chosen value e g 24V IN OUT etc Enabling is indicated in the figure of the main dialog window with P and S lt is possible to format progressive wire numbers up to 4 characters With 1 example of numbers 1 2 3 10 11 100 999 1000 etc With 01 example of numbers 01 02 03 10 11 100 999 1000 etc With 001 example of numbers 001 002 003 010 011 100 999 1000 etc With 0001 example of numbers 0001 0010 0100 1000 etc Sheet Prefix separator and constants are not counted Considered only when the Sh Number as prefix parameter is active The value is set with the 3 1 Create Multi sheet command Example on sheet 3 with separator With 1 example of numbers 3 1 3 10 3 999 3 1000 etc With 01 example of numbers 03 1 03 10 03 999 03 1000 etc Let us Suppose we also activate wire formatting at 0001 With 1 example of numbers 3 0001 3 0010 3 0999 3 1000 etc With 01 example of numbers 03 0001 03 0010 03 0999 03 1000 etc Let us Suppose we also activate the constant prefix A and the suffix 24V With 01 example of numbers A03 000124V A03 001024V A03 099924V etc 4 General commands 85 Receive Number FOO e EGO When a wire has the start point coinciding with a symbol through this configuration it is possible to make the wire number th
29. 3x 1x1 5 from the Bundles list and press Insert The 2 case is certainly faster so it can be concluded that the cables database is used when a bundle ready for use does not exist It is important to note that certain situations are solved using both databases the same example as before could be solved taking the group 2x 1x1 5 from the Bundles list and 1 cable with cross section 1 5 from the Cables list to still obtain the same result of 3x 1x1 5 19 Cables 311 Delete This acts on the Cables and Bundles to lay list and is used to delete a cable selected from the list The deleted cable cannot be recovered except by taking it again from the Cables database Delete All This acts on the Cables and Bundles to lay list and is used to clear the currently used list completely Acquire The Cables and Bundles to lay list is compiled with the data contained in a section that already possesses cables inside it The function requests Select the Section to acquire the Cables contained This function is particularly helpful when needing to lay the same cables that have been inserted with a previous operation The cables of the start section can be deleted moved in the new section enabling the variable Delete from section selected cables the reference of the cables can be kept unchanged Slack The cables are inserted in the section with the same length increased by the Slack
30. 455T02 Ave QG 2 563490240000 Finder QG 1 60123024 Finder QG A 6012790240240 Finder QG 1 866002403 Finder QG 1 90122 Finder 0G 3 Sorting by Panel Type 6 columns of data 17 lines It is fundamental to note that the macrocodes SH1 and SH2 are not consecutive and the uncoded elements HL1 and HL2 are placed at the top of the list The terminals total of 9 are listed with single item for each panel ELK3 and independently not in groups It is fundamental to note the high number of lines obtained List sorting by Panel Type or Type is the most detailed system Compact View During compact viewing the Reference and Sheet of the codes are not indicated it is therefore possible to bring together all the identical codes forming part of the same panel in the same quantity Bill of materials by type and panel Type Manufacturer wg m 0G 5 KU 915 1 ABE QG 1 45B90TSR Ave 0G 2 455 TI Ave 0G 2 563490240000 Finder See 1 60123024 Finder QG A 601290240240 Finder ee 1 866002403 Finder 0G 1 9022 Finder QG 3 Compact Sorting by Panel Type 4 columns of data 6 lines The uncoded elements HL1 and HL2 are placed at the top of the list and marked with 3 asterisks The terminals total of 9 are listed in 2 groups one per Panel of 6 and 3 Compact list sorting by Panel Type is often used as list for specific purchases of each Panel 8 Bill of Materials 179 BOM Table This option all
31. Coinciding Values this error is usually caused by changes made to the wire no using the AutoCAD commande Eattedit or Ddatte operation not correct as it only graphically changes the text contained in the symbol of the number but not the real data stored in the line extended data When the wire is connected to a return the change takes place within the Signal attribute of the return symbol _Sign In this specific case the return symbol replaces the number symbol in every respect 5 Wire numbering 115 Ddattef Power feeds This is used to change the data of power feeds or of wires connected to Power Feed Returns see par 4 4 When a power feed number is changed all the returns with the same name present in all the job order multi sheets are updated automatically To change only the selected power feed line locally activation of the Update selected branch only setting is required change power iert ES You can click either on the wire or on the return symbol indifferently Any Non Coinciding Values message is due to the different content between the start signal and the destination signal connected to the same branch Confirming a new value all the data are updated unequivocally solving the inconsistency When the current data of the wire are not in the wires database the message Cable not in database is shown in the description The Return Content ref
32. Raceway start point Raceway end point Raceway reference lt 40x60 gt type value At this point the raceway is drawn centred on the axis You are now asked for right or left alignment through a point Point for alignment direction lt Return for None gt right or left The raceway is moved in the direction indicated pressing Return it remains in the central position in relation to its axis O The raceway reference proposed as default corresponds to its dimensions 13 Layout 207 Database The Width x Depth dimensions of raceways can be indicated in the special fields and stored using the Ins button in the database Armadi ini file common to the sizes of Plates Components and Terminal blocks This database does not contain information useful to the bill of materials Pressing the Database button accesses a database Canaline Dat file specifically for raceways where in addition to the dimensions it is also possible to enter useful information for the bill of materials Armadi ini Allows you to take the dimensions Management through the Ins Del and Cabinets ini buttons Canaline Dat Besides the dimensions this allows you also to take the Manufacturer Type and Raceways Dat Description for Bill of Materials Management through the Raceway selection and Database buttons Every raceway is composed of the B anf ch es Code Description Size mm name of the Manufacturer ARNOCANA
33. T1 Ld AL NEON Pres attribute therefore they are element E d symbols Fai S H MA Example of Element symbols The AutoCAD Ddatte command allows you to check the attributes contained in the symbols to check the family they belong to A block that contains the following series of attributes is considered as an Element symbol Label Default Type Description Name Component reference PinA1 First input wiring pin number PinB1 First output wiring pin number PinN Subsequent wiring pin numbers Type Contains the catalogue codes of the material associated Manufacturer Contains the brand of the type of material associated Panel Reference of pertinent electrical panel Description Lamp Component generic description Code Optional for compatibility with previous releases 7 8 Function1 Line 1 component function Function2 Line 2 component function Support Optional for data extraction Note the data marked with are examples Type P Preassign Type I Invisible The characteristics of the attributes of Element symbols are the same as those described previously for Parent symbols 224 Spac Start 2012 Return Symbol The Return symbol is fundamental for Cross Reference operations During this procedure Spac registers the position sheet segment of the power feed and or connection arrows with the same signal number chaining takes place between the Start and Destination symbols Start returns have the attribute PRE
34. Tom TRZ DIELECTREX TRA DIELECTREX IN D tCTek JE DIELECTREX The D rCek TRA PIELECTRES Im DIELECTRIK TRS DIELECTRIK TRO DIELECTRIK TRN D I TRI ELECTRA Example of Section List made in table form The configuration for drawing the table includes the following options Insertion Point Request Space Row x2 When several sheets are needed to complete the drawing of the table you can choose whether to change the point of insertion of the table on the pages following the first one or not The space occupied by every line is calculated in proportion with the configured height of the texts This parameter allows you to double this space to allow the insertion of two lines of text This condition is particularly advantageous for inserting translations Sheet Character Only for Functional drawings When several sheets are needed to 300 Spac Start 2012 complete the drawing of the table you can choose whether to continue on numerically consecutive sheets new or already existing or whether to generate numerically intermediate sheets e g 1 1A 1B etc 18 4 Modify Sections This command allows you to view and change the data contained in a section lt is necessary to select the section concerned directly If you fail to select it because it is perpendicular to the current view access to Options using return and the use of the Search function is necessary which makes it poss
35. WEIDMULLER WEIDMULLER WEIDMULLER WEIDMULLER WEIDMULLER WEIDMULLER WEIDMULLER WEIDMULLER WDU 4 NORMAL OK Ge Setting Numl and NumO is used to change the status of the wire numbering variable Input same or different from Output see par 4 2 lt is practically the integration of the 6 7 Numl and Numo settings command but limited only to the terminal selected Any Non Coinciding Values message normally due to the different content between number wire or terminal is solved using the Wire Ddattef command The button serves to change the return block symbol to represent the terminal on the terminal block taking from those available in the Terminal and Connector Database Any changes made manually to the Usage field must take account of the syntax envisaged for this string of information see 6 4 Usage 5 7 Ddattef 6 Terminals and Connectors 139 6 6 NumM numbering This command is used to sort the values contained in the NumM attribute of terminals numerically For every terminal block inserted in the list with Add it is possible to set a different Start NumM while the scan is common for all of them Automatic renumbering of NumM terminals 2 Horizontal and Vertical Scans is the ee L criterion for searching terminals to be Cees Meter eminal E numbered In practice it is the same E search system that in automatic wire numbering is called Scan A and B
36. alphabetically according to the job order names Pressing again the order changes from increasing to decreasing and so on Customer a Pressing on Customer or on the indicator the list is sorted alphabetically according to the name associated Pressing again the order changes from increasing to decreasing and so on The list of job orders can be exported in CSV file format or drawn in table form pressing the Table button The button is not active during the first access to Spac It is firstly necessary to open a multi sheet and recall the Job Orders Management command 2 Basics e 27 New Job Order All the data of the new job order is to be entered in this dialog window starting from the name composed of a maximum of 18 characters see par 2 2 and the Description max 40 characters xi Then associate the name of the customer see Customer EXAMPLE2008 Management for whom the new i i Edficio_artigianale project is developed and choose a sDProget E start configuration SDPROGET Ci l On confirmation the new job order is inserted in the list together with the already existing ones ae ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Note The Name and Description must not contain punctuation characters also special characters like quotation marks apostrophe percentage sign etc are not allowed Spaces are allowed New Job Order window Pressing Edit changes the description and customer o
37. button again to return to the previous filtered view Automatic filter If Apply Filters is activated when the PickAdd button for controlling the method of 3 Go back to 8 4 DbCenter 186 Spac Start 2012 selecting objects is off the database is filtered automatically according to the component name prefix while the objects are selected DbCenter Toolbar The toolbar contains all the Show unassociated blocks Apply Filter buttons that allow you to use y b and customize the DbCenter Database source Show materials fA PickADD Help Update Sor by Description Show Macro Filter Settings Database position The first time the DbCenter is used the request will be activated automatically to select the position and name of the Materials database database file with amw extension Pressing this button it is possible to change this configuration subsequently Update Materials database TreeView is updated this refresh can prove to be helpful when working with shared databases which might have undergone changes See Macros The view switches to the macrocodes TreeView Sort by description The materials are normally sorted according to the catalogue code pressing this button sorting takes place according to the description View unassociated blocks Pressing this button the components are shown on the drawing to which no material code has been associated The command is closed a
38. occasional reference 5 Symbol Configuration see par 4 2 In the previous versions of Spac 2005 and 2003 the prefix file and the descriptions of the symbols were stored respectively in the Ascii files with extension PRE and DES You can recover your customizations using the database file import function see Compatibility with previous versions 14 Customizations e 213 To make sure that the Blk symbols are able to break the wires during insertion on the drawing the following graphic rule must be adhered to The automatic system with which the wires are interrupted by the required size is measured on the reference Break lines The following figure shows on the left a symbol without reference lines while on the right there is a similar symbol but drawn correctly thus capable of interrupting the wires automatically Break line m PE C w SE i bel Example of symbol with reference lines for wire break Therefore the lines are used to indicate the dimension of the symbol to the function in the figure the wire pitch 10 mm and height 15 mm is indicated For uniformity the symbol insertion point must coincide with the top left Break line external end point O Symbols without reference lines are inserted on the drawing in the conventional manner It is possible to create particular configurations with Insertion point the Break line reference lines as shown in the figure oppo
39. ooocccccocccnccccnnccnncnccnanoncnnnos 229 OPA DO tic 87 121 Terminal fence occoccncnncncnncnncnncncnnnnncnnnnna nana 121 122 Terminal Symbol EE 226 Thermal Symbols ooocccccconccnncccnnccnncnnnnancnncnnnnnnnnnnnns 377 Translator BIOCKS ita 203 390 Spac Start 2012 UNI S541 SYMDO LS siii ias 377 UI Sta llanta a a en eter et 20 Update nl casi 136 A A E 137 Used numbers jet 112 NIN TNS did ps 333 View management 337 VIEW Wal Socio 263 Walllay iNO enna aca cost tea tess atten 280 282 EIN Te EEN 280 ET Re te 262 Wal taaan 253 263 le Tee sai acount sieiaudsciatewnetineanecaunees 257 EE eebe 97 Wire number Configuration ccccooocccncccnonncnnccnnnnnnnoss 83 XCOPY SVIMDOL ura 238 Ln 384 XG Last Used Symbols oooocccccccccccccnncccnnncccnnnnnncnnns 240 KS EQIESYMDO veia alii 238 385 XX Mas ES MD stat 238 ARAS el Le stato toscas 384 Zone Management 265 ZONEG ul ta til 265 337
40. pin input and output wire numbers are active only if an unmarked pin is selected i e a pin not present on the drawing aper NumM always active is necessary for exchanging pin numbers carry out the 4 operations in sequence 1 Select the first from the list and choose the new value with NumM Ele 2 Check that the value assigned is not already in use NumM pin No l l 3 If NumM is double select the second from the list and use NumM to choose the pin value that belonged to the first or other free one 4 Check the list again for no double NumM values Usage Usage is a value that can be assigned optionally to the pin to represent its destination see 6 4 Usage It is possible to attribute a new usage value simultaneously for all the pins selected pressing Change Values Input notes Available to the user The contents can be seen on the terminal block on the basis of the state of visibility of the attributes R_Note MO of the return block Output notes Available to the user The contents can be seen on the terminal block on the basis of the state of visibility of the attributes R_Note VA of the return block Return Block This is the symbol used to represent every pin of the connector or plug Normally the symbol is common for all the pins that form the connector The value assigned by default is the one set during configuration see par 4 2 lt is possible to change the return block simultaneously for all the
41. without releasing the left key of the mouse or the Pan command indicating 2 points without releasing the right key of the mouse O The function mode of LibCenter is similar to Drawing mode of DbCenter 188 Spac Start 2012 9 Single feed Draw 9 1 Single feed Draw This command is used for the graphical creation of the single feed schemes As soon as it is activated it opens the program window showed bellow where the user is prompted to insert the data required for the protection and the line z Schema Unifilare AN EA DbCenter LibCenter z INT BTDIN ACCESSORI DIN A A INT BTDIN BTDIN 100 IMT E F81H 10 btdin100 mag Tipo di Protezione Primaria Tipo di Protezione Secondaria Interruttori magnetotermici estraibili k Nessuna protezione secondaria RIFERIME DEI ici catalogo Codice F81H 10 y C Codice CIRCUITO Descrizione btdin100 magnetot 1P 10 Descrizione Costruttore ici Costruttore 81H 80 btdin100 mam Bticino 81HD 10 btdin100 mag om protezione 81HD 16 btdin1 00 mag d Serie BTDIN 100 Serie Rel Diff Ue io AN 1 calibro A Corrente Diff ma 81HD 25 btdin1 00 mag a IE 10 b 81HD 32 btdin100 mag 81HD 40 btdin100 mag Curva Taglia Diff A Polarit Caratteristica Potere Int Icu k Potere Int Ics k
42. you can control the enlargement while with Return the function is ended keeping the current zoom or restoring the initial view A means Caution height not present in the attribute see 21 6 Element height This warning does not in any way compromise the way this command works 330 Spac Start 2012 Edit This command allows you to change the data and characteristics of the selected element but not the laying height position Operation includes that of the abbreviated XS command Edit Symbol see par 28 2 The function requests Select an Element Return for options If you fail to select the section because it is perpendicular to the current view Presa 16A 2P PE access to Options with Return and the use of the Search function is necessary which makes it possible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it Using Delete the symbol is deleted from the drawing while with Details you can view all the parts of it without being able to make any changes View The View button is particularly useful for tracking the position of a symbol on the drawing In fact it is highlighted to facilitate its recognition The function requests Zoom Zoom End Return Pressing and you can control the enlargement while with Return the function is ended keeping the current zoom or restoring the initial view Change XS allows
43. 03 PEA Terminal block drawn with return block AB2 50 In terminal blocks sorted by Numl the jumpers are drawn automatically when there are equivalent Numl values With Edit you can choose the required graphics for each terminal After confirming the sheet is chosen on which to carry out the drawing If the page stated is occupied the message Status Contains entities is shown and the next page is proposed On drawings made with previous Spac versions the following message might be shown Caution the return Block does not allow jumpers the problem is solved using a Terminal block symbol of the current version The terminal block start point is proposed according to the coordinates entered during configuration It is firstly necessary to check that the AutoCAD Attreq variable is set to 1 The information concerning the Usage datum if available is composed of the Panel Reference Function1 and 2 of the assigned block see 6 4 Usage BM M1 Motore Carrello Carriage Motor BM M1 Motore Carrello Carriage Motor BM M1 Motore Carrello Carriage Motor Terminal block with return blocks NO2 50 and PE2 50 with Usage visible completely The character hyphen is inserted automatically between the data that form the usage description to simplify reading Only some return blocks possess this visible attribute R_Usage O Output as drawing is normally used only fo
44. 2 type Number of columns lt no gt 3 type Distance between rows in cm lt 100 gt type Distance between columns in cm lt 150 gt type Copy development angle lt 0 gt Do you confirm the copy Yes type or Enter Yes No y type or Enter The figure shows the result obtained with the previous example It is important to note that the distances expressed with positive values indicate that the copy takes place with direction from the bottom up and from left to right If the distance between rows is negative the rows are added at the bottom If the distance between columns is negative the columns are added at the left fis When the symbol is not present on the drawing use Automatic Insertion see par 28 2 Development angle Indicates the angle of the copy function The development angle does not act on symbol rotation Inserting the angle value 180 allows you to obtain copies from the top down and from right to left with positive distance values Confirm copy Pressing N the copy is cancelled The function resumes proposing the values entered previously to facilitate any correction of the data Pressing Y or Enter the operation is confirmed The function allows you also to copy several symbols at the same time keeping the tags sequenced incrementally 334 Spac Start 2012 O Always pay attention to the unit of measure for expressing the distances Copy f
45. 2012 Pressing Update the data processed are shown E R on the drawing only valid ones qi The position sheet and segment of the S corresponding Destination is given on the Start Z symbols and vice versa A 19 The branch is an invisible datum op the k i drawing use of the AutoCAD Eattedit and e M 9 Fg Sh 3 Ddatte commands allows you to view and change the value During this processing error and fault messages Ro A 2 1 a TF 9 5h 2 may occur see par 7 3 Fg Sh 1 j Situation on Sh 1 2 and 3 after the cross reference Cross Reference on Parents and Returns This is the most used Cross Reference option as it simultaneously obtains the double processing of all the parent symbols and all the returns present x After scanning the multi sheet the Data taken from multi sheets general Report situation IS shown TESTO1 Total processed parents 2 this shows the nu mber of Total processed elements 2 components processed with the Total processed signals 2 main faults detected Pressing Output an Ascii file is generated in the job order folder called CrossRef R csv with the same contents as those on the screen The View option allows you to change screen to analyse the details of every group processed View Ge Report C Parents C Elements C Ref arrows Output pee S ee 7 Cross Reference 147 View Parents All processing related with Parent symbols is filtered Pressing O
46. 264 388 Spac Start 2012 IMPI a 242 361 Import RE le 160 MpPortaevicOs or dr ida 369 IMport Settings mico ic cian 70 Import Single feed 193 Import Single feed Diagram oooooonccnnnccnnnnnncccnnnnnnos 243 Importing data to CGanecn 361 Importing data to LiteStar ec ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 368 Incrementa na odas sad 78 105 A EE 295 Information on Database nnnnnnennnenennnnenennennnn 160 IN PIG cc ias 36 207 NIN ISS cesses coe orcs o lunas 68 Ins Terminal configuration scccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 83 Inserimento SIMO ccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeees 188 JE ge EE 162 Insert CONE id 88 124 en gl ee isos eteceeerect a 306 381 Insert Terminals iuris 88 119 Installation dumension 341 Installation Settings cccccceseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 247 Installation Symbols occcccoccccncccnncnonncononcnnncononcnonoss 374 Internal Bill of Materials cess eee ee 174 348 JOD OOK ee AE 23 27 Job Order Management 27 Job Tee EE 37 JOb Order ai EE 32 lee 292 Last Used Symbols cenas incoado 240 Layon A ae ees cate ctmenetnenmlumess 293 BEE 375 377 EE TS RE 344 Laying height A 303 304 307 329 385 LAV AEON eien a a 251 Laying legend WEE 344 Laying Legend EE 344 En 311 LAVNI Modest a 280 Laying SEU aaa lei 273 ANY ORAR PO COME Om RE E AE AT 165 Layour SCAG ps pia ds 205 IDC CIEE earn tana 188 Ss ade 262 LINK elements cccooccccocnccccnnoccnnccn
47. Beleeg ee EE 173 OK TOP EVElY TE 173 SO BILLORE IV EEN 174 Eltere 175 nn a a 176 A CTN 176 A Pe nee ee ee Pe 176 Ove tempera A eos 176 Rei ue RE a6 E EE 176 IS IN o o e o io oe ee 177 List by F ANG ANG Referente Ad 177 AN AAA E eee ce ee ee E ee ee ee 178 elle Ter 178 LISTO panal and TYDE EE 179 Blue ier 179 BOM TAO tao oidos 180 CONV SS A A A aod nad ee ea eee 182 EEN 183 Materials database Troedieuw 184 Associated Bee EEN 185 EE 186 DOCENTE TOMA A EE EE EE EE OE UD 187 A A oe tele ect oe ete ec oe et eel oe ete eae oe ete cece e 188 9 SINGLE PEED DRAW eege eege ee EE 189 Ou TS INGE FEED RE 189 qe SINGLE FEED NUMBER ee 191 OS ING LEPE EAT TABLES EE 192 JA IMPORT SINGLE EE 193 Bee ed 193 TONLE io li 195 12 TFUNG TON LEGEND ai O atan dro e DE 195 Drawn PPP PE po E O a tends dtssedeatdanntcbes 196 12 2 ATTRIBUTE CHANCES a a e o DO 197 Elias 0 AAA SS EEEeEg 197 ANTDULOS VISIO Vr A A A A A A A SaNi 198 REON OV AAA A A A A al asen ety 199 A O A 200 EE aia 200 CINE A tee tel anti 200 te ee LR CV BQO e 200 IMPAR A di dolo 201 EVOA DU Si eo od 201 123 INAVIGATO IEN 202 124 TRANSLATOR ENEE ee 203 O UA yg E neues 205 T3 CABINET EXTERIOR ee 205 List of Contents 5 Oabinel Ee EE 205 ACCES SOOS aha clei tak e le ais 206 E O A on tant cect ean ant dete ae tetas 207 Eeer 207 A E 207 BBC 1 6 0 Fe F lt anne no TS Eee Oe eee 208 COMORAS eebe 208 TONA e 209 ODO are ee ee A A A ee Ne eee ae 209 A 209 ES EEN MM BO
48. Burglar alarm Tv system etc have been made The presence in the list of a zone called Zona0 indicates that some symbols on the drawing are not attributed to any zone In fact the symbols not assigned to zones see 17 13 Zone Management are associated with Zona0 automatically Fig 1 Complete installation Installation View E Circuit 0 REFARTO LAVORAZIONE DISTRIBUZIONE d UFFICI E SERVI FORZA GENERALE ILLUM EMERG ILLUMINAZIONE part of installation concerning Distribution indifferent of zones and pressing Select obtains the result of the following figure Circuit Filter When this filter is enabled the view is based on the symbols that belong to the same circuit The view by Installation and Zones is frozen O Circuit filter takes place only if the Caneco Circuits have been entered see par 24 3 22 Utilities e 337 After selecting to view the part of installation concerning Distribution in relation to the previous figure 1 only the panel and the symbols of junction boxes D 3 1 with their connection sections have CUCINA CAMERA DA LETTO remained in view ZU e 20 All the symbols and sections belonging to h a hi the Electrical Burglar alarm Tv etc INGPESSO BAGO systems have been frozen ZU 24 So this command allows you to print the drawing each time of only the installations required Fig 2 Distribution installation O The choice of the zone acts exclu
49. Depth are common for both the wall space and lift Using Get from drawing it is possible to measure the width and depth directly from the planimetry In fact 2 points are requested for calculating the distance 17 9 Recesses and Pilaster strips Recesses and pilaster strips This command acts on the walls and is used to change the path of the lines that build the walls Recess means an alteration within the wall 2 oi 10 thickness The function requests point x 2 poin e Initial point 1 point Hr oF X E Distance from edge in cm lt 50 gt X paint AS Change edge 50 de 1 poin Enter or type another value Select direction 2 point Pilaster strip means an alteration outside the 10 wall thickness The function requests i J KR oint Initial point 1 porte s A Distance from edge in cm lt 50 gt X 1 point zi Change edge Enter or type another value 2 Ke 1 paint Select direction Gm point The position of the 2nd point is fundamental for indicating all the directions The X change edge option is used to exchange the right point of measurement with the left one or top with bottom 262 e Spac Start 2012 17 10 Building Utility Doors and windows Utility Commands for changing the functions of 17 6 Doors and Windows avoiding using the traditional AutoCAD commands to obtain automatic wall patching Delete To remove doors and windows restoring the original condit
50. Duplication can be carried out while clicking twice with the left hand button the Rename operation is carried out New Open Save as This command allows you to create an empty database with a new amw file name It is possible to insert new Manufacturers manually with the corresponding families of codes or import databases already existing in different formats This allows you to load an already existing database other than the current one which is momentarily unloaded The current database can be duplicated with a different name 8 Bill of Materials 159 Information on Database Dot gly e at Clicking with the right hand mouse button on the I Manufacturer database file name access to information is Information possible The information detects the database contents in Verb Hidden count form Manulaciurers P 0 This function is particularly helpful for checking Faries D I when a database is opened if there are any Sen 20516 0 hidden articles see Hide information Import Export Database It is possible to import new material codes to any database either new or existing the existing manufacturers and articles are updated and integrated or not according to the requests posed to the operator during importation Auto composition Import Export KR 21 sl Importing price lists in Me tel format is possible in both formats and Il Select one from the available models f
51. Elements In the Automatic Laying mode the symbols selected at start and destination are considered as linked to the cables laid whereas in the Semiautomatic laying mode the component selected as start is surely connected while the destination depends on the conditions With Manual laying it depends on how the command has ended after the following request Select Elements at start and destination End Selection of the objects ends when Return End is hit on the keyboard The dialog window shows the reference of all the linked components upstream and downstream In the centre the path needed to make this connection is shown able laying Selections done From Element Zone Elements can be linked and disconnected using the 19 3 Modify Cables command lt is possible to check the components that on the drawing are not connected to any cable using the specific function 21 9 Disconnected elements Use last path Setting this variable inhibits the request to select sections in which to insert the list of Cables and Bundles to lay These are inserted automatically in all the sections that were selected in the previous use of the command The last path is valid also in sections divided into conduits and the same conduit as the one used previously is considered The last path is also stored with the 19 3 Modify Cables function pressing the Select Last Path button After Laying
52. GUIDACAV LISC DFL 34G GUAINA GUIDACAV LISC DFL 14N GUAINA GUIDACAV LISC DFL 16N GUAINA GUIDACAV LISC DFL 20N GUAINA GUIDACAV LISC DFL 26N GUAINA GUIDACAV LISC DFL 34N GUAINA GUIDACAV LISC DFL 14T e DIELECTRIX GUAINA GUIDACAV LISC DEL 16G SOMES SUL Seca Every channel is composed by the name of the Manufacturer Catalogue Code and its Description then by the exact internal dimension values taken from the product technical specifications which are essential to the programme for calculating the fill NOTE It is important not to confound the Dimensions used for the product description with the internal dimensions used for the fill calculation You can add new raceways also inserting their data directly in the ASCII file called L_tratte dat in the Libraries Databases folder using a normal text editor This is also the only opportunity to choose the sequence of the data shown in the list Circular Channel This is defined setting Circular type It is fundamental to insert the internal dimensions of the conduit diameter in mm used for the fill calculation b HEI The value of the outside diameter written in Dimensions is purely descriptive Rectangular Channel This is defined setting Rectangular type It is fundamental to insert the internal dimensions of the conduit width and height in mm useful for the fill calculation emgeet The values of the outsi
53. If the graphics of a section remain unchanged execution of 20 1 Dimension Raceways is necessary Multilevel sections This command is used to show the changes of level concerning the path of sections on the drawing The command has two states ON and OFF On In the point in which the section changes laying height a symbol is placed on which the change is shown In the case of changes to the path of sections you can simply reconfirm the On state OLS to regenerate the situation with adequate corrections Se The symbol used is DISLI dwg contained for any customizations ALS 100 in the Libraries Symbols folder The symbol is not inserted in vertical start and end sections of gt the section Off The initial situation is restored If the section has no level changes the symbol is not shown Section height This command automatically inserts the indication of the section laying height On Several texts can be shown on the same section if the path has several multilevels The command has two states ON and OFF In the middle point of the section or of a piece and with the same inclination a wording is placed indicating the laying height In the case of changes to the paths you can simply reconfirm the On state to regenerate the situation with adequate corrections The text is drawn on the special Information layer Off The initial situation is restored 18 Sections e 307 Change Linetype This f
54. References REF1 REF1_44 REF1_22 REF2 REFS etc or with incorrectly stored References The problem can be solved directly associating a different Contactor or Auxiliary without intervening graphically on the drawing The use of generic references is often implemented intentionally to indicate that the project has been made without bases for the insertion of Pins 29 Caution References and Heads with common Pins This control is active only when processing with Pin marking and additional Heads are used The main register Reference and the additional head or one of the heads have common pin numbers The problem is solved only by replacing one of the two components 30 Caution Sub elements with repetitions in Pins Sub element symbols belonging to the same Parent have been detected on the drawing that have the same pin values this occurs when the symbol that already had pin marking is copied or there are two identical pins on the same symbol The problem is fixed automatically This is a warning to indicate that the existing Pin values will not be able to be Protected 31 Caution Parent with Pin list not found The symbol in question is not inserted in the Prefix File list see par 4 2 or the current database default is unsuitable for the symbols library in progress Registration on the Sub elements occurs in any case as it is based on the Reference indicated in the Code attribute 32 Caution Sub elements with Pin
55. Sub 42 7 47 element symbols Ey The AutoCAD Ddatte command allows you to check the attributes contained in the symbols to check the Example of Sub element symbol family they belong to A block that comprises the following series of attributes is considered as a Sub element symbol Label Default Type Description Name Component reference as parent reference PinA1 P First input wiring pin number PinB1 P First output wiring pin number Note the data marked with are examples Type P Preassign Type I Invisible Name During insertion of the block on the drawing the NAME will host the reference of the corresponding Parent Symbol as value Fundamental for making it recognizable by all programme processings Pin These attributes contain the reference numbers for wiring components see par 4 2 and par 7 2 For convention we have named the attributes PinA top the input ones in the block PinB bottom the output ones They are completed automatically during cross reference with the values written in the Register Reference Symbol Pres The PRES attribute is fundamental as it assigns the Sub element Symbol definition to the block Reg The presence of this REG attribute is necessary to contain the position register of the corresponding parent block completion takes place automatically during the cross reference operation Function1 This is used to insert in the symbol the data on its function in the syste
56. Tagging a component in Free mode is always possible in fact when entering symbols a reference is proposed that can be replaced or changed by typing any value whatsoever see par 15 3 Incremental Tagging KM KAD An incremental reference is proposed when entering the symbols on the drawing it is associated with the symbol prefix and is increased automatically by one unit at a time For example if in the Cei15 prefix file the prefix KA has been configured for the symbol C1031 the tags will be KA1 KA2 KA3 etc Incremental is the default setting The increment starts again from 1 for every new prefix Positional Tagging The tags are automatically composed positionally when KAI KANZ entering the symbols on the drawing the configuration allows you to set the parameters for composing the tag according to the position on the drawing so it is important to have the correct Sheet Dimensioning configuration PFC Positional with separator Let us suppose that the symbols C1031 of the figure are drawn on sheet 1 the first in segment 1 KA1 1 while the second is in segment 2 KA1 2 78 Spac Start 2012 The positional mode uses certain configuration parameters Make up The prefix is a variable that is set by Symbol Configuration according to the type of element for example KA for relay coils and SB for buttons Sh and Seg are the sheet and segment number see example of Sheet Dime
57. The symbols with this message must be rebuilt 12 Error no Parent Offset attribute 7 Cross Reference 153 The symbol indicated by this error was declared during construction as parent block Pres M therefore it must also contain the Offset attribute for the register reference block insertion coordinates indicated in the Code The symbols with this message must be rebuilt The error is not indicated in Parent blocks with Fixed register reference without Offset but with internal Reg attributes 13 Caution Code attribute in empty Parent In the Parent symbol in question the Code attribute is empty Code represents the name of the register reference associated with it so in this case cross reference is not performed The problem is solved associating a new Contactor or Auxiliary valid without intervening graphically on the drawing 14 Caution Reference not found In the Parent symbol in question the Code attribute is not valid Code represents the name of the register reference which is a symbol that must be contained in the Libraries Reference folder The problem is solved associating a new Contactor or Auxiliary valid without intervening graphically on the drawing 15 Error Parent with fixed Register reference The symbol in question has the integrated register reference therefore unsuitable for pin marking Registration of the position of Sub elements and vice versa on the Parent takes place in any case
58. Thermal symbol Attributes A block that comprises the following series of attributes is considered as a Thermal symbol Label Default Type Description Name Component reference text height 2 and color 4 Type Contains the catalogue codes of the material associated Manufacturer Contains the brand of the type of material associated Description Contains the description of the type of material associated Height Laying height associated during insertion text height 1 5 and color 3 Legend Heat exchanger IP Component generic description Support IP Optional for data extraction Note the data marked with are examples Type P Preassign Type I Invisible Layer A block that comprises the following series of Layers is considered as a Thermal symbol Layer Type Description Compterm_attr Contains all the attributes of the Component including the NAME in color 4 cyan Height Type Manufacturer and Description in color 4 green The remaining ones are color 6 magenta Compterm Contains the symbol graphics Note it is always advisable to see the already existing symbols before developing customized symbols These blocks are inserted on the planimetry on the basis of the Symbols Scale factor set with 17 1 Installation SETTINGS 28 Symbols e 377 28 2 Symbol insertion Many possibilities exist for inserting an Installation symbol on the planimetry it is necessary to know how to choose the most suit
59. a working base Software YouProject for the My Home domotics design Then you can design by interacting with the software YouProject Pr7 y SPAC interfaces with Pr7 which is the natural evolution of Pr4 electrical systems quotations feasibility studies and resources analysis on the construction facility 1 Setup 21 22 Spac Start 2012 2 Basics 2 1 Working with Spac Designers use Spac Start to draw electrical documentation quickly and accurately To simplify the many typical operations of an electrical design Start has specific functions that are created and evolve on the grounds of precise requirements of the sector A document developed with this software is not merely a drawing but a container of helpful information to obtain a series of design checks and controls Correct use of the programme allows you to make the most of its potential and this is why you are advised to read through this manual carefully All the command instructions contained herein are described assuming that the user is familiar with the AutoCAD programme 2 2 Job Order The series of drawings and documents belonging to the same job are considered by the programme as belonging to the same job order Therefore the job order is a folder containing all the files required to develop a specific electrical documentation The most important files of the job order are certainly the drawings files with dwg extension each drawing file is identified with
60. all codes beginning with those six digits and followed by any sequence of characters allowed in the code Insert the information for searching Manufacturer FIND ER Family Component 601 eo Ce Catalogue code Internal code Description Search Delete You run through the file viewing the positions of all the found codes by clicking on Find next Exiting the function without clicking Close leaves the search results in memory to be used later It is important to insert the character otherwise only one code will be searched for Hide information This function is useful to delete manufacturers family and codes that are not frequently used from display This makes the file faster and easier to access The Hide command can be applied to any data by right clicking the selected data and choosing Hide from the popup menu The Information on Database command immediately reveals whether there are any hidden codes within a materials file The hidden information can be viewed by using the command Hidden component management Hidden component management This function is useful for revealing manufacturers family and codes that have been hidden from file access by using the Hide information command The Information on Database reveals the presence of hidden codes within the materials database Import file Terminals DAT lt allows to import the file with extens
61. already 100 AA 100 existing 100 97 10 100 The name of the block must be 100 RISE PCS 100 chosen from those left available rao from MO BLK1 to 24 Each CaaS E new symbol must correspond alen o el with a ld image slide with the es Aler o rel 103 same name for viewing in the wt II TTT Terminal block drawn with return block AB2 50 O The configuration in the figure corresponds with the one stored as default 90 Spac Start 2012 Sheet title legend Title legend configuration all This is the configuration for inserting data in the table it is automatically inserted on the drawing when Sheet legeno is executed see par 3 18 The table symbol used as default is LegendaT dwg in the symbols folder The use of any different table symbols is possible provided that they are stored in the same folder O The configuration in the figure corresponds with the one stored as default Revision legend Reno KSE ix This is the configuration for inserting data in the table it is automatically inserted on the drawing when Revision legend is executed see par 3 17 e Descriptio The table symbol used as default Point Insert 0 D is LegendaR dwg in the symbols Attribute SE HE T folder The use of any different table symbols is possible provided that they are stored in the same folder O The configuration in the figure corresponds with the one stored as default 4 General com
62. are 1 2 3 etc With 01 the numerical segments are 01 02 03 etc Usable Area It is important to type or select on the drawing the coordinates of the points that define the area limited by the segments This area divided by the number of segments determines the sheet configuration Click on the Example button to view the help image It is of fundamental importance that Sheet Dimensioning be set correctly in the Start Configuration settings see par 2 5 4 General commands 71 Cross Reference Cross Reference with On components of Parent pin marking Sub element and Element fai eg category pin marking of far QF components is given 16 254 according to Symbol Configuration see par 4 2 1 A 5 2 A 6 The figure shows the configuration needed to obtain the graphic result of the Pins on symbol Q11 IEC Parent Symbol Q11 with pin marking Add segment When this is off on both Parent and Return symbols the position is simplified describing it only with the sheet number J 50 In the figure the second return R1 is without segment only sheet no on the first one Aggiungere Catenaria sui Rimandi Add Segment R1 on returns has been activated p 5 Separator This is the character used to form the registration datum For compatibility with drawings made with previous Spac versions you E A ari Z are advised to use the dot charac
63. are composed by 10 blocks of a length of 40mm The first descriptive block on the left is a graphical symbol with the textual descriptions of the fields contained on the next blocks On the right of the 1 descriptive block there are 9 copies of the data block equal for all the circuit data tables These tables are automatically filled in the single feed design phase see 9 7 AFERNENTO DENOMINA ZKINE Single feed Draw The research of the table to be filled is WE e executed by identifying the table that is vertically aligned to the first point in each L MAX PROTETTA Ir drawing 4 ORCUTO GR For this reason it is suggested to insert the Single Feed data Table before the design of the single feed drawing Example of a Data Table with 10 circuit data tables O The deletion of a symbol can affect the visualization of those numerically consecutive WARNING The size of the Table with 10 circuit data tables requires the use of an adequate template see section Master Title Blocks Master Unif and Master3 are appropriated symbols useful length of 400mm The symbols of the Master 1 and 2 templates are not adequate because of their reduced dimensions 192 Spac Start 2012 9 4 Import Single feed This command consents the automatic execution of the functional Single Feed scheme both with the graphical represen
64. are stored in the L_cavi txt file Category definition ll To enter a new category in the 1 Caviunipolari per intemo e cablaggio database firstly type its position as 2 Cavi per servizio mobile consecutive numerical value and then 3 Cavi unipolar e multipolar per energia e segnalamento the Descri pti on Pressing Add the new code is stored in the list With Delete the code selected in the list is deleted Selecting a category from the database its characteristics are shown in the respective fields and the editing of any datum is updated in the list pressing Edit 19 6 Bundle database A bundle is the storage of a group of cables useful for speeding the Cable Laying operation see par 19 1 The configuration opens with the cable database see par 19 5 and with the Bundle database already defined in the L_fasci dat file To enter a new bundle in the database it is firstly necessary to select the one All categories concerned from the cable list first at Manufacturer Type raining Descriptior top then associate it with a color and FG7OR 0 6 1 k G SETTEDU lastly press Add to insert it in the FG7OR 0 6 1k G SETTEpiu provisory composition window central GEI AS _ G SETTEpu list FG7OR 0 6 1k 370 1x35 FG7OR 0 6 1 k x50 G SETTEpiu When all the cables are in the provisory composition window it is possible to press the Add button in the Defined bundles window list al bottom to PREL NOTV K win make the compos
65. at the end of the operation the command is not closed thereby offering the possibility of laying the same cables but with different reference in sections not consecutive to one another 19 Cables 313 Semiautomatic laying The semiautomatic section selection mode unlike Manual laying requires the selection of a start element and is used to select the sections following a guided path and without making any selection on the drawing or when intending to choose a different path from the one proposed automatically by the programme After completing the list of Cables and Bundles to lay and pressing Forward gt the function asks for the selection of the first element Cable laying 3 1x1 5 Semiautomatic laying mode Select Start Element Selection The function begins with the cascade view of several dialog windows in which the sections to be used are selected at the same time the path chosen is highlighted on the drawing and the end point is in turn indicated with a red marker When the window contains the name of only one section this is selected automatically as there is no other opportunity of choice when the list contains several sections this means it is possible to take two or more directions it is necessary to select the name of the section that corresponds with the correct direction possibly with the help of the View button When the Cancel button is pressed the operation ends showing
66. can create new multi sheets paying attention to the numbering of the pages e Every user can change the local configuration while the start configuration has been chosen by the user who firstly created the Job order e Every user uses the data contained on the multi sheets opened by other users in read only mode Sheet status SUMMARY When a drawing is opened the list of Multi sheet name from Sh to Sh Total sheets Multi sheets in use is shown this Ey Sa A caution appears before every operating command The setting Do not show _ this window in future is cancelled every time the drawing is returned to To make a practical example we can say that data scanning for the Internal Bill of Materials see par 8 3 can be run also when all the job order multi sheets are opened by the corresponding users the data are taken from the last save performed of the drawings in use At the end of the scan data collection the Internal Bill of Materials shows the list of all the information collected and the table is drawn with no problems provided that it is on pages of the current multi sheet O The information collected might not be reliable or updated if the last drawings in use save is not recent enough In any case some restrictions exist to which attention is essential for example with an Edit function the Internal Bill of Materials allows you to change the information gathered bu
67. cccooccccconccncconcnccononnncnnnnnnonarnnnnnnnos 325 mme A E 8 EE E ssr eae A E E E 55 lt pac eebe eege cie id 267 Col escaicsdssscoudens3accxctucienshienseenduceacosceendacssetustouiceeceesden 84 ell 255 Columns AXES A 263 ee Ve 178 179 380 352 COMPONE M1 cece ceeeeeeccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeaeees 208 ABD al eee eee eee ene ere ner en ee are a eee eee 52 Component edea o oooocoocovccccecce cee ececceecece eee ceeseeseee 102 A AA AA 372 Component Tags 78 Ablk ne Le UE 372 Compress Database errereen 170 Add Sheet EE 45 52 CONQUIS cccccininnionionconconconcnn con con coo corro cor conca 308 AMW File Bee 159 183 Configuration Cross Reference ccccsesececeseseseeeees 79 Apply filter be 168 Connechon 98 101 Apply AA 186 Connection Returns oocccoooocccooceccooceceooeececececcccce 81 99 Assign PENS ENEE 99 CONNECTIONS c ccooccccccocccononnccnononcncnnnn nono nnn cnn canon nc cannnnccons 97 Assign US YO EE 138 Connector Drawing 129 Associate Materials E 171 183 345 Conta beer 148 Associate Materials same blocks 34 Copy between beet 54 Attribute CHANGES EE 197 Copy installatiON ooonncnnnnccnnnncnononcnrnanannnannananans 340 AttrlOUteS ENEE 230 374 377 Copy Job Order 36 Autocomposeton 52 COpy sumbel conocio nono 238 Automatic Numbermg ENEE 87 COPY Symbol EE 384 Eeer 94 Create Mult sbeet oooooccoooocccooocccooeecoooceecoceceeccececcc 41
68. command 5 Wire numbering 109 Numbering wires connected to terminals When a wire on which a terminal is connected is numbered the configuration set in settings with regard to Input Output same or different is of fundamental importance so it is set if the wire that enters the terminal keeps the same number on the output wire Numl same as NumO 100 Mors ele 100 Mors Numi different NumO 100 VU 131 101 191 We Toe from This is certainly the mostly used condition The wire connected upstream of the terminal Numl keeps the same value downstream NumoO In this case it is sufficient to select the wire only once to number the whole connection When this mode is used it is advisable to use terminals that show the Numl and Terminal block data When working with the Force wire No in terminal configuration all the values of Numl and NumO automatically acquire the wire number value This is the condition in which the wire connected upstream of the terminal Numl is wanted with a different value than downstream NumoO In this case it is necessary to number the wire before and after the terminal When this mode is used it is advisable to use terminals that show the Num and NumO data as in the figure When working with the Force wire No in terminal configuration the values of NumO 1 terminal and Numl 2 terminal automatically acquire the wire number value The
69. command calls up the hygiene facility symbols box belonging to the Furnishing library The blocks are proportioned automatically during insertion on the planimetry on the basis of the drawing scale set in 17 1 Installation SETTINGS All the symbols of the Furnishing library are of three dimensional origin so before using the final print it is advisable to run the Hide Lines command see par 17 14 These symbols are drawn on the Furnishing Layer so the management of any diversified plans is up to the designer advisable operation on complex drawings New symbols can be customized using the space provided for ABLK user symbols see 27 2 Ablk Symbols Example of application of symbols A sudden change to the Drawing scale see par 17 1 does not compromise the proportion between these symbols But take care not to change the unit of measure 17 12 Furnishings This series of commands calls up the general furnishing symbol boxes belonging to the Furnishing library The blocks are proportioned automatically during insertion on the planimetry on the basis of the drawing scale set in 17 1 Installation SETTINGS All the symbols of the Furnishing library are of three dimensional origin so before using the final print it is advisable to run the Hide Lines command see par 17 14 These symbols are drawn on the Furnishing Layer SO the management of any diversified plans i
70. correctly compiled while sorted according to Sheet number it is possible to exclude from the list pages that do not have revisions or the pages that have the revision symbol left empty with the attributes not compiled Revisions are taken into consideration also in the Sheet legend see par 3 18 At the end of processing all the revisions found are presented in a list The name of the multi sheet is also given to distinguish the position of any sheets that have the same page number Pressing on Drawing the revision is drawn using a table block It is possible to customize the table and the position of the data it contains using the special configuration see Revision legend par 4 2 For every page 24 revisions are indicated the pages needed to complete the legend are consecutive to the first one indicated as start number Number of first sheet for Revision Legend If the destination sheet is occupied the function asks you if you want to continue just the same or if you prefer to interrupt the procedure to choose a new page number For the sheets after the first one you will be asked to confirm each time Enabling Clear Current Sheet deletes all the entities contained before drawing If the destination sheet is new the function proceeds with no further requests The sheets after the first one are automatically created consecutively The page numbering on the new sheets is proposed automatically The table symbol
71. data in the attributes of the symbols Any data deriving from changes made manually will be lost Checks During processing it can occur that some connectors or terminals be marked with an asterisk character this indicates a fault The most frequent case is caused by the type of connector or terminal whose characteristics are not present in the Terminal and Connector Fault on CN2 Database see par 4 2 The problem is solved using the Edit function associating a new brand and model to the faulty objects On this subject use of the Update function is fundamental for stating the new data on the drawing 136 Spac Start 2012 6 4 Usage Usage is a value assigned optionally to the terminal to represent its function or destination in practice it is the name of an element connected upstream or downstream of the terminal The usage is a helpful parameter for obtaining the terminal blocks sorted according to the terminals with the same usage therefore the terminals needed to connect the same component Such as for example the 3 terminals connected to the motor which are always positioned consecutively in the terminal block regardless of their Numl NumO and NumM value The example in the figure shows a case of association of the usages of the terminals helpful for the motor connection M1 The direction upstream or downstream chosen for taking these usage values depends on the panel hierarchy
72. dei bi Zi 276 e Spac Start 2012 on brackets fastened by collars on gangways and crossrails Single wire cables with sheath or multiwire suspended or incorporated in support wires or cords Bare conductors or sheathless cables on insulators Multiwire cables or single wire with sheath in structure cavities Sheathless single wire cables in circular protective pipes laid in structure cavities Multiwire cables or single wire with sheath in circular protective pipes laid in structure cavities Sheathless single wire cables in circular protective pipes laid in structure cavities Sheathless single wire cables in protective non circular pipes buried in the walling Multiwire cables or single wire with sheath in protective non circular pipes buried in the walling Multiwire cables or single wire with sheath laid In false ceilings additional storey floors 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 22A 23 24 24A 25 Sheathless cables and multiwire cables or 31 single wire with sheath in channels laid on the wall with horizontal path Sheathless cables and multiwire cables or 32 single wire with sheath in channels laid on the wall with vertical path Sheathless cables laid in channels embedded 33 in the floor Multiwire cables laid in channels embedded in the floor 33A E SE Sheathless cables laid in overhanging 34 AT channels 34A Multiwire ca
73. draw columns hatera fey Stat Renda entering the distance from an already S kat existing pillar or generating a network of pillars with the Series a option Dimensions cm Lauer COLONNE START 2 Rectangular y The function requests Insertion point Enter for options be point It is also possible to type the coordinates for entering the pillar directly from the keyboard or you can use the help of the Osnap modes Press Enter to acces the Series option Angle of rotation lt 0 gt direction or angle After indicating the direction of rotation the function continues with the insertion of new pillars until Enter is pressed Series you are requested to select an already existing pillar This way it is possible to generate a network of ea pillars at precise distances lt works in the same way as tp the AutoCAD rectangular Series command lines and d columns Rectangular and circular columns Materials for Spac Render optional set the type of material to be assigned to the object drawn Pressing Select object it captures the kind of material to an existing object while Change is already associated with the material change Columns axes Selecting the columns already present in the planimetry this utility draws of the centering axes Spac draws the axes on the Layer called Columns Axes positioned on the columns wae See 17 10 Building Utility 17 General commands 255
74. due to the need to run checks The circuits filter is independent of the one related with the pertinent installation and zone Installation View I The window shows that the Circuits Filter setting is NETALLATIONS Sections ZONES Elements active and that lighting circuits O C3 C4 and C5 have been FORZA GENERALE selected ILLUM EMERG ILLUMINAZIONE Press on Select to obtain the graphic result of the following figure m The Circuit represents a portion of x installation to be checked and protected S Filtering circuits is useful for checking the A data exported to Caneco for calculations ge and checks on the drawing before generation of the single feed drawing 3 Pa 1 CUCINA IIS LAMERA DA LETTO 21 i ZU l A INGRESSO EE 20 ZU m Sei x Si TT DI Fig 4 Circuits It is always advisable to draw the summary table of the zones in the project in the planimetry Use the special Drawing function of Zone Management Spac Start 2072 is compatible with the zone management generated with the previous versions The only difference consists in the name which could be indicated with a reference of 6 characters With Change it is possible to rename the zones 22 Utilities e 339 22 2 Copy installation Using this command it is possible to duplicate an installation that has already been drawn or part of it It is possible to copy elements sections with the relevant cables and type of racewa
75. file The file name is LISTTRAT CSV and it is generated in the job order directory Standard This represents the basic configuration of the output fields if active Add Every item of the Available fields list is a datum in the Section List The items which with Add are given in the Output fields represent a column in the output file Remove This is used to remove a datum in the Output fields Default Pressing Default the current configuration is stored for subsequent uses If confirmed without pressing Default the customized configuration is considered as occasional Data hidden by the use of filters are not extracted in the CSV file Drawing Pressing on Drawing proceeds with the drawing of the Section list in table form parametric mode This option allows you to draw respecting the planimetry scale in proportion a table with the same contents as shown in the list Cable table drawing parameters 30 40 25 Hl 30 40 15 25 25 25 60 an ara ll hay ie Every datum Tag contained in the Available fields is information which pressing Add is inserted in the Output fields to represent a column of the table Each Tag possesses two variables the width and the column title which can be changed by pressing the Edit button 18 Sections e 299 Number of Lines Texts Height Titles Height Table Width Table Height Standard This value is used to split the table in several par
76. file name Punto dwg Point dwg pressing the right hand button of the mouse together with Shift on the keyboard for mouse with 2 buttons 98 Spac Start 2012 Connection Returns This command is used to insert the return symbols one at a time in the points selected by the user With Automatic Position see par 4 2 on the basis of the selection point and line inclination the function chooses where to insert a start return or a destination return with rotations at 0 or 90 _ The return is inserted in the end 8 point nearest to the point used to select the line 100 When the wire selected is already numbered the data of the wire a are taken automatically and moved into the return symbol with selection no further requests The insertion of a return on wires that are not numbered yet requires the entry compulsory of the Wire Number see par 5 7 which is the equivalent of the name of the Signal itself while the Description or Branch is optional for a double start from single line Each time it is possible to choose the different cable features and colors pressing the button Description Branch Returns cannot be inserted in blank spaces but only after selecting a wire or line E Update selected branch only Ge Returns for Connections Window D For correct use of Description or Branch see Cross Reference on Return If in the setting prefere
77. if a fixed setting for the licensed server ee PU ES 8 Enter the Server port value identical to the Port value set on the licensed server press OK then Apply Disable option Use local protocol as last resource OK or If there is a firewall on the licensed client computer remember to open the port to be used for both the TCP and the UDP protocols 18 Spac Start 2012 Data migration and customizations utility From version 2005 to 2012 At the end of setup the customizations and changes made to the previous version are retrieved The purpose of this utility is to allow a quick change of the version setting up updates retrieving the existing settings The migration utility retrieves Database Migration Materials Database The amw files are copied from the previous Libraries Databases folder Internal Cabinet The database of the components contained in the Armadi ini file is replaced with Layout Database that of the previous version The database of the raceways contained in the Canaline dat file is integrated with the changes and additions made to the previous version Terminal Database The Morsetti dat file database of Terminals Plugs Connectors and Accessories is integrated with the changes and additions made Prefix File Pri These are saved in File_Pri_200x zip ProgramiUsen Settings folder Libraries Migration Blk Symbols All the BIk ABIk IBIk MBIk symbols dwg and sld a
78. indicated F is resident active by default 7 O A Ges Sens gt S Summary see par 3 1 The destination sheet can be seen in preview The image used is a sld file slide contained in the Slide folder present in every job order directory these images are generated automatically by the Change Sheet Next Sheet and Previous Sheet functions Practically when passing from one sheet to another the start page is photographed If the window that contains the image is empty or the image is obsolete it is possible to ask for updating of all the slides contained in the sld files with Sheet slides see par 3 18 Select Image for Clicking on preview obtains an enlargement with the possibility of view Zoom control Using and reduces and increases the enlargement factor The Reset button restores the default values TI E Go to sheet 0 Selecting this item you can move directly on sheet O of the current multi sheet to change the constant parts of drawing e g title block or logo or to create new blocks To go to sheet O of other multi sheets access is firstly necessary to the multi sheet that contains it Sheet Preview This allows you to switch off the preview image slide of the sheet selected to speed up the procedure This parameter also acts on the Previous Sheet and Next Sheet commands which in normal conditions generate and update the slide image at every page
79. is a 10A socket with prefix XS so on the drawing the references XS1 XS2 etc will be associated Laying Height 1 2 These are the measurements expressed in cm of the three more usual and 3 heights from the ground where the component is installed Load Associated load value useful datum for Caneco see 24 3 Caneco Circuits Cosphi Load cosf value useful datum for Caneco If a block is inserted on the drawing whose prefix is not configured in the current list a provisory prefix will be requested 17 General commands e 251 Database Association This is the assignment of a material code with description and corresponding manufacturer These codes will be counted in processing the Bill of Materials see par 23 3 and 23 4 The code assigned to the symbol during this configuration will be proposed as default value when entering the symbol on the drawing It will in any case be possible to accept edit or remove the values proposed each time see par 28 2 Database Pressing this button associates the symbol with the code chosen from the materials database amw file or in the macro codes database see par 23 2 The operation carried out in this way also simultaneously shows the assignment of a material code with manufacturer data and description Manual The manufacturer s name material code catalogue code and product description can be entered manually if they are not present in the external materials database amw
80. is not included Spac Start 2012 allows you to make divisions into conduits in a simple manner as you simply attribute a model type and manufacturer of Raceway to the section which is envisaged as number of sub sections Identified with this name is a vertical section helpful for connecting two components placed at different heights but belonging to the same node see par 28 2 CAUTION Changing drawings made with previous Spac Start versions is not allowed without firstly executing the 18 8 Section Converter command 18 Sections e 281 1 Wall passing to laying height This laying type allows you to select the edges of the walls to specify the section path The laying height is indicated by the user the start and destination heights are taken automatically by selecting the components linked The upward and downward paths are therefore calculated according to the difference between the laying height and that of the components selected The section starts from the element selected in start and continues with a first vertical section to reach the laying height which is kept for all the subsequent horizontal sections on the walls lastly selection of the destination element triggers the last vertical section to join the laying height with the level of the symbol selected Firstly it is necessary to indicate The laying height E g laying H 230 then the function requests START Select Element Section or Node
81. is set 7 Error Invalid Return Sequence 2 or more start or destination signals have been detected that are the same and in the same sheet If the signals are on the same branch the problem can be solved inserting a branch value at one of the signals using the AutoCAD command if not one of the symbols must be removed In this case the signal registration is cleared 8 Error P A Return Sequence unmanageable Consecutive destination returns have been detected one of these is in the same sheet as the start return the other is on subsequent sheets this problem simultaneously causes the error of point 9 The problem can be solved removing any one of the destination returns 9 Error consecutive Start Returns The same and consecutive start returns have been detected on two different sheets The problem can be solved inserting a destination return with the same name between the two In this case the signal registration is cleared 10 Error consecutive Destination Returns The same and consecutive destination returns have been detected on two different sheets The problem can be solved inserting a start return with the same name between the two In this case the signal registration is cleared 7 Cross Reference 157 158 Spac Start 2012 3 Bill of Materials 8 1 Material Database Management of the materials database takes place through the specific Materials database d programme In the drawing environment it i
82. is the tag for circuit C2 set with Caneco ES The initial situation is restored XS Chapter number 25 is not present in this manual d 24 Caneco 363 364 Spac Start 2012 26 LiteSTAR 26 1 LiteStar These functions allow the interface between Spac Start and LiteStar lighting engineering calculation software This two function programme allows the operator to export the planimetry of premises simply defining the vertexes with which it is identified This way the files are generated needed by the LiteStar programme to recognise the area of the room in which the devices will be placed and the illuminations will be calculated Then to import the devices in the exact positions defined in the calculation programme on the planimetry O For more detailed information please see the specific instructions for use of the product LiteStar is an optional software not supplied with Spac Start LiteStar is a product made by OxyTech S a s 26 2 Export premises This is the function with which the area of a room drawn in Spac Start environment is exported LOCALE DA ESPORTARE The calculation of several rooms corresponds to the execution of several exportations differentiated from one another in the project name For every exportation the following data must be completed in the dialog window Project Name Height mt Floor color Wall color in the corresponding box enter the name you intend to att
83. it differs from the original one Let us Suppose we have drawn the IEC symbol of the coil relay with the IEC database IEC Std 750 and then subsequently configured the IEC_61346 Database IEC Std 61346 See 4 1 Setting This setting now allows us to choose the File from which to take the prefixes L o The IEC_61346 file set subsequently is used The reference KM1 of the relay symbol N prefix KM is converted to Q1 prefix Q The IEC_ 61346 file set originally is used The reference KM1 of the relay symbol keeps Off the same prefix KM 4 General commands 103 Automatic 1 Pressing Automatic Referencing all the references in the list are changed Symbols found without Prefix _ X If symbols are detected that do not have a prefix they Type Block Librar Prefi are pointed out in the warning as shown in the figure Parent LUB TESYS_U The Assign Prefix button allows you to assign a Element TSXPREMILIMAD1 IEC_61348 Element TSXP57153M IEC_61346 provisory prefix to each Element TSXPS Y 1 WAC JEC 61346 Element BLK1000 BL Element TSXPY4E IEC NOTE All the symbols remaining without prefix are ignored by the re generation of the new references and will therefore keep the previous reference Assign prefix IL Pressing Continue Re referencing on all valid components or with provisory prefix the name is Contre feier Cael updated according to the mode set kee See
84. it is possible to double click on the material code in the DbCenter window and then select one or more components placed on the drawing 8 Bill of Materials 183 Materials database TreeView C Archivio Material Ggs GE Ggs Merlin Gem Ggs Moeller A Ornror a Pilz Ggs Rockwell Automation H Siemens ELE Telemecanique Eee ALTIVAR 08 z t ALTIVAR 11 z t ALTIVAR 18 t ALTIVAR 28 z t ALTIVAR 38 zt ALTIVAR 38 58 z t ALTIVAR 58 z t ALTIVAR 66 68 z t ALTIVAR ES r ALTRI ELEMENTI DI COMANDO E de AVVIATORI A GIORNO e AYYIATORI IN CASSETTA E WOR AVVIATORI STATICI El aT5480 Find El E AF0001 Inter scatolato 6304 diff con acce Tree View of Macrocodes Find Codes DbCenter Find Manufacture Telemecanique Text search Find eB Searching Description a Catalogue code Internal code Description tse Go back to 8 4 DbCenter 184 Spac Start 2012 This allows you to navigate through the typical subdivisions by Manufacturer and Family defined in the database For each material the material code followed by the corresponding description is shown All the materials are normally sorted by code but can be sorted by description using the Sort by description button in the Dbcenter toolbar The window can be positioned in the drawing area or coupled to the right or left of the AutoCAD drawing window Using the right hand mouse button from any p
85. job order Therefore the job order is a folder containing all the files required to develop a specific electrical documentation The most important files of the job order are certainly the drawings files with dwg extension each drawing file is identified with the multi sheet name 42 Spac Start 2012 Sheet title It is possible to associate a title to every sheet present in the job order which will be written in a graphic symbol that can be selected pressing the button To insert a title firstly select a sheet number from the list then in Title type the required description confirmation takes place pressing lt Enter gt from the keyboard or pressing Apply The same operation is carried out to change an already existing title To insert titles that are the same as one another it is also possible Commessa lo use the normal Windows copy and paste functions Ctrl C and Ctrl V Titlel is used to manage the translation Ordine Impiante Commessa di Esempio Schema Elettrico Simbologia IEC ALIMENTAZIONE AUSILIARI BIPIE T woar AT Tari pE y i Aer fA Poe CU es ay dd Avi Ti CT d DATE JA HPF LICEO CUWER LE Example of application of the symbol TITLEO dwg The sheet titles and any translations are summarised in drawing tables using the command Sheet legend see par 14 1 It is not possible to handle further attributes or other Tags than the ones indicated The symbols
86. necessary to manually type the reference in the Name of Parent space insert Contact FC Parents available The position occupied by the contact with the pin values will be associated by Cross Sis Reference according to the sequence of processing see par 7 1 and 7 2 When one of the available references is chosen the panel and the contents of the Functions 1 and 2 are also shown FUNCTION1 Function2 Sheet segment 3 5C PinA Type PinB PinC Reference 13 A 14 12E 21 E 22 12E 31 E 32 12E Insertion of Sub Element symbol 15 Symbols e 235 Element Symbol The Element Symbol is recognised by the programme as the block does not contain the Pres attribute Lamps motors fuses capacitors etc are considered as Elements Let us take as example the insertion of the lamp H5 of the IEC symbols library Clicking only once on the symbol its description is shown Clicking twice proceeds with insertion Symbol H5 Insertion point If the insertion point is above a wire this is automatically broken by the precise dimension of the symbol If the insertion point is in empty space not on wire the function continues according to the configuration indicated in Preferences see par 4 2 Belonging to the Element category brings up the same dialog window as the Parent symbols except for the possibility to handle the references Code of Contactors Auxiliary and Additional Hea
87. of pages only in the current multi sheet and add intermediate sheets giving alphanumerical names number followed by a letter Setting 3A as in the example figure means creating a new intermediate sheet between 3 and 4 still pressing the ecte tope teated Create button The result is that 3A 3B 3Z are all diagram sheets that Spac considers inserted between sheet 3 and sheet 4 To add sheets not intermediate at the end of the current multi sheet simply indicate the number immediately after the last existing page removing the additional character ae see 3 6 Delete Sheet 3 Sheet Management 45 3 6 Delete Sheet This command is used to delete sheets from the current multi sheet The sheet intended to be deleted must be selected from the list of the pages present in the multi sheet Multiple selections are possible to delete more sheets at the same time Delete sheet Sheets to delete DATI PROGETTO LISTA FOGLI ALIMENTAZIONE ALIMENTAZIONE AUSILIARI MOTOR AUSILIARI 110V AUSILIARI 24V INGRESSI PLC MORSETTIERE CONNETTORI ESTERNO ARMADIO INTERNO ARMADIO DISTINTA MATERIALI DISTINTA MATERIALI DISTINTA MATERIALI Before removing a sheet the command asks for To retrieve a page that has just been deleted use the Cancel command In the case of multiple selection more than one sheet selected the command asks you choose whether to confirm every single removal Answering
88. of the installation on the plane view of the drawing a block is generated which represents a complete view of the parts selected This block must then be exploded to be edited manually or dimensioned according to requirements The function requests Projection line First point Second point 1 pointi 2 point Select the entity to be projected on the projection line Selection of the walls components and parts intended to be projected in the development Select objects Projection block insertion point ho p BEER Example of development projection of a wall Return 100 lt 90 or Hi The figure shows the projection made on a portion of planimetry attention should be paid to the variable 3D sections see par 18 7 this setting also reflects on the drawing of the development making the section paths and position of components clearer During the request to select entities to be projected it is important for the choice to be suited to the objects avoiding superfluous ones to make the development projection simpler and readily understandable In the example in the figure the projection block has been inserted using a polar coordinate calculated in relation to the 1 point used for the projection line It is also possible to insert the block stating simply equivalent of 1 point it will then be easy to move the projection to a more suitable position with the hel
89. only if there are several returns starting from the same wire or power feed thus with the same name on the 1st return we will have Signal R with Branch none on the 2nd return we will have Signal R with Branch 1 2 then 3 on the third etc e The PRES attribute is fundamental in allowing the programme to recognise the Return symbol Pres P in the start symbol and Pres A in the Destination symbol e The REG attribute contains the crossed position sheet and segment of the corresponding Returns Example The figure shows two signals that are the same at the start sheet 1 and the corresponding destination on sheets 2 and 3 Start attributes Pres P of Sh 1 1st Signal R Branch empty 2nd Signal R Branch 1 Attributes on destination Pres A of Sh 2 1st Signal R Branch empty Attributes on destination Pres A of Sh 3 2nd Signal R Branch 1 The signal and branch values are entered during insertion of the symbol on the drawing Situation on Sh 1 2 and 3 before the cross reference Cross reference ren a sii i i xj ignal name Branch After scanning the multi sheet the general Report situation is shown the report shows any errors or faults that cannot be edited or solved in this working session Pressing on view Returns it is possible to go into the detail of the registrations of every return as in the figure Situation during cross reference processing 146 Spac Start
90. option concerns the settings made with Zone Management see par 17 13 The Load Management data refer to the interface with Caneco see par 24 3 Pressing any one of the 4 OK buttons the symbol is confirmed on the drawing Select Wall This mode is used to insert a new node on an already existing wall see Insert Node This system is used for inserting components that are physically rested on or embedded in the walls 378 e Spac Start 2012 After selecting a point on the wall 1 point the function requests Distance from edge in cm lt 250 gt X change edge 350 ELEMENT insertion point 2 pointy Enter Current point Angle of rotation lt 0 gt OP point then Enter to confirm The position of the 1 point indicates the 390 Node indicative position on the wall The X change edge option is used to exchange the right point of measurement with the left one or top with gt 23 bottom Typing the value 350 from the keyboard the 1 cab 2 o Sf 3 point is transferred to the precise position Since the Node indicates the component real position it must be placed on the drawing with 10 154 suitable accuracy AS The graphic position of the symbol 2 point has no effect as all the measures are calculated with reference to the node that represents it Select Node This is the mode for using an already existing node using it as if it were a vertical raceway
91. or coupled to the right or left of the AutoCAD drawing window Viewing the material codes contained in a component takes place selecting it the selected symbol on the drawing is highlighted with dashed rectangle in color 6 Selecting a material code from the list you can Delete it using the lt Del gt key on the keyboard or from the menu activated with the right hand mouse button or Find it in the database to view further details of it To search for a code in the materials database use the right hand mouse button in the Tree view from any position of the tree and activate the Find function To view all the codes found in sequence press the F3 key on the keyboard If the PickAdd button for controlling the method of selecting objects is active the list of associated materials always refers to the last symbol selected Des Go back to 8 4 DbCenter 8 Bill of Materials 185 Filters DBCenter Filter Filters defined in database Manual filters Data 1 KA sl Data 2 sl DBCenter Filter Filters defined in database Manual filters Manufacture e Al MM Test search String 1 Relay String z String 3 Searching Description Apply filter Manual filters This allows you to run searches applying filters to the data in the database and present them filtered in the main window The window is activated pressing the Configure filters button in the DbCenter
92. performed with this message 8 Error Sub element without Parent This error occurs when a Sub element symbol is without the corresponding Parent symbol for example a contact without the corresponding coil the message can be seen in the initial Report 9 Error Reference without Parent This error occurs when a register reference symbol cross is without the corresponding Parent symbol normally this error occurs changing the Parent name manually without changing the name of the corresponding register cross The problem is solved deleting the reference in question from the drawing the message can be seen in the initial Report 10 Error Parent Sub element or reference Symbol with incorrect Pres The message can be seen in both the initial Report and in the parents Report In the symbol in question the Pres attribute is invalid or empty Cross reference is not performed with this message When the message is in the initial Report it is very likely that the symbol in question is of the Sub element category when the message is in the parents Report the symbol is a parent or register reference in this case delete the symbol from the drawing Cross reference is not performed on symbols with this message 11 Error no Code attribute in Parent The symbol indicated by this error was declared during construction as parent block Pres M therefore it must also contain the Code attribute for association of the register references
93. perpendicular to the current view access to Options and the use of the Search function is necessary which makes it possible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it Select a Section Node or an Element selection Select point for offset from Section For the new section the point for the Offset is required This allows the new section to be drawn at a certain distance in relation to the one selected at the start thereby avoiding graphically overlaying the two paths entering several points in succession it is possible to double triple etc the offset value To end the section without offset press Return The duplication of a section is intended only in the path so any cables contained will not be duplicated and neither will the association to the type of duct dimensioning 18 Sections e 291 7 Join Sections Joining sections allows you to connect 2 sections or sub sections adjacent to one another turning them into a single section The function requests Select the main Section Return for options Select the secondary Section Return for options If you fail to select the section because it is perpendicular to the current view access to Options and the use of the Search function is necessary which makes it possible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it The 1 point is used to select the piece of main section
94. placed in parallel The starting point on an already existing line allows it to automatically take its color and line type The lt first destination point gt connects the first component the lt subsequent destination points gt connect the components placed on parallel with the first You are advised to work with Orto and Snap always active O Branch only works with the Standard connection mode 4 General commands 97 Multiple Super wire Patch i T Connection T Certain functions are called using the central button of the mouse for mouse with 3 buttons or This allows you to draw a series of parallel lines between 2 orthogonal points or wires for straight connections in the number set in No of wires the distance is the one set in Clearance between wires both configured with the 4 1 Setting command This works in the same way as described previously for Wires allowing you to draw the connection that is not orthogonal between a component positioned vertically and one positioned horizontally You are advised to work with Orto and Snap always active This works in the same way as described previously for Wires allowing you to draw the connection that is not orthogonal between a component positioned vertically and
95. section with different laying heights are joined in a single piece when one is changed H 0 with the same laying value as the other H 30 O The start and destination heights can be changed using the 18 6 Change laying height at ends command 18 Sections e 303 18 6 Change laying height at ends This command allows you to change the path of a section in its end points In practice it is possible to change the start and destination laying heights indicated when drawing the section The laying height of intermediate pieces remains unchanged The function requests Select an Element a Section or a Node selection Element When there is an element connected at the end of a section this is the simplest condition selecting the symbol equivocal situations are avoided Section When an element is not connected it is preferable to select the section in the nearest point possible to one of the two ends Node The node is selected when an element is not connected and there is difficulty in selecting the section In the example in the figure the section starts from component SS1 switch at 110 cm from the ground and ends on component XS1 socket at 18 cm Let us suppose we want to change the height of the socket from 18 to 230 cm Selecting XS1 the following is shown Selected height to change Presa 164 2P PE Interuttore unipolare GENERALE ILLUMINAZIONE The replacement of 18 with the new laying value 230 causes
96. select the wires to be numbered one at a time or all together using the fence between two points as indicated in the figure The wires numbers inserted with this type of numbering are counted in the same way as the wires inserted with the traditional command 9 Single feed Draw 191 9 3 Single feed Data tables This command opens the Data Tables macro symbols library that contains the typical data of the Single Feed schemes Tabelle Dati 10 Calate The command presents 8 sample tables of m 10 circuit data tables that could be inserted manually in each single feed sheet These macro blocks has attributes for the fast insertion of the table s data these can HIT D be changed later with commands Eattedit or Ddatte The insertion of the tables is done in coordinates 0 0 The tables symbols are memorized on the LS LMM SPAC Librerie Unif folder Each dwg block has an sld image slide associated with the same name for the visualization on the dialogue box It is possible to customize new table SEHR symbols memorizing them on the same Descrisione folder of those contained in the system Tabela ud carters con dad ciskdburtone 0 casei The block name must be consecutive to the names already present in the system Cdati10 8 Cdati10 9 etc for a maximum pm Zeg of 20 tables the dialogue box could visualize a maximum of 20 windows The tables with 10 circuit data tables
97. setting Receive Wire No from terminal allows you to number the wire with the values already present in the terminal in the attributes of Numl and NumO see par 4 2 Wire Properties Numbering wires connected to Returns When attempting to number a wire connected to return the function checks whether it concerns Power Feed Returns or Connection Returns Power feed The wire is rejected by the selection The wire numbering does not change the Returns value entered previously when inserting the return see par 4 4 Data consistency is checked and that the color of the lines is as configured using the 4 1 Setting command in Power Feed Color It is possible to edit the content of a Power Feed return and the corresponding wire connected only using the 5 7 Ddattef command Connection The numbering changes the value of the wire and the corresponding return Returns connected as occurs normally with all the other wires Ddattef 5 7 Ddattef is used to change the numbering of any wire always keeping the data consistent with one another It is the only command that allows you to change the wire numbers connected to Power Feed Returns When Update selected branch only is not active all the returns with the same name present in all the job order multi sheets are updated automatically 110 Spac Start 2012 5 2 Numbering Position The wire number is composed of the sheet n
98. slew CAUTION The text styles that use TTF character fonts for some systems cause slowdowns in the sheet change procedure it is therefore advisable to turn off Sheet Preview when you want to use these text styles 44 Spac Start 2012 3 3 Next Sheet ps This command is to go to the sheet following the current one the function is also activated pressing on the keyboard The intermediate sheets are considered in sequence for example 3 3A and 4 in the case of missing sheets the command skips to the immediately subsequent sheet Next Sheet cannot be used to go from the last sheet of the current multi sheet to the first of the next multi sheet in which case a warning message is shown see 3 4 Previous Sheet CAUTION The keyboard command cannot be repeated pressing lt Enter gt The command can only be repeated typing A 3 4 Previous Sheet This command is to go to the sheet prior to the current one the function is also activated pressing on the keyboard The intermediate sheets are considered in sequence for example 4 3A and 3 in the case of missing sheets the command skips to the immediately previous sheet Previous Sheet can work to go from the first sheet of the current multi sheet to sheet 0 E see 3 3 Next Sheet 3 5 Add Sheet The Add Sheets function is integrated in the 3 1 Create Multi sheet command it allows you to both increase the number
99. so 4 start arrows are drawn with the same signal value 100 they must however be 100 e Au distinguished by Line to avoid register errors during Cross Reference therefore we associate the first signal 100 with line A the second with 100 linea B and so on The same situation must be shown on the four destination arrows with the 100 first destination signal 100 we associate line A with the second B etc e LINE is invisible the completion of this datum is requested during block insertion as Branch in normal use Line is ignored during insertion of the symbol hitting Return Reg The reason for the presence of the REG attribute is to contain the position register of the corresponding chained return completion takes place automatically during the cross reference operation 15 Symbols e 225 Accessory Symbols e Terminal Symbol e Plug Symbol e Terminal block symbol Terminal Symbol The Terminal symbol is used by the 6 1 Insert Terminals command the data contained in the attributes are completed automatically by this procedure This category of symbols is characterised by the presence of attributes that are all in the preassign mode visibility is ik Vi WI chosen by the customized model and does not affect vi vi vi operation The AutoCAD Ddatte command allows you to check the attributes contained in the symbols to check the family they belong to Example of Termi
100. specific selection Origin point of dimensions int 1 point Dimensioning direction Ee point Position of dimensions 3 pointi Do you want to dimension in the other direction Yes lt No gt S yes Origin point of dimensions int 1 point Dimensioning direction 4 point Position of dimensions 5 porn Pressing Return at the P Ce y y y request to select the components chooses to dimension the whole project p The origin point of the ed dimensions has been entered dh Jr with the help of the Osnap i D I Intersection mode The dimension direction points 2 and 4 point have been entered with the help of the Orto mode active F8 h Dimensioning in the 2 directions in the same 4 pt command session avoids d repeating the selection of the nodes to be dimensioned Spt En ul Example of dimensioning of a portion of installation Spac Start draws the dimensions on the specific layer called Ic_quote The dimensions made here are also useful as reference during execution of Premises development see par 22 4 O The dimension style used is the one set in the current mode using the AutoCAD Ddim command For details on how this configuration command works reference should be made to the specific instructions for use manual 22 Utilities e 341 22 4 Premises development Premises development is used to project the three dimensional result
101. suggested on the first multi sheet of the job order while a progressive number will be indicated on the following ones depending on the sheets already created Confirming with Create on the drawing the same number of Layers are generated as the sheets to be created in addition to Layer 0 This command can be used again to add further new groups of sheets To insert new intermediate sheets the function Add Sheets is used see 3 5 Add Sheet while 3 6 Delete Sheet is used to remove unwanted pages Pressing the Generate button in the situation shown in the previous figure 10 new sheets are created starting from number 31 up to number 40 3 Sheet Management 41 wg Formatting is used to set the 1 No 1 2 3 10 100 etc number of characters max 4 of the o No 01 02 03 10 100 etc sheet number o l 1 No 001 002 003 010 l The format set is used by all the Spac Ge A a E commands 0001 No 0001 0002 0003 0010 0100 etc The sheet preview image depends on Sheet preview of 3 2 Change Sheet Select Image for Zoom Clicking on preview obtains an enlargement with the possibility of view control Using and reduces and increases the enlargement factor The Reset button restores the default values hh Wb iT W Multi sheet The series of drawings and documents belonging to the same job are considered by the programme as belonging to the same
102. switch QF7 from the first to the second branch tern The connection wires upstream of the component are power feed signals the connection wires downstream R6 S6 T6 are automatically removed and replaced with the values of the signals The values on the signals have priority with respect to the existing numbers on the wires regardless of the position upstream or downstream In cases in which both upstream and downstream there are wire numbers not tied to return signals power feeds the function proceeds with the request for the wire to be kept Since the new position of the component is indicated on a group of signals with priority the function only asks for the new wire numbers to associate downstream of the component 100 101 102 In cases in which the new position of the component is indicated on wires not tied to return signals power feeds the function proceeds firstly with the request for the wires to be kept then asks for the new wire numbers H the new position is indicated in empty space no further requests are made This operation works replacing the data also on any terminals connected to the wires that lose their original value CAUTION This function acts only on Parent Sub Element and Element category symbols and on Terminals or Connectors see 15 1 Symbol Categories 15 Symbols e 239 15 5 Favourite Symbols sees Pressing the Favourites button present in most symbol
103. the drawing pressing Sel gt helpful when making changes or updating S Summary see par 3 1 fis Processing takes place according to the settings made in Cross Reference see par 4 2 6d Symbols with the Type attribute containing I or IGNORE are rejected by Cross reference 7 Cross Reference 143 Cross Reference on Parent Parent Symbol The components defined as Parent symbols are those that have ties with the other elements on the diagram like coils with contacts switches with auxiliary devices pushbuttons with additional devices etc This option allows you to process one or more Parent symbols in the job order detecting the position of the corresponding Sub element symbols For this correspondence to take place the Parent blocks in question must contain determinate attributes see par 15 2 e The NAME attribute contains the reference of the Parent Symbol the sub element symbols must have the same name as the Parent to which they are tied care must be given to upper and lower case characters e The CODE attribute is essential only for Parent symbols that do not possess REGn registration attributes In practice the code contains the name of the Reference block contained in the Spac Libraries Ref folder that must be associated with the Parent the Reference block contains the REGn attributes for writing the position of the Sub elements The Parent symbols which have REGn attri
104. the insertion command described in the menu support file named Strt mnz the same for all versions in the User folder Example of insertion in SYMBOLS Scale example of Sockets AMP icbl 1 impianti Prese IMPIANT1 IMP 700 701 001 403 Example of insertion in DRAWING Scale example of Fluorescent Tubes CA icbl 1 impianti Tubi fluorescenti IMPIANT3 IMP 110 120 135 1 The difference is minimal so take care at the end 1 se see 15 1 Symbol Categories CAUTION Customizations made by users are not protected automatically during software updating procedures 376 Spac Start 2012 Thermal Symbols UNI 9511 This symbols library is used for drawing thermal installations The Thermal symbol is very similar to an Installation symbol all the operations for insertion on the drawing and the management commands are practically identical Unlike Installation symbols Thermal symbols do not have the box rectangular frame that encloses the symbol To make sure that a symbol of this category is fully compatible 1h with all the Spac Start procedures determinate attributes must be contemplated within it and the graphic part of the drawing must be subdivided into specific layers The AutoCAD Ddatte command allows you to check the attributes SECT contained in the symbols in order to check the contents of those that are invisible on the drawing Example of
105. the previous versions of Spac 164 Spac Start 2012 d Layout Making a double click on an existing code it is possible to display and change its characteristics Modifica componente E d x Generale Note tecniche Layout BLK elettrico Sbroglia Dimension f blocchi per layout quadro Blocco rientro m Dimensioni mm Larghezza Altezza vr Profondita LZ ras E D E 14068 3 Le possibili definizioni per il layout sono le seguenti 1 Dimension dimensioni in mm del componente Nel layout vera inserto un parallelepipedo con le dimensions Y Z 2 Dimension Blocco di rientro dimensioni in milimetri del componente con blocca di entro generico Nel layout vera inzento il blocco generico con le dimensions Y Z 3 Blocco di nentro blocca di nentra specifico del componente realizzato in dimensioni reali in millimetri In the Dimensions mm field set the real sizes of the component these dimensions are used to make automatic the drawing procedures for the topographic electrical panel a generic rectangular block is inserted using the symbol Ly_ Default As an alternative it is possible to insert directly the name of the graphic symbol to be used in the Re entry Block field Pressing the Browse key it is possible to choose a specific symbol from the symbols available in the Library GestTop folder Configuring both Dimensions and Re entry Block the priority depends on the type of block
106. the result of the second figure The 3D view of the installation is very effective for immediately seeing the result obtained with this operation Socket height 230 cm The change acts simultaneously on both the ends of the section and on the element It is important to remember that the intermediate sections of the path remain unchanged The laying heights of intermediate sections can be changed using the 18 5 Change laying height command 304 Spac Start 2012 18 7 Sections utility Laying prefabricated raceways Practically this is the same 18 1 Laying Sections command customized to draw sections of raceways like prefabricated conduits or busbars Prefabricated raceways are usually drawn using the free laying mode as start and destination symbols do not exist Free Laying This laying type allows you to draw any section path All the various laying heights are indicated by the user and only the start and destination heights are taken automatically by selecting the components linked See 4 Freely Compared with the previous Spac Start versions some Laying modes are no longer present including Derivations Spac Start 2072 allows you to make derivations in a simple manner as you simply select an already existing section as start point of a new section with any of the laying modes available Duplicate section Duplication allows you to draw a new section that has the sam
107. the two to simplify this operation which in this way is developed in two steps 1 Access to rogramme windows side by side Materials Database and drawin Call up the Materials database programme that is kept open at the Database same time as the drawing programme Select the Manufacturer in sequence to view the Codes contained and store the one concerned pressing Errore L origine riferimento non e stata trovata Abbina AutoCAD gl Ae 2 Associate Materials Abbina Materiali NOTE The Associate AutoCAD button appears only when a code or macrocode is selected Now you have to work in the drawing environment the Associate Materials command or button in the figure asks you to select the symbols with which to associate the code stored with the operation of point 1 NOTE association can be carried out also during insertion of the symbol on the drawing pressing the Database button see par 15 3 or during prefix configuration see par 4 2 In the attributes of the selected block the function states the following data e the material MANUFACTURER or BRAND is given in the MANUFACTURER attribute e the material Catalogue CODE is given in the TYPE attribute e the generic description of the component is replaced with the material DESCRIPTION in the DESCRIPTION attribute e Any information configured in the NOTES field see par 8 1 The function shows the data associated previously
108. them on the drawing using the AutoCAD Ddatte command it is necessary to add compile and associate a new field with every Tag Example Add Fields File FIELDS Pressing Fields accesses the possibility to add new fields available for all customers In the example of the figure pressing New generates the new field Date All the new fields are then viewed in the main screen of Customer Management and will be available for ever customer and for all tyoes of master title block The Fields added must then be associated to a Tag the content must be entered manually The Content is assigned to the field selected pressing the edit button or lt Enter gt from the keyboard NOTE it is not possible to delete fields that are associated with Tags it is firstly necessary to remove the association concerned Some fields are frozen with the warning message Field value detected from job order data these are compiled automatically according to the names and descriptions associated with the job order and multi sheet and cannot be changed during this working session Job order name Job Order description Multisheet name Multisheet description Designer EN PES Title block Een Fields Save Canca Example of manual association of an additional Field value 2 Basics 35 Start Configuration Every Spac job order is associated with a customer see Customer Management it is possible t
109. this information Caneco automatically generates the structure of the General Single feed diagram where the position can be seen of the QCL panel located downstream of QGBT GPLV Main e PTDINIDD A 00 A 25 A Lal LU 50 m 200 imi OL LUCI 5 14 100 mi 100 ge LUCI 1 LUCI 443 4 43 Example of Panel circuit 360 Spac Start 2012 hd 25 Maien METBDB 125 A 250 A 160 A 100 mi 100 mi 100 mv PC 220 PC CEE 220 PC CEE 380 4 6 4 92 2 53 In the example in the figure the circuits UCI and LUCI2 are supplied by panel QCL generated with the previous example QL is QGBT located and In fact circuit downstream of upstream of QCL 24 4 Export data The data are exported from the planimetric drawing to Caneco The function asks you to select the power feed from which to extract the data of the circuits connected Through the options it is possible to execute Search which is useful for running a scan of the drawing to seek the power feeds drawn graphically in a zone of the installation momentarily frozen or not very visible C CANECO Planimetric Diagram Calculation Export dati per Caneco Riferimento LGBT Caneco Full hai d 3c MM Annulla The Export Data function generates files with IMP extension in the current job order folder In the previous Spac Start 4 x versions the data were stored in the Linee txt Lines txt and Utilizz txt Use txt files Caneco is compatible f
110. through the use of this button Saving associations takes place by default in the Sheet Libraries folder with the chosen name and file extension abb the file structure is shown in the following example cro de 1 SHEET1 2 SHEET2 Every association is composed of a record with 2 fields Sheet Number and Sheet Name to be associated It is also possible to act manually on the file respecting the syntax indicated Open Association To re use a stored autocomposition simply select the corresponding abb file Any sheet numbers present in the association file that do not correspond with sheets in the current multi sheet are associated with new sheets that will be created automatically with no further notice Category Filter This filter allows you to view the list of stored sheets corresponding with the required groups This function is very practical especially when working with very substantial lists The categories are set during the storage operation see par 3 8 The filter is not stored in such a way as to view all the sheets at every access to the command 52 Spac Start 2012 3 10 Explode This command allows you to explode a block or a stored sheet inserted without the option Explode on sheet keeping it on the current layer unlike the AutoCAD Explode command that shows the entities exploded on the original creation layer normally Layer 0 CAUTION If the AutoCAD Explode command is used by mis
111. time to be proposed as default the next time the command is used This way it is possible to draw the power feeds on several sheets always in the same position This command should not be used on the first sheet of the diagram where destination arrows must not be drawn This function is normally called to draw the last sheet in which a power feed is referred in fact only the destination arrows are drawn on the left This function is normally called to draw a power feed start point on the first sheet in fact only the start arrows are drawn on the right This function requests the first and second point for the start and destination of the first line at the top then only one point to determine the height for the position of the second power feed 2nd signal passage way at the bottom In this case too the coordinates and names of the power feeds are stored to be re proposed the next time the function is used Branch j This function is used to draw power feeds that start perpendicular to other already existing lines automatically taking the names of the returns Only the Branch datum must be inserted used for returns with the same signal name in order to point out that it is intendedly a double start and not a repeated starts error L shaped branch f WW Function similar to the one described previously differing only in the fact that the new power feeds are drawn on parallel with those alread
112. to all the sheets such as for example the squaring with the title block table Single feed The Single feed diagram is used for drawing the distributions in simplified form block diagram For every sheet layer it is necessary to enter the technical specifications of the equipment and components and corresponding SE dimensionings in the Data Tables T SS To make this graphic form the specific Single feed symbols must be used see par 4 1 Example of Single feed Diagram Functional multi sheet creation takes place using the 2 5 Spac Job Order Management commands followed by 3 1 Create Multi sheet 2 Basics e 25 2 4 The Sheet The concept of sheet is valid only in functional diagrams In every multi sheet as many Layers are present as have been created with the Create Multi sheet command Every Layer bears the number of the corresponding sheet When viewing a sheet is required Layer O where the title block has been inserted and the Layer with the name of the sheet indicated are unlocked simultaneously all the other Layers remain frozen so that they are invisible On every sheet it is possible to use all the colors and types of line available with AutoCAD If a Layer is renamed the sheet name is changed as well alphabetic names are not accepted by Spac except in particular cases see par 3 2 In planimetric diagrams the sheet is the whole of all the Layers required to be made visi
113. to simplify the work normally a point a and direction coinciding with the Difference in height existing walls are used Adapt Adapt Material for Start Render m si Dimensions cm Layer SCALE START To start it is necessary to insert the stairway width and the number of steps required lastly dimension the sizes of each step on the basis of the depth and elevation Elevation This is the height of the step if this value is not known precisely it can be calculated automatically activating the Adapt option Adapt with the item Difference in height allows you to insert the total height of the stairway then pressing the lt button the measurement calculated is shown Depth This is the step width if this value is not known precisely it can be calculated automatically activating the Adapt option Adapt implies entering the total length of the stairway calculated on the layout projection the stairway length is divided by the number of steps and the result is the width of each step O Materials for Spac Render optional set the type of material to be assigned to the object drawn Pressing Select object it captures the kind of material to an existing object while Change is already associated with the material change 17 General commands 259 In the following examples a stairway composed of 10 steps is rested against a wall that is 300 cm long and 270 cm high Adapt Elevati
114. to update the referencing of all the components of the job order or of only a part with only one operation Components reference Processing takes place on the component present in the multi sheets selected in the UNIFILARE list MULTIFILARE The list makes it possible to run checks during normal work as the existence of any double references is noted immediately the repeated names are marked with an asterisk se Summary see par 3 1 At the end of a scan the following dialog window is shown In the example figure it can be seen that the reference FU1 is marked with the asterisk as it is used twice on page 1 and 4 List of references in use SH Pressing Re referencing in the Automatic or Manual mode the names of the components on the drawing are changed and updated consecutively with the Type of reference parameters shown Automatic 1 Manual 2 With Automatic Referencing all the references in the list are changed Using Manual Referencing you are asked to select the components to be changed It is however possible to restore the initial situation with the previous references pressing the Restore Previous References button immediately after executing Re referencing To change the mode or Type of referencina it is necessary to act on the configuration of the settings see Symbols Tagging par 4 2 where you can choose between e Incremental Tagging e POos
115. using the specific Delete function in order to make available all the associated equipment symbols and any downstream circuits are also deleted Using any other deleting command risks causing misalignments between the information contained 24 Caneco 359 Panel circuit This operation allows you to generate a new panel connected upstream to an already existing distribution for example QGBT An example is given below Ei Protezione Tipo ut Gen Er Quadro a monte Jacet Kee Sottoquadro Quadro El x Riferimento ci Pilemmento Stile Gu BE Ti Descrizione Quadro Comando Luci Quadro Alimentazione WISEN r Normale SDCcorso Contenuto 3P N PE D Pr Dra inc y d d nazi Fi Desoidoma Quadro llluminazione Frot E l ProtBase zl d Utilizzatori Trasformatore Home Descrizione Assorbim Elimina Aggiungi Modifica Assor 1 Utiliz fl Lungt Totale utilizzatori 1 START OR EA E Tens secondaria Potenza EWA Ue Schema secondario Blindo Distribuzione Lunghezza Annulla The circuit reference is QL Lighting panel e the name of the circuit used to connect the new OCL panel Light control panel downstream of the QGBT General LV Panel To activate the data window concerning the Panel window with QCL it is necessary to press the Downstream button only after selecting the Panel style types of circuit from the list With
116. while Description generically gives the default datum contained in the symbol The Associate materials operation Qty Manufacturer e Descripti can be carried out also during insertion of the symbols on the drawing pressing Database or Db N B The Fm button is not enabled in some versions of Spac Database Schneider Clear Start Component not coded Associate Materials Db or Database of a single Code inserts the following 3 data of the figure The previous generic description of iy Manufacturer tee ee the component has been replaced 1 Finder 161290740740 Relay Octal Bif F with that of the material chosen Pressing the Db button updates the existing Code with the new ones or further codes are associated to create a macro Association of single material code Let us suppose that the component in question is an illuminated pushbutton composed of 3 codes Manufacturer Type Description KLOCKNER B1K92 PILOT LIGHT KLOCKNER B1LOW PRESETTING DEVICE KLOCKNER B1L1A CONTACT Associate Materials of a macrocode inserts the following 3 groups of data The Type contains the catalogue A Lt codes separated by the semicolon Finder 161290240240 Relay Octal Bf P character as also Manufacturer and Finder 90 22 Wainscot relay ae 60123024 Relay octal Description OO1VT Fixing screw Macrocode association If the macrocode is composed of elements that pertain to various manufacturers th
117. will be C100 or in any case a consecutive value to the highest one detected by the drawing Previous index The deletion of cables is ignored The name of the next cable will be C103 so the references will no longer be consecutive The references of cables can be free max 10 characters and can be changed both during the final laying stage and using the specific Modify Cables command see par 19 3 312 Spac Start 2012 Manual laying The laying mode with select section manually is usually used to insert cables when in the sections there are no start and destination elements or when intending to choose a different path than the one proposed automatically by the programme After completing the list of Cables and Bundles to lay and pressing Forward gt the function asks for the selection of an element it is now necessary to press Return to cancel this request Cable laying 3 1x1 5 Manual laying mode Select Section Node or Element select sections Select Section Node or Element Return End Return Select Elements at start and destination End Return It is advisable to select the section directly to avoid a selection step through the dialog window that summarises all the sections that involve the node or component selected It is also possible to select directly all successive sections to form the entire passage of the cable If the section is not consecutive the function shows the following mes
118. with angle from XY of 35 3 degrees Plan View This represents the AutoCAD PVISTA command with angle in relation to the X axis of 270 degrees and with angle from the XY plane of O degrees Therefore the drawing viewed with any angle is taken to the plan view Hide When the AutoCAD DDVPOINT PVISTA or VISTAD commands are used to create a three dimensional view of the drawing AutoCAD produces a wireframe view in the current window All the lines are present including those hidden by other objects The HIDE command removes the hidden lines from the screen The HIDE command considers circles solids traces regions wide polyline segments three dimensional faces polygon meshes and extruded edges with height other than zero as opaque surfaces that hide objects If they are extruded circles solids traces and thick polyline segments are considered as objects with top and bottom faces The HIDE command does not consider objects on frozen or deactivated layers O lt is advisable to perform the hide operation before sending the drawing for printing Shade The AutoCAD SHADE command removes the hidden lines and shows the figure shaded on the drawing The shaded image can only be viewed on the screen however it is possible to print this image on a slide through the AutoCAD GENDIA command 17 General commands e 267 17 15 Plan Utility Graphic changes Attributes visibility Force value Adapt Width T and T Import Attrib
119. with the component current code if the component has never been associated with any code the bottom part of the window is empty Manufacturer Manufacturer Merlin Gerin Description 601290240240 013702480 Voltage signal indicator 710011 0101 18604 C32H DC 2P 10AC circuit breaker C32H DC 2P 25A C circuit breaker C60A 1P 6A B circuit breaker C60A 3P 324 B circuit breaker Auxiliary Switch O F for C60 ID General purpose relay 24 V DC 2C0 10A Ceiling light KST90 18W 220V White NG125A 3P 100A C circuit breaker x Pressing Add the new data are added to those already existing forming a local macrocode Using the Del button the existing data are deleted Telemecanique m e according to the ree le selection Use Clear to E A delete all the existing ones IV Wik for ever code Description C60A 3P 324 B circuit breaker d MERLIN GERN Available allows you to insert existing codes in the list at the top of those available The manufacturers logo is present only where applicable 8 Bill of Materials e 171 For every symbol selected it is necessary to confirm with Update or Cancel to be able to go on to the next symbol To completely cancel the operation press Cancel the same number of times as the number of symbols selected When a symbol is inserted on the drawing the Manufacturer and Type data are normally empty depending on the prefix database used see par 4 2
120. you to draw respecting the planimetry scale in proportion a table with the same contents as shown in the list Every datum Tag contained in the Available fields is information which pressing Add is inserted in the Output fields to represent a column of the table Each Tag possesses two variables the width and the column title which can be changed by pressing the Edit button Number of Lines Texts Height Titles Height Table Width Table Height Standard This value is used to split the table in several parts also on different sheets because after completion of the maximum number of lines a new insertion point or continuation on the next sheet is requested This is the height of all the texts contained in the table This parameter affects the height of each line proportionately thus the total height of the table This is the height of the column titles This parameter affects the calculation of the total height of the table This is the total sum of the widths assigned to each output field The size is expressed in millimetres This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Width to avoid overstepping the margins of the master title block with the table On the basis of the maximum number of lines foreseen and the height of the texts the maximum total height of the table is calculated This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Height to avoid overstepping the margins of the master title bloc
121. 0V AUSILIARI 24V INGRESSI PLC USCITE PLC MORSETTIERE CONNETTORI ESTERNO ARMADIO INTERNO ARMADIO DISTINTA MATERIALI DISTINTA MATERIALI DISTINTA MATERIALI Sheet Titles List AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY MOTORS 110V AUXILIARY 24V AUAILIARY PLC INPUT PLC OUTPUT TERMINAL STRIP EXTERNAL LAYOUT INTERNAL LAYOUT MATERIAL LIST MATERIAL LIST MATERIAL LIST Pressing on Drawing the sheets list is drawn using a table block this option allows you to choose whether the title in the main language and its translation if any are to be written on the same line separated by the character or on different lines In the former case 52 titles are listed for each page and 26 in the latter using the default table It is possible to customize the table and the position of the data it contains using the special configuration see Sheet title legend par 4 2 64 Spac Start 2012 Foglio oe The table symbol used as default Sheet Description is LegendaT dwg DESCRIZIONE DESCRIPTION It is present in the symbols folder LISTA FOGLI Y INDEX The use of customized tables is possible provided that they are ALIMENTAZIONE POWER SUPPLY stored in the same directory ALIMENTAZIONE AUSILIARI AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY Example of Legend with translation in single line The pages needed to complete the legend are consecutive to the one indicated at the start Number of first sheet for Sheets List If the destination sheet is o
122. 138 09 TERMINA E DDT tacos 139 6 6 NUMM NUMBERING eene een ee een e een e een ee een eg 140 NUMM SING E 140 6 7 NOMLAND NUMO SETS e eo e cdo 141 6 8 REMOVE TEN aos 141 T GROSS REFERENCE inn 143 Feat OROSS Le 143 COSS ee 144 A a cee Saracen data head late a cal a a el Bd ues ident ald ee ae 144 SUB ClEMENE SVIMDOl asc cece A A ES Re kao Ae ee a 144 EX AIC EE 145 Gross Heterence On FRONT ee Eer EE 146 EIERE geegent ee eee ee 146 EXIM DIG its EE ENEE EE 146 Cross Rererence on Farents and FELONS eebe deeg 147 EMI EE 148 EI 150 E EE 152 e e 153 Errors detected on Parent SYIMDOIS ccccseccsesccsesccsucccescssuscnsussausessusensusssusensusssusessusenussanses 153 EN TOS detected on Retur SIND SA E 157 o BIEOFMA TERA ES gt pci a 159 a RETTEN 159 IITOFIMANOIN ON Databas Orsini ita tb 160 MD EDO e os 160 PAINE EDS Si a 161 HIGCTUNO A COOC AA A A A A O E 162 erte EE 162 A a taaitie os nena a acca asia catty a A Ar 163 e e A O R 164 A RR 165 Fleche Bi a aia aia cis 166 A A y BaN AY On eee Cy Pane oe 167 Delicia eegene 167 4 Spac Start 2012 ASSOCIA MO UE 168 O a tania Genter 168 ie Kee EE 169 llo LLO 08 GU Oesa gatasenacscaeeancatsatnasad deausuatagestonssatiensaesbattossdecsutuateameuadseaacaneagees 169 Hidden component management 169 portue Terminals DAT ti des 169 gt E anced t iad Ole Badutal cule ciihO Sid la Suet recs 169 MAAS EE 170 ETE O EE 170 6 2 ASSOCIATE MATERIALS EE 171 DOC C OGCS ee ee 173 EE 173
123. 160 Spac Start 2012 Print Database Printing material databases can be configured completely by the user according to specific requirements every set up is a customization of the print format 21xi There are some print configurations already ready for use each one is in a Jet file in the Bill Report folder The Archivio compatto Compact database print is vertical and there are no internal and Ean codes therefore it is the most suitable one for saving the pages needed Select one from the available reports for print or create a new one By pressing the Modify button you can modify the structure of the report highlighted HE Compact complete Database Compact Database Preview Paged Database Modify The Archivio completo Complete database print is horizontal all the main information of the articles is present therefore it is the most suitable one for a detailed print Forward gt gt Preview This shows on the screen the pages to be sent to print This function is helpful for checking the arrangement of the data based on the set up chosen Change Pressing Change access is gained to the page layout customization programme optional for programming uses In this stage it is advisable to consult the instructions and helps available on line New This allows you to generate a new print set up Also in this case access Is gained to the page layout customization programme opti
124. 22 5 Circuit This attribute contains the Caneco circuit name see par 24 3 This datum is fundamental for dialogue between Spac Start and the Caneco calculation software Load This attribute contains the absorption of the component in question This value is added with those of all those components that form part of the same circuit for Caneco see par 24 3 Cosphi Useful technical datum for export to Caneco see par 24 3 Pr4 The PR4 attribute contains the description of the material associated with the component during drawing using the interface with the materials database of the Pr4 estimates programme see par 25 2 Support Optional Layer A block that comprises the following series of Layers is considered as an Installation symbol Type Description Not used Comp_attr Contains all the attributes of the Component including the NAME in color 4 cyan Height Type Manufacturer and Description in color 4 green The remaining ones are color 6 magenta Comp_box Contains the red box color 1 the dimensions must always be the same for any symbol 8x8 mm Components Contains the symbol graphics normally in color 4 cyan Note it is always advisable to see the already existing symbols before developing customized symbols Box 4 All the symbols of the library are drawn inside a specific box in color 1 red on the Comp_ box layer CO The utility of this box is fundamental for all Spac
125. 314 5 6 you obtain The creation of the empty sheet no 1 is proposed ajs If you make the shift from sh 3 forward by 10 112113114115 positions you obtain The creation of the empty sheets from no 3 to no 12 is proposed O Any missing sheets are not compacted during the shift forward and are considered as empty sheets The following example refers to a case with 4 missing sheets 4sh D If make the shift from sh 3 forward by 1 position HDD 4sh obtain The creation of the empty sheet no 3 is proposed 3 Sheet Management e 47 Backward This parameter indicates the type of shift Let us suppose we have 5 sheets numbered from 11 to 15 If make the shift from sh 11 backward by 1110 11 12 13 14 position obtain The creation of the empty sheet no 15 is proposed It is not possible in this case to perform from sh 11 a shift of over 10 positions backward max u to sh 1 The missing sheets are compacted if they are prior to the one to be shifted the subsequent sheets are not compacted The following example refers to a case with 4 missing sheets 4sh If make the shift from sh 8 backward by a max of 12 ja a fs 4 positions obtain The creation of the empty sheets from no 6 to no 9 is proposed The following example refers to a case with 2 missing sheets in 2 positions 2sh 2sh If make the shift from sh 4 backward by a max of 2sh 2 positions obtain The creation of the empty sheets no 6 an
126. 38 58 Ele ALTIVAR 58 E e ALTIVAR 66 68 Eee ALTIVAR 69 er ALTRI ELEMENTI DI COMANDO E ie AVVIATORI A GIORNO Elie AVVIATORIIN CASSETTA 2 JO AvVIATORI STATICI El ATS480110 ALTISTART 1104 _ S S Manufac ATS48C110 ALTISTART 1104 4004 Telemecani Example of DbCenter DbCenter comprises 3 work windows Materials database TreeView Associated materials list Filters tise See DbCenter Toolbar di g Ueo U a l A Operation is very simple after selecting the code of the material to be associated with one or more components on the drawing simply drag with the mouse Drag amp Drop the material chosen from the DbCenter window and keeping the mouse left hand button pressed select the block on the drawing with which to associate the material The new code is always added with no further requests of the programme to those already present if any The new code is replaced with no further requests of the programme to those already present if any if the Shift TI key on the keyboard is pressed NOTE the Shift key must be pressed before starting to drag and kept pressed until the end of the operation If the selection is in the blank space by mistake or intentionally a second step is activated which allows the user to select one or more blocks on the drawing with which to associate the material chosen As an alternative to the Drag Drop system
127. 5 Wire numbering 107 Indicate un numbered wires can simplify work viewing the wires that remain to be numbered in the current page Number by strings This method is used when wanting to reference the wires freely with texts or numbers that are not necessarily incremental with one another To start numbering by strings simply enter an inverted comma in front of the file name In this case the comma allows recognition of the entire content of the string otherwise only value 1 is considered If the string starts with a number the inverted comma is mandatory No with inverted comma It often occurs to have to number a wire numerically without wanting to ee 5 follow the current prefix configurations constants or various formats in No with saved this case the inverted comma allows these configurations to be ignored the wire number will be 6 instead of 02 006 example made with pref Sheet 2 separator and format with 3 characters OOno comma In this case the inverted comma is unnecessary as the string starts with SIGNAL a character No without inverted The parameters set in the Advanced Options settings are not observed comma and neither are those for the local prefixes O String numbering allows you to number only one wire at a time Number by This method is used when wanting to number the wires progressively increments from the number indicated at the start The function automatica
128. 64 bit Software configuration Administrator access is necessary for installation purposes Authorisations of the domain administrator are not necessary For information apply to the system administrator e Operating system Windows 7 64 bit e Web Browser Microsoft O Internet Explorer 7 0 or later Installation on Windows XP and Vista 64 bit operating systems is not allowed 12 Spac Start 2012 1 2 Spac Start Setup e g Spac Start setup is guided and all the instructions are displayed on the monitor The programme transfers the files from the release DVD to one or more folders that are created on the hard disk and a new group of programmes in the Start menu To be able to set up and use the programme some general notions about how the computer works are necessary and also basic knowledge of Windows operating systems Before proceeding with setup it is necessary to check that the hardware requirements of your computer correspond with those given in paragraph 1 1 Hardware The setup of Spac Start 2012 requires the authorisations of the system administrator Setup on a single station takes place indicating First setup Master setup during the Setup procedure The setup of several stations in the LAN takes place indicating Primary Setup during the Setup procedure of the main station Master and Secondary Setup during the Setup procedure of the other stations Slaves in the LAN
129. AZIONE ILLUMINAZIONE ILLUMINAZIONE ILLUMINAZIONE INAZIONE ILLUMINAZ ILLUMINAZ ILLUMINAZ ILLUMINAZI ILLUMINAZI ILLUMINAZI ILLUMINAZI ILLUMINAZI ILLUMINAZI ILLUMINAZ ILLUMINAZ ILLUMINAZ nn tn tn tn on on tn tn tn tn tn sen on tn on tn in tn in GA GA Lo MEET Update Cancel O ES Lal Pressing on the indicator the list is sorted alphabetically on the datum selected For every section the list shows the installation it belongs to the characteristics of the raceway the number of sub sections for those divided into conduits laying type length in metres and the quantity of sub sections that form the whole section Details View Change Filters Update This allows you to view all the parts of the section selected in the list From this consultation no form of change is possible The View button is particularly useful for tracking the position of a section on the drawing In fact it is highlighted to facilitate its recognition The function requests Zoom Zoom End Return Pressing and you can control the enlargement while with Return the function is ended with the current zoom or restoring the initial view This allows you to view and change all the data of sections except the reference The change window is accessed quickly with a double click To change the reference use the specific command Modify sections see par 18 4 The change to the data of the sections is shown
130. AutoCAD then the Materials database goes automatically to the background NOTE The Associate AutoCAD button appears only when a code or macrocode is selected 2 Associate Materials Now you have to work in the drawing environment with the Associate Materials command or pressing the button in the figure you are asked to select the symbols with which to associate the code stored with the operation described in point 1 NOTE association can be carried out also during insertion of the symbol on the drawing pressing the Database button see par 28 2 Abbina Material or during configuration of the prefix PRI file see 17 2 Symbol SETTINGS In the attributes of the selected block the function states the following data e the material MANUFACTURER or BRAND is given the MANUFACTURER attribute e the material Catalogue CODE is given in the TYPE attribute e the generic description of the component is replaced with the material DESCRIPTION in the DESCRIPTION attribute if present e any information configured in the Technical Notes se See 8 4 DbCenter 23 Bill of Materials e 345 The function shows the data associated previously with the component if the component has never been associated with any code the top part of the window is empty Abhbinamento Materiali ES KA GC AE Ge een SL x Pressing Add the new SC sem ata are added to those 16 already existing forming KW
131. CAD Delete command In cases in which both upstream and downstream there are wire numbers not tied to return signals power feeds the function proceeds with the request for the wire to be kept xj The request for the number of the wire to be kept takes place for every single connection in order to allow the full view of the characteristics The default setting indicates keeping the number BK upstream Filo in alto Top wire causing deletion of the NessunoINO7V K number downstream Filo in basso Bottom wire This operation works replacing the data also on any terminals connected to the wire that loses its original value Delete Symbol is particularly suitable for deleting Nessuno NO7V K terminals and connectors This function acts only on Parent Sub Element and Element category symbols on Terminals or Connectors and Returns see 15 1 Symbol Categories This function works in the same way as the Patch command see par 4 5 helpful when the wires to be joined are not numbered This function adds the check of the wire numbers 15 Symbols e 237 Copy This is used to copy symbols avoiding access to the symbols library menu see par 15 3 Last Automatically the insertion point is requested of a new symbol identical to the one inserted previously you can type the command XX on the keyboard Select The function asks you to choose a symbol and then the insertion point of the new
132. Cabinet front base plate height 100 lt 200 gt 100 Select the cabinet If the front view of the cabinet is selected the command ends with insertion of the front base plate if the side view is selected you are asked Which side of cabinet front right or left point This way the block Fqzocco dwg is inserted present in the Panels folder scaled according to the size of the panel selected Transparent doors This is the parametric insertion of a block that can be customized by a user called Fqantat dwg You are asked Transparent door insertion point bottom left Transparent door width cm type or 1st point Transparent door height cm type or 2 point If the dimensions of the door are typed the value must be expressed in real centimetres With the Cabinet Front base plate and Accessories commands a drawing like the one in the following figure is obtained quickly and easily FRONTAL VIEW LATERAL VIEW ei a Y 199 TRASPARENT DOOR ACCESSORIES Example of composition with the cabinet accessories library sizes expressed in cm The example represents a panel with two doors in front and side view complete with front base plate and accessories The dimensions must be entered manually 206 Spac Start 2012 13 2 Cabinet Interior This command is used to quickly draw the electric panel interior topographic layout The mostly used dimensions in real millimetres can be stored separately for Plate Rac
133. Cables in a section it is advisable to execute the 20 1 Dimension Raceways command to check the path cramming coefficients 316 Spac Start 2012 Laying Multiple Modes It is only possible to associate the Multiple Laying concept with the Semiautomatic section selection and Automatic section selection modes Operation is very simple setting Serial at the end of a first cable laying operation the command continues considering the previous destination symbol or point as start for a new cable laying with the same characteristics consecutive to the one that has just been made Setting Parallel at the end of a first cable laying operation the command continues considering the previous start symbol or point as start for a new cable laying In practice it allows you to continue laying the same cables without quitting the function Appropriate use of the multiple cable laying function allows considerable time saving during operations for drafting the cables in the sections The following figures show us some examples of application Serial am a The bundle of cables 3 1x2 5 is laid between the various symbols using serial multiple laying In the initial laying SB1 was selected as start element and EL1 as destination then from EL1 to EL2 as new destination then from EL2 to ELS It should be noted that the same cable bundle has been laid in each section Parallel oxZ AZ 3 The bundle o
134. Code Making a double click on an existing code it is possible to display and change its characteristics The dialogue panel is the same panel as when inserting a new article and consists of the following 5 data tabs General Technical Notes Layout Electrical BLK 162 Spac Start 2012 General Making a double click on an existing code it is possible to display and change its characteristics Modifica componente i lx Generale Note tecniche Layout BLE elettrico Sbroglio Generale Costruthore Finds Famiglia RELE INDUSTRI LI Codice catalogo Codice interno Codice EAN 8012823296050 REL INDUSTRIALE Descrizione Mote Prezzo 23 1 Sconto Documento BE PAC Aukomazione Librerie Documents 601 23024 pdf Sfoglia Apri Scheda tecnica UK Annulla The Manufacturer and Family fields are two fields that can be changed using this function they can be renamed by double clicking on the item in the archive Catalogue Code corresponds to the data written in the Type attribute of the symbols on the drawing during the operation 8 2 Associate Materials obligatory field Internal code frequently corresponds to a company and or warehouse code whilst EAN code European Article Number is a European code data not shown on symbols Description corresponds to the data written in the Description attribute of the symbols on the drawing during the operation 8 2 Asso
135. Colors only the lines drawn with colors other than those in the list are not considered as wires therefore the functions that concern the numbering of wires and terminals various processings etc do not act on these lines 84 Spac Start 2012 Advanced Options As the values of the wire number must be consistent with the relevant data on the terminal the settings configured here act on the characteristics of both Advanced options wires and terminals Enabling Sheet Number as Prefix Separator Constants Wire No formatting Sheet No formatting the current sheet number is associated with the wire number and then with the Separator terminal number E Enabling you choose the position C Before or After the Constant value if there is no Constant it is indifferent Let us Suppose we are numbering sheet 3 Starting from number 1 the wires are given the following values 3 1 3 2 3 3 etc The enabling of this parameter is indicated in the figure of the main dialog window with Sh This numbering system involves cancelling the variable of the reserve numbers available for each sheet during automatic wire numbering as the numbers always start again on every sheet from 1 This is the character or string that is inserted between the sheet number and the wire value Normally it is a dot character Example on sheet 3 Separator 3 1 3 2 3 3 etc Separator AB 3AB1 3AB2
136. Connectors 123 6 2 Insert Connectors This command draws plugs and connectors on the wires of the electric diagram In general it works in the same way and follows the rules already described for inserting terminals From this dialog window it is possible to choose and enter all the connector data When they are confirmed you are asked to select the wire on which to insert them If pointing takes place on already numbered wires the Plug Symbol or connector always takes the values of the wire If pointing takes place on un numbered wires the Numi and NumO data are introduced also in the wire NumO is calculated on the basis of the Increment configuration E Elte O Manufacturer 145 6P 145 65 18 1P 18 15 18 1P 1815 14 12P 14 125 14 12P 14 125 14 19P 14 195 The code list can be sorted in 4 different ways Pressing on Type Pin no or Category or on the indicator the list is sorted alphabetically according to the selection Manufacturer All the already existing connectors are shown according to the Panel selected For every new connector reference max 8 characters it is possible to insert an extended description max 35 characters In this stage it is not possible to change the type of connector set so the choice of the characteristics Manufacturer type etc is only active for new ones The list of available connectors with their technical features can be edited using 4 2 Settin
137. Diam therefore when a section is RIX 59 TUBO PIEGH MEDIO LILLA FK15 32 Diam RIX TUBO PIEGH MEDIO LILLA FK15 40 Diam selected that already DIELECTRIX TUBO PIEGH MEDIO LILLA FK15 50 DIELECTRIX TUBO ISOL RIG PIEG FRED RKS 16 DIELECTRIX TUBO ISOL RIG PIEG FRED RKS9 20 DIELECTRIX 502 TUBO ISOL RIG PIEG FRED RKS 25 DIELECTRIX TUBO ISOL RIG PIEG FRED RKS 32 DIELECTRIX TUBO ISOL RIG PIEG FRED RKS 40 Diam DIELECTRIX TUBO ISOL RIG PIEG FRED RKS 50 Diam TUBO PROT RIGIDO AUTOES RK15 16 1 Diam DIELECTRIX 1240 TUBO PROT RIGIDO AUTOES RK15 20 1 Diam Diam Diam Diam Diam possesses the type of raceway the function shows the message Raceway already dimensioned but changes are still possible at any time Ll _ Ll ld ld do ld dl dl sch sch MSC SeERRSZSeRR All the cables passing in the Se T 5 section are automatically ee e selected to obtain the total fill calculation The Sub section column is related with the number of conduits contained When the value is 1 the raceways are normal not divided into conduits 20 Raceways 323 The Fill Calculation allows calculation of the cram coefficient of the cable bundle in the raceway With the Select All Delete and Invert buttons you can act on the list of the cables contained to carry out partial calculations If the fill red column does not exceed the allowed R10 311x715 ID DO limit yellow line this means that the raceway chosen is adequate
138. E 48 Sheets caseification 52 Sheets Forward EEN 47 SS ING EE 101 TAS EE 47 SIMDO EE 188 Single feed Data tables cccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 Single feed draw 189 Single feed Number wires oooocccccnccccccconccnnnnccnnnnnos 191 Sale ted nta ona loo dad 243 Index e 389 Single feed Diagram ooooccccnncccccconnccnnnccnnnonnnnnnnnnnos 243 Single feed Drawing oooocccccnccccncoonccnnnncncnnnanononnnnnos 25 Single feed Title Blocks 100 A mere eee ee 231 ei ee EG 231 A S 66 elle EE 231 pac SCUINGS Lee eege E 68 GEET 14 Spac cil e tp denia dona 36 68 Split MOIE Ee 53 Squaring Title BIOCKS ccccceseseeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 249 SEH EE 259 Start Configuration oooccccccccocncncccconnnnnccconononcnnnos 36 68 Store SNEG lt 49 Sub element symbol occccccccocccnncccccnnnncs 144 222 235 o ead waesiusnds ee deeae tele at weed eos 43 Symbol Categories 217 373 Symbol Confguratton 73 Symbol dumension 332 Symbol INS nda 232 378 SY MbONLSJENA sucia ido 343 SYVMDOlSEMINGS asii e 251 SVMS tanto lacio 67 232 Symbols Pushbutton panel front 210 Symbols Pushbutton panel rear 210 Symbols tagging iio 78 TAG Files iia dd init ida eri 34 E ele He e BEE 332 Terminal and Connector Database o oocccncccnnccnnccoo 88 Terminal Block 90 126 209 Terminal block drawing s sssesennnsenennnnnesnnneennennene 128 Terminal Block Hetumm 90 Terminal block symbol
139. E FORWARDS CARRIAGE BACKWARDS THERMAL PROTECTION RELEASED 24V DC AUXILIARY PINCERS MOTOR ENABLED CARRIAGE MOTOR ENABLED ROLLS MOTOR ENABLED DETACHMENT COIL START CIRCUIT BREAKERS OK PINCERS MOTOR ENABLED RELAY CARRIAGE MOTOR ENABLED RELAY ROLLS MOTOR ENABLED RELAY START ENABLED RELAY ad sad sal sal CTF ed Get de 09 e A A Cer ga ca Ze CARRIAGE MOTOR THERMAL OVERLOAD SWITCH Change This allows you to change the data concerning Function and Function2 on the components of the list and the operation is confirmed pressing the Change button To state the changes made on the drawing press the Update bution Update The changes made to Function1 and 2 are stated in the symbols on the drawing and the values on the Sub element symbols are also aligned 12 Utilities 195 Drawing This allows you to draw the summary table of the functions 1 and 2 It is possible to customize the table block and the position of the data it contains using the special configuration see Function legend par 4 2 omsyn Sida ltem Funzione Use Type ANECORS CARRELLO INOETRO Gr BM E da TRASEORMATORE 36092 3 PREE E LIMA OHNE TZ Bee 4 MOTORE FPFE ANCERS MOTOR H 5 MZ MOTORE CARRELLI EH 8 CARRIAGE MOTOR MH MOTCRE au DN ROULE MOTOR R1 Gruppo RC J A Example of Function Legend TRASFO 360 410 ASILAR 140 Vac El TRASFORMATORE 380 48 AUSLIARI 284 4 BFI PROTEZO Et EI 5 The page
140. EO g SC 1 6 EE 70 Sheel DIMENSION EE 71 EOS IPC o Ee 72 SVINDO CONT A e a des ae 73 A mudacesraiseeeh sen as O a maces psccadanceses gubweceraasecne 75 AA EE AE ACA 75 EISE TEE 76 Compatibility with previous VETSIONS EE 77 Manal IB Fs REN 77 SVIMDOIS ee ee EE 78 2 Spac Start 2012 incremental FAQ GING EE 78 POSON elle Le RE 78 Free Fagging WEE EE 79 Se EE 79 E A DS ne ee ee 80 Aere Eder OSI OM aaa 80 See HE doit iia tai 80 COSC HOM EE 81 Cross in line Start and Destination ss ia 81 le 82 A A IN 82 Dialog WIC OWS Ste US ad A A a 82 Wire and Termina NUMIDCTS ia aa 83 oe OA icseistanet aai 83 Wie Propecia dde dido codos suda 84 TE MINA ele 84 Color Management ads 84 POV ANCE Opos A armistice eg ene ladeeio tae 85 AUTORIZA NUDO o 87 E o AAA IA 87 henminal and CONT CCOO Re 88 Reg Uer DOCK EE 90 SR ee EE 91 FAC VISION OO CII E 91 FUNCUON JOJON O Meme ine taa a E AE EA ne AY AAA AE AAA AAA AAA 92 AS PANEL SETTING titi 93 ENEE EE ii ar ii isis 94 POWer Feed Reis ici A A ib 96 Ai GON NES TONS e S e o E e ln e Meee 97 Connec OM Fa UIT AAN A O A eae es 99 AO DRAWING ERT 100 SIMOICTCCO ASPE QUI GE 100 Cate Connel ONS eebe 100 e GO Qe o1 6 IONO oaa Ree aA Peo PSO AE EA nt E 101 SS A ET tinea ic cauteiia sea eacaiaita T EE 101 4 7 GOMPONENT REFERENCE S ajrni EE EE 102 Parent reterence WINS ANDO name lt a E dao tetas 103 USE CUINA til datada 103 A A a Bde Ried nida vied st da livbntdaduied ah dadisinidaduied
141. ER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER A E AA EE E SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS SIRIUS mr Internal code Notes Family 4414TORI COMBIN SE Number of components 44 Each database is a file with Amw extension each one can contain an infinite number of manufacturers The exampleof the previous figure shows the 3 level structure of a database e Manufacturer is a folder that contains an unlimited number of families e Family is a group that contains an unlimited number of codes e Code is that of the catalogue with the corresponding description and commercial data of the article Clicking with the right hand mouse button on Manufacturer Family and Codes the operations for Insertion Deletion and
142. ES mee shown D pt ege The function shows the provisory straight H 53l es path that joins the two symbols selected 07164 ZN d 2 pt After selecting START and DESTINATION the section reference window opens automatically 282 Spac Start 2012 d Then the INTersect and FINe End snap is activated to facilitate selection of the edges on the walls 3 point With A Cancel the 3 point is deleted if it has not been entered correctly Press Return to quit the selection of edges Select points along the walls ord Point Cancel lt points along the walls gt Return Select point for offset from wall 4th point Select point for offset from wall Return The 4 point defines where towards the inside or outside of the wall the section is to be drawn This is to ensure that it does not coincide with the lines of the wall Offset from wall increases readability of the diagram as it moves the section away from the wall Entering several points in succession it is possible to double triple etc the offset value distance with default value 5 To end the section press Return The command continues considering the previous destination symbol or point as start for a new section consecutive to the one that has just been drawn DESTINATION Select Element Section or Node Return for options To end the command definitively press Return and click on End The three dimensional view of the section
143. ETTEpiu With the selection of a code from the CORE ie Zeng database all the characteristics are Fa FOR 0 61 k 8 ENE ee shown in the respective fields and the FG OH 0 61k A50 G SETTEpiu ee SE el editing of any datum is updated in the list FG7OR 0 6 1k 3 25 G SETTEpiu pressing Edit FG7OR 0 61k 34 DN iu FG7OR O 6 1k Zb FGVOR 0 6 1k 3c10 PIRELLI FG OR 0 6 1 kV Manufacturer This contains the material manufacturer s name The same type of cable can be present several times in the database under different manufacturers Type This usually gives the codes to Standard CEl 20 27 and CEI UNEL 35011 which identify the constructional characteristics of the cable Formation Summarises the number of conductors for multipolar cables and their cross section a cable with 3 conductors all with cross section 1 5 mm has formation 3x1 5 Description This is normally provided by the manufacturer it identifies the possibilities of use Diameter This datum is provided by the cable manufacturer and the value is fundamental for calculating and dimensioning raceways see par 20 1 Category This represents the possibility to divide the cables into many families Division into groups is particularly effective for speeding up cable selection during the various operations 19 Cables 321 Cable categories Definition of the categories represents the possibility to divide the cable database into families to simplify consultation The categories
144. Element symbols in the figure require a specific configuration for pin marking For this to be possible the presence of Pin attributes is necessary The Sub element symbols provided with Pins receive the configuration of the relevant Parent we ha based on the Code in fact the Code indicates A the name of the Register Reference Symbol The register reference symbol contains the pin marking to be given on the Sub element Cross Reference without pin marking symbols Let s take a detailed look at the configuration of the various symbols that form the example Parents KA1 and Block pin configuration KA1 l x KA2 The pair of attributes PinA1 and valus PinB1 are configured with the values paisi A1 and A2 as shown in the dialog PIN window Value Al The configuration is changed by the E corresponding Prefix File see lt Delete En Symbol Configuration lt Change CL This configuration only concerns Symbol in exploded compilation of the Parent Symbol form and does not act on Sub element symbols _Cancel Sub elements KA1 and KA2 There is no configuration on the Sub element symbols The pair of attributes PinA1 and PinB1 are compiled on the basis of the contents of the Register Reference Symbol cross assigned through the Code in the Parent symbol PAG PAE 150 Spac Start 2012 Elements HL1 and On Element symbols the configuration is described
145. FINDER 60123048 is selected the function seeks if available the relevant technical documentation in file 60123048 doc or 60123048 pdf If more than one technical reports exist the function seeks and opens documents 60123048 01 doc 60123048 02 doc 60123048 03 doc etc up to a maximum of 20 documents If no technical report exists no file with the same name as the code a warning message is shown In the Spacdoc Err file in the user folder any unfound documents are listed The documents cannot be edited They can only be seen or sent directly to the printer with the same order they have in the Bill 176 Spac Start 2012 List by reference The components are sorted in alphabetical sequence according to the reference codes that form part of the same component macrocode are thus listed consecutively Terminals and connectors with any reference are always placed at the end of the list forming a group which is in turn in alphabetical order Let us consider the 7 components of the following figure divided in two different panels Panel F1 Macro GLICEO24 HL2 Pl 1 1 SHI DL1CE024 GROUPE SCHNEIDER LU 1 1 00070230 GAOUPE SCHNEIDER 1 Hebe 102 GAOUPE SCHNEIDER 1 SH2 DL1CE024 GAOUPE SCHNEIDER LU 1 1 eB eh esd GROUPE SCHNEIDER 1 B28E102 GAOUPE SCHNEIDER 1 MP Elka ELECO F1 3 Mi Elka ELECO QG d M2 EK ELEC QG 3 Sorting by Reference 6 columns of data 11 lines It is fundamental to note that the macrocodes
146. L NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL ERR iei T eh eh eh eh ek eh eck ech ek eh ech ll eh ek eh _ Change Retum Bk Elo Manufacturer Type TE 10716 0 NORMAL TE 10 16 70 NORMAL TE 16 25 0 NORMAL TE 16 25 D NORMAL TE SM NORMAL TE 35 50 D NORMAL EL EIK3 i NORMAL ELECO NORMAL se E A new scan proposes the lists changed previously only when the Update function has been used which is helpful for transferring the changed data from the file to the drawing i e replacing the values in the terminal symbols on the diagram Update is fundamental for making changed data coincide with those of a new scan If the changes saved are not given on the drawing with Update it is still possible to recover them with the next scan when the list of Terminal Blocks Saved and not Updated is presented selecting only those to be protected Explode REP repetitions The Edit of a terminal block that contains terminals with repetitions based on the REP attribute only for Rep value other than O and 1 causes the question Do you want to explode them Let us take for example a terminal with Rep 3 Yes The exploded terminal is represented in 3 lines the _ Rep Section Numi NumM NumO added ones are shown by the character a al 25 OV 18 OV al 25 DV 19 OV al 2 5 OV 20 OV No The terminal is represented in only 1 row ee A a 1 25 OV
147. LEMENTO EE 327 A II NI ee acts Ee 327 CG VF aie Barer oe O alte eae Aces pte ania 328 Mee GE 328 212 CHANGE ELEMENTS das 329 o lO 1 AAA N N wl tale decade we take lead wie ae anda ie ee eae ieee 329 MUITDIC TAVING NEJN eege eege eege 330 e Re eM CE A a a Re ET ee 331 21 REFERENCE INDEX EE 331 8 Spac Start 2012 2d ELEMENT Eeer 332 SL CHANGE DIMENSION maaa 332 21O ECEMENOE EE 333 A ERT 333 SEET ee 333 21 9 DISCONNECTED ELEMENTS O LOL 333 21 10 SERIES OF ELEMENTS cout nia 334 iere 334 OV TCO ele er EN o ee ee eee 335 22 REI Eege EE ici 337 22 1 VIEW MANAGEMENT 337 222 GORY INSTALLATION osorosnn osorno Tosen copan ano rco ranma oasis 340 22 INSTALA TION DIMENSION estas sais conil 341 2274 PREMISES DEVELOPMENT ae bere EE 342 22S le LEGEND tt te e ae eya tl 343 220 LAYING LEGEND nai eco ipod 344 22 7 PRINT PLANIMETRIC TO PDF sora ee 344 23 DILL OF MATERIA EE 345 231 MATERIAL ATABASE EE 345 2312 ASSOCIATE MATERIA ES oras innata ara ubicadas 345 Associate Materials Same Diockel seririsresnscnrnscneen ni a 347 0 A Ee 347 233 BLE MATERIA ES cutis alien E 348 E O lO dl ud COCO OO PR ted eae atta se eased dk cata hss be be eee E TT 349 COMPACT EEN 350 tee EE 350 EISE eeh 351 so E eege eege 352 EXA VW ee 352 Wi A O na St Reed aa ah 352 EE 353 SE EE 354 ZECANECO ii a eo e ir e 355 A O 355 24 2 GANECO POWER FEED ira 356 EE 357 NOW CCU sii ia dad 357 lei re 358 Hr eet rors er E rE erst rere 359 PEE EE 359 PA
148. LI ARNOCANALI ARNOCANALI ARNOCANALI ARNOCANALI ARNOCANALI ARNOCANALI Canale cablaggio 3030 F 4 5 Canale cablaggio 4030 F 4 5 Canale cablaggio 6230 F 4 5 Canale cablaggio 8030 F 4 5 Canale cablaggio 10030 F 4 5 Canale cablaggio 40x40 E 4 5 Canale cablaggio 640 F 4 5 Canale cablaggio 8040 F 4 5 Canale cablaggio 10040 F 4 5 Catalogue Code and its Description in addition to the dimension values press Add to insert new articles in the list only after completing all the fields required Canale cablaggio 4060 F 45 SU REISER ieii 5S To change the data of an already existing raceway press Change To delete an article from the list press Delete Component This is used to draw the dimensions of a component generic on the panel internal plate After setting or choosing the dimensions Base x Height x Depth press the Draw button and you will be asked Component insertion point Component reference KM1 type value The component insertion point is the middle one of the height on the left hand side of the rectangle This point has been chosen to facilitate insertion in axis on the guide of components of differing dimensions The function asks if you want to continue on a subsequent component of the same dimensions proposing the next insertion point automatically with Return lt RETURN gt Current point Offset between Components distance between components is used to set the inse
149. M Dati progetto i Eech ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM Lista fogli Ud ISPAC Automazione pdAWESEMPIO pdf ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM Alimentazione generale E ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM Alimentazioni ausiliarie ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM Motori ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM Circuiti di emergenza ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM Ausiliari 110 VAC ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM Comandi Tesys U ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM Yariatore di velocita ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM Ausiliari 24 YDC Percorso di creazione Anteprima O 00 y ont GO PA se Summary see par 3 1 All of the job order can be printed directly all sheets are automatically included in the list Alternatively the list of sheets to print can be customized and the sheets required can be selected from the various multisheets The following buttons operate on the multisheet sheet list Add To create a customized list of sheets to print select a multisheet and highlight the list of sheets it contains Click on the sheets required Press Add to include all the selected sheet numbers in the list of sheets to print Repeat the procedure for each multisheet in order to obtain a customized print list All All sheets in the selected multisheet are highlighted Press Add to include these in the print list Delete To delete previous selections The following buttons operate on the list of sheets to print Remove Removes selected sheets from the print list Clear Removes the entire list of sheets to be printed Press OK to save automatic
150. Manual 2 CAUTION The Automatic Referencing button is off only when there are repeated Parent symbol references operations continue pressing Parent reference with same name Manual 2 Pressing Manual Referencing you are asked to select the components to be changed EE x A list like the one in the figure is shown with the list of the references selected current and the list of the references proposed by the programme new If symbols are detected that do not have a prefix they are pointed out in the warning as for Automatic Referencing The new references proposed by the programme can be redefined by the operator Select the reference to be redefined type the new value in the space for User Reference and press Change New Reference Change Reference The new reference associated with the OK Ge Parent Symbol is stated also on the corresponding sub element symbols See Automatic 1 CAUTION Manual Referencing is the only tool for correctly changing the name of a group of components consecutively 104 Spac Start 2012 Incremental Tagging The symbol prefix is associated with an incremental value The new reference associated with the Parent Symbol is stated also on the corresponding sub element symbols The symbol C1031 is inserted on the drawing with the prefix KA configured in the Cei15 prefix file therefore the references will be
151. NICO EE 360 E O A E oer eee eT a etm 361 IMDONING data o CAMEO e a 361 ES CO IES e de ete Gale cue E deci 363 E ele EUA MD ra aabt 363 CICS E EE 363 dia H EN GEN 365 A AAA o A A cece ueanmatouect 365 26 2 e RE TEE 365 26 3 IMPORTING DATA TO LIT ES TAB us ina 368 2624 NPORT DEVICE EE 369 26 5 IMPORT ISOLUX e 370 ZOO IMPOR U1 SOM US RID EE 370 2TCUS TOMIZA TION Socia 371 ETB lee RE 371 List of Contents 9 AA EE ee 372 2 LS BSO MB sala 372 28 IIMBOLS AR dee Ee dee 373 20 15 YMBOL NEE 373 POR ANO So ee 373 ISE lee A A ale NS ae ede NG a 374 A A PP PI O E 374 E O O asemadssmaiccet 375 Eier 375 INSerion Scale EE 376 TPRETIMAESVIMDOIS UNIS T P AMP o ncaa orate ae 377 ADUS ee eae ea eels ee th actus ean ea re cade at tee Tact deta E Ee 377 BEE 377 26 2 OY MBO INSERT ION Si ie 378 TR AAA A A ane nn ee 378 SOI NOGO EE 379 A o SS 380 A a es eee 380 Froe WITS CIO ici E A ia NE er e MR ES e 381 SENOS ee al bt aia 381 OOO ete ee ee ee ee 382 Replace Elemen eniai a eli 382 Automatinio EEN 383 EE EE 384 ES E10 A SEAE E R A A ee 384 A ee WEE EE 384 A A O E suaae nici ui tat euaaeas 384 Selena te EE 385 Ch hangeJaving ee st llo nit 385 IND a 387 10 Spac Start 2012 1 Setup 1 1 Hardware and Software Requirements For 32 bit operating systems e AutoCAD Oem 2010 32 bit Hardware requirements e Personal computer processor Intel Pentium 4 or higher with technology SSE2 AMD Athlon or higher with technology
152. New button of the figure on the right the programme would propose NumM 4 or the consecutive value and Level 1 leaving in any case NumM 2 Level 2 available New Terminal A new terminal is created using the next NumM value following the last one used The value calculated is shown in the NumM window Mumbi Multiple terminals ao k Terminal number To create a new terminal with NumM not consecutive to the last one used the value required should be typed in the NumM window The list of available levels always and only refers to the currently used terminal block choosing a different terminal block the list is updated automatically with the new data If the list is frozen it means that you have chosen a terminal block for normal terminals Deleting level terminals forming part of a multiple terminal they are made available in the available levels list only repeating the command To change both the technical data and commercial characteristics it is necessary to use the specific Edit connector function of the Terminal Block and Connector Management command see par 6 3 O The creation of a mixed terminal block containing both normal terminals and multiple terminals is not allowed CAUTION If the New button View those available setting and the used terminals list are frozen this means that the currently used terminal block does not allow the insertion of multiple terminals 6 Terminals and
153. OK 8 Bill of Materials e 167 Associating filters T Associate filter AE Associates a filter an already defined one to one or more components in the materials Select filter to associate to selected components database rc pelea The component s are selected Data 1 Data 2 i SH Accezzor Interruttori fro m th e database fi rst the n E E Associate Filter is selected from the contextual menu that pops up ih EE when having right clicked on the erate potes selected component s ae EE GF imagnetotemiciDiferenziali 1 32 gt fl Magnetotermici Differenziali 40 1254 oF BlocchiDifferenziali 100 32004 UE Salvamotaori S F Codes linked to filters are 601261100010 RELE INDUSTRIALE DA INNESTO 110 AC 104 2 Ge Mar 0010 indicated by a symbol bearing an 5601201100020 RELE INDUSTRIALE DA INNESTO 110 4C 104 2 Se Ma 0020 F as in the figure 5601281100030 RELE INDUSTRIALE DA INNESTO 110V 4C 108 2 Ge Mat 0030 Use the same procedure but clicking on Delete the link between filter and selected components to disassociate component s from a filter Identifies a single material code Identifies a single material code paired to a Filter Apply filter All database components that do not correspond to a filters characteristics are not displayed when a filter is applied This simplifies a search to within a determined category of items T Applica filtro Bb Filter linked t
154. PLC 34 OVPLC The terminals are always drawn consecutively to one 4 ze OVPLC 3 OVPLE another in the terminal block It is not possible to 1 25 OVPLC 36 OVPLC change the quantity except directly on the drawing essential O To make the explosion of terminals definitive answering Yes execution of the Update function is 6 Terminals and Connectors 131 Change terminal Repetitions Counted on the basis of the contents of the Rep attribute present in every terminal Rep empty 1 This value can be changed on the drawing using the AutoCAD Ddatte command A terminal with Rep 2 will be drawn in the terminal block twice with a connection jumper between the two automatically NumM If only one terminal is selected the NumM value terminal number is viewed and changed it is possible to assign the same NumM value to two or more terminals to be able to view them consecutively Manufacturer Selecting only one terminal from the list the model is shown To assign a new Type model to the terminal or to all the selected terminals press Change Type Cross section De treading of Manufacture Type and Cross Section is reliable only when ust one terminal is selected from the list Usage Usage is a value that can be assigned optionally to the terminal to represent its destination see 6 4 Usage lt is possible to attribute a new usage value simultaneously for all the terminals selected pressing Change Values Input n
155. ROVA name composed of the prefix CADY_ followed by the name of the project The room origin point is stored in this Layer so it is essential to save the drawing to subsequently obtain importation of the appliances placed by the LITESTAR programme The drawing can be saved freely with any name and in any directory It is now possible to import the data to LiteStar environment to carry out the lighting engineering calculation O It is of fundamental importance for the points to be entered with counter clockwise direction of rotation 26 LiteSTAR 367 26 3 Importing data to LiteStar To import data from the planimetry stored in the Project name Run file it is necessary to have called the calculation programme following the instructions for use manual of the product and open a new job selecting the corresponding run file 2 xj The data from the planimetry are imported immediately It is now necessary to position the devices manually or automatically then check the results of the lighting engineering calculation Documenti NOTE It is advisable to refer to the specific instructions for use of the product Risorse del co lt Nome file Edificio Artigianale Aun Rizorse di rete ee Tipo file RUN files ze Annulla we From the Devices command menu select the Add devices automatically command then from the photometric database access the database of the Indoor devices and select those
156. Retum blk Catego Doubl 1 25 NO2 50 NORMAL 2 5 E In practice it works in the same way as already described previously for 12 ic Edit terminal block with a 2 i 2 5 3 E0 5 NO2 50 NORMAL difference 7 NO2 50 NORMAL i A 1 NORMAL every terminal occupies the same number of rows of the list as the number of its levels or shelves Save allows you to save on file the changes made for each terminal block A new scan proposes the lists changed previously only when the Update Meet Usage function has been used which is _ Change Retum Bk 1 un Input nst helpful for transferring the changed a SE data from the file to the drawing e Change type gt Manufacturer Type Secon ioe replacing the values in the terminal NORMAL i NORMAL symbols on the diagram NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL Update is fundamental for making NORMAL NORMAL changed data coincide with those of a new scan If the changes saved are not given on the drawing with Update it is still possible to recover them with the next scan when the list of Terminal Blocks Saved and not Updated is presented selecting only those to be protected Change terminal If only one terminal is selected the value of NumM terminal number is viewed and changed on this subject it is wise to remember that Spac Start graphically manages multiple terminals subdividing them into various terminals In practice every shelf level of the multiple terminal is drawn
157. S P while Destination j Af ones have the attribute PRES A c4 The name of return symbols must have the prefix _ALIM At Power Feed Returns or _SIGN Connection Returns 13 Return symbols are also blocks of arrows for interrupted l At mechanical connections PE A block that comprises the following series of attributes A Af is considered as a Return symbol Example of Start returns Label Default Type Description Signal Name of the wire or power feed that is returned Pres PorA IP Identifies whether the return is for Start or Destination Line Reference associated with the return branch Reg P Registers the connection position Note the data marked with are examples Type P Preassign Type l Invisible Signal During insertion of the block on the drawing the SIGNAL attribute requires as value the wire or power feed number during the Cross Reference procedure the start arrows are registered with the destination arrows and vice versa that have the same value as the attribute Pres The PRES attribute is fundamental as it assigns the start P or destination A return symbol definition to the block Line The LINE attribute is specific for the return symbols category It is used to separate the path of two power feeds or wires that have the same number or better to distinguish two or more start arrows that have the same signal a value 21 Example power feed number 100 must serve four usages
158. S a lat 210 EENHEETEN 210 SVIMDOIS Fushputon DN o o 210 A A O A 211 1MGUSTOMIZATIO N Sit 213 ABU SY NA OES dota a iaa ais 213 AZ MBEK MACRO MB ea 215 TA BEKR GIBRAR A asain damn seinen dams aa aa T 216 19 SYMBOLS E 217 15 1 EE Eeer ees 217 PE A o Ree Eee 218 Register Reference SyMDOl coconccccccnococonoccnnococonooonnononononnonononnononononnnnononnnonnnnonarnnnnononaninnonones 220 SUD CICMCIE SVINDOI ess A EEEE EEEN 222 Pres identification for Sub element symbols cccccsssseeeccceeeeeeeecceeusececceeaeeeecsseaueeeeessaaseeeesssaseeees 223 EIEIO ESV ee EE 224 FACT SV INDO ee 225 PICCESSOLY ae e 226 TEMA DO e ro od deceo does 226 A PL ee nnn Retry Cet aoe Ce SOLE NN er een re Nm ee ema 228 Terminal eieiei MIO EE EE 229 15 2 SY MBOLAGRER TION Cicero eileen A o e meetin 230 EE 230 A RO 230 AADUN q o dius 231 A eebe EE 231 SS YMBOLN SERTION EE 232 EE ere 233 SUD CICIMMICRT SVITIOO 2 A A A A a elena 235 EIEMONE SY INDO EE 236 Ee 237 DoS 237 EEN 238 CIOE ii 238 A A A E A A Senn 238 lei 239 15 5 ENEE 240 15 6 EAST USED SYMBOUS cuina iii 240 Le e uta ll e a e a te OS 241 TAN e 241 EXPO dala Nom Flanm y A A A A A AA A A AA 242 IMPORT Gala TO CANO id oesbictos 242 EXDONING Cala Non CINC eo 243 16 2 IMPORT SINGLE FEED DIAGRAMA a 243 Ren Bel e 244 Direct Impor TEO TAI Vinci ire ion Sneha en Stich sen ads 244 6 Spac Start 2012 PLANIMETRIC DIAGbRAM ees RERREE NEE RE Een 240 I1GENERAEGOMMAND Sita 247 EENS
159. S1 XS3 XS11 etc With this comnand it is possible to reorganise the tags and make them consecutive The function requests Select an Element An element must be selected to find the prefix to be reorganised from the symbol for example clicking a Socket symbol obtains the retagging of all the components on the drawing with the same prefix XS In the case of planimetries made using the Copy Installation command see par 22 2 the function shows the prefixes divided by group The example in the figure shows the possibility of tagging only the XS Sockets obtained with the copy made to draw the installation in AULA1 the prefix obtained by copying is written between square brackets To reorganise all the tags regardless of the copy prefix it is necessary to firstly use the Replace Value command to assign the same name to all the symbols required e g XS100 21 5 Change dimension The dimension with which the symbols are inserted on the drawing is set with the Symbols Scale in the initial stage by the 17 1 Installation SETTINGS function This change operation is therefore used when you want to change the scale of a drawing already partially or completely developed All the blocks stored with file name beginning with the prefix IMP AVE and IBLK are scaled The function requests Current scale 5 New scale type the new value 7 5 The current scale value is taken from the one s
160. SH1 and SH2 are listed consecutively and the uncoded elements HL1 and HL2 are placed at the top of the list The terminals total of 9 at the bottom of the list are subdivided by terminal blocks therefore 3 groups of 3 O List sorting by Reference is normally the mostly used system List by Panel and Reference The components are grouped according to the panel they belong to then sorted according to reference in alphabetical sequence HL2 H 1 MP EIK3 ELECO Pl 3 SH 011CE024 GROUPE SCHNEIDER Ur 1 1 Bm 0233 GROUPE SCHNEIDER 1 B2BE102 GROUP SCHNEIDER 1 DH DLICEO24 GROUPE SCHNEIDER OG 1 l MB Sh 1 0299 GROUPE SCHNEIDER 1 62BE102 GROUPE SCHNEIDER 1 Mi Elk ELECO PE a Miz EIK3 ELECO OG 3 Sorting by Panel Reference 6 columns of data 11 lines 8 Bill of Materials 177 List by Type The components are firstly grouped according to the Manufacturer and then sorted _ in alphabetical sequence according to the code codes that form part of the same component macrocode are not listed consecutively HLZ E 1 1 EIK ELECO M1 JG 1 1 M1 06 1 1 MI OG 1 1 Me OG 1 1 Me Ur 1 1 Me OG 1 1 MP EI 1 1 MP Pi 1 1 MP Hi 1 1 DLILED24 GROUPE SCHNEIDER SH OG 1 1 5H2 OG 1 1 22M 10033 GROUPE SCHNEIDER SH1 Ui 1 1 SH2 JG 1 1 82BE 102 GROUPE SCHNEIDER 5H 1 OG 1 1 5H2 dG 1 1 Sorting by Type 6 columns of data 17 lines It is fundamental to note that the macrocodes SH1 and SH2 are not listed consecutively and the uncoded el
161. SSE2 e Video board resolution 1024x768 minimum with 16 8 million colours e RAM Memory 2 GB e DVD reader for installation e USB port for a hardware protection key Optional Hardware e Modem or Internet access used only for on line update 32 bit Software configuration Administrator access is necessary for installation purposes Authorisations of the domain administrator are not necessary For information apply to the system administrator e Operating system Windows XP 32bit Service Pack 3 or higher Windows Vista 32bit Service Pack 1 or higher Windows 7 32 bit e Web Browser Microsoft O Internet Explorer 7 0 or later For 64 bit operating system Installation on Windows 98 ME NT 4 0 2000 and 2003 Server operating systems is not allowed 1 Setup 11 For 64 bit operating systems e AutoCAD Oem 2010 64 bit Hardware requirements e Personal computer processor Intel Pentium 4 or higher with support Intel EM64T and technology SSE2 Intel Xeon or higher with support Intel EM64T and technology SSE2 AMD Athlon or higher with technology SSE2 AMD Opteron or higher with technology SSE2 e Video board resolution 1024x768 minimum with 16 8 million colours e RAM Memory 2 GB recommended 4 GB e DVD reader for installation e USB port for a hardware protection key Optional Hardware e Modem or Internet access used only for on line update
162. Start 2012 4 General commande 4 1 Setting This command starts automatically when New Multi sheet is accessed CONFIGURATION xj The command is called from the keyboard typing IMPOST SET The title block see par 3 18 if already present on the drawing on sheet 0 can be updated with the data of the customer associated with the job order see par 2 5 activating Update Title Block If it is the first time the drawing is accessed the title block is inserted enabling Insert Title Block the one set based on the Customer E Insert If the two items are off the title block data must be updated manually no Customer Singlefeed Library IEC 750 1 2 char GEES Wires Feeds Prefixes LANGE The wire pitch and color acts on the operation of the wire connection commands see par 4 5 the color of the wires is also adopted as Dalayer color of all the pages of the multi sheet except sheet 0 of the Title block The feed pitch and color are variable that act on the feed drawing commands see par 4 4 the default color is 1 red This allows you to choose the Prefixes database that contains the symbols library configuration this configuration of the prefixes is of fundamental importance with regard to symbol insertion operations on the drawing the contents of the database can be viewed from Symbol Configuration see par 4 2 4 General commands 67 4 2 S
163. Start graphic operations see par 28 2 The box is also used to standardise the insertion point on all the symbols Normally the symbols are positioned on the drawing with reference on the middle point of the top line of the box CAUTION some symbols are an exception to this rule These are the symbols for Fluorescent tubes Watertight ceiling lamps and Watertight wall mounting lamps and those symbols that require insertion on the drawing proportionately with its scale 28 Symbols e 375 Insertion Scale When a symbol is inserted on the drawing see par 28 2 it is automatically enlarged to be visible on the drawing according to the Symbols scale setting NOTE These blocks are inserted on the planimetry on the basis of the Symbols Scale factor set with 17 1 Installation SETTINGS Caution some symbols are an exception to this rule These are the symbols for Fluorescent tubes Watertight ceiling lamps and Watertight wall mounting lamps and those symbols that require insertion on the drawing proportionately with its scale NOTE The insertion of Fluorescent tubes and Watertight ceiling lamps blocks takes place proportionately on the planimetry on the basis of the drawing scale factor as for furnishing symbols set with 17 1 Installation SETTINGS The scale with which the symbol is inserted on the drawing symbols scale or drawing scale is decided in
164. The Laying modes is the system with which the sections are drawn The choice of the most correct system based on the type of connection to be made allows optimisation of the drafting of the drawing considerably saving time Pressing Default all the current parameters are stored to be re proposed as such the next time the function is used The main Laying modes are e Free e Wall e Ceiling e Floor The accessory utilities to the Laying modes are e Duplicate section e Join sections e Break sections After choosing the mode required press the Laying button or double click on the item itself the function continues on the drawing with the identification of the points for drafting the path 18 Sections e 273 The Free laying mode requests the following points in sequence START Select Element Section or Node Return for options Next point Next point DESTINATION Select Element Section or Node Return for options The Wall Ceiling and Floor laying modes request the following points in sequence START Select Element Section or Node Return for options DESTINATION Select Element Section or Node Return for options For all modes once the Section destination point has been established the dialog window is shown for specifying the data Installation TRS ILLUMINAZIONE New Reference ILLUMINAZIONE E DIELECTRIX 25 220 TUBO PROT RIGIDO AUTOES RK15 20 Diam 20 mm No
165. The configuration of the Y Coordinate corresponds to the position of the components as shown in the example figures Importazione da CANECO Coordinate r Barratura Protezione Polarita COATI10 1 Carichi Scelta Tabella Fartenza Ordine di rientra Default Annulla 125 110 SU 30 i E A Lundnachre appartanente Areadone ago Frese d corrente Automatic importing of the single feed diagram must take place in association with the use of Master title single feed blocks suitable for the Tables Circuits 10 accessed with Table Selection Return Sequence the available ones are The drawing takes place with start from the current sheet and continuing when necessary on the following ones The layout of the circuits takes place according to two possible priorities From Caneco This way the various circuits are drawn with the same layout visible in Caneco Alphanumeric The circuits are drawn in alphabetical order according to the reference NOTE Complete importation does not exclude the possibility of making later changes and customizations using the normal drawing tools Direct Import from Planimetry The Import Single feed Diagram function uses the files with IMP extension in the current job order folder If you do not possess the Caneco calculation software or when only the graphic layout of the drawing is needed without calculations it is po
166. U NO V K 1x1 5 GNYE NO W 1x1 5 GY c NO V K Tx2 5 BN gt NOFV K 1x25 BU MUAR Tx2 5 GNYE NO7W K 1x6 BK c NO7W K ep BN ce NOW ep BU e NOW Tb GNYE e NO V K Tb GY TUBO PIEGH AUTOEST FK9 40 TUBO PROT RIGIDO AUTOES RK15 20 TUBO PROT RIGIDO AUTOES RK15 50 All the elements e marked with 3 asterisks are uncoded and grouped together with a single total quantity 23 Bill of Materials e 349 Manufacturer Description e IMP082 s Cassetta di connessionederivazione da incas 2 In this example of the figure IMP082 is not a material code but the name of the dwg file of the symbol not associated with any material The cables c are quantified separately when they have been attributed a color If cables are laid on the drawing not differentiated by color color or Nd they are quantified only on the basis of the type and cross section recommended condition The raceways t marked with 3 asterisks are uncoded and the length of undimensioned channels is added in the same quantity Compact View With compact view the References of the components e are not indicated it is therefore possible to bring together all the identical codes in the same quantity The uncoded elements without Code and Manufacturer marked with 3 asterisks are grouped at the top of the list The result of this list can be drawn in Table or extracted into a CSV File Extended View With non compact view the Referen
167. UM EMERG 139m NO7WK 1x1 5 BK PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM 450 750V GENERALE 4m c NO V K 1x1 5 BN PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM 45077530V GENERALE 54 6m NOW 1x1 5 BU PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM AH ZO GENERALE e The elements e that have the same code but belong to different Zones are not consecutive e The cables c of the same type and color but belong to different Installation families are quantified separately and therefore are not consecutive e The raceways t that have the same code but belong to different Installation families are not consecutive 23 Bill of Materials 351 Compact View With_compact view the References of the components e are not indicated it is therefore possible to bring together all the identical codes in the same quantity of the same zone The uncoded elements without Code and Manufacturer marked with 3 asterisks are grouped at the top of the list of each Zone The result of this list can be drawn in Table or extracted into a CSV File Extended View With non compact view the References of the components e are also indicated therefore each symbol represents a line of list and it is not possible to bring together all the identical codes in the same quantity The uncoded elements without Code and Manufacturer marked with 3 asterisks are placed at the top of the list of each Zone The result of this list can be drawn in Table or extracted into a CSV File The differences between compact and extended
168. UNE 247 A eclectic eal Ate ca Matec tees atta Aa tea gaat Nt 247 Squaring Title Blocke enee 249 d EE 250 NEW EDFA WIIG siti sss Bae salle cde sae A AAA A AA A AA AA A A AAA 250 EXISTING DAWN O suso O ei ici aisl ia 250 M2SYMBOL MR e E EE 251 D lapase ASSOCIANO E 252 TAS ALE ebe 253 le ee EE 254 A o A i eng he ae eae ae tial reso a a Sain 254 1 7 ee E EE 255 EE 255 17 9 BEAMS rotaria a a a coin 256 16 DOORS EE 257 Ed 259 E ere EE 261 17 8 WALE SPACE AND LIFT TS a 262 17 9 RECESSESANDPILASTER STRIP 262 ANO BUILDING TALITY lali 263 Doors te WINCOWS UNIV A A A A A AAA 263 ere ANS A A A A actu paste NANA 263 A A daen aan ioctl inet aes 263 View Eege 263 TEE r cates eva ca uneven tabi van b an 263 ees GAY GIE NEF e E EEN 264 AZ TONS H Te 264 RAS ZONE MANAGE MENT iaa 265 IE Degree Ol DTO TE CHOIR ni E E AA ER E E 266 IATA VIEW ica 267 El E E AO RO eT Ae Re A RT Pee ee Pn PRE T A Paar ey ee a EE ee eae eee 267 ELA EE 267 LO A PE DES E RE A nS aT AA E en eee art eer Te ree 267 AOC E 267 ae WE VOL E EE 268 elef Ee e E 268 reien Vai E cus RA AS A AS A AAA AAA AA AS 269 FORCE VNC A A A Sain aca al nate A OER 270 ADAN WIAR Trana Pa EE 270 IMPON AIDU OS oo rir EE E AO E E E EE E O A 270 EXPO eh 271 19 eng el LE 273 E PP EE 273 lee Ee 275 Le E 279 LMI MOOCS E 280 L Wall passing to ue Bel iia 282 2 Gelling irom Wallto clemencia 284 3 Floor from wall to wall passing to laying begabt 286 EE 288 Sn sia dasuoentelbonacataaats
169. Unloading All the pages power and auxiliary that concern the unloading circuits Etc Example of subdivision into classes by type of drawing Sheet0 Customized master title blocks to be inserted on sheets 0 Distribution Power supply distribution sheets Power Sheets with motor starting and power in general Auxiliary Auxiliary circuits and Plc diagrams Single feed Single feed diagrams Etc 50 Spac Start 2012 3 9 Enter Stored Sheets The Enter Sheets command is used to access the stored sheets database to be able to call them up and insert them on the work sheets indicated INSERT stored Sheets xj Selecting the sheet on the list Classification Descriptio allows you to preview its POWER FEED General power feed contents POWER FEED Aucdliary power feed POWER Moto AUXILIARY 110V ste Insertion in the page takes Green i place in the same position of Output type 1 origin The Explode on sheet option allows the automatic explosion on the current block of the stored sheet In practice the 3 10 Explode command IS performed automatically Pressing Insert the page selected is inserted directly on the current sheet Summary see par 3 1 To insert a stored sheet Associate Remove Association 1 Select the sheet concerned from the list of stored sheets 2 Select the page on which you want to insert it Connection between the two takes place pressing the Associate button and the fun
170. a local macrocode H componente 552 menuta bigane abbinato al codes Pressing Overwrite the VIMAR new data replace the 166 existing ones INTERR 2P 16406 The manufacturer s logo is present only where applicable Iinpolszione de malesale AWE 45810 INTERRUTTORE BIPOLARE INTERROUTITOR Agur Armilla It is possible to re use the codes stored with the previous operations taking them from the Previous codes list For every symbol selected it is necessary to confirm with Add or Overwrite Cancel allows you to go on to the next symbol To completely cancel the operation press Cancel the same number of times as the number of symbols selected When a symbol is inserted on the drawing the Manufacturer and Type data are normally empty only when the PRI file see 17 2 Symbol SETTINGS has not been customized while Description generically gives the default datum contained in the symbol The Associate materials operation Database i E can be carried out also during COSTRUTTORE Po insertion of the symbols on the drawing pressing the Database n ES i button DESCRIZIONE Component not coded Associate Materials pressing Database of a single Code inserts the following 3 data of the figure The generic description of the component has been replaced with COSTRUTTORE SIEMENS that of the material chosen Database TIPO 356 1118 Pressing Database several times it is possible to u
171. a Squaring field to configure a Planimetric Master Title Block 4 Press on Associate to access the specific window figure select a datum available from the Fields list then select the master title block to be associated from the Tag list to confirm press Associate Title block MASTER The association work is considered complete when one of the two lists Customer WTO SEES O permi gt These data are stored in the Associate Tag file present in the Customer Libraries folder If the attributes present in the Master es Title Block symbol are changed this configuration must be updated in the same way Example of Master Title Block attributes Association The association remains valid for the subsequent Customers that use the same title block 5 At the end of the Fields Tag association operation you go back to the main window Contents Associated tag Customer Title block COMMESSA IMPIANTO1 NOME FILE IMPIANTO2 DISEGNATORE 34 Spac Start 2012 Check that the Fields Tag association carried out in point 4 is correct Pressing Save the new customer is stored in the Clienti Dat Customers Dat file in the Libraries Customers folder Fields It is possible to insert new values in the Fields List This becomes necessary when Tags that have not been associated are available lf you intend to compile several attributes of the master title block directly at this stage rather than compile
172. able one time by time IMPOO2E Let us take as example the insertion of a 10 16A Socket taken from the commands menu of Installation Catalogue Cat IMP Clicking only once on the symbol figure its description is shown Clicking twice proceeds with insertion of the symbol Select Insertion point Wall Node Section or Element Enter for options Insertion point Hement features IMP002B Venez EN EJ GE Database 1 Ge gt After indicating the insertion point on the drawing the inclination is requested If the F8 button Ortho is active it is possible to choose only orthogonal positions To be able to indicate positions with intermediate inclinations F8 should be deactivated or type the required value from the keyboard Angle of rotation lt 45 gt 90 Any angle of rotation must then be confirmed with lt Enter gt After choosing the symbol position and rotation the IMP002B Elements features window is shown On the basis of the configuration set in 17 2 Symbol SETTINGS both the most frequently used tag and the 3 laying height values are proposed The material data are shown automatically only when when they are configured in the settings default see par 17 2 in other cases they need to be typed manually or pressing Database see par 23 2 with the button the stored values are consulted with Clear the 3 fields related with the material are cleared The Zone
173. act FS registered as Normal H On the drawing there are transfer contacts associated with Parents whose Code does not envisage association but only for open and closed SC 1 2 se J6 contacts Registration takes place as closed contact with the addition of sc Caution Open Contact FAP or FT registered as Normal Caution Closed Contact FCP registered as Normal lt normally occurs with the use of generic references REF1 REF1_44 REF1_22 REF2 REF3 etc or with incorrect References that do not envisage the association of power contacts Registration takes place as normal open and closed contact not power contact 7 Cross Reference 155 27 Error No transfers in Parent Code This control is active only when processing with Pin marking On the drawing there is a transfer contact associated with a Parent symbol that does not envisage its registration The problem is solved associating a new Contactor or Head without intervening graphically on the drawing for example 2SC 3SC etc Without Pin marking this Error message changes to Caution Transfer Contact registered as Normal see point 26 28 Error Reference with error in Pins This control is active only when processing with Pin marking The register reference in question has empty Pin attributes Only one without number or with repeated Pin numbers will suffice in these cases the block must be reviewed It normally occurs with the use of generic
174. actice the opposite operation to Link elements mentioned previously O Elements can be linked and disconnected using 19 4 Disconnected cables 320 Spac Start 2012 19 4 Disconnected cables This command lists the cables which upstream or downstream have no connected element The connection between cable and component is obtained during Cable Laying see par 19 1 when the Select elements option is active or with the Modify Cables command see par 19 3 where the Connect and Disconnect buttons are present This association is a purely optional datum for the programme and you are advised to perform this operation only when it is strictly necessary to complete the compilation of the Cable List see par 19 2 19 5 Cable database The configuration opens with the cable database stored in the L cavi txt file in the Libraries Databases folder This database is used during cable laying and change operations To insert a new code in the database it is essential to firstly type the Manufacturer Type Formation and Description then indicate its Diameter outside and lastly associate it with a Category chosen among those available I With Add the new code is stored in the 3 list FG OH 0 6 1k 1x240 GS FG7OR O 6 1k 1300 G SETTEpiu e Araki ee Sen With Delete the code selected from the FGVOR 0 61k Ach G S iu ode oe pepe LL cl list is deleted FG OH O 6 1k e G SETTEpiu i FG7OR 0 6 1k 2x6 G S
175. age and windows The item Threshold height becomes sill only when proceeding with the drawing of windows Porta ad un battente Windows door frame width Top height D Altezza Soglia The drawing of a wall is obtained with the entry of 3 points the first on the Material for Start Render wall where the door is to be drawn the eg second indicates the direction of the door rh or Ih for horizontal walls top or bottom for vertical ones the third is Dimensions cm Layer SERRAMENTI the hinge point START ae See 17 10 Building Utility The function requests Select a point on the wall lt Enter Quit gt point 1 Distance from edge in cm lt 47 5 gt X change edge 40 type the precise distance e g from 47 5 to 40 Select the wall lines to be cut point 2 Hinge point or Exit point 3 Select a point on the wall lt Enter Quit gt Enter to quit In the example of the first figure let us suppose we want 1 point 2 point a to insert the door at the SC precise distance of 40 cm ae SS measured in relation to the left edge of the wall gt y D OG The 1st point has been I point 1 entered at a distance of 47 5 cm for this reason it has been necessary to rectify the correct measurement through the keyboard 3 point 3 point The 2nd point positioned more to the left with respect to the 1st is used when the distance Mg 70 from the right edge
176. ained in the Available fields is information which pressing Add is inserted in the Output fields to represent a column of the table Each Tag possesses two variables the width and the column title which can be changed by pressing the Edit button ix Field Title fone Type Description Manufacturer No Sheet There 1 1B Depending on the type of sorting selected Type or Zone the parameters for drawing the table vary according to requirements The compact view corresponds to a lower number of available fields Number of Lines Texts Height Titles Height Table Width Table Height Standard This value is used to split the table in several parts also on different sheets because after completion of the maximum number of lines a new insertion point or continuation on the next sheet is requested This is the height of all the texts contained in the table This parameter affects the height of each line proportionately thus the total height of the table This is the height of the column titles This parameter affects the calculation of the total height of the table This is the total sum of the widths assigned to each output field The size is expressed in millimetres This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Width to avoid overstepping the margins of the master title block with the table On the basis of the maximum number of lines foreseen and the height of the texts the maxim
177. al distribution all the junction boxes are reached then from every box the connection to all the usages and light spots is completed This step must be repeated the same number of times as the number of installations to be drawn Power Audio Tv Alarm etc 1 Wall passing to laying height This laying type allows you to select the edges of the walls to specify the section path The laying height is indicated by the user The height of the start and destination are taken automatically with the selection of the linked components the upward and downward paths are therefore calculated according to the difference between the laying height and that of the components selected 2 Ceiling from wall to element This laying type allows you to define the section without indicating any laying height and the values are taken from the start and destination elements The upward and downward paths are therefore calculated according to the difference between the heights of the components selected 3 Floor from wall to wall passing to laying height This laying type allows you to select any point to specify the section path The laying height is indicated by the user The height of the start and destination are taken automatically with the selection of the linked components the upward and downward paths are therefore calculated according to the difference between the laying height and that of th
178. allows you to immediately see the last list of the numbers without having to repeat the search on the job order data Please note that the numbers marked with an asterisk are repeated For example for the Repeated ones where only a filter from the total list is required Use Last List is Used to save the time of a new process Use Last List allows you to immediately see again the last list of numbers sorted in a different way without having to repeat the search on the job order data The lists can be sorted in two ways Logical In the list priority is given to the characters numbers then numbers associated with characters Alphabetical In the list priority is given to the numbers then numbers associated with characters and lastly characters sequence of set of Ascii characters Note the numbers marked with an asterisk are the repeated ones For every Sheet number indication after the first one at least one repetition exists 112 Spac Start 2012 5 4 Copy Wire No Normally Wire Numbering inserts on the drawing only one number for each wire or potential even when the wire is drawn with several segments and branches This command copies the wire number on the segments selected or on the whole branch Insert Numbers this command copies the wire number on the entities selected or on the branches indicated You can select each wire individually or use fence selections exactly as takes place for N
179. ally the drawing before printing O The sheet image management system is the same one described for the 3 2 Change Sheet command for obsolete or missing images use Sheet slides see par 3 18 3 Sheet Management e 57 Print page setup List of the page settings available for the automatic printing Print Sheets From DWG Stampante Impostazioni di pagina attive This is the listof the page settings O da DWG memorized on the drawing po mf It is possible to create or modify them with St te DWG To PDF pcs o Gegen f GE SE the AutoCAD command Page Settings Stile Management or pressing the button Stampa centraba Browse Area da estensioni Mon ruotato Customized This is the list of page settings memorized on SPAC The PDF DWF and JPG settings are fixed it is not possible to modify or delete the print driver associated It is only possible to edit pressing the button Browse To create a new customized setting select the item lt New gt from nuova the list DWG These are the Page Settings for the classic AutoCAD printing It is possible to copy the settings from one drawing to the other Customized These are the predefined settings for the printing in PDF DWF and JPG file formats These settings are memorized on the file FllePlotStd ini on the SPAC folder Program utente Settaggi To print with different line thickness it is possible to associ
180. ample of record that describes a code related with a Plug or Connector BRAND PLUG TYPE PIN Seq BLK M DESCR BLK R Example of record that describes a code related with an Accessory BRAND ACCESSORY TYPE nil nil DESCR BLK R 88 Spac Start 2012 Terminal This is the graphic symbol to be associated for every new code entered in the Block database There are some groups of specific symbols for the category of Plugs Connectors You can customize new terminal blocks storing them in the same folder as those already existing Spac Libraries Symbols The block name must be consecutive to the names already present _Mors n3 _Mors n4 etc for normal terminals for a maximum of 10 terminals NOTE Deleting a block compromises the viewing of the numerically subsequent ones This option allows you to set the type of terminal that will be used by the insert command it is advisable to use graphically different types of terminals but with the same visible data for every family of terminals Normal Section etc in fact it is possible to choose those with the same data Each dwg block corresponds with a Sld image slide with the same name as the block for viewing in the dialog window the purpose of the image is to show the visible attributes Return Block This serves to define a symbol to represent the terminal on the terminal block see par 6 3 The Return Blk is set with the name of a symbol existi
181. anelPrefix Suffix PanelPrefix 4 General commands 79 Returns The corresponding buttons are pressed to choose the symbols rotated in 4 different ways to be adopted as start and destination arrows The symbols are contained in the Spac ALIM_1 Libraries Symbols Returns folder There are 2 families of symbols e Power Feed Returns e Connection Returns 15 This allows you to configure the groups of return symbols to be used when drawing with the 4 4 Power feeds and 4 5 Connections functions You can customize new return symbols storing them in the same folder as those already existing The block name must have the prefix _ALIM for Power feeds and _ SIGN for Connections The difference between the returns of the two families is fundamental especially during Wire Numbering see par 5 1 The return symbols are independent of the symbols library currently used and of the choices made with 4 1 Setting Automatic Position The return is inserted automatically in the end point nearest to the point used to select the line When a horizontal wire or line is selected symbols configured with rotation 0 are used while symbols with 90 rotation are inserted when a vertical wire or line is selected z When a line is selected in the When a line is selected in the point nearest to the starting point point nearest to the end point left or top the start returns are right or botto
182. antity and type of cables that run along the sections previously drawn In practice Laying Section defines the path and type of raceway with Cable laying the conductors are inserted inside this operation is simplified by the fact that it is possible to organise databases of single cables or grouped into bundles I The function uses two databases i The bundle database see Fascio 3x 6 standard 1x6 par 19 6 in the first screen is helpful for quickly laying standard groups of cables Pressing the Cables button accesses the single cables database see par 19 5 ome helpful for working in free PIRELLI FROR 45077530V Wax B i P FROR 450 750V 36x25 B mode and for laying cables in EE Bk more particular situations Taking from the two databases the list of Cables and Bundles to lay is completed Then pressing y Farle 7 the Forward gt the function continues with selection of the sections in which the cables selected are to be inserted The lt Acquire button allows you to take the cables from a section that already contains them Use of the double database can be understood with a simple example Supposing we want to lay 3 cables NO7VK with cross section 1 5 there are two possibilities The first is to select the type of cable required from the Cables list then select its color and press 3 times on Insert once for each color chosen The second possibility is to select the group
183. anufacturer PIRELLI PIRELLI Pressing Change accesses the possibility to replace the cables with others in the database P and A represent the quantity of components connected at the start and destination of every cable Details All the data concerning the cable are shown for consulting including any components linked to it View This is useful for tracking the position of a section on the drawing In fact it is highlighted to facilitate its recognition The function requests Zoom Zoom End Return Pressing and you can control the enlargement while with Return the function is ended keeping the current zoom or restoring the initial view Delete The cable selected is removed Deletion becomes definitive only when the operation is closed Quitting the command with Cancel the cables are restored Link elements Pressing the Link button you are requested to select the components that are physically connected upstream and downstream to the cable in question These are purely optional data and you are advised to perform this operation only when it is strictly necessary to complete the compilation of the Cable List see par 19 2 P and A represent the quantity of components connected at the start and destination Disconnect elements Pressing the Disconnect button you are requested to select the components that are no longer physically connected upstream and downstream to the cable in question This is in pr
184. aper This limit is particularly helpful when needing to cut the sheet by hand after a plotting session The Limits layer is usually frozen when intending to address the drawing to the printer or when plotting is carried out using sheets of the correct size for the format You can customize new title blocks storing them in the same folder as those already existing Libraries Symbols The name of the symbol must keep the same prefix as the default ones Example A2 HORIZ _FirmName AO VERT_Customer etc lt Simulating Select this button to check the sheet format with the chosen scale and unit of measurement settings in a preview The Simulating option is particularly helpful when choosing the appropriate setting to be associated with an already existing planimetry Insert The drawing format origin coordinates are set in this area bottom left corner When possible for example on new drawings it is better to keep the origin at 0 0 lt Select Use this button to indicate by selecting the drawing format origin This coordinate point also corresponds with the title block insertion point Drawing Scale The drawing scale must be chosen in relation to the size of the planimetry in relation to the sheet format available It is very important to know that the scale acts on the limits of the sheet and of the title block and not on the graphic content for example Format A4 in millimetres with scale 1 1 corresponds to a
185. aracteristics segments The master title blocks are stored in the Spac Libraries Symbols folder each dwg block corresponds with a sld image slide with the same name for viewing in the dialog window You can customize new title blocks storing them in the same folder as those already existing The block name must be consecutive to the names already present Master4 Master5 etc for a maximum of 20 blocks the dialog window can show a max of 20 windows O Deleting a master compromises the viewing of the numerically subsequent ones CAUTION The Master3 title block is the only one among those available that is adequately sized to be able to draw single feed drawings Sheet slides The purpose of this utility is to automatically create the images slides that are used as preview by the Change Sheet Print Sheets Automatic Wire Numbering commands etc Selecting Sheets the slides are created related with the current multi sheet while with Multi sheet it is possible to generate the slides for the whole job order When this operation is performed a new subfolder called Slide is automatically created in the job order directory and it contains the files with sld extension The name of the files is formed of the multi sheet name separator _ and sheet number For example Layout_100 sld is the file that contains the slide of sheet 100 present in the multi sheet Layout dwg 66 Spac
186. are considered as Parent Let us take as example the insertion of the relay coil KM1 Clicking once on the symbol its description is shown Clicking twice proceeds with insertion EMT Symbol KM1 Insertion point If the insertion point is on a wire this is automatically broken by the precise dimension of the symbol If the insertion point is in empty space not on wire the function continues according to the configuration indicated in Preferences see par 4 2 Belonging to the Parent category brings up the following dialog window The name is composed according to the setting of the Symbols Tagging configuration see par 4 2 Main Panel It is however possible to type a free name The panel is the one set as default in 4 3 Panel Setting At this stage it is possible to choose another one among the references available in the list pressing Insertion of Parent symbol Pressing on these buttons increases or decreases the name by one unit The code represents the Register Reference Symbol that will be automatically inserted by the programme during Cross Reference processing see par 7 1 the default is set in Symbol Configuration see par 4 2 and stored in the currently used prefix file 15 Symbols e 233 The Db or Database button associates in the Manufacturer Type and Description fields the data stored with the materials database a preview of the d
187. ata can be consulted pressing Pressing on Contactors Auxiliary and Heads the various combinations can be composed Contactors Pressing this button accesses the display of all the contactor codes available in the Reference Cnt folder They are the references to be used for all types of coils Auxiliary Pressing this button accesses the display of all the auxiliary and additional contact codes available in the Reference Aux folder They are the references to be used for switches pushbuttons selectors etc Heads Pressing this button accesses the display of all the additional head codes to be coupled with Contactors or Auxiliary devices in the Reference Tsa folder Insert Turning off Insert Reference the register symbol of the contacts is not drawn the Reference reference code is in any case stored in the attribute in order to allow the Cross Reference to insert the reference symbol subsequently and only if necessary The choice is possible only when Cross in line of contacts is active see par 4 2 Cross Reference Then there are data concerning the material Manufacturer The default is set in Symbol Configuration and stored in the currently used prefix file It is possible either to type the material brand manually or press the Database button to associate the code stored in the material database see par 8 2 Type This is the material code catalogue code and the same procedure as describ
188. ate the default configuration SPAC Default Ctb Plot area Extension The valid print area is equivalent to the Zoom Extension command carried out on the drawing This is the most commonly used option in that it enables optimization of the print area on paper Limits The valid print area is equivalent to the Zoom All command applied to the drawing Screen The valid print area is equivalent to the current Zoom to the drawing WARNING The Windows setting cannot be used If the default setting is Windows printing is aborted after the first sheet 58 Spac Start 2012 Grouping This functionality is enabled only for the printing of PDF and DWF file formats It consents to print the schemes in a single file for the Job Order in one file for each multi sheet and in one file for single scheme Single Sheet The file name is managed automatically NameMultiSheet_NumberSheet pdf or dwf A Pdf or Dwf file is created automatically on the Job Order directory to store all the files created Multi Sheet The file name is managed automatically NameMultiSheet pdt o dwf A Pdf or Dwf file is created automatically on the Job Order directory to store all the files created Job Order The file name is proposed by default NameJobOrder paf or dwf The file name and directory could be modified by the user Indicating an existing file name it is possible to add the pages to the existing file or to overwrite the exi
189. aterials associated with the components including terminals and connectors that form part of the job order without performing any data import export Uncoded components are in any case contemplated in the list and it is not indispensable to take the material codes from the database as they can also be attributed using Edit symbol or XS see par 15 4 or using the AutoCAD Ddatte command The following attributes must be completed e TYPE contains the element catalogue code or macrocode Macrocode means the sum of several codes separated from one another by the semicolon character e MANUFACTURER contains the material brand In the presence of several codes macrocode they will all be associated with the same manufacturer To attribute different brands to the various codes it is necessary to indicate several manufacturer names separated from one another by the semicolon character with the same order as the codes in the TYPE attribute e DESCRIPTION contains a default description of the component In the presence of several codes macrocode they will all be associated with the same description To attribute different descriptions to the various codes it is necessary to indicate several descriptions separated from one another by the semicolon character with the same order as the codes in the TYPE attribute The list includes the symbols that have at least the NAME and TYPE atiributes even if empty Symbols with the Type attrib
190. ation on the manufacturer Siemens x Manufacturer Siemens Date of last 0170572005 Motes Number List 200407 Date List 01705 2005 lo F Dettagi gt gt The information can be entered or changed by the user It consists of two fields the first is Data and is for recognizing validity of a listing Click on Ignore when there are no data The second is Notes which can be freely used No information stored appears when nothing has been entered The name of the family must be chosen to facilitate mnemonically the search for the next item Insert components which opens the Errore L autoriferimento non valido per un segnalibro panel can be retrieved by right clicking on the name of the new family Is possible to move or copy codes from one manufacturer to another Copy You must select one or more codes these must be dragged to the group belonging to the Manufacturer that is different from the Start group It is not possible to copy the Codes between groups of the same manufacturer double codes in the listing are not permitted The symbol appears during the dragging of the cursor Move You must select one or more codes holding down the keyboard Shift TI key you must drag the codes to a group different from the start group and between groups of the same manufacturer During the dragging of the cursor no symbol appears O Copy and Move act in the same way on an entire Family Edit
191. b Bed Every item that using Add is taken to Fields sorted by output represents a column of the file To export information not included in the Available fields list it is necessary to enter the name of the attribute in the quality of New field and then insert it in Fields sorted by output The Available Fields list contains the data Tag Db InternalCode Db Notes and Db Price unlike all the other fields these 3 pieces of information are taken from the materials database and not from the symbol contents It is of fundamental importance to firstly check which materials database is set by default Default is used to store the customization of the output fields for subsequent uses To migrate data to other programmes and or formats for example warehouse management it is advisable to use Microsoft Excel of Windows when the CSV file is opened it is as shown in the figure below File Option PBF SUSMISNP3400 PHOTOELECTRIC SENSOR OBJECT SN DAN NO OR NC M12 CONNECTOR Telemecanique BM 3 1 Mi Three Phase Asynchronous Motor BM 5 d M2 Three Phase Asynchronous Motor BM 5 1 Mi Three Phase Asynchronous Motor BM 5 1 1 56 SCMD2Z111M12 LIMIT SWITCH amp CM D BOOTED END PLUNGER 1 0C Telemecanique BM 3 1 57 SCMD2111M12 LIMIT SWITCH amp CM D BOOTED END PLUNGER 1 0C Telemecanique BM 3 1 501 sTIMT2NA372 CAPACITIVE SENSOR STT CYLINDRICAL M12 5H 2mm NO CABLE 2M Telemecaniqu
192. bering Automatic Wire NUMBERING Number Summary The main automatic numbering parameter is certainly the search scan normally type A scan is used on power diagrams while in all other cases the scan is type B Type C and D are used only in the case of numbering on drawings oriented vertically JIC The value of Available for sheet is ignored if numbering is done with sheet prefix enabled as for every page the numbering starts again from the first value The Number Summary option see par 5 5 enables the automatism that inserts a block in which the first and last wire number used on the current sheet are indicated This block is called Blinfi and can also contain the last number usable in the case of changes calculated according to the Available for sheet number set Pressing on the button accesses the menu for defining the block to be inserted The blinfi are stored in the Spac Libraries Symbols directory each dwg block corresponds with a sld image slide with the same name for viewing in the dialog window Symbol Blinfi1 dwg O N B Available for sheet and Scan are not used by Spac Start They are in the configuration owing to reasons of compatibility with Spac Automazione You can customize the new blocks storing them in the same directory as those already existing The block name must be consecutive to the names already present Blinfi4 Blinfi5 etc for a maxi
193. ble at the same time together with all the circuits electrical burglar alarm etc not frozen by the special filter command 26 Spac Start 2012 2 5 Spac Job Order Management HESS e Selecting the Job Order This function is activated automatically after starting Spac and e New Job Order allows to view the list of all the existing job orders and create new ones The function can be recalled at any time from the e Open Job Order first command menu File or typing SP_START on the k e Customer Management SE Selecting the Job Order The dialog window contains a list of all the already existing job orders double click or press the Open button to access and view the contents of the multi sheets or press the New button to create new ones SPAC Start 2010 Commesse in D SPAC Start 7010 Commesse Job Order Mame A Job Order Description ESEMPIO2Z01 2 SOProget Esempio 008 Edificio Artigianale Hew Job Order Job Orders Path START Open Job Order able l W SPAC Start 2010 Plus Main Job Orders dialog window Every job order corresponds to a folder directory configured with Job Orders Path When working with several stations linked in a network it is wise for all operators to have the same path configuration in order to manage a single database shared by everyone The list of job orders can be viewed in 4 different sortings Job Order Name EN Pressing on Job Order Name or on the indicator the list is sorted
194. bles or single wire with sheath in overhanging channels 34A Sheathless cables in circular protective pipes 41 laid within closed trenches with horizontal or vertical path pp LEE Sheathless cables in circular protective pipes 42 A laid within ventilated trenches embedded in the KEN floor Single wire cables with sheath and multiwire 43 cables laid in open or ventilated trenches with horizontal or vertical path Multiwire cables or single wire with sheath laid 51 directly within thermally insulated walls Multiwire cables or single wire with sheath laid 52 directly in the walling without additional mechanical protection 18 Sections e 277 Multiwire cables or single wire with sheath laid 53 directly in the walling with additional mechanical protection he hh Theres praca a F GH GE SE K EN ee SE d Single wire cables with sheath and multiwire 61 cables in protective underground pipes or in underground trenches Underground multiwire cables or single wire 62 with sheath without additional mechanical protection Underground multiwire cables or single wire 63 with sheath with additional mechanical protection Sheathless cables laid in grooved elements 71 E On EEN E b Ab A Gei D CNA CC ec L i SE L EA Sa j FF LA H W G EN GE Il A Sheathless cables laid in channels provided 72 with separation elemen
195. blocks that do not comprise any attribute within them O The blocks are inserted proportionately on the planimetry on the basis of the drawing scale set in 17 1 Installation SETTINGS 28 Symbols e 373 Installation Symbols The Installation symbol is fundamental for all Spac Start operations in the plamimetric drawing environment oi To make sure that a symbol of this category is fully compatible with all the Spac Start procedures determinate attributes must be contemplated within it and the graphic part of the drawing must be L subdivided into specific layers 10 154 The AutoCAD Ddatte command allows you to check the attributes contained in the symbols in order to check the contents of those AS that are invisible on the drawing Example of Installation symbol Attributes A block that comprises the following series of attributes is considered as an Installation symbol Label Default Type Description Name Component reference text height 2 and color 4 Type Contains the catalogue codes of the material associated Manufacturer Contains the brand of the type of material associated Description Contains the description of the type of material associated Height Laying height associated during insertion text height 1 5 and color 3 Legend 16A Socket IP Component generic description Note the data marked with are examples Type P Preassign Type l Invisible Name During insertion of the block on the draw
196. brary described by the name of the file itself The importation of a DES file updates the descriptions in the database of the Description Lib Mdb symbols it is advisable to check beforehand if the file language corresponds to the one set You find the Des file corresponding to the symbols library in every folder in the directory of the libraries of the previous Spac versions Customizations can be made to the database file Description Lib Mdb also using Microsoft Access of Windows it is important only not to change the file structure These edit operations are not advised for the less expert users Material Data This can be performed on Parent and Element category symbols In practice it is the assignment of a material code with description and corresponding manufacturer These codes are used to process the Bill of Materials see par 8 1 The code assigned to the symbol during this configuration will be proposed as default value when entering the symbol on the drawing it will in any case be possible to accept edit or remove the values proposed each time see par 15 3 4 General commands e 77 Symbols Tagging This configuration allows you to set the type of component tagging according to requirements and the standards to be complied with These parameters are used when inserting symbols on the drawing and by the 4 7 Component references command There are 3 tagging systems e Incremental e Positional e Free
197. butes do not need the CODE even if it is however advisable By default the symbols have a CODE value for example REF1 on coils REF2 or REF3 on switches etc e The OFFSET attribute is associated with the CODE attribute It indicates the position of the Reference block on the drawing the position is related to the Parent symbol insertion point If the OFFSET is 0 10 0 this means that the reference block will be inserted in coordinate X 0 Y 10 with respect to the insertion point of the parent while the degrees of rotation are O e The PRES attribute is fundamental in allowing the programme to recognise the parent symbol PRES must contain M e The REG attributes are the containers of the registrations where the Sub element symbols are located REG is always followed by a number the even REGs host the registration of open and exchange contacts Sub elements the odd REGs host the closed ones The presence of these attributes excludes OFFSET and makes CODE unavailable example in coil relays with fixed reference Sub element symbol Also the sub element symbols must respect the presence of certain attributes see par 15 2 e The NAME attribute must state the Parent component to which it is to be associated e The PRES attribute is fundamental in allowing the programme to recognise the Sub element symbol the PRES content is variable according to the type of block PRES Description PRES Description Normally open contact Op
198. can also be entered in the manual mode using the special command Sheet title see par 3 18 Summary This option allows you to consult the sheet status of the multi sheets of the current job order It also checks if there are any Multi sheets in use by other users see par 2 5 Job Order Sharing Sheet status SUMMARY ol The figure shows that the job order Multi sheet name from 5h to Sh Total sheets comprises 3 multi sheets the one UNIFILARE highlighted Lists is the current MULTIFILARE work one The first is Diagram with pages from no 1 to 15 total 15 sheets currently in use i e opened by another user connected in the network The second is Layout with pages from no 16 to 20 total 5 sheets 3 Sheet Management 43 3 2 Change Sheet This command allows you to quickly view a sheet of the current job order regardless of the multi sheet it belongs to It is called up from the keyboard pressing the F command You can write the number of the sheet concerned directly or choose it from the sheets list corresponding to the multi sheet indicated below if the sheet to be called belongs to a multi sheet other than the current one it is important to Jutisheets check the status of the option EDIFICIO_ARTIGIANALE Le LAYOUT PLANIMETRIC Save multi sheet changes if it IS active the current drawing is saved before loading the multi sheet file where the page
199. ccupied Status contains entity the function asks you if you want to continue just the same or if you prefer to indicate a new page number Enabling Clear Current Sheet deletes all the entities contained before drawing reste few sheets automatica lp For the sheets after the first one you will be asked to confirm each time If the destination sheet is new the function proceeds with no further requests The sheets after the first one are automatically created consecutively The page numbering on the new sheets is proposed automatically 3 Sheet Management e 65 Master Title Blocks Normally the title block is inserted automatically by the 4 1 Setting command during the opening of a new drawing on the basis of the configuration of the customer associated with the job order see par 2 5 In the other cases this function is used for manual insertion Master title blocks sell The command shows 4 example master e EE title blocks to be inserted on sheet 0 of i every multi sheet These blocks are provided with attributes for quick table data entry which can then be edited using the Eattedit or Ddatte commands i The insertion of a title block takes place A in coordinate 0 0 After insertion it is a good rule to check the oo E Cl Sheet Dimensioning in the Spac y Settings see par 4 2 i e the configuration of the useful space and of the title block ch
200. ces of the components e are also indicated therefore each symbol represents a line of list and it is not possible to bring together all the identical codes in the same quantity The uncoded elements without Code and Manufacturer marked with 3 asterisks are placed at the top of the list The result of this list can be drawn in Table or extracted into a CSV File The differences between compact and extended view can be noted only on the list of elements e for cables c and raceways t the two modes do not change the result 350 Spac Start 2012 List by ZONE The list by Zone is divided into 3 groups Elements Raceways and Cables In the elements e group the various Zones are sorted with priority to Zona or Elements without zone for each zone the various manufacturers are sorted lastly for every Manufacturer the materials are listed alphabetically according to the product code the codes that form part of the same component macrocode can therefore be listed non consecutively In the cables c group they are sorted by types of Installation for each of which there is the usual sorting firstly by Manufacturer and then according to the product code In the raceways t group sorting is the same as described for cables the uncoded channels without Code and Manufacturer marked with 3 asterisks are placed at the top of the list of every Installation group At the end of the scan the list is shown on the
201. ciate Materials Some manufacturers have descriptions in different languages It is possible to check for alternative languages by selecting one of the flags at the side The Notes field allows the user to insert additional comments and can be used freely The Document Data Sheet is associated by pressing the Browse button and it is possible to associate a file in Doc Word format or PDF Acrobat format Preview of the product is displayed only when an image file bmp or jpg format is present in the Library Archives Ilmages folder in Spac and has a name corresponding to the catalogue code The Catalogue code is the only obligatory field whilst the use of the Description field is strongly advised it is displayed in most parts of the configurations for Bills of Material 8 Bill of Materials 163 Technical Notes Making a double click on an existing code it is possible to display and change its characteristics Modifica componente x Generale Note tecniche Layout ELE elettrico Sbroglia Note tecniche Dato 1 la 5 Abbina filtro Kr Dato 2 Interruttor non Aut Sezionatori e Dtos 9 fT finitas Taglia ES Taglia Diff Ir Codice HESS contatti disponibili Ent Aus Tsa Colore Dissipazione termica Attribute TAG FUNZIONE Valore Moto Protection Aggiungi Modifica Elimina Ved Note tecniche Pe OF nella This panel allows the user to cu
202. ck name must be consecutive to the names already present _REVIS4 _REVIS5 _REVIS6 etc for a maximum of 20 blocks the dialog window can show a max of 20 windows Deleting a symbol compromises the viewing in the insertion window of the numerically subsequent ones CAUTION The symbol _Revis1 is composed of attributes only the graphic part is drawn on title block Master3 for which the block is adapted in the first bank of attributes REV_NUM_1 is preassigned at 00 to obtain at least a part that can be viewed and selected using the AutoCAD Eattedit or Ddatte commands 60 Spac Start 2012 Revision legend The Revision legend is a function that can be used only if Revision symbol are present on the drawing which are used to indicate changes and updates that have been made on the various pages of the documentation Shoat Rea sell Every insertion of a new revision or change to already existing ones involves the UNIFILARE subsequent updating of the legend by the MULTIFILARE S At the start it is necessary to select the drawing to be processed this allows you to obtain the specific legend for each multi sheet or complete one of the whole job order advisable choice The revisions can be sorted according to the Sheet number or Revision number Summary see par 3 1 The legend sorted according to the Revision number considers only the sheets that actually have a revision symbol drawn and
203. cnncncnnnonnnonanncnnnonnnons 320 LIN En EE 316 List by Panel and Reference cccccssseeeeeeeeeees 177 List by panel and Type EE 179 List by reierence oooncccccccnoccnnccnnonnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnns 177 LISUIDY TYDE EE 178 349 ESP ZONE EE 351 OEB 353 List without usage 138 UNTO CT EEN 365 Local Configuration idad 68 Bees 352 A E 77 LS TRIE ta ee 161 Master Title BlOCKS cui id 66 Material Database ooococccccnccnccncnccnccnccncnn 159 252 345 ME tee nee ceeded agewataanrne cave 159 183 345 Materials database oococcoccnccccnccnconcnncncnnnoncnnnon 159 345 Materials Database ccoccncoccnccnccnconcnccnccncnninnnnnoncnnnnn 183 Materials Database Filter ccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 186 Mik Macro svmbols 215 MOB Plis dd 106 VE 160 Modify ere 320 Modil Sections AA 301 Move between sheets ooccccccccccccccccoccnncncononcnnnonnnnnons 54 Move symbol ccccccseseeeecceeeeeeeceeeeeecesseeeeesaaeeeess 239 Multilevel SectiONS coooncccoconnccoccncnocononcnnanonononon 307 M ltiple e Te EE 317 Multiple laying heat 330 Multiple terminal drawing s sseonnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnne 129 Multiple terminals AA 122 MUNESA Sed to 24 27 Navia irrita 202 Network diagram ccccsceeccsseeeecesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeas 363 Network hardlock coocoococcoccnccncnnconcnccncnncnnn nro nana 16 Network hardware protection key 16 Network port Protection c
204. coconcccccoccnccconnncnconcnononnnnos 16 New DI EE 357 NEE 21 NexESnee dentaria lla 45 Nori cxzcaiekcen Ea a o aniani 98 293 381 Number Of conduite 308 Number Sheets ani 56 Number SUMAN Vin iaa ajos 114 NUMDEr WIES iii 107 Number with Returns ooccoccnccnccnccnccnncnncnnnoncnnnn nn 110 Number with terminals ccceceeeceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 110 Numbering Position amasado eed 83 La BR 120 141 Numl and NumO eeitmgs 141 UI WEE 120 135 140 III EE 140 IO si ata 120 141 A a a 144 219 221 OPIO EE 169 209 382 STEE 360 SCH Rei ei DI soso da daci n 360 Panel SOU sese 93 PANGS nee EE 210 Parallel o tal e de lante lod cal 95 100 Parent Symbol snena ana 144 218 233 RES LE EE TEE E E E T 98 D EE 316 A 352 PDF EE 176 A EEN 77 Pilaster SMS EEN 262 A A A AA 75 K i Ra AMO edi cias da 150 Plan VIEW A e 267 Planimetric Drawing nensenenneoenneoennnnrnnenennnesnneennnne 24 PI EE 207 Bel Le EE 228 POSIMOM A ie aos 78 105 111 Power Feed Returns cccceceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 80 96 Sek EE 94 PRE Flia ata a 77 Prefabricated Channel 325 Prefabricated Channel PC 325 Prefabricated raceway coooocccncccnonccnncononnnnnnononcnnnnnnnns 305 PYEICKENCES sii ore ede oe Sie fe 82 Pret Elo artrosis 75 76 103 PLOMO aiaa e EE E EEEE Ea 250 251 Premises development 342 Previous Gheet ooccocccnccnnccnncnnnonnconanonccnncnnnnnncnnnnonanoness 45 SR 250 251 Print Database anida 161 P
205. coefficients between users within the same circuit All the data and main results of the calculation can be viewed in a single window Other pieces of information give details of all the parts of the calculation characteristics of the protection IKs selectivity The first role of Caneco is the design of circuit cables and protections Forcing these data it is also possible to use them as check software CANECO is an independent programme lt runs all the calculation operations autonomously and automatically builds the graphics in single feed form without the use of further graphic software However it is possible to dialog with Caneco extracting the data from the planimetric drawing developed with Spac Start they are processed by the calculation software The results can be imported on the graphics of the Single feed diagrams still developed using Spac CANECO Planimetric Diagram Calculation single feed Diagram The data flow schematically shown here represents the complete combination of the 3 steps It is however possible to develop only the documents necessary and therefore execute only Planimetry and Calculation or Calculation and Single feed Spac Start can also manage the direct passage from Planimetric Diagram to Single feed diagram Clearly this is obtained without the calculation results so it should be borne in mind that the values given in the tables are not checked by the software
206. command allows you to check a7 22 3 DI the attributes contained in the symbols to check the NY family they belong to Examples of Reference symbol The parents with fixed register reference block without Code and Offset attributes form a single block with the reg Reference this must be without the Parent and Pres attributes A block that contains the following series of attributes is considered as a Reference symbol Label Default Type Description Parent IP Reference of associated parent PinAO First input wiring pin number PinBO First output wiring pin number PinN Se wiring pin numbers Note the data marked with a are examples Type P Preassign Type I Invisible 220 Spac Start 2012 Parent Pin Reg The PARENT attribute hosts the name of the Parent Symbol to which the reference is associated This attribute is the only link between two blocks that are graphically separate but conceptually joined The parent value is completed automatically These attributes contain the reference numbers for the wiring Each pair of pin attributes PinA and PinB must be preset with the values that will be indicated on the Sub element symbol Pin tags contain the same number as the associated Reg for example Reg3 is associated with the wiring numbers of PinA3 and PinB3 The creation of a REG attribute is necessary for every contact symbol to be registered This attribute is used to contain the position registe
207. copied Creation of a new file for IEC symbols To delete a file press the Del button Pressing the Import button it is possible to recover the customizations made with previous Spac versions importing the files with Pre Pfr Lpd and Des extension See Compatibility with previous versions O CAUTION Use of the character is not allowed in the name of new files 76 Spac Start 2012 Compatibility with previous versions Access is gained from Symbol Configuration pressing the Archivi File management window pressing on Import button then from the Gestione In the previous Spac versions the various symbol configurations were stored in the following files This corresponds to a current prefix file without certain parameters like for the Loop Diagram and Panel The importation of a PRE file automatically creates a new Prefix File with the same name if a file with the same name as the file to be imported already exists you will be asked to Update or Replace the existing one This contains the configuration of the Button Panel Importation takes place automatically in the Prefix File with the same name N B Command not enabled in Spac Start Lpd File This contains the configuration of the Loop Diagram Importation takes place automatically in the Prefix File with the same name N B Command not enabled in Spac Start This contains the description of the symbols li
208. cs used more frequently for se certain customers or associate those of a certain manufacturer specifically with Choice of prefix file during configuration dl S a the symbols library All the prefix files are contained in the Description Lib Mdb file in the Spac Libraries Databases folder 4 General commands 75 New Prefix File From Symbol Configuration access to Prefix List Management is obtained pressing the button To create a new file select among the existing ones a start file that serves as base to copy its list of symbols Prefix file Management sx The base file must belong to the same i Symbols Library as the new one eee ieee After entering the name of the new file max 16 characters and the relevant description in the required languages press the Ins button IEC 750 Library 1 2 char IEC 61346 Library 1 char Singleteed Library IEC 750 1 2 char Singlefeed Library IEC 61346 1 2 char then choose whether you want to copy the structure only or also the data Libreria Unifilare IEC 750 1 2 car Single eed Library IEC 750 1 2 char Stru cture only Only the list of symbols and prefixes is copied from the start file chosen as base Copy structure and data The file is copied identical to the start file Besides the list of symbols and prefixes also the pin configurations material references Loop Diagram configuration Panel etc are also
209. ction views the association marking the page associated with gt To remove an association carried out by mistake use the Remove button after selecting one of the pages marked with gt When only one sheet needs to be inserted it is wise to use Insert After confirming with the OK button you will be asked for the insertion mode on the associated sheets Replace Add Keep contact desc Keep wire numbers The entitities on the page concerned by the insertion are removed automatically to leave their place to the new sheet The entitities on the page concerned by the insertion are not removed so the new sheet will be superimposed on the content already present The stored sheet is inserted with or without the register references This function is helpful when inserting a page that had been stored following a Cross Reference process The stored sheet is inserted with or without the wire numbers This function is helpful when inserting a page that had been stored with normal or automatic wire numbering At the end the stored sheet is inserted on the associated page with the chosen modes 3 Sheet Management e 51 New sheet This command allows you to increase the number of sheets of the current multi sheet and add intermediate sheets giving alphanumerical names see par 3 5 Add The sheet number entered in the New sheet box is confirmed and inserted in the list pressing this button The creation of thi
210. d The solution consists in deleting the excess contacts In any case to remedy the problem other different possibilities exist as described in Editing see par 7 1 23 Error Exceeded max number of Closed contacts FC Error Exceeded max number of Closed contacts FCP In the register reference block indicated in the Parent Code attribute the Reg attributes with odd number are insufficient for containing the registrations of the necessary closed contacts The register reference is not inserted The solution consists in deleting the excess contacts In any case to remedy the problem other different possibilities exist as described in Editing see par 7 1 24 Error Exceeded max number of Transfer contacts FS In the register reference block indicated in the Parent Code attribute the Reg attributes with odd number are insufficient for containing the registrations of the necessary transfer contacts The register reference is not inserted The solution consists in deleting the excess contacts In any case to remedy the problem other different possibilities exist as described in Editing see par 7 1 25 Error Exceeded max number of Lamp contacts FL In the register reference block indicated in the Parent Code attribute the Reg attributes are insufficient for containing the registrations of the necessary Lamp sub element symbols The register reference is not inserted 26 Caution Transfer Cont
211. d Delete to remove it CC g amp gEe In Attributes List there are only the names of the more common tags the list cannot be changed Only selected symbols the change takes place only for the blocks selected Identical to selection acts on all the blocks equal to the one selected of the sheet multi sheet or job order All symbols all the blocks are changed on the sheet multi sheet or job order that possess at least one of the attributes to be changed In the figure of the example the attributes tags Name and Size become color 4 with heights of 3 5 and 3 mm While the fields concerning text Position x y Rotation Style and width are not considered You can use the character as suffix of the attribute name Example to change the attributes Reg1 Reg2 Reg etc in a single operation simply indicate reg Pressing Default the current configuration is stored in local mode see par 4 2 for subsequent uses of the same command If confirmed without pressing Default the configuration is considered as occasional and used only once 12 Utilities e 197 Height Type the required text height Color Type the number code of the color required clicking on the coloured rectangle takes you directly to the window of the colors available Offset Offset is used to set the new position entering the movement in the relevant polar coordinate for example to move attributes 10mm dow
212. d Linea COLLEGAMENTO Polarit F N PE Monofase Neutro Cond Prot Lunghezza m 8 Dati cavo btdin1 00 Pirelli FLEXI piu FROR bid 00 Assorbimento btdin1 00 ZIONE amp ORT D izj 1 S PORTATI Se cavo per servizio Wm ITH A bil HIH A Descrizione 2 e Gg IRMAGN gt 82H 125 btdin1 00 magi y Sezione mm 2 gt 40 Rimando Morsetto Arrivo man lt j PROTE Quadro BM Borda Macchina Archivio Materiali Morsettiera M1 Morsettiera Motore 1 Sigla C Comando sempre attivo C Inserimento multiplo Codice Descrizione Costru Example of a fast compilation of the fields using a Drag amp Drop approach Protection Primary and Secondary Selecting from the possible combinations it is necessary to set the primary and secondary protection the code and other data required related to the protections could be moved directly from the DoCenter with a Drag amp Drop approach see section 8 4 DbCenter to the codes of the protection of interest The data displaced is inserted on the protection with the flag code activated 9 Single feed Draw 189 The line descriptive data polarity length etc must be typed manually while the cable type must be selected from the codes on Cable database pressing the button Rimando O Morsetto starting on the general distribution
213. d no 7 is proposed Checks After performing Shift sheets it is necessary to check the situation of the documentation it is certainly necessary to repeat the 3 15 Number Sheets command if you have used positional symbol tagging updating will be needed see par 4 7 as also for the numbering of wires that have the same prefix as the page number see par 4 2 If the Cross reference has been carried out previously it must certainly be re processed see par 7 1 S Summary see par 3 1 All the sheets that have undergone a change of the page number must be checked in their contents as all references to page numbers must be restored 48 Spac Start 2012 3 8 Store Sheet The Store Sheet command is used to manage and file repetitive diagram sheets and then re use them freely every time it becomes necessary also on different job orders Stored sheet MANAGEMENT 3 9 Enter Stored Sheets must be Name Classification Description ES10 0001 POWER FEED General mee used to call up a sheet that has ae lee already been stored AUXILIARY 110V Acalia AUXILIARY 24V Awdliary input type 1 It is advisable to store the sheets without any processing and without wire and terminal numbering This way the sheet is completely neutral and can be SESE E Ea considered a master sheet 1 iliary ES10 0004 OOOO O Lei A J EEE Master can also become the t i name of a classification for filing DR the
214. d on the 4 drawing in the same way as normal ones This command allows you to distinguish them with the insertion of a symbol that also shows the number of divisions The function requests Select a Section R Search In the case of sections perpendicular to the current view use of the Search function is necessary The example in the figure shows a section divided into 3 conduits Empty traces This command lists the sections that are without cables see par 19 1 also those that have already been dimensioned are considered as Empty traces see par 20 1 308 Spac Start 2012 18 8 Section Converter After opening a planimetric drawing made with previous Spac Start versions it is fundamental to Convert the sections You can avoid Section Converter if you only need to print the drawing thereby keeping drawing compatibility with Spac Start 4 1 2002 and 2003 versions The recognition of a drawing that needs to be converted takes place automatically during Disegno realizzato con una precedente versione opening with the message in the figure Si rende necessaria la conversione del dizegno Continuare Answering Yes the procedure makes a backup copy of the drawing then starts with the search for Elements and Sections Conversion procedure started please wait Total converted elements no Total converted sections no Then the maximum permissible distance between a Node and the e
215. d proportioned with the wire pitch 7 5 or 10mm e For higher flexibility of the macrosymbol you are advised to store it in the most neutral way possible therefore without references wire numbers and without associations to material codes e tis preferable to set up the macrosymbol with any connection points The name of the macrosymbol must be chosen in relation to the name of the free box to which it is required to be associated from MBLK1 to MBLK60 For each one an image slide is associated for viewing in the window stored with the same name as the macroblock to be represented The MBLK symbols and the relevant slides must be stored in the special folder of Spac Libraries Blk The macroblocks and slides are created using the AutoCAD Mblocco and Gendia commands Consult the specific manual for operating details Clicking on the box of a Mblk symbol its description is shown to add or change descriptions it is necessary to use Prefix File 5 Symbol Configuration see par 4 2 In the previous versions of Spac 2005 and 2003 the descriptions of the symbols were stored in the Ascii files with extension DES You can recover your customizations using the database file import function see Compatibility with previous versions 14 Customizations e 215 14 3 BLK Library This command allows you to insert and organize in groups the BLK symbols built by the user see 14 1 Blk Symbols
216. de sizes written in Dimensions are purely descriptive Prefabricated Channel This is defined setting Prefabricated type The value of the size set in Dimensions mm is purely descriptive and not valid for the fill calculation It is not possible to set Inside dimensions Eltz S leet ral tata 20 Raceways 325 326 Spac Start 2012 21 Elements 21 1 Element List This command generates the list of all the elements component symbols present on the drawing It is also possible to view the corresponding details for each component Details View Change Update Filters This allows you to view all the parts of the component selected in the list They are helpful for consultation as no change is possible The View button is particularly useful for tracking the position of a symbol on the planimetry In fact it is highlighted to facilitate its recognition The function requests Zoom Zoom End Return Pressing and you can control the enlargement while with Return the function is ended keeping the current zoom or restoring the initial view This allows you to view and change all the data of the component The change window is accessed quickly with a double click see par 21 2 Every change to the data of the cable is shown on the drawing using the Update function This button is active only when changes have been made to the symbol data pressing Change T
217. dia Tutorial attached to the programme RailDesigner 2 is optional software not supplied with Spac The software is distributed by Weidmuller you can find information or download the programme directly from www weidmuller it CSV File Pressing CSV File Output an Ascii file is generated called Terminal List Csv for extracting the data of terminal blocks and connectors Standard is the basic configuration of the output fields where applicable CSV file parameters xl Every datum contained in the Available fields list is an Type Te TTT Num attribute present in the terminal Man Manufacturer NumM Sect Nun block or connector every datum DE D D Manufacturer which with Add is taken to the Se Fields sorted by output Usage Ref represents a column of the file Default is used to store the customization of the output fields for subsequent uses Changing the writing mode of the fields it is possible to parameterise the characteristics of the file Edit terminal block The Edit function allows you to make changes to the terminal block This tool is used to change the brand and model of terminals to change the output graphics in the terminal block with return block and to assign usage and miscellaneous notes 130 Spac Start 2012 ll Save allows you to save Rep Section Numl NumM Mun Usage Retum blk egor the changes made for NORMAL each terminal block NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMA
218. diagnostics so during processing fault messages can be shown e Errors detected on Parent symbols e Errors detected on Return symbols Errors detected on Parent symbols 1 Error Unnamed Parent In the position indicated there is a Parent symbol Pres M with empty Name attribute the message can be seen in the initial Report 2 Error Unnamed Sub element In the position indicated there is a Sub element symbol Pres F with empty Name attribute the message can be seen in the initial Report 3 Error Unnamed Element In the position indicated there is an Element symbol without Pres attribute with empty Name attribute the message can be seen in the initial Report 4 Error Unnamed Reference In the position indicated there is a register reference symbol Pres R with empty Parent attribute the message can be seen in the initial Report 5 Error Parents with same name In the positions indicated there are Parent symbols Pres M with the same name the message can be seen in the initial Report cross reference is not performed on symbols with this message 6 Error Elements with same name In the positions indicated there are Element symbols without Pres with the same name the message can be seen in the initial Report 7 Error Same name as Element The Parent symbol in question has the same name as an Element symbol in the position indicated the message can be seen in the initial Report cross reference is not
219. directly In this way 4 symbols will be inserted 300 cm apart To repeat the copy on more rows activate Secondary direction and repeat the operations carried out for the main direction 28 Symbols e 383 Repeat insertion This function is used to copy the symbols present on the drawing avoiding access to the symbols library menu There are 2 possibilities e Repeating the insertion of a new symbol identical to the last one inserted e Repeating the insertion of a symbol identical to the selected one This function has been designed to avoid the use of the AutoCAD Copy command Compared with the traditional Copy command of AutoCAD this function allows you to obtain all the automatisms based on the category of the symbol Last Symbol Automatically the insertion point is requested of a new symbol identical to the one inserted previously To facilitate the use of this function you can type the XX command on the keyboard Copy Symbol The function requests Select an already inserted block lt Enter Quit gt Then the insertion point is requested of a new symbol identical to the selected one To facilitate the use of this function you can type the X command on the keyboard X and XX are taken also pressing the central button of the mouse for mouse with 3 buttons or pressing the right hand button of the mouse together with Shift on the keyboard for mouse with 2 buttons Clone T
220. drawn with the previous example shows the result obtained The laying height at 230 cm was necessary to cross above the door drawn with a height of 210 cm It can therefore be concluded that Wall is a mode suitable for connecting 2 components already present on the drawing using the path of the edges and walls The length of the section is always calculated automatically also in the case of changes using the AutoCAD Stretch command To change the path of sections use of 18 5 Change laying height and 18 6 Change laying height at ends is necessary 18 Sections e 283 2 Ceiling from wall to element This laying type allows you to define the section without indicating any laying height and the values are taken from the start and destination elements The upward and downward paths are therefore calculated according to the difference between the heights of the components selected The section starts from the element selected in start and continues with a first vertical section to reach the height of the destination element then with a second horizontal section to connect the second element The function requests START Select Element Section or Node Return for options 1 point the start symbol is to be selected DESTINATION Select Element Section or Node Return for options 2 point the destination symbol is to be selected With the 1 and 2 point the laying heights are taken
221. ds The name is composed according to the setting of the Symbols Tagging configuration see par 4 2 It is however possible to type a free name Insert Contact FA Parents available The panel name is the one set as default in the 43 Panel Setting Available Labels i comman d At this stage it is possible to choose another one among the references available in the list pressing Insertion of Element symbol Pressing on these buttons increases or decreases the name by one unit 236 Spac Start 2012 15 4 Change symbols Delete These functions act on the symbols already present on the drawing Copy and Clone _ They replace the use of the AutoCAD Delete Copy Ddatte and Move Edit commands with specific functions Move Delete This function is used to delete a component symbol on the drawing automatically restoring the connections between the wires The command asks you to Select the Block to delete or Wire to patch Let us suppose deleting switch QF7 the connection wires upstream of the component are power feed signals the connection wires downstream R6 S6 T6 are automatically removed and replaced with the values of the signals The values on the signals have priority with respect to the existing numbers on the wires regardless of the position upstream or downstream This function can be used even if you have firstly deleted the symbol using the conventional Auto
222. dth and the column title which can be changed by pressing the Edit button Number of This value is used to split the table in several parts also on different sheets Lines because after completion of the maximum number of lines a new insertion point or continuation on the next sheet is requested Texts Height This is the height of all the texts contained in the table This parameter affects the height of each line proportionately thus the total height of the table This is the height of the column titles This parameter affects the calculation of This is the total sum of the widths assigned to each output field The size is expressed in millimetres This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Width to avoid overstepping the margins of the master title block with the table On the basis of the maximum number of lines foreseen and the height of the texts the maximum total height of the table is calculated This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Height to avoid overstepping the margins of the Titles Height the total height of the table Table Width Table Height master title block with the table Standard This represents the basic configuration of the output fields where applicable Pressing Default the current configuration is stored in local mode see par 4 2 for subsequent uses If confirmed without pressing Default the configuration is considered as occasional and used The pitch betw
223. dy present in the diagram by selecting components on the drawing The new value replaces the previous one with no further requests to confirm The value is contained in the panel attribute present in the symbols 4 General commands 93 4 4 Power feeds Selecting Power feeds accesses the following dialog window where the helpful functions are grouped for drawing the power feed lines in different ways All these functions are provided with the superwire system which consists in automatic recognition of the size of the symbols present on the wire path or connection R J The color of the lines default 1 red distance power feed clearance and the type of return are configured using 4 1 Setting The Number of power feeds from 1 to 20 is the quantity of parallel lines required to be set before selecting the function from the window For every power feed drawn it is always necessary to choose the name of the signal and the characteristics of the cable the line type serves for dashing for example the ground line the line types must be previously loaded on the drawing Power feeds Window Power feeds Destination points 94 Spac Start 2012 This function allows you to quickly draw a series of power feed lines with destination arrows for reference from the previous sheet and start arrows to the next sheet the start and destination point coordinates are stored each
224. e Before clearing a sheet the command_____asks Jor DATI PROGETTO LISTA FOGLI 2 a 3 ALIMENTAZIONE To retrieve a page that has 4 ALIMENTAZIONE AUSILIARI 5 MOTORI just been cleared use the AUSILIARI 110V A 7 AUSILIARI 24V Cancel command 8 INGRESSI PLC 9 USCITE PLC MORSETTIERE CONNETTORI In the case of multiple ESTERNO ARMADIO INTERNO ARMADIO selection more than one DISTINTA MATERIAL DISTINTA MATERIALI sheet selected the command DISTINTA MATERIALI asks you choose whether to confirm every single removal Save Multesheet changes Answering No to the question Do you want to confirm the clearing operation for every sheet selected the following confirmation Are You Sure is valid for all the sheets If the page to be cleared has no deletable entities the command answers with Empty sheet Therefore the request to confirm implies the certain deletion of objects To clear a page quickly double click on the number of the page to be cleared and confirm the operation This function only works on sheets belonging to the current multi sheet lt should be underscored that this command does not physically remove the pages from the drawing file but clears their contents CAUTION The AutoCAD Cancel command does not allow the recovery of pages after closing a Multi sheet 3 Sheet Management e 55 3 15 Number Sheets This command is used to number all the sheets of
225. e BM 3 1 502 STILS2FAZ62 CAPACITIVE SENSOR STT CYLINDRICAL A 32mm SN 15mm NO CABLE 2M Telemecanique BM 3 1 BM BTU End bracket Omega thickness 8 mm CABLA BM A ADM 0155 46 Two wap Feedthrough terminal black 4 mm CABUR BM 9 T M1 WOU 4 4 mmg Feed through terminal block WEIDMULLER BM 5 3 M1 WE 4 4 mmg Protective conductor terminal block WEIDMULLER BM 5 1 From this condition it is easy to make changes on the fields and manage the data storing them in the most suitable way and format for the exchange of information with other types of software 182 Spac Start 2012 8 4 DbCenter DbCenter is the interface programme between the drawing and the materials database it allows the quick association of material codes and is used as an alternative to the 8 2 Associate Materials command which offers more working possibilities but less potential and immediacy in use When the DbCenter is working the operator has in addition to the drawing area a dialog window that always remains active in the same way as that of AutoCAD Properties From this window interaction with the materials database is quick and simple see 8 7 Material Database in searching codes or macrocodes that can be taken to the drawing area using Drag amp Drop 1 23 Rockwell Automation H I Siemens ELE Telemecanique er ALTIVAR 08 E ALTVAR 11 zer ALTIVAR 18 t ALTIVAR 28 t ALTIVAR 38 t ALTIVAR
226. e Section or Element Enter for options Enter It is necessary to choose the item New Free Node among the various options then you are asked for New NODE insertion point r point ELEMENT insertion point 2 point Angle of rotation lt 0 gt EE point then Enter to confirm This system is used to insert components in critical positions for example when the graphic symbol is in a position in which it interferes with S A other drawn objects or to simulate a table or 2 3 floor mounted self bearing box A Since the Node indicates the component real position it must be placed on the drawing with 1 C A suitable accuracy 1 104 AS fae See Insert Node par 18 7 28 Symbols e 381 Options The Options menu is activated pressing Enter during the initial request for the symbol insertion point _ E Select allows you to go back to the previous possibility for selecting EE 7 a Wall Section and Element Nuovo Nodo Libero HI New Free Node allows you to insert a new node in any position so ae Sener not necessarily on an already existing wall see Insert Node Automatic insert Replace Element is used for inserting a new symbol replacing the position and connection of an already existing symbol Automatic Insertion is used for inserting a series of symbols Replace Element This is the mode used to replace an already existing symbol in the planimetry with a new block keeping the featu
227. e path as a section already existing on the drawing See 6 Duplicate Section Break Section This is a utility of the laying types that allows you to break an existing section into two sub sections thereby offering the possibility to insert in the break point a new element or generate a branch See 5 Break Section Join Sections Joining sections allows you to connect 2 sections or sub sections adjacent to one another turning them into a single section It represents the possibility to handle a complex path obtained originally with the drawing of many sections as a single section See 7 Join Sections To select the mode concerned double click on the item of the list 18 Sections e 305 The 18 4 Modify Sections command allows you to convert a section drawn with the Lay sections command in a prefabricated raceway Acting on the laying type is necessary selecting the last item of the CanaPref list Change prefabricated raceway TR71 x4 This change involves aying type Installation pressing the Select button of CanaPref DISTRIBUZIONE New Reference PR the data concerning the i section AE ENEE TR E It is a good rule to use section references with a specific prefix when drawing prefabricated raceways CanaPref ZUCCHINI 50630101 Description Blindosbara 3P M PE 5B4 7 Al 1604 3Mt Dimensions 76195 mm se See 18 1 Laying Sectio
228. e Manufacturer attribute contains the various Brands separated from one another by the semicolon character These values can also be inserted manually giving particular care to the sequence in which they are arranged example the 2nd code B1LOW corresponds with the second description and with the second Manufacturer and so on se See 8 4 DbCenter The data associated with the symbols using Associate Materials are written in the Manufacturer Type and Description attributes It is therefore necessary to take account of the maximum limit of the data that can be entered max 256 characters 172 Spac Start 2012 See Codes The list of Available codes is composed automatically keeping the codes that are taken time by time from the materials database in the list It is however also possible to take codes that are already present in the symbols current codes to make them available for subsequent associations pressing gt Available To remove useless codes from the list press the Delete button The list of codes can be sorted in 3 different ways Fe Pressing on Manufacturer or on the indicator the list is sorted alphabetically according to the material brand Manufacturer Ee Pressing on Type or on the indicator the list is sorted alphabetically according to the material catalogue code Description F Pressing on Description or on the indicator the list is sorted alphabetical
229. e change window is accessed quickly see par 19 3 Every change to the data of the cable is shown on the drawing using the Update function Update This button is active only when changes have been made to the data of cables pressing Change The drawing can be updated with the new changes The Filters option is very practical especially when working with very substantial lists as it allows you to customize the data to be viewed The filter is not stored in such a way as to view the complete list at every access to the command CSV File Pressing on File activates the configuration window for generating an ASCII data extraction file The file name is LISTCAVI CSV and it is generated in the job order directory Standard This represents the basic configuration of the output fields if active Add Every item of the Available fields list is a datum in the Section List The items which with Add are given in the Output fields represent a column in the output file Remove This is used to remove a datum in the Output fields Default Pressing Default the current configuration is stored for subsequent uses If confirmed without pressing Default the customized configuration is considered as occasional Data hidden by the use of filters are not extracted in the CSV file 318 Spac Start 2012 Drawing Pressing on Drawing proceeds with the drawing of the Cable list in table form parametric mode This option allows
230. e components selected 4 Freely This laying type allows you to draw any section path All the various laying heights are indicated by the user and only the start and destination heights are taken automatically by selecting the components linked Compared with the previous Spac Start versions some Laying modes are no longer present including Derivations Spac Start 2072 allows you to make derivations in a simple manner as you simply select an already existing section as start point of a new section with any of the laying modes available 280 Spac Start 2012 5 Break Section This is a utility of the laying types that allows you to break an existing section into two sub sections thereby offering the possibility to insert in the break point a new element or generate a branch 6 Duplicate Section Duplication allows you to draw a new section that has the same path as a section already existing on the drawing 7 Join Sections Joining sections allows you to connect 2 sections or sub sections adjacent to one another turning them into a single section It represents the possibility to handle a complex path obtained originally with the drawing of many sections as a single section To select the mode concerned double click on the item of the list Compared with the previous Spac Start versions the Laying mode Divide into conduits
231. e data of this setting affect most of the Spac commands therefore it is essential to check that they are correct each time C mat det da Ven PE d A e fa EP en a pa 7 a dap la Meal S2Gments nd point Example Double position Jet point d IT i L j Ze Di ES Ip D ms Segment Position Indicates the position of the sheet division segments Select abscissae if you have a master title block with numerical segment located on axis X division by columns select ordinates if the segment is located vertically on axis Y division by lines Set double segment if the title block is drawn with both horizontal numerical and vertical lettered division Management of the letter segment alone is not possible There is a help for each of the three positions clicking the Example button Segment Number Indicate the number of sheet divisions For numerical segments specify whether the numbering starts from 0 or 1 lettered ones start from the letter A in alphabetical order from the top down Increment segment Indicates the type of numbering on the segments With increment 1 the segments are consecutive 0 1 2 etc increment 2 obtains 0 2 4 etc Last Segment No The number assigned to the last segment is calculated according to the number of divisions and the value set in increment Formatting lt is possible to format segment numbers up to 4 characters With 1 the numerical segments
232. e di partenza leowalore 480 a Passo 20 Colore izowalore 520 Example of Isolux Curves import Drawing Isolux curves is not applicable using a project from Lite Litestar 4 xx but only from versions 5 XX 7 XX 26 6 Import Isolux grid This function is used to import to the planimetry the drawing of the Isolux Grid of the results calculated using LiteStar after performing export data from LiteStar select the corresponding Pnt file The data of the Pnt file from the lighting engineering calculation of LiteStar are imported immediately on the planimetry Example of Isolux grid import Drawing lsolux curves is not applicable using a project from Lite Litestar 4 xx but only from versions 5 xx 7 xx 370 e Spac Start 2012 2 Customizations 27 1 IbIk Symbols With Spac Start you can customize new symbols through the IBLK library left free exactly to be available to the user who can use it to increase the library with all those symbols for planimetric diagrams that are not contemplated by AGA the existing library When a new IBLK symbol is generated the following general rules must be KSl adhered to e t is essential for the graphic part of a block to be drawn on specific layers for this category of symbols there are no restraints concerning the colors and types of line that can be used even if it is preferable for reasons of homogeneity to refer to those already made e It is essen
233. e drawing to make them available again from the Associate pin window the command must be repeated O To change both the technical data and commercial characteristics it is necessary to use the specific Edit connector function of the Terminal Block and Connector Management command see par 6 3 6 Terminals and Connectors 125 6 3 Terminal Blocks and Connectors This command allows you to obtain the list of all the terminal blocks and connectors For every terminal block or connector it is possible to view its contents to make any changes afterwards the tables and drawings are made graphically Terminal block and Plug Connector Management Processing takes place on the components in the UNIFILARE MULTIFILARE multi sheets selected in the list It is possible to see a preview of the contents of a multi sheet pressing the Preview button If changes are made to the contents or to the sequence in the terminal block lists using Customize or Edit these changes are stored and proposed at the next scan S Summary see par 3 1 The terminals processed are placed in the list according to certain sorting parameters Cross section Sort Type 126 Spac Start 2012 This is the cross section of the terminal in mm Of the various sort types this is the one with highest priority in practice all terminals with the same cross section are grouped together and for each group the sequence is dictat
234. e in which upstream or downstream of the terminal wires with different numbering are connected the request for the wire number to be kept is shown The default setting indicates keeping the number upstream of the terminal Top wire causing deletion of the number downstream Bottom wire This operation also updates the values on any wires connected to the wire that loses ts original value 6 Terminals and Connectors 141 142 Spac Start 2012 7 Cross Reference 7 1 Cross Reference Cross Reference means automatically managing the cross references based on the position of the sheet and segment of the components present on the current multi sheet or of the whole job order according to choice The cross reference takes place between Parent and Sub element symbols having the same name and Return symbols between starts and destinations that have the same signal Processing for all the components present in the multi sheets selected in the list SCHEMA Parents and Returns is among the mostly used options of Cross Reference as it simultaneously obtains the double processing of all the parent symbols and all the returns present If necessary the processing also of a single component or return is allowed In this case it must be selected on the drawing pressing Sel gt Choosing Select among the various Cross reference options allows you to process only one group of components and or returns chosen on
235. e invisible and therefore their value is not shown on the drawing checked or preassigned O The use of these commande is described in the AutoCAD User Manual 230 Spac Start 2012 Attribute modes In the Attribute modes area of the dialog window of the AutoCAD Ddattdef command it is possible to set the 4 modes I Invisible C Constant V Check and P Preassign Invisible When the invisible mode is selected the information concerning the attribute is not shown on the drawing when the block is inserted This mode is helpful if you are not interested in seeing an attribute on the screen or if there is such a quantity of attributes that showing them would fill the drawing excessively Constant The constant mode gives a fixed value to the attribute for any insertion of the block Unlike what occurs using the other modes the value of a constant attribute cannot be changed after insertion of the symbol When Constant is active the Check and Preassign modes can no longer be associated Spac does not use the symbols of the libraries in the Constant mode to ensure that the data contained in the attributes can be changed at any time using the Ddatte command Check If an attribute is defined with this mode the accuracy of its value can be checked during insertion of the block that contains it in practice the same question for confirmation is repeated twice Spac does not use blocks with attributes in check mode Preassig
236. e numerous sections are overlaid O In the case of Sub sections the choice of Reference and Installation is not operational as the sub section always acquires the characteristics of the main section 274 Spac Start 2012 Laying type Choose the laying type among the following types of standards CEI 64 8 Table 52C Example get Sheathless cables in circular protective pipes 1 laid within thermally insulated walls Multiwire cables in circular protective pipes laid within thermally insulated walls 2 2 e Sheathless cables in circular protective pipes 3 S laid on or spaced from walls Multiwire cables in circular protective pipes laid on or spaced from walls 3A SC Sheathless cables in non circular protective 4 es pipes laid on walls Multiwire cables in non circular protective pipes laid on walls 4A 4 Sheathless cables in protective pipes buried in 5 the walling Sheathless cables in protective pipes buried in A the walling 9 GE EE Multiwire cables or single wire with sheath with or without armor and cables with mineral insulation laid on or spaced from walls 11 fixed on ceilings 11A spaced from ceilings 11B on unperforated gangways 12 on perforated gangways 13 18 Sections e 275 SE E a Ge K sse a Se ae a L Ob Sc GC a Ge WK Sr SS Li as aie aaa E DEE GH eg KEES SE S Ga Fi Fi KA
237. e of Parent symbol A block that comprises the following series of attributes is considered as a Parent symbol Label Name PinA1 PinB1 PinN Pres Type Manufacturer Panel Description Code Offset Function1 Function2 Support Note the data Name Pin Default Type Description Component reference First input wiring pin number First output wiring pin number Subsequent wiring pin numbers IP Main identification of parent symbol IP Contains the catalogue codes of the material associated IP Contains the brand of the material associated P Reference of pertinent electrical panel Switch IP Component generic description RIF2 IP Name of register reference block for cross reference 15 5 0 IP Register reference block position for cross reference IP Line 1 component function P Line 2 component function Optional marked with are examples Type P Preassign Type I Invisible During insertion of the block on the drawing it will host the element REFERENCE as value Fundamental for making the block recognizable by all programme processings see par 4 7 These attributes contain the reference numbers for wiring components see par 4 2 and par 7 2 For convention we have named as attributes PinA top the input ones in the block PinB bottom the output ones the number indicates that it is the first second etc pair of pins We have chosen to draw all the Pin attributes with a specific writing styl
238. e of the same name the color is 3 green to be able to differentiate them in the printout as thickness and make them more easily identifiable in reading the diagram on the monitor 218 Spac Start 2012 Pres The PRES attribute is fundamental as it assigns the Parent Symbol definition to the block Belonging to this family of symbols imposes the presence of another two attributes Code and Offset this condition is essential for performing cross reference operations and obtaining the automatic insertion of register Reference blocks Type The purpose of the TYPE attribute is to host the Catalogue Code of the material to be associated with the component during drawing It is therefore important for making the block recognisable by the Bill of materials see par 8 1 When wanting to insert several material codes macrocode this is possible separating the codes with the character Manufacturer The purpose of the MANUFACTURER attribute is to host the brand of the material to be associated with the component during drawing This datum is important for management of the Bill of materials see par 8 1 Panel The PANEL attribute contains the reference of the electrical panel in which the component is physically located in the diagram see par 4 3 The presence of this attribute makes it possible to differentiate the various processings according to the electric panel in fact it is possible to generate the bill of materials te
239. e same as the content of any attribute present in the symbol In the example the name of the symbol is INP1 which contains several attributes the one that contains the text E0 0 which we want to use as wire number is the attribute INPUT To get this result the configuration is Tag INPUT and Block INP1 To apply the configuration to all the symbols of the same type with INP prefix it is possible to enter Block INP When Numbering Position is set the advanced options are reduced to the following Advanced options wires and tenminal Owing to the rules imposed by this numbering method the Wire Properties and Terminal Properties settings and the previous Advanced Options parameters are excluded Wire No formatting Sheet No formatting 86 Spac Start 2012 It is possible to format progressive wire numbers up to 4 characters On sheet 3 at segment 6 wire numbers will be allocated of the following type With 1 example of numbers 361 362 363 etc With 01 example of numbers 3601 3602 3603 etc Considered only when the Sh Number as prefix parameter is active The value is set with the 3 1 Create Multi sheet command On sheet 3 at segment 6 wire numbers will be allocated of the following type With 1 example of numbers 361 362 363 etc With 01 example of numbers 0361 0362 0363 etc Automatic Numbering The parameters set are used only by automatic wire num
240. e values lt is fundamental to always check these configurations before starting to draw a new project in order to set the reference variables on which the type of use and behaviour of the various functions depends according to the construction requirements and standards to be adhered to When no start configuration exists the programme proceeds with its own default settings In practice the Spac_cfg ini local configuration file is stored empty CAUTION The configuration ini files are in ASCII format therefore readable and editable with any text editor these edit operations are unadvisable for less expert users 68 Spac Start 2012 Export Settings This function is used to store or change a Start Configuration starting from the local settings contained in the Spac_cfg ini file in the job order Cfg folder r 7 When an already existing file A ini name is indicated a change is made when a new file name is Him indicated a new start cfg is Fini generated save Settings lt is also possible to make Esp P NEW imi partial changes to already Local CFG rt CE G A existing configurations New Start Cfg The command opens the list of all the local configurations type the name of the new configuration intended to be generated then select which settings keys you intend to transfer to the start configuration normally all If a customer exists with the same name ass
241. e vertical falling of drops dimensions over 50 mm of water Protected against solid bodies with Protected against the falling of drops of dimensions over 12 mm water with a max inclination of 15 degrees on vertical Protected against splashes of water from all directions Protected against solid bodies with dimensions over 1 mm Protected against dust Totally protected against dust Protected against jets of water from all directions Protected against waves or powerful jets ee Protected against the effects of immersion Bg Protected against the effects of submersion O When only one of the 2 figures is used the other is replaced by the letter X Protected against solid bodies with Protected against rainfall with a max dimensions over 2 5 mm inclination of 60 degrees 266 Spac Start 2012 17 14 3D View The planimetries made entirely with Spac Start are three dimensional in both the graphic part concerning the masonry and doors and windows and in the part concerning the electrical system This command is used to set the three dimensional view direction Select This is the AutoCAD DDVPOINT command The three dimensional view of the project is essential for consulting the sections made in 3D any operation can be performed from these views View test with X 225 degrees and XY at 10 30 and 50 degrees As a standard feature you find 4 views ready for use in axonometry
242. ecify the section path The laying height is indicated by the user The height of the start and destination are taken automatically with the selection of the linked components the upward and downward paths are therefore calculated according to the difference between the laying height and that of the components selected From the start element the section accomplishes a first vertical section to reach the laying height like the subsequent horizontal sections until reaching the destination element The last section again vertical will join the laying height with the level of the destination element Firstly it is necessary to indicate The laying height E g floor laying H 0 then the function requests START Select Element Section or Node Return for options 1 point the start symbol is to be selected DESTINATION Select Element Section or Node Return for options 2 point the destination symbol is to be selected With the 1 and 2 point the laying heights are taken from the symbols selected these values were stated during insertion of the components on the drawing see par 28 2 Options 3 Pressing Return at the request for START or DESTINATION the E Options menu opens Search pressing on Select Point a point with the related height is requested it replaces the selection of the start or destination element This is the condition used when no reference symbol exists points not restrain
243. eco Utilities e Network diagram e Circuits Tag Network diagram This command opens a window for viewing Caneco circuits with tree structure The viewer shows the network diagram in extended mode showing all the circuits or compact showing only the Panel and Sub Busbar circuits Visualizzatore Caneco ES mm Switches the view from extended to compact In the compact mode it is only possible to open the folders that represent the Panels and Sub Busbars to be seen in detail Gei sl 5 This is used to see the correspondence on the drawing of the E symbol that contains the data of the circuit selected in the GH C10 network diagram C11 ZE C12 Zoom takes place automatically on the corresponding symbol P and the following message is shown in the command line TE ca D s Sat Do you want to go back to the initial es C4 view No lt Yes gt OD CR 8 CR Changes the data of the circuit or power feed selected oC OG CB Opens the edit tools currently not available Refreshes the view of the network diagram Using the right hand mouse button you can obtain the position of the window anchored to the walls or free with Allow hook Circuits Tag This command is used to highlight on the symbols the reference of the circuit they belong to The command has two states ON and OFF Activating it you are asked for the symbols on which you want to act 7 On Off IA On the symbol in the example figure there
244. ection between two terminals of different terminal blocks the first will have the second as usage It is possible to sort the terminals according to this value REP repetition contains the number of any repetitions of the terminal in the terminal block common with jumper If REP is empty it corresponds to value 1 This contains the dimension for interrupting the wire on which the terminal is inserted 15 Symbols 227 Plug Symbol The Plug symbol is used by the 6 2 Insert Connectors command the data contained in the attributes are completed automatically by this procedure This category of symbols is characterised by the presence of eh pn L attributes that are all in the preassign mode visibility is YE chosen by the customized model and does not affect operation The AutoCAD Ddatte command allows you to check the attributes contained in the symbols to check the family they Example of Connector or Plug belong to A block that comprises the following series of attributes is considered as a Plug symbol Label Default Type Description Panel IP Panel the plug or connector belongs to P Terminal Connector reference visible Block Cross IP Not used section Numi IP Input wire number or name Numm P Connector or plug pin number visible Note the data marked with are examples Type P Preassign Type I Invisible O For reasons of simplicity the plug symbol has the same attributes as the terminal b
245. ection references and organisation of the list of installations needed for project development arr Normally these two lists are set at the initial stage of the drawing In some cases a specific section prefix is DISTRIBUZIONE made to coincide for each installation Prefixes lt is possible to type new prefixes to be used for the name of sections composed of a maximum of 2 characters the new prefix is placed in the list pressing Add Using Delete it is possible to remove the prefixes that have not been used in the drawing In some cases the prefix of the section is changed to correspond with the type of installation Example AU Audio AL Alarm etc Prefix The function checks the highest number used for each section prefix present on Revision the current drawing in order to build a new index essential for proposing the immediately successive values for the references of the new sections The function does not change the references already used on the drawing so it is not possible to regenerate a referencing of the sections that has not been carried out consecutively Installations By default Spac shows the families of most commonly used installations such as Electrical Audio Tv Alarm Edp Intercom Services etc To insert new families in the list with a name composed of a maximum of 20 characters press Add Each installation is associated with a color to be able to differentiate the color of the sectio
246. ed previously for Manufacturer is followed Description The generic description is shown which is in the symbol in the attribute of the same name This datum is changed if a material code is associated pressing the Db button Additional information can be inserted optionally Function1 This is used to compile the attributes helpful to 12 1 Function legend Function2 Second line of Function Support Optional 234 e Spac Start 2012 Sub element symbol The Sub element symbol is recognised by the programme as the block contains the attribute Pres F contacts transfers auxiliary devices and additional elements are considered as Sub elements Let us take as example the insertion of the open contact NA22 Clicking once on the symbol its description is shown Clicking twice proceeds with insertion Symbol NA22 Insertion point If the insertion point is above a wire this is automatically broken by the precise dimension of the symbol If the insertion point is in empty space not on wire the function continues according to the configuration indicated in Preferences see par 4 2 Selecting a prefix in the list of those used on the drawing the list of Available references shows the filtered list of the corresponding parent symbols to choose the Name to be associated with the contact If the name of the Parent to which you want to associate the Sub element symbol is not in the list it is
247. ed already 7 possesses data these are taken Salaction automatically with no further requests The insertion of a return requires the compulsory entry of the Signal name while the Description or Branch is optional for a double start from single line Power feed retums x Each time it is possible to choose AA the different cable features and ei colors pressing the button NTS The possibility to change is denied if the signal name already exists or continuous R when the name is chosen using the list of values already entered Power Feed Returns Window i For correct use of Description or Branch see Cross Reference on Return If in the return settings see par 4 2 the option Cross in line Start and Destination is set during the insertion of a start return it is also possible to also insert the corresponding destination return on the chosen page Returns cannot be inserted in blank spaces but only after selecting a wire or line To change the data of a return only the 5 7 Ddattef command can be used it is not correct to carry out changes using the AutoCAD Eattedit or Ddatte commands O CAUTION Avoid using the AutoCAD Eattedit or Ddatte commands to change data on returns 96 Spac Start 2012 4 5 Connections Selecting Connections accesses the following dialog window where the functions used for connecting the components on the diagram through t
248. ed by elements If there are difficulties in selecting the section for example because it is perpendicular to the current view the use of Search is necessary which makes it possible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it If with 1 and 2 point existing sections are selected the derivations are executed automatically the existing section is broken into 2 sub sections keeping the original reference If the 1 or 2 point is on the end point of an existing section the section selected is continued automatically a new sub section is added to the existing section which keeps the original reference If nodes are selected with 1 and 2 point the list of the components that form them is SCH shown o Ree l 7 x 1 pt CH The function shows the provisory straight e path that joins the two symbols selected z XS D After selecting START and DESTINATION the section reference window opens automatically 286 Spac Start 2012 d Then the request to select intermediate points is activated 3 point Any 3 4 5 etc point changes the initially direct path with intermediate sections With A Cancel the 27 4 5 etc point is deleted if it has not been entered correctly Pressing Return the direct section drawn temporarily becomes final ending the function Select intermediate points 3 point Cancel lt intermediate points gt Re
249. ed by the other variables On connectors this value is empty and therefore sorting has no effect By default terminals are sorted according to the input wire number Numl Sorting by NumM terminal number is possible only when the datum has been used correctly during insertion of the terminals on the drawing Sorting on Numl NumM etc becomes a priority when the Cross section variable is set as Not estimateo Sorting by Usage is feasible only after assigning the necessary information to all the terminals on the drawing see par 6 4 Sorting is activated by Customize pressing the Sort by Usage button With Logic priority in the list is given to the characters numbers and lastly numbers associated with characters With Alphabetical priority in the list is given to the numbers then numbers associated with characters and lastly characters sequence of set of Ascii characters Ascending and descending act on both characters and numerical values The processing of the multi sheets generates the list of the terminal blocks and connectors drawn Terminal block and Plug Connector list Name TERMINAL BLOC XBM TERMINAL BLOC XM1 TERMINAL BLOC XM TERMINAL BLOC XM3 Plug CH1 Plug CN Plug CN3 TERMINAL BLOC XG pete List of Terminal Blocks and Connectors Edit This allows you to act on the data contained in the terminal blocks or connectors to change them The changes made are given on the drawing using Update
250. ed if it is present on the drawing and not for those inserted subsequently Command always active The command is recalled automatically in a cyclic way Multiple Insertions The drawing is repeated without recall the command O It is suggested to insert the Single Feeds Table before the execution of the single feed drawing 190 Spac Start 2012 9 2 Single feed Number wires This is a specific command for the wires numbering on the single feed schemes Sigla filo Sigla Filo 1 Mumero e Prefissi O Suffissi Walori separati da spazi ROTM ROTM wi C abilita inserimento PE Annulla Wire numbering of Single Feed drawings The single feed wires numbering assigns several wire values to each single wire line The quantity of values assigned depends on the Polarity configured for each line during the graphical design see 9 1 Single feed Draw This command can be used easily it is enough to set the start number and the combination of prefix suffix to be used The traditional wires numbering should not be used for this type of schemes not adequate in this case a single wire value is assigned to each single wire each line Polarit 3F PE Trifase Cond Prat gt Wee See 5 1 Number wires The option Enable PE insertion is used to add a connection with a dedicated terminal visible in the terminal block As for the traditional wires numbering it is possible to
251. ed the size of the Sheet Width to avoid overstepping the margins of the master title block with the table On the basis of the maximum number of lines foreseen and the height of the texts the maximum total height of the table is calculated This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Height to avoid overstepping the margins of the master title block with the table This represents the basic configuration of the output fields where applicable Pressing Default the current configuration is stored in local mode see par 4 2 for subsequent uses If confirmed without pressing Default the configuration is considered as occasional and used only once The function asks you to Select the table insertion point The configuration of the previous figure corresponds with the following graphic result Lope pes pene Tipo Type Descrizione Description A ruttare Marke Ee SE E TEA men LAMPADINA GROUPE SCHYEIDER SD Mel PULSANTE LUMINOSO VERDE GROUPE SCHNEIDER ZP HEI ELEMENTO Ol CONTATTO GROUPE SCHNEIDER aH UL U LAMPADNA GAQUPE SCHNEIDER SHSM Ws PULSANTE LUMINOSO YERDE GROUPE SCHEIDER ZP DEI Geen Ol CONTATTO GROUPE SCHEIDER H Jo Morsetio passante 25 mm ELECO Mirto pasare 25m ao og rs H Jm Moreton passante 25mm JE Jo H Example of Internal Bill of Materials sorted by Reference The configuration for drawing the table includes the following options Insertion Point When several sheets are needed to complete the draw
252. ed to 12E is chosen like 02T or 11T etc it is possible to add more than one head The Heads are symbols contained in the folder Libraries Riferim Tsa Ref Hd When the added reference is confirmed the error message is removed immediately The addition of heads also involves updating adding an article the type of material this solution is valid only when the Bill of Materials has not been established yet see par 8 1 O To remove the heads simply select a new contactor The error or fault messages that occur during processing can partly be solved with edit of View Parents for details reference should be made to the Errors paragraph see par 7 3 7 Cross Reference 149 7 2 Pin marking This option allows you to process the Parent Sub element and Element symbols present in the job order finding the respective pin configuration described in the settings and giving it on the symbol Correspondence is determined by the presence of the PIN attributes see par 15 2 Cross reference with pin marking facilitates reading of the electric diagram by the operator during wiring and maintenance operations as the connection details are described fis Processing takes place according to the settings made in Cross Reference see par 4 2 Parent oy a dic ill Code of KA1 RIF1_44 NO Pin marking Code of KA2 12E OK Pin marking Element Symbols HL1 and HL2 Code ignored if present The parent and
253. eed to delete them they are automatically updated also in position during the new numbering Pressing Update the wire is assigned the new number 100 Pressing Not Updated the previous Wire Content value of 1 is kept To automatically update a series of wires activate Update Following Wires before pressing Update The Number Contents are nil if the block containing the wire number is graphically deleted 7 SE The Wire Contents correspond to the real paste selected branch anii value assigned to the line m If the Number contents do not coincide with those of the Wire the case is that of Non Coinciding Values Non Coinciding Values is usually caused by changes made to the wire no using the AutoCAD commands Eattedit or Ddatte This operation is not correct as it only graphically changes the text contained in the symbol of the number but not the real data in the line extended data The Terminal Contents are nil when no terminal is connected on the wire it is Various when the Input and Output wires on the terminal have different values When the terminal data are changed using the AutoCAD Eattedit or Ddatte commands incorrect operation the case is again that of Non Coinciding Values Pressing Update the Non Coinciding Values are updated unequivocally on the whole branch The wire numbers must be changed using the special 5 7 Ddattef
254. eeeeeeesssaaaaeeeeeeeessssaaeeeeeeees 31 EE dE 32 GaN FIG AA oe PP E AUS o A 33 Customer Management 34 le EE 35 SIGO IO IO aa 36 TOD Ee 36 0 Ola A A eer rt enter ete eter nee rar eere tree 37 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM cccccccsscseseeeneesseeeseesaeenenenes OO List of Contents 1 3 SHEET MANAGEMENT eene ee 41 SN OREATE MOLI CHEE TS indias 41 NV o E 43 EE eee eee eee PEON Ee 43 32 CHANGE SHEET KEE 44 SEANS IESE E e WEEN 45 SS RREVOUS SHEET o a a a e o ro EE 45 SE PP EN 45 5 0 DELETE SHEET arcano nta IO IO onto ea 46 SS IESO EE KEE 47 FOP e EE 47 eG AS EE 48 Era EE 48 O NEE 49 TST CAE EE 50 SCOT CLASSI CAL EEN 50 3 7 ENTER OTORED SHEETS EE 51 NEWS ae o a a e reas me arborea ar eto ei 52 SEENEN 52 ES WAE aO N EEEE A EAE AE EE TEA E weGan adn EA P te steno EEA AAT 52 EIERE 52 EE 52 S TOE 0 AA A Aboard oa beeteite 53 Sl tori MUETIESHEE EE 53 912 COPY EEN 54 3 13 MOVE BETWEEN SHEE Ee 54 A SHEE KEE 55 Waben KEEN 56 3 AO PRINT OHCET O ae didactica dci eii 57 SEET 58 SI A A A A A A aca weans 58 10 lee We tenes sree A 59 PASSION VR EE 59 Olid SAEED EEN ee EE E dae 60 FICVISION Ee 60 FACVISIONS CO CIO an ada 61 o o A A 62 Eeer 62 SS Se A uo q Eo anecasen nai can mua eneiearitanleanteenie en ataniee ee 63 EE EEN 63 E EE 64 MASIA E 66 SCO SS EE 66 A GENERAL COMMAND Suicidio 67 SETTING anni cidad anida 67 ASE TUN E S AE E o e SA 68 EIERE 69 NC o A 69 Chan de Stat EE 69 M
255. een the symbols is normally symbol legend E suggested by the function however you can only once rh Eipresa 10164 P PE 1 Presa per televisione TP Fresa per telefono Interruttore bipolare Funta luce Example of symbol Legend adjust this value decreasing it when needing to save space The text style used is the current one at the 3 time of use Ki Spac draws the symbol legend automaticall 2 on the specific Layer called Legend Quantity means the total of identical symbols 7 present on the planimetry 16 22 Utilities e 343 22 6 Laying Legend This is a symbols library used to graphically represent the Laying type associated during section drafting operations see par 18 1 Posa tipo 11 Cavi multipolari o unipolari con guaina con o senza armatura e cayi con isolamento minerale posati o distanziati da pareti Example of laying symbol Type 11 This library can be used implementing the various symbols individually or taking the summary tables pages that contain them suitable for drawings in scale 1 1 They are normally used to make the lists more comprehensible where the sections are documented only with the numerical correspondence of the laying type 22 Print Planimetric to PDF This function allows you to print the planimetry on Pdf format files Spac PDF Writer is a Spac proprietary print driver therefore the set up of Acrobat PDF Writer is not
256. eets contained in them Pressing Table proceeds with the drawing of the job order list in table form parametric mode This function requires the parameters for the drawing Designer MULT_DESCRIPTION Date Customer JOB_DESCRIPTION Path Field Title Commessa Multifoglio Pref Disegnatore Descrizione Disegno Data 40 Disegnatore Cliente of Data Descrizione Path CC Zeen JI Ges Every datum Tag contained in the Available fields is information which pressing Add is inserted in the Output fields to represent a column of the table Each Tag possesses two variables the width and the column title which can be changed by pressing the Edit button Number of Lines Texts Height Titles Height Table Width Table Height Standard 32 Spac Start 2012 This value is used to split the table in several parts also on different sheets because after completion of the maximum number of lines a new insertion point or continuation on the next sheet is requested This is the height of all the texts contained in the table This parameter affects the height of each line proportionately thus the total height of the table This is the height of the column titles This parameter affects the calculation of the total height of the table This is the total sum of the widths assigned to each output field The size is expressed in millimetres This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Width to av
257. ement is done according to two possible priorities From Caneco Circuits are designed with the same placement visible in Caneco Alpha numerical Circuits are designed in an alphabetic order according to the reference ID O This configuration does not exclude the possibility to execute future modifications and customizations with the regular design tools Caneco is an optional software that is not provided with SPAC Start www caneco eu O Chapters from number 10 to number 11 are not present in this manual 9 Single feed Draw 193 194 Spac Start 2012 12 Utilities 12 1 Function legend The Parent Sub element and Element category symbols contain the Function1 and Function2 attributes for describing the function of the component in the electrical diagram The comments are compiled on the diagram using Edit symbol or XS see par 15 4 Every change to already existing functions involves the subsequent updating of the legend Processing takes place for the Panels selected on all the multi sheets indicated pressing Scan Multi sheets The data can be sorted by Reference Panel or Sheet List of components Function Sorted by Code Function DIGITAL INPUTS MODULE RELAY OUTPUTS MODULE PLC RACK PROTECTIONS CLOSED CAPACITOR CARRIAGE MOTOR THERMAL OVERLOAD SWITCH 24VDC AUXILIARY FUSE RACK 0 PLO POWER SUPPLY MODULE 24V DC 1 0 POWER PACK ALARM LIGHTING DEVICE LIGHTING BOARD 110V AC POWER SUPPLY CARRIAG
258. ements HL1 and HL2 are placed at the top of the list The terminals total of 9 are listed with single item ELK3 independently not in groups It is fundamental to note the high number of lines obtained List sorting by Type or Panel Type is the most detailed system Compact View During compact viewing the Reference Sheet and Panel of the codes are not indicated it is therefore possible to bring together all the identical codes in the same quantity Bill of materials by type Manufacturer KU 9151 ABB 1 ABBSOTSR Ave 2 455 T02 Ave 2 563490240000 Finder 1 60123024 Finder 3 601230240240 Finder 1 Compact Sorting by Type 3 columns of data 5 lines The uncoded elements HL1 and HL2 are placed at the top of the list and marked with 3 asterisks The terminals total of 9 are listed in a single group therefore 1 group of 9 It is fundamental to note the reduced number of lines obtained O Compact by Type list sorting is the least detailed system lt is often used for assembly purchases 178 Spac Start 2012 List by panel and Type The components are grouped according to the panel they belong to then according to Manufacturer and lastly according to the catalogue code in alphabetical sequence The codes that form part of the same component macrocode are not listed consecutively Bill of materials by type and panel Manufacturer Telemecanique 1 Wey 5 KU 915 1 ABB 0G 1 A5BS9OTSR Ave QG 2
259. en power contact Triple contact power Normally closed contact Closed power contact Delayed pickup F RD_ Delayed drop out NN e The REG attribute without number contains the position of the corresponding Parent symbol FA FAP ee FS Transtercontact pn am FA2 Normally open double contact me Fan FAP FAPn PRE rap E 144 Spac Start 2012 Example The figure shows two Parent symbols coils KA1 and KA2 and two Sub element symbols contacts KA2 and KA1 located as example on page no 1 in segment 1 and 2 Attributes on Parent symbols Pres M KA1 Code REF1 44 Offset 000 0 10 0 KA1 Code 12E Offset 0 10 0 Attributes on Sub element symbols KA1 Pres FA KA2 Pres FC The code is entered during insertion of the symbol on the drawing and can be changed at any time using the XS command Edit symbol The default value is set during symbol configuration After scanning the multi sheet the general Report situation is shown the report shows any errors or faults that can not be edited or solved in this working session Pressing on view Parents it is possible to go into the detail of the registrations of every component as in the figure in this session it is possible to make changes editing like the replacement of the contactor or Je Pins on sub elements _ Pins on Component the addition of heads if the coil is unsuitable for Po taking all the necessary contacts in practice wes action
260. ent ways 1 All a list is processed of all the pins of the connector indicated With a double click or pressing View the object is highlighted on the drawing 2 Pin it is necessary to type or select the specific number of the pin to be sought Selecting a component on the topographic Layout cabinet interior its position is sought and shown in the diagram and vice versa To run a large number of consecutive searches you are advised to continue with Use backup to quickly access the data processed with a previous Scan multi sheet remember to remove the elliptical marker symbol from the drawing manually O CAUTION Avoid interrupting the function with the Esc key Should this occur inadvertently 202 Spac Start 2012 12 4 Translator Blocks These symbols are specific for containing phrases that will have to be translated Selecting a symbol you are requested to complete one or more lines of comment manually The symbol in the figure has 4 lines of comment AUMENTAZIONE AUSILIARI 110 TEXT1 AUXILIARY POWER FEED type TEXT2 110V type Symbol Trad2 dwg TEXT3 Return TEXT4 Return The first 2 lines are for the original language while 3 and 4 will be completed by the translation The symbol in the figure has only 2 lines ALIMENTA ZONE AUSILIARI 110 TEXT1 110V AUXILIARY POWER FEED type Symbol Trad1 dwg TEXT3 Return The Translator module is not included with Spac Start The Tran
261. erencing the wires on the whole job order unequivocally As there are many ways and regulations governing the numbering of wires before starting numbering it is necessary to consult the settings of Wire and Terminal Numbers see par 4 2 to customize the numbering according to requirements All the lines drawn on the diagram are considered as wires hence numerable with the exception of e Polylines and Multilines e Non orthogonal lines e Neglected lines i e those of the color not to be processed see Color Management par 4 2 Particular operating cases are considered e Lines connected with returns e Lines already numbered e Lines with inconsistent data Wire numbering can be done in the manual or automatic mode see par 5 2 Numbering The manual wire numbering command calls up this dialog window with the possibility of numbering by increment 1 2 3 or by string 1 R1 1R380V etc The Wire Reference is the actual value assigned to the wire This can be the result of various compositions of prefixes formats sheet no and progressive no The progressive number is set from the Number box default proposes the next one after the last one saved The parameters set in the configuration can temporarily be changed only for the command in progress local pressing Settings see par 4 2 The Wire Data can be changed each time or stored as default pressing the button
262. erminal has to keep the same number on the output wire or not during subsequent wire numbering Same Input All the terminals or connectors selected on the diagram change their status Output to Numl NumoO This is certainly the mostly used condition The wire connected upstream of the terminal Numl keeps the same value downstream NumO In this case it is sufficient to select the wire only once to number the whole connection see par 5 1 Different Input All the terminals or connectors selected on the diagram change their status Output to Numi different from NumO This is the condition in which the wire connected upstream of the terminal Numl is wanted with a different value than the one downstream NumO In this case it is necessary to number the wire before and after the terminal Based on The status of the variable is reset During the subsequent wire numbering Attributes one case or the other is considered based on the real content of the attributes Num and NumO of the terminals O The Based on Attributes setting adjusts operation of the terminal to any changes made manually on the block using the AutoCAD Ddatte command 6 8 Remove Terminals This command allows you to remove the terminals and plugs connectors on the whole Sheet or on the selected wires Removal does not only involve the deletion of the graphic symbol of the terminal but it acts restoring wire numbering correctly In the cas
263. ers to the signal attribute of the return symbol The Wire Content represents the real value attributed to the line If the Return content does not coincide with that of the Wires the case is that of Non Coinciding Values this error is usually caused by changes made using the AutoCAD Eattedit or Ddatte commands incorrect operation When Update selected branch only is not active all the returns with the same name present in all the job order multi sheets are updated automatically 116 Spac Start 2012 Terminal Ddattef d This is used to change the data of terminals or of connectors and plugs see par 6 1 avoiding using the AutoCAD Eattedit or Ddatte commands incorrect operation Selecting a terminal all the data that have been given to it during insertion on the drawing are shown At this stage it is possible to change the Panel Terminal Block and characteristics of the material Terminal characteristic modification VLM 10 16 EIK10 EIK3 ELECO d NORMAL IS cs Setting Num and NumO is used to change the status of the wire numbering variable Input same or different from Output see par 4 2 It is practically the integration of the 6 7 Numl and NumO settings command but limited only to the terminal selected Any Non Coinciding Values message normally due to the different content between number wire or terminal is solved using
264. ert an extended description for each of them max 35 characters During the creation of a new terminal block you choose whether it is for normal terminals or for multiple terminals NumM This is the Terminal Number this value increases automatically at every insertion It can be used to manage the sequence of terminals in the terminal block and to identify multiple terminals The NumM Request option allows you to insert any value each time 6 6 NumM numbering changes the sequence according to requirements Numl This is the Input wire Number it is considered only if insertion of the terminal takes place on a wire that has not been numbered yet NumO This is the Output wire Number it is considered only if insertion of the terminal takes place on a wire that has not been numbered yet The output number is always calculated in relation to the input number they are the same if the corresponding variable has been set in the Settings otherwise NumoO is increased by the value set as increment NumM Request For every terminal insertion you are asked NumM Value lt l gt This setting is active during the use of Multiple terminals A single prefix can be enabled that is used for all the wires in the following example numbering starting from Numl no 1 is supposed L1 L2 E MI M1 Wi Several prefixes can be enabled This configuration is very simple as it suffices to insert them separated by a space i
265. et Utility Sheet title Sheet legend Master Title Blocks Sheet slides Sheet title d It is possible to associate a title to every sheet present in the job order using the 3 1 Create Multi sheet command or manually taking it from the select window These blocks have two Title attributes one for inserting the page content description the other for any translation into a foreign language The content can be changed manually using the AutoCAD Ddatte command or using Create Multi sheet When there are different types of symbols on the same drawing it is possible to standardise using Create Multi sheet General is shown The sheet title block is inserted automatically in coordinate 0 0 a customized title block corresponds to every type of title block The use of these blocks allows you to obtain a list of all the descriptions associated with the pages using the Sheet legend command at the end of the job order Title symbol The blocks are stored in the Spac Libraries Symbols folder each dwg block corresponds with a sld image slide with the IOLO same name for viewing in the dialog window in the figure the O symbol is in exploded form TITOLON ee A The attribute Title is for the main description while Tei is TitleO dwg Symbol used for any translation You can customize new blocks storing them in the same folder as those already present The block name must be consecutive to the names alread
266. et during Installations Settings configuration see par 17 1 In the example in the figure the symbol XS1 has been inserted with the drawing in scale 1 50 this scale has then been changed to 1 75 the symbol XS2 is therefore larger than the first one Ga TA XS Scale 1 50 Scale 1 75 Change blocks dimension is used exactly in these conditions where it is necessary to standardise the size of the two symbols If the enlargement factor 7 5 is entered not 75 because the Ree SE p unit is cm all the symbols on the drawing take the same size ST as XS2 which remains unchanged ue aE The command works according to choice on the selected DA D symbols Select option or on all the symbols in the planimetry OS YC that are not frozen All option Scale 1 75 The symbols hooked to one another because they belong to the same box are put back together automatically When they are hooked but with different laying height because they belong to the same node they must be put back together manually after this operation 332 Spac Start 2012 21 6 Element height On This command is used to highlight the relevant Laying height on the symbols The command has two states ON and OFF When it is ON you are asked for the symbols on which you want to act its Select Elements Select lt All gt Quit J 10 7164 Pressing Enter the function acts on all the symbols present in the planimetry VI otherwise the c
267. ete to remove it Change attribute visibility x Only selected symbols Height in om VISIBLE SUPPORTO change Visbity to VISIBILE the change takes place only for Legend description INVISIBLE CARICO change Visibility to VISIBILE Type INVISIBLE the blocks selected yp Manufacturer INVISIBLE Description INVISIBLE PR4 article INVISIBLE z PRA mido ae Identical to selection INVISIBLE acts on all the blocks identical to the one selected of the sheet multi sheet or job order All symbols all the blocks are changed on the sheet multi sheet or job Street order that possess at least one J ilishi of the attributes to be changed Pressing Default the current configuration is stored in local mode see par 4 2 for subsequent uses of the same command If confirmed without pressing Default the configuration is considered as occasional and used only once 17 General commands e 269 Force value This command is helpful for making changes HL HL H HL common to many symbols simultaneously VERLE NERO GIALLO BLU Force Value of an Altribute COLORE HL Dean mL HES e ROSSO HLT ROSSO The command is suitable for quickly changing for example the brand or model of a group of components Adapt Width T and T T Double utility to increase T or reduce T the width of texts and attributes AUXILIARY CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY The function asks you to select also AUXILIARY CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY re
268. ettings The Spac Settings allow you to customize operation of the programme Storage of these settings takes place on 2 levels On this subject it is necessary to distinguish two configuration environments e Start Configuration e Local Configuration When a new job order is created the Start Configuration see par 2 5 is used as base for the Local Configuration job order The start configurations can be numerous for example one for every type of job or for every customer They are stored in the ini files in the Spac Libraries Cfg folder Often the files have the same name as the customer to obtain automatic association during the creation of a new job order When a new job order is started the start configuration is automatically copied and stored in local mode To change or create new configurations it is necessary to use Export Settings When a new job order is started the start configuration is copied in local mode in the Spac_cfg ini file in the job order Cfg folder to obtain the basic settings The subsequent customizations of the settings typical of the project in progress will be stored only in local mode leaving the start settings unchanged Fo New Job Order TE ee ee Local CFG In the settings it is important to indicate the sheet squaring parameters title block coordinates and number of divisions segments correct operation of all the commands depends on thes
269. eway Component and Terminal block The various functions operate by default in scale 1 10 so that the drawing is generally suitable for a sheet in A3 size The scale value is changed using the Cabinet Layout Scale command The dimensions are stored in the Armadi ini Cabinets ini files in the Spac Libraries Databases folder intemal cabinet layoul To store new A A OM A measurements in the file press the Ins key Main Panel zeg Panel Panel Door and to remove them press Del The button is used to find a TEE measurement between two points on the drawing On Board Plate This is used to draw the panel internal plate After setting or choosing the dimensions Base x Height press the Draw button and you will be asked Plate bottom left point Depending on the plate drawn it is possible to continue with the raceways and various components Raceway This is used to draw the raceways positioned on the panel internal plate After choosing the pertinent panel helpful for counting the raceways in the Bill of Materials it is necessary to set the dimensions Width x Depth the sizes can be indicated typing the values in the fields provided or can be taken from two different databases the common one of the Armadi ini Cabinets ini file and the specific one for raceways Canaline Dat Raceways ini Drawing takes place in reference to the points identified on the axis pressing Draw you are asked
270. extracted from the Selected blocks on the drawing or from all the blocks on the sheets in the list When All blocks is set generically it might be helpful to activate the filter of the ones really helpful and involved so pressing the Change button the list of these symbols can be defined The data are extracted on the basis of the Tag list to extract the list of the attributes is composed pressing the Change button 17 General commands 271 272 e Spac Start 2012 18 Sections 18 1 Laying Sections Normally the drawing of the sections is made as soon as the electrical symbols have been positioned on the planimetry every path of Raceway is called SECTION In turn the sections can be subdivided into sub sections This occurs for the more complex paths Laying Section sl All the electrical components mog do gg positioned in the planimetry ANE TAVAL can be connected to LAYING TO CEILING K r e LAYING TO FLOOR CH sections many possibilities exist for generating a section Ss j path The most suitable one is See BEE to be chosen time by time It is however possible to also draw the sections first with free mode and insert the various components afterwards in the start and end points Every section or group of sub sections has a Reference and is associated with a System This describes a path that is specified during drawing with Laying type
271. f 15 mm this diameter must be at least 1 8 times the circumscribed diameter of the cable bundle contained in the conduit itself A low cram coefficient is advantageous with regard to the result of cable pullout capability Std CEI 64 9 art 4 1 01 calls for the extraction of a cable from the bundle comprised between two junction boxes and checking that the cable has not undergone damage consisting of abrasion of the protective coating O This calculation cannot be carried out when a prefabricated raceway is selected 324 Spac Start 2012 20 2 Channel database This allows you to make changes and customizations to the raceway database stored in the L tratte dat file There are three types of raceway Circular Rectangular and Prefabricated You can change the data of an already existing raceway Change remove it definitively from the list Delete or insert new ones Add Raceway Database Manufacturer DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX DIELECTRIX Sub Sect Size mm GUAINA SPIRALATA TERMIC DFT 28 GUAINA SPIRALATA TERMIC DFT 32 GUAINA SPIRALATA TERMIC DFT 35 GUAINA SPIRALATA TERMIC DFT 40 GUAINA SPIRALATA TERMIC DFT 50 GUAINA SPIRALATA TERMIC DFT 60 GUAINA GUIDACAV LISC DFL 14G GUAINA GUIDACAV LISC DFL 16G GUAINA GUIDACAV LISC DFL 20G GUAINA GUIDACAV LISC DFL 26G GUAINA
272. f already existing job orders These data are stored in the Job Description _ SP file present in every job order folder The start configuration can only be changed if the job order is still without multi sheets The choice of the customer implies the automatic association of two master title blocks the first is used on functional drawings and the second in planimetries these data can be edited only accessing the Customer management section Customers not associated with title blocks can be defined in which case it will be necessary to enter the symbol manually on Layer 0 immediately after opening a New Multi sheet see par 3 18 In addition the choice of the customer implies the automatic association of the start configuration if a configuration exists with the same customer name The choice of the start configuration makes it possible to start a new drawing with the 4 1 Setting and 4 2 Settings parameters already established In practice if you start a new job order associated with the customer Sdproget the start configuration Sdproget will be proposed to you only if it exists In planimetric diagrams the drawing scale 1 10 1 25 etc as insertion scale affects the sheet format AO A1 A2 etc the two pieces of information can be changed later on the drawing without having to act on the customer configuration 28 Spac Start 2012 Open Job Order After choosing a job order this wi
273. f cables 3 1x2 5 has been laid between the various symbols using parallel multiple laying In the initial laying E1 was selected as start element and XS1 as destination then still from E1 to XS2 as new destination then from El to XS3 It should be noted that 3 cable bundles have been laid in the initial section in the next one 2 O Multiple laying is not allowed using the Select section manually mode 19 Cables 317 19 2 Cable List This command executes the list of all the cables present in the sections on the drawing It is also possible to view the corresponding details for each cable Lal Pressing on the indicator the list is sorted alphabetically on the datum selected Details This allows you to view all the parts of the cable selected in the list The List and Details are consulting utilities therefore no form of change is possible View The View button is particularly useful for tracking the position of a cable in the section on the drawing In fact it is highlighted to facilitate its recognition The function requests Zoom Zoom End Return Pressing and you can control the enlargement while with Return the function is ended keeping the current zoom or restoring the initial view Change This allows you to see and change the cables in the sections If a single section is selected at a time it is possible to change its reference only of single cables With a double click th
274. f confirmed without pressing Default the configuration is considered as occasional and used only once 268 e Spac Start 2012 Height Type the required text height Color Type the number code of the color required clicking on the coloured rectangle takes you directly to the window of the colors available Offset Offset is used to set the new position entering the movement in the relevant polar coordinate for example to move attributes 10mm downwards it is necessary to indicate O and 10 x y Rotation The attributes are rotated by the inclination expressed in degrees Text style This is the list of text styles created by the AutoCAD Style command stored in the current drawing Width factor The value 1 is the width factor of the original font values below 1 obtain compression of the text and over 1 expansion Attributes visibility This command allows you to change the visibility status of the attributes Selecting a drawing component a list is shown with the condition of all the attributes that form part of it Select the attributes to be changed in the Attribute Selection list then press the Add button to insert them in the Attributes to edit list Pressing Add the function automatically switches the visibility status but the status can also be set manually Press Change to change the characteristic of an attribute already inserted in the list of those to be changed and Del
275. f the files with DWH extension and can therefore be handled like normal drawings for any changes or updates O The use of these commands is described in the AutoCAD User manual Graphics SPAC Start necessarily requires to work properly that the graphic part of a block be drawn on Layer 0 attributes included There are no restraints concerning the colors and types of line that can be used even if it is preferable for reasons of homogeneity to retain the characteristics of already existing ones The DALAYER logic color is not to be mistaken with color 7 white as the Dalayer is used by the programme for drawing wires distinguishing the colour of the two entities wire and symbol is particularly effective when drafting the diagram Attributes The attributes are special entities composed of text To use an attribute it is firstly necessary to define it using the Ddattdef command They become like parts to be included in the storage of a block only through the attributes is it possible to take information and transfer it to external databases A block without attributes is therefore to be considered as a purely graphic element lt is possible to associate different attributes to a block provided that each one is distinguished by a different label in the case of inserting a block with several attributes Spac will ask for the value of each A constant attribute retains the same value every time the block is inserted Attributes can also b
276. file 252 e Spac Start 2012 17 3 Walls This command is used to draw internal and external walls for making the planimetry of any type of building Spac draws the walls on the specific layer called Walls Wall Features ff The more frequently used Wall a width and height are stored SS presing the Default button and wall height ae they will be proposed the next time the command is used Wall width Wal generating line pe aA i Ge The Wall generating line is used Ge GC SE bf E Z to set the position of the wall trace 3 moving the trace to the left or right Manaia Aenda means working with the internal or external measurements of the wall ld Pressing the Default button the E most frequently used condition is stored Dimensions cm Layer MURI START se See 17 10 Building Utility The function requests Initial point 1 point Direction Enter for options Re point Wall length in cm lt 150 gt 100 type the precise distance Direction Enter for options Enter for Options It is possible to express Direction also typing the rotation from the keyboard 0 45 60 etc 150 With the previous example we have drawn a piece of wall as shown in the figure opposite the wall sides have been closed automatically 1 oint as set in the Options e E Arc it is possible to draw circular walls The O a available choices are the same as those of the 100 2 Point AutoCAD Arc
277. from the symbols selected these values were stated during insertion of the components on the drawing see par 28 2 Options Pressing Return at the request for START or DESTINATION the Options menu opens pressing on Select Point a point with the related height is requested it replaces the selection of the start or destination element This is the condition used when no reference symbol exists points not restrained by elements If there are difficulties in selecting the section for example because it is perpendicular to the current view the use of Search is necessary which makes it possible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it If with 1 and 2 point existing sections are selected the derivations are executed automatically the existing section is broken into 2 sub sections keeping the original reference If the 1 or 2 point is on the end point of an existing section the section selected is continued automatically a new sub section is added to the existing section which keeps the original reference If nodes are selected with 1 and 2 point the list of the components that form them is Ss shown K The function shows the provisory straight H Sot path that joins the two symbols selected Ppt E The laying height is adjusted according to X WAKA the destination component 9 LI p db After selecting START and DESTINATION the sec
278. gs Panel Local Prefixes Numl and NumO work in the same way as already described for terminals The parameters set during configuration can be changed locally only for the command in progress pressing Settings see par 4 2 After choosing the type of connector panel and reference the symbols are inserted It is possible to select one wire at a time or enter a point in the blank space and the fence mode selection is activated automatically 124 Spac Start 2012 The first fence has intersected the Example of 6 pole connector x three lines upstream with pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 and PE then 3 pins of the connector are connected to preference the pins marked with gt N lt are already connected only those left free can be selected NOTE The value of the pin is written in the NumM attribute on symbols this value is an attribute that is always visible GROUP RB The second fence has intersected the three lines downstream the Associate pin window is shown where pins A B and C are marked with gt N as they are occupied only those left free can be selected NOTE to graphically rotate the connector symbol simply click on the image before generating the second fence this allows you to choose a different graphic form from those available Cancel Insertion of 6 pole connector through 2 fences Deleting the poles of a connector from th
279. gs of the various commands Enabling this item when a processing is called the multi sheet will be selected automatically by default though it is possible to act manually each time i To manage during processing Multi sheets processed with The position of drawings in the database cannot be changed except with the Job Orders Path function every job order corresponds to a folder directory All the drawings multi sheet generated for the job together with all the other configuration databases mdb supporting and backing files that have been necessary for that project are saved in this folder Progetto A Progetto B 3 C Spac Tutorial For example to correctly view the list of the job orders shown Help in the figure ProjectA ProjectB the Path must be set in SI Libretie Spac Job Orders E 23 Program O The path of Job Orders Path must not contain punctuation mark characters CAUTION If drawings are moved by hand to other folders or subfolders they can no longer be seen with the Job Orders Management function Open Multi sheet It is possible to open a multi sheet for the first time or open an already existing drawing New opening Drawing type selection as soon as the new drawing is opened you will be required to answer the request to Select drawing type The appropriate commands and symbols are loaded according to the choice Selecting PLANIMETRIC Diagram causes the sub
280. haracters With Change it is possible to rename the zones 17 General commands 265 When Not Associated is pressed the list is accessed of all the symbols without zone and you can also associate them from this position using the list of Zones at the bottom and the Associate button 71 The detail of this CAMERA DA LETTO planimetry shows a F20 division into 4 different zones only 2 of which have the same degree of IP protection Spac Start 2072 is compatible with the zones whose name is indicated with a reference as in the Example of application Zone Management figure z E ee INGRESO ai P20 The use of the zones is fundamental for 22 1 View management operations IP Degree of protection The enclosures must be able to ensure an appropriate degree of protection against determinate external agents and against direct contacts in every direction Boxes contain electrical equipment with the purpose of protecting enclosures persons and the equipment contained The degree of protection is distinguished by the letters IP International Protection followed by 2 figures that respectively indicate the conformity with the conditions established by the Standard for protection against the penetration of solid bodies and against water as per the following table Solid bodies Water Brief description Brief description Not protected Not protected Protected against solid bodies with Protected against th
281. he color of the layer Search If you fail to select the section because it is perpendicular to the current view use of the Search function is necessary which makes it possible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it Delete All Tall the information present on the drawing is deleted automatically Delete Select It is possible to select the information to be deleted from the drawing However the information can take different forms in particular conditions as for example occurs on sections divided into conduits see par 18 1 7 The section drawn in the example is divided into 3 A conduits the dimension of the raceway 30x10 is TR3 0 SAAR 39x10 given only once while every conduit has its own Eon information about the cables contained TRICO 20 The information is also inserted at the end of the 19 1 Cable laying and 20 1 Dimension Raceways commands 296 Spac Start 2012 18 3 Section List This command generates the list of all the sections and sub sections present on the drawing lt allows you to change certain properties such as for example the raceway type and laying type It is also possible to view the relevant details for every section List of Segments total number 67 Reference Installation mpati Laying Lung im Nr Sotto Tratte ILLUMINAZIONE ILLUMINAZIONE DISTRIBUZIONE GENERALE ILLUMINAZIONE ILLUMINAZIONE ILLUMINAZIONE ILLUMIN
282. he drawing can be updated with the new changes The Filters option is very practical especially when working with very substantial lists as it allows you to choose the data to be viewed The filter is not stored in such a way as to view the complete list at every access to the command Or Free names Invertitore e Presa 104 2P PE EL Fresa 164 2P PE 5 E Presa CEE 164 2P PE e Presa CEE 164 3P PE Proiettore Riflettore Pulsante Funto luce Quadro di distribuzione 21 Elements 327 CSV File Pressing on File activates the configuration window for generating an ASCII data extraction file The file name is LISTELEM CSV and it is generated in the job order directory Data hidden by the use of filters are not extracted in the CSV file Drawing Pressing on Drawing proceeds with the drawing of the Cable list in table form parametric mode This option allows you to draw respecting the planimetry scale in proportion a table with the same contents as shown in the list Every datum Tag contained in the Available fields is information which pressing Add is inserted in the Output fields to represent a column of the table Each Tag possesses two variables the width and the column title which can be changed by pressing the Edit button Number of Lines Texts Height Titles Height Table Width Table Height Standard This value is used to split the table in several parts also on different sheet
283. he installation momentarily frozen Using New proceeds with the choice of the block already present on the drawing or the new symbol to represent the power feed panel then the function opens the following dialog window Alimentazione BT per Icc NI Rete Riferimento ALIMENTAZION Regime M TT Horma Tensione BT 4 200 e dU Ondine Corrente disponibile A lcc3 Max al Quadra 4 IT pzioni di default Annulla Elimina Quadro a valle Quadro generale BT Riferimento BT Protezione Gesang Prot CT Ditt Urra we Network calculation is fixed according to the national Std CEI 64 8 it is then necessary to choose the earthing system voltage and voltage drop at the origin General panel LV the Reference also indicates the name of the symbol on the drawing in addition to the current values it is also necessary to indicate the type of protection and protection at indirect contacts At confirmation of the settings the function requests the insertion point of the symbol selected at the start LGBT Using Default options the current data configuration is stored for subsequent uses To remove a power feed the Delete button must be used in order to also delete all the circuits that depend on it Using any other deleting command risks causing misalignments between the information contained The data entered during this operation are stored in the job order folde
284. he same in which the raceway ends XSI Select Element This is the mode for using an already existing symbol in so doing the new symbol is hooked to the one selected This system is used for the modular elements that form part of the same box 1016A 10 64 A LJ AX existing symbol Two components hooked to one another belong to the same box d The 2 and 3 point of the figure are never requested when hooking has been successful if not the function works as in node selection see Select Node 380 Spac Start 2012 Free Insertion This mode is used to insert a free symbol without node This system is normally used to insert ceiling light spots In this case the symbol also acts like a node Select Insertion point Wall Node 1 point Angle of rotation lt 0 gt 2 point then Enter to confirm The graphic position of the symbol 1 point is fundamental as all the measures are calculated with reference to its insertion point acting like a node on all the symbols that are without it 20 Since the symbols without node indicate the component real position it must be placed on 1 A the drawing with suitable accuracy El Insert Node This is the mode for inserting a new node in any position on the drawing so not necessarily on an already existing wall see Select Wall Press Enter to access the Options Select Insertion point Wall Nod
285. he same name as the symbol to be represented and in the same folder The ABLK symbols and the relevant slides must be stored in the special folder Spim Libraries Blk The blocks and slides are created using the AutoCAD Mblocco and Gendia commands Consult 27 3 ps d the specific manual for operating details To make sure that the new ABIk symbols are compatible with the Spac Start functions during building it is necessary to follow the specific rules see par 28 1 During insertion Pressing this button activates Symbol Configuration see par 4 2 related with the type of block selected to change or insert the descriptions Pressing this button accesses the window of the next group if existing The block selected is inserted in the group of favourites This contains the most frequently used symbols see 75 5 Favourite Symbols Blk Symbols With Spac Start you can customize new symbols through the BLK library left free exactly to be available to the user who can use it for generic symbols or to increase the library with all those symbols for functional diagrams both single feed and multifeed that are not contemplated in the existing libraries see 15 1 Symbol Categories See 14 1 Blk Symbols for operating details 372 Spac Start 2012 28 Symbols 28 1 Symbol Categories This paragraph describes how to organise a series of attributes to make a symbol compa
286. he setup Folder for the Libraries and Databases Libraries In the case of Secondary Setup choose the Libraries Folder shared in the LAN Choose the name of the programme group default Spac Start 2012 select the Complete or Customized type of setup for Primary setup only Complete Spac is set up complete with all the graphic libraries and all the databases Customized the parts to be set up are selected Setup can start according to the parameters set At the end of setup if a previous version of Spac is present the Data migration and customizations utility programme is activated automatically which can automatically retrieve the customizations and changes made in the previous version The programme icons are automatically arranged in link form on the Windows desktop Setup of Spac Start has been completed Restart Windows at the end of setup to make the changes made to the system for running the programme operational T CAUTION Carefully read the contents of the setup windows SDProget reserves the right to make changes or improvements to the setup programme at any time SPAC must be launched and operated with the hardlock key inserted If the key is not in at program start up the error message Failed to recognize hardware protection will appear Es e Stand alone hardlock e Network hardlock The USB hardlock usually doesn t need any configuration if connected during sof
287. he wires are grouped All these functions are provided with the superwire system which consists in automatic recognition of the size of the symbols present on the wire path or connection The color of the lines DaLayer and the distance between them wire clearance are configured using 4 1 Setting The Wire number from 1 to 20 to be drawn is considered only by the 6 wires and node functions Connections Window Wire This is used to trace a line inserting the connection points automatically if active When the wire starts from a line already drawn it takes its color and line type features Effective for the connection of elements drawn in series that must be perfectly aligned In fact entering the first point on the power feed at the top and the second on the power feed at the bottom the necessary connections are drawn including the links With the standard type of connection the function works without requesting further information with serial and parallel connections the wiring directions are requested right or left when the wire is connected to horizontal lines top or bottom when it is connected to vertical lines The difference between serial and parallel connections is documented in the previous paragraph see 4 4 Power feeds You are advised to work with Orto and Snap always active Branch This is used to quickly draw the connection lines between several components
288. heet must be selected multiple selections are possible to copy on more sheets at the same time To copy a page quickly double click on the number of the destination page If the destination sheet copy destination belongs to a different multi sheet than the current one it is important to check the status of the Save multi sheet changes option if it is active the current drawing is saved before loading the multi sheet file where the page chosen is resident it is active by default It is possible to make copies between sheets that belong to different multi sheets only using the Fixed Position 3 13 Move between sheets This command allows you to move the entities selected from one sheet to another After selecting the objected to be moved the destination sheet must be indicated Use the mouse to indicate the start point and then the destination point on the chosen page First moving point Destination point To move quickly double click on the number of the destination page This function only works on sheets belonging to the current multi sheet 54 Spac Start 2012 3 14 Clear sheet d D This command allows you to delete the entire content of a sheet including the page number and symbol of the associated title The sheet intended to be cleared must be selected from the list of the pages present in the multi sheet Multiple selections are possible to clear more sheets at the same tim
289. his is used to copy by selecting the symbols on the drawing with the same procedures and characteristics already seen for the previous command Copy Symbols with Selection X Clone Symbol differs as all the original information of the symbol to be copied is kept such as material data Functions 1 and 2 Register reference codes and settings concerning the Ignore Symbol list O You can quickly call up the function also typing the command XC on the keyboard 384 Spac Start 2012 Edit Symbol This function is used to change the data that have been entered in the symbol during insertion on the drawing In practice it replaces the use of the AutoCAD Ddatte command simplifying the viewing and changing of the data contained in the attributes To facilitate the use of this function you can type the XS command on the keyboard Change laying height To change the laying height of a symbol use the Change laying height see par 21 2 command which works in the same way as Change height at ends see par 18 6 These commands simultaneously change both the height of the component and of the sections connected 28 Symbols e 385 386 Spac Start 2012 Index Change CCU escorrer ee 359 Change Elements 329 Ee Reech Change laying height at ende ee 304 385 A lt A 27 Change Sheet ooconnccccnnnncnccccnonancnaninanancncn canon ana nncano nos 44 Change svmbols 237 Channel database
290. i e the one that keeps its data and characteristics after the operation The 2 point is used to select the second piece of section Le the one that loses its data to acquire those of the main section after the operation Joining sections is useful after the deletion of a derivation as it makes it possible to cancel the 2 pieces that had exactly created the derivation re joining them in a single section as they were originally 292 e Spac Start 2012 Lay on Node Identified with this name is a vertical section helpful for connecting two components placed at different heights but belonging to coinciding nodes see par 28 2 The particularity consists in the fact that the three Wall Ceiling and Floor modes in this situation work in the same way abbreviated laying The function requests START Select Element Section or Node Return for options 1 point the start symbol is to be selected DESTINATION Select Element Section or Node Return for options 2 point the destination symbol is to be selected Component E1 is positioned at a height of 30 cm while SS1 is at 110 cm from the ground The function automatically recognises that the nodes to which the two symbols belong coincide thus same x y coordinate abbreviating the sequence of the commands pt bo A 2 ot m The procedure ends with no further requests generating a section that vertically c
291. iate each symbol with a series of information including the prefix for cable referencing the more usual laying heights commercial and technical data The configuration opens loading the contents of the Prefix File associated during 17 1 Installation SETTINGS as current database It is advisable to generate a new prefix file for every brand and series of components intended to be used for example IMPIANTI_Ave Noir PRI IMPIANTI Ave Blanc PRI IMPIANTI_Vimar Idea PRI IMPIANTI_Bticino Living PRI IMPIANTI Bticino Magic PRI etc The prefix of the file name must be IMPIANTI_ pri for IMP symbols BLK_ for IBLK symbols and UNI9511_ for TERM symbols The availability of several PRI files allows you to associate the symbols with a determinate manufacturer therefore it is possible to create a specific database for every material brand Change allows you to load IMPIANTLIEC E another database contained in the files with pri extension that are resident in the Spac settings folder With New a copy of the current database is generated with a different name Every symbols library can be associated with different databases in order to meet differentiated graphic rules according to the standard to be complied with Name This is the name of the block dwg file that contains the electrical symbol with which all the following parameters are associated Prefix This is the component reference the symbol IMP001
292. ible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it The function requests Select a Section Return for options selection or Return Using Search the selection possibilities of the function are extended in fact Select a Section Node or an Element selection Section selection xij In the list the first column indicates the start height of the sections in the point in 300 TR7 0 5 ILLUMINAZIONE 300 TR8 0 5 ILLUMINAZIONE common 200 TR12 0 5 ILLUMINAZIONE In the case of purely vertical sections see Lay on Node par 18 1 the destination height is also shown Pressing Details all the data concerning the section are shown for consulting including the number of curves path length and any cables contained View This is useful for tracking the position of a section on the drawing In fact it is highlighted to facilitate its recognition The function requests Zoom Zoom End Return Pressing and you can control the enlargement while with Return the function is ended keeping the current zoom or restoring the initial view After selecting the section the Change window opens as in the following figure from where you can change the reference pertinent installation laying type and commercial characteristics of the raceway Using Delete deletes the section selected from the drawing Change Section TR11 lt is also possible to choose a Reference S
293. ical panel Reference of terminal block the terminal belongs to color green and height 2 The CROSS SECTION attribute contains the size of the terminal This datum is essential as terminal blocks can be sorted by this value see par 6 3 The value of the NUMI attribute color green and height 2 if visible is the terminal input wire number The datum is taken automatically during insertion of the terminal if the wire is already numbered The value of the NUMM attribute color green and height 2 if visible is a number or name to identify the terminal The datum can be managed automatically by the programme which assigns an incremental numerical value each time The value of the NUMO attribute color green and height 2 if visible is the terminal output wire number The datum is taken automatically during insertion of the terminal if the wire is already numbered NumO has the same value as Numl when Input Output is set This attribute is present only in symbols that represent multiple terminals to distinguish the various shelves or levels of the same terminal The content is free you can manually enter the description of the components connected upstream or at the left of the terminal Same as Notem for components connected downstream or at the right of the terminal Completion is optional Management takes place using specific commands see par 6 4 Indicates the terminal reference element If there is a conn
294. ickness the insertion position is determined by a point drawn using the AutoCAD Point command present in the symbol The symbol without the point cannot be drawn with the jumper CAUTION In the terminal block symbols of multiple terminals for every level it is necessary to associate a whole group of attributes except for R_Terminal block and R_Cross section which are unequivocal Example for Level 1 R_Numi7 R Numm7 R_Numo etc for Level 2 R_Numi7 R_ Numm 7 R_Numo etc 15 Symbols 229 15 2 Symbol Creation Creating a block means storing a part of a drawing thought to be able to be used repetitively on other drawings The creation of a library of blocks presupposes that the blocks be built before their actual use In any case it is necessary first of all to draw the graphic part using the normal AutoCAD commands and observing a few rules including those set forth by any standards After the graphic execution it is necessary to associate the attributes using the AutoCAD Ddattdef command their position is regulated by the fact that some will be graphically visible on the drawing Using the AutoCAD Wblock command stores the graphic part associated with the attributes in a file After creation of the file the objects selected are deleted from the drawing OOPS can be used to recover the objects Ddinsert is the AutoCAD command to use for inserting the blocks in the drawing the blocks are o
295. ies datradeudouainnddemcoaseaciensstausieranites 290 6 Duplicate Section E 291 PESO SS CONS a aos 292 Layon NOGE osna a as Rl od OR te ett Be Sle teeta a eas 293 List of Contents 7 Start and destination elemen S iia le a ee le i ele eee 293 DHONI EE 294 ro ANTES E PTEE A E A E E EEE T E E 295 EE a O 297 OTTO CONC A A EA eee ee 298 O NN 299 A A 299 18 4 MODIFY OEC e 301 8 53 HANGE PAVING HECHA EE 303 13 06 EECHELEN eerste EE Ee 304 187 SECTONS UTA A e eee 305 Laying prefabricated r Cewakg 305 Peor lee 306 EE ee EE EE 307 EE 307 SEON Dri ati EE ee 307 CHange EMOS A A A A A ia 308 NEIERENS 308 EMDIFUACOS citaba Aa 308 NGG SECHON CONVERTER a o e e A e dl ee Me e a O 309 TS CABLES conil 311 T9 GABE LAVIN Te EE 311 CBee ON Pe EE Ree A EE 312 Manual lay E 313 SEMAU AUC TAVIAG ees E a Oech te Ose ane Oar 314 AUTOMAalC LEAVING EE 315 ARA A Per SMemnnnI ete 316 d E 316 ESAS MUDE MODOS rers iE A A A E E A gene 317 A A A E II A O E A ee eT 318 SS NI O 318 VEN AA A 319 LES del Eilen ENEE 320 EE ida iii acne Rate ene ie a eek 320 DISCOMMOCCE CLOW ICN ES ed Ee 320 194 DISCONNECTED CABLE EE 321 FS CABLE DATABASE cut ic 321 Elo e ee EE 322 19 6 BUNDUE DATABASE waste AE ee 322 OR TH EE chnccnsmeemeaaet 323 20 DIMENSION RACEWAY EE 323 PT AIC EE 324 20 2GHANNEE DATABASE SE EE DE EE E 325 Circular CRANE p e ES 325 Rectangular E te 325 PICTADNCAICO ee ainia its 325 Py ELEMENTOS rosa 327 A E
296. ile in the current materials database To complete the macro the codes are to be taken from the materials database so it is advisable to place the two programme windows side by side to simplify this operation firstly be selected from the materials database then dragged to the space provided for Components of macro selected up to obtaining a result like the one in the figure EI HLOOD2 Led color Yellow ae Of the codes forming a macro the only e datum that can be changed is the quantity To delete a code select it and then press the Del button on the keyboard Manufacturer Catalogue Description WS Telemecanique VvL4114 ROUND PILOT LIGHT S IF 40 RED IN 1 Telemecanique XVLX0B TIGHTENING TOOL FOR A8mm UNIT 1 _ JTelemecanique 27911 SEALIPESFOR m UNIT SET OF 10 1 Macro set up can also be obtained with copy and paste operations Ctrl C and Ctrl V between the Materials database and the macro Editor 170 Spac Start 2012 8 2 Associate Materials This allows you to associate a material code or macrocode with one or more components present on the diagram Firstly access is necessary using the 8 1 Material Database command to select the article code to be stored with Errore L origine riferimento non e stata trovata afterwards this function causes the request to select the components on the drawing with which to assign it It is advisable to lace
297. ill of Materials 175 To enter the new values you can work in 4 different ways Manual Pressing Clear the previous data are deleted to allow entering the new ones The manufacturer catalogue code and product description are entered manually if they are not present in the external materials database see par 8 1 Database The 8 2 Associate Materials command is triggered Copy The Edit opens a second dialog window containing the list of all the codes used in the current Bill In practice it allows you to copy the data of articles already in the bill to transfer them to the components to be changed Update With Edit we have seen the possibility of making changes to the data lists These changes are given on the drawing using the Update function Delete This is used to remove a component from the list It is helpful when wanting to exclude certain data existing from the table drawing The component is not really deleted from the diagram even after an Update operation With a new scan the deleted data are restored again Details Details allows you to see all the data of a component Overtemperature N B This button is not enabled in some versions of Spac Start Technical Manual Pressing this button the function performs a search operation in the Spac Libraries Documents folder Depending on the code selected in the list the search will be for a file with Pdf or Doc extension If for example the code
298. images cannot be changed without remaking the entire images library 15 Symbols 231 15 3 Symbol insertion Symbols are inserted taking them from the pop menus of the library set see par 4 1 those composed of several symbols lec and Unif have two insertion menus Symbols library and Switches Clicking on the name of a group e g Relay coils activates the selection window Clicking once on the symbol the description is shown twice insertion proceeds directly or once plus Ok Symbol insertion window Pressing this button activates Symbol Configuration see par 4 2 related with the type of block selected clicking only once In the case of generic symbols the window is activated to change or insert the descriptions Pressing this button accesses the window of the next group if existing Pressing this button takes you back to the window of the previous group ES Preferiti The block selected is inserted in the group of favourites This contains the most frequently used symbols see 75 5 Favourite Symbols When entering a symbol on the drawing a specific dialog window is shown depending on the category it belongs to e Parent Symbol e Sub element symbol e Element Symbol S see 15 1 Symbol Categories 232 Spac Start 2012 Parent Symbol The Parent Symbol is recognised by the programme as the block contains the attribute Pres M coils switches pushbuttons selectors etc
299. in local mode The local configuration is represented by the Spac_cfg ini file present in the Cfg folder of the job order directory This way all the changes carried out after the settings remain operational only and exclusively for the current job order leaving the start settings unchanged le To create new configurations or change existing ones it is necessary to use the Export Settings function see par 4 2 The configuration called BASE contains the normally mostly used settings This configuration can be used when starting job orders associated with No Customer CAUTION When no start configuration exists the programme uses its own default settings Copy Job Order This function allows you to duplicate an already existing job order A new job order folder is generated with the same content as the one selected for start at the address indicated in the Job Orders Path Only the New job order name is required It is however possible also to change the description customer and start configuration 36 Spac Start 2012 Job Order Sharing When a folder directory is configured as Job Orders Path shared by the network the possibility is obtained to work from several stations at the same time on the same Job order Naturally the job order must be split into several multi sheets as it is not possible to open the same drawing at the same time from different work stations e Every user
300. in the same way as Parent symbols This configuration can be changed according to Only one configuration exists for The Pin attributes forming this symbol have pre assigned values therefore by default they contain_a value that has been attributed to them during construction of the HL2 CL at any time requirements every symbol Reg Ref 12E DIN DNA PINAY DNA PINES FINAJ ey block Reg Ref REF1 44 The register reference might not have Pin attributes or have them with nil default values Pin attributes empty as in the case of Ref1_44 In both cases pin marking processing cannot take place Block pin configuration H5 Y X PIN Value d Valu Add Delete Change Configuration of Code 12E PinBO 14 PinA0 13 PinB1 22 PinAl 21 PinB3 32 PinA3 31 Code REF1_44 PinBO PinA0 PinBl PinAl PinB3 PinA3 se Pin Configuration see par 4 2 KAS AT 12 Tl oa LA SC il Hl KA2 FA ed KE Cross Reference with pin marking Performing Cross reference with Pin marking obtains this result On KA2 Code 12E the ref symbol 12E is inserted which contains the pin values These values are given on the Sub element symbols of the Parent in question Pin marking has not been carried out on KA1 as the reference symbol HEET 44 does not envisage it by default the value of pin attributes is nil consequen
301. in the figure gt choose Import Spac Esport SPAC To import the data contained in the Linee txt Lines txt and Utilizz txt Use txt of the previous Spac Start 4 x versions select the Import Export command from the File menu and then SPAC 24 Caneco 361 The data from the planimetry are imported immediately into the table one line for every Circuit defined in the planimetry see par 24 3 as in the example in the figure Quadro B BR Tutti stili fij 5 Quadro Illuminazione E A le Contenuto N ssorbimento Lunghezza Huado P HI PE l 1 1004 PO Illumin DAN APE 1 3 50 200 FL P N PE ee 100 IPC CEE 220 PC PAN PE 12 164 100 PC CEE 380 PL 3P PE 3 2164 100 It is now possible with Caneco to check and dimension the imported data for these operations it is advisable to consult the specific instructions for use manual provided with the product Caution The circuit or dimension changes made in the Caneco environment do not cause any automatic updating in the planimetric drawing of SPAC Start With this operation the Caneco calculation programme imports the IMP files found in the folder in which the project is saved It is therefore fundamental to store the Caneco project in the current job order folder before importing the data The default is contained in the Export ini file contained in the Spac Start Job Order folder 362 Spac Start 2012 24 5 Can
302. in the preview window When the LibCenter is functioning the operator has available the drawing area and also a dialogue window that is always active in a similar manner to the properties window in AutoCAD DbCenter Menu Blocchi la I IEC k Contatti Bobine Rele lca Bobine Rele ER dE Bobine Rele Ritardate 17 Rele ritardato allece Kap Rele ritardato all ecc k27 Rele ritardato alla di E21 Rele ritardato all ecc K293 Rele ritardato all ecc E d Altre Bobine Rele 2 Mod Protezione Segnalazione E K Componenti el Lampade Eben Motori Generatori ES Motori D C CH Motori A C MSY Generatori ER Dispositivo termico Hl Induttanze H H Dispositivi di Protezione x Archivio Materiali Example LibCenter 850 0TOOVTOLNN sg Its functioning mode is very simple after having selected the symbol to be inserted on the display just drag the block with the mouse Drag amp Drop to the drawing area when the left mouse button is released proceed to select the insertion point NOTE Drag amp Drop is performed by keeping pressed the left button on the mouse from the LibCenter window to the drawing area After selecting the insertion point on the diagram page the functions available vary according to the type of symbol EEGEN Modelo i In the symbol preview window it is possible to perform the zoom command indicating 2 points
303. inals and connectors This means the search for symbols of the Parent Element or Sub element category If the component sought is formed of only one symbol no list is opened If the component belongs to the Parent category that possesses corresponding sub elements the complete list is opened Highlight sub element symbols is activated only selecting the first object of the list pressing View obtains the consecutive view of all the others 54 All The View button is active only for the symbols of the current multi 54 Api sheet Pic bit Returns Terminals Connectors Topographic Symbols The name of the bit address must be indicated for example E0 0 All the return symbols power feed and connection with the signal value indicated are highlighted consecutively Press S to interrupt the sequence of the command To find a complete terminal block or a specific terminal indicate the references of the Panel and Terminal block It is then possible to proceed in two different ways 1 All a list is processed of all the terminals of the terminal block indicated With a double click or pressing View the object is highlighted on the drawing 2 Numi and NumM it is necessary to type or select the number of the input wire Numl or terminal NumM to be sought specifically To find a complete connector or a specific pin indicate the references of the Panel and Terminal block It is then possible to proceed in two differ
304. ing is generally suitable for a sheet in A3 size The scale value is changed using the Cabinet Layout Scale command Choosing the drawing with front view it is necessary to determine the number of doors from 1 to 3 The height and width measurements are considered without taking account of the front base plate The symbols used for this view are resident in the panels folder with name FQANTE FQ2ANTE and FQ3ANTE dwg In the drawing in side view account is taken of the height and depth without front base plate for inserting the block FQ1LATER dwg The blocks can be customized To draw both views the command must be repeated twice You are asked for Cabinet insertion point bottom left point The dimensions are stored in the Cabinets ini files in the Spac Libraries Databases folder Cabinet Layout Scale This is used to set the scale factor to be adopted for the drawing of both the interior and exterior cabinet topographic layout This value also affects the library of accessory symbols to keep the various proportions uniform O The scale value set by default is 10 13 Layout 205 Accessories This is a library of symbols helpful for completing the front panel topographic drawing the symbols are split to accompany both the front and side view drawing The symbols are resident in the Panels folder Front base plate To be executed following the Cabinet command for the front base plate drawing
305. ing it will host the element REFERENCE as value this attribute is fundamental for making the block recognisable by all the programme processes The text height is 2 mm Type The purpose of the TYPE attribute is to host the Catalogue Code of the material to be associated with the component during drawing It is therefore important for making the block recognisable by the Bill of materials see par 23 2 When wanting to insert several material codes macrocode this is possible separating the codes with the character The text height is 1 mm Manufacturer The purpose of the MANUFACTURER attribute is to host the brand of the material to be associated with the component during drawing This datum is important for management of the Bill of materials see par 23 2 The text height is 1 mm The DESCRIPTION attribute contains the description of the material to be a PUON associated with the component during drawing This datum is important for management of the Bill of materials see par 23 2 The text height is 1 mm Height The attribute with HEIGHT label contains the laying height value given during insertion of the block on the drawing The attribute is visible but the datum is managed with a specific command see par 21 6 The text height is 1 5 mm 374 Spac Start 2012 Legend This contains a component generic description The value contained in this attribute is used by the function to draw the Symbols Legeno see par
306. ing of the table you Request can choose whether to change the point of insertion of the table on the pages following the first one or not Space Row x2 The space occupied by every line is calculated in proportion with the configured height of the texts This parameter allows you to double this space to allow the insertion of two lines of text This condition is particularly advantageous for inserting translations Sheet Character When several sheets are needed to complete the drawing of the table you can choose whether to continue on numerically consecutive sheets new or already existing or whether to generate numerically intermediate sheets e g 1 1A 1B etc The Available Fields list contains the data Tag Db InternalCode Db Notes and Db Price unlike all the other fields these 3 pieces of information are taken from the materials database and not from the symbol contents lt is of fundamental importance to firstly check which materials database is set by default 8 Bill of Materials 181 CSV File Pressing on CSV File an Ascii file is generated for extracting the data of the Internal Bill of Materials Standard is the basic configuration of the output fields where applicable CSV file parameters xi Every item in the Available Teg Atrbuto Tilo Campo fields list corresponds to an Type attribute in the symbols of tar aol components terminals and Panel Change connectors Q intemal Code D
307. ing to the configuration The data are extracted from the sheets in the list pressing Add Pressing on Entire Job Order all the sheets are added automatically in the list It is possible to change the list of sheets to be processed removing one sheet at a time Delete sheet or all of them together Clear list The data are extracted from the Selected blocks on the drawing or from all the blocks on the sheets in the list When All blocks is set generically it might be helpful to activate the filter of the ones really helpful and involved so pressing the Change button the list of these symbols can be defined The data are extracted on the basis of the Tag list to extract the list of the attributes is composed pressing the Change button se See Import Attributes 12 Utilities e 201 12 3 Navigator This command allows you to quickly find the position of a component on the diagram the search takes place on all the multi sheets selected in the list pressing Scan Multi sheets If the component is not traced the function shows No Element found When the component is found a list shows all the parent and sub element symbols that form part of it With a double click or pressing View the object is highlighted on the drawing Pay attention to upper and lower case letters Kal and KA1 are considered as different names Search can also act on Plc bits returns term
308. ing type installation New Reference from the e Reference list thereby making a possible Sub section become an independent section the sub T SEET sections that belong to the same A section possess the same reference ILLUMINAZIONE E Or from the Reference list it is possible to choose an Existing Reference useful for joining consecutive sections This turns a Section into a sub section DIELECTRIX 25220 TUBO PROT RIGIDO AUTOES RK15 20 If the sections are not consecutive Diam 20 mm the Section with repeated name error is generated The Reference change is obtained pressing the Change button 18 Sections e 301 If the Reference list is set on New reference you can enter the section reference freely typing a max of 10 characters or with the normal composition of the prefix plus the corresponding incremental value The change of the prefix or incremental value must be confirmed pressing the lt button then the reference change is obtained pressing the Change button T CAUTION the error Section with repeated name is found during Testing See Sections List par 18 3 To change the path of sections use of 18 5 Change laying height and 18 6 Change laying height at ends is necessary 302 Spac Start 2012 18 5 Change laying height This command allows you to change the path of a section in its intermediate sections In practice it is possible
309. inp 25 Gu IPAC Start 201 DP TART Lok ans JL me 27 Sheet format This area is used for setting the dimension of the drawing sheet From the drop down list it is possible to select a UNI format from A4 to AO oriented horizontally or vertically Each of these formats corresponds with a title block symbol present in the Spac Libraries Symbols directory this title block is automatically placed on the drawing according to the scale and unit of measurement chosen lt is also possible to select the User format to enter customized dimensions in mm in this case only the format limit is drawn The Update Master Title Block info function allows you to update the contents of the attributes of the squaring at any time taking the information on the basis of the associated Customer see Customer Management par 2 5 Otherwise it is possible to use the AutoCAD Ddatte command which allows you to view and customize all the data contained in the attributes The sheet format can be changed at any time even when the planimetry has already been started In this case the old title block is automatically removed to leave its place for the new one without losing the common information 17 General commande e 247 The title block is divided on 2 layers named Limits and Master Title Block on the Limits layer the red border is resident with folding marks that delineates the real size of the sheet of p
310. insertion dialog windows see 15 3 Symbol insertion the block selected is stored in the group of favourites which contains the mostly used symbols The group of favourites can contain up to 20 symbols for every graphic symbol The Delete button is used to delete only the symbol selected from the group while pressing Clear deletes all the symbols related with the symbol set The list of favourite symbols is contained in the Favorites mdb file stored in the Program User Settings folder for the local user It is advisable to store the symbols used most frequently The use of this command is simplified by the fact that you can quickly call up the function also typing the command BP on the keyboard BP is also called up quickly pressing the central button of the mouse for mouse with 3 buttons or pressing the right hand button of the mouse together with Shift ft on the keyboard for mouse with 2 buttons 15 6 Last Used Symbols This command is used to recall the group of the last used symbols see 75 3 Symbol insertion The last used group can contain up to 20 symbols for every graphic symbol The Delete button is used to delete only the symbol selected from the group while pressing Clear deletes all the symbols related with the symbol set The list of last symbols used is contained in the Favorites mdb file stored in the Program User Settings folder fo
311. ion DAT supplied from specific constructors or from the Morsetti Dat file of a prevoius version of Spac Options A materials database file with the extension AMW can be set to load by default at program launch 8 Bill of Materials e 169 Database Utility There are two commands dedicated to database maintenance Compress This operation is necessary on databases that have undergone Database considerable changes and updates Compressing sorts the data to make consultation quicker fal The current working database cannot be compressed Compression reduces the weight of the file after deleting many data Restore Database Restore allows you to load damaged databases The possibility of recovery is in any case proportionate with the entity and ae type of errors in the damaged file It is always necessary to check the contents of a restored database as some data might be no longer present as they have been deleted during the operation to allow recovery Edit Macro This command is used to access the macrocode management programme i e code that represents the sum of several codes Macro Editor New macro i l 21 Pressing New the first operation Macrocode Pyshbotton SOSO C lt lt S C C S t S S Si required is to enter the name of the re macro and the corresponding Description Pushbatton break contact with built in signal lamp Y Pressing Save the macro is stored in description Save Delete the amw f
312. ion asks you to select the reference symbol and then the destination symbol A list shows all the attributes present in the two blocks The texts contained in those selected will be transferred from the reference block to the destination block Adapt Width T and T T Double utility to increase T or reduce T the width of texts and attributes AUXILIAR Y CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY The function asks you to select also AUXILIARY CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY repeatedly the Text or the Attribute of which you intend to change increase or reduce the AUXILIARY CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY width factor T O You can quickly call up the Increase width and Bring width also typing the commands T and T on the keyboard 200 Spac Start 2012 Import Attributes This command is used to re import the file Attributes Csv containing the information changed outside the drawing environment which took place following the Export Attributes command ae See Export Attributes CAUTION It is fundamental to immediately check the consistency between the imported data compared with those contained on the drawing to be able to cancel the operation if necessary This operation is not advised for the less expert users Export Attributes This command is used to export a file Attributes Csv containing the information stored in the attributes taking it directly from the symbols on the drawings accord
313. ion of the wall Copy Helpful for copying walls and windows in the dimensions already existing in the planimetry Move This allows you to move a door or window also on different walls than the original one automatically restoring the wall Replacement This allows you to change the dimensions of a door or window and replace it entirely Patch Walls This is used to quickly restore broken lines of walls or that do not coincide in the end points Hide Walls This function is particularly helpful in three dimensional project viewing lt is exactly in this condition that the walls can prove to be a superfluous detail especially when we are interested only in consulting the electrical project Normal condition and with walls hidden You can select which walls you want to hide or with the All option the function is extended to the whole planimetry The function hides the walls leaving only their trace on the floor so the Walls layer is not frozen O The special View Walls function must be used to go back to the initial condition View Walls This is the opposite function to Hide Walls also in this case the walls to be restored are selected or with the All option the function is extended to the whole planimetry Columns axes This draws the centering axes on the basis of the circular and rectangular columns see par 17 4 17 General commands e 263 17 11 Hygiene facilities This
314. item the possibility is given to specify the number of wall separations segments in which to separate the curved wall The dialog window will be as shown in the following figure Nuova stanza xj Confirming these data Neng roma cessed mm is followed by the request to select the Akezza mi 420 room identification SESSA Grigo Basse 0 UU DOS counter Color Pareti SS clockwise olore Pareti avoi sl Riletarca X Colore Solhtto O JI Altezza Pieno Lavora mo H Calcolo automatico divisori Pareti Curve ke Esportazione Interri Numero disam Pareh Curve Esportazione dati verso Led Ze tar D xx hd It is of fundamental importance for the points to be entered with counter clockwise direction of rotation First premises point lt Enter to Quit gt click with the mouse in correspondence with the vertex Pt1 If you want to interrupt the command simply press the Enter Return key also corresponding to the right hand mouse button 366 Spac Start 2012 Other point lt Enter for arc or quit gt click with the mouse in correspondence with the vertex Pt2 If you want to interrupt the command press the Enter key twice Other point lt Enter for arc or quit gt click with the mouse in correspondence with the vertex Pt3 If you want to interrupt the command press the Enter key twice Other point lt Enter for arc or quit gt click with the mouse in correspondence with the vertex P
315. ith this procedure is only checked by 24 Caneco 357 Circuit Styles This is the type of Circuit The style is to be chosen among those defined in the following list Motor Motor protection circuits Lighting Lighting circuits Circuits for current sockets Heating Heating circuits Panel Panel definition Sub Busbar definition Busbar circuits Power factor improvement capacitors The circuit style allows you to establish certain parameters by default others must be entered or checked by the user Upstream panel Distribution panel from which the circuit leads max 12 characters It is generated with the Power feed command see par 24 2 the default name is QGBT General LV Panel Downstream Destination of the circuit max 12 characters This is active only for Panel panel Sub Busbar Busbar and Transformer circuits Sub Busbar This is considered a circuit in every aspect The selection is made among the Sub busbars contained in the Upstream panel selected Reference This is the Circuit identification reference This reference identifies the circuit in Caneco in the same way max 12 characters Contents Composition of the circuit selection takes place automatically according to the circuit chosen This value defines the number of poles and the earthing system The composition is contained in the following list 3P PE 3 poles ground 3P N PE 3 poles neutral ground 3P 3 poles 3P N 3 poles
316. ition With this group of commands it is possible to obtain a structural steelwork drawing of the type shown in the following figure Example of composition with the modular panels library The various functions operate in scale 1 10 so that the drawing is suitable for sheets in A3 size Any dimensions shall therefore be expressed with the same scale factor setting the variable DIMLFAC to 10 using Change Variables To accurately insert the panels on the structural steel work the cabinet drawing is provided with reference notches use them as insertion point of the various panels using the Osnap a INTersection mode ke To ensure that the references of the components on the panels are requested automatically set the variable ATTDIA to 1 using Change Variables if not they are to be compiled subsequently using the AutoCAD Eattedit or Ddatte commands 13 Layout 211 212 Spac Start 2012 14 Customizations 14 1 BIk Symbols With Spac Start you can customize new symbols through the BLK library left free exactly to be available to the user who can use it to increase the library with all those symbols that are not contemplated by the various standards Adhere to the general rules for the creation of new symbols e tis essential for the graphic part of a block to be drawn on LAYER 0 there are no restraints concerning the colors and types of line that can be used even if it is preferable for reason
317. ition definitive PIRELLI NO7W K 1x15 i PIRELLI NO7V K St NY The new bundle is saved with the name corresponding to its formation Using Delete eliminates a cable from the provisory composition window or a bundle from those already defined An already existing bundle is updated in its internal cable list pressing Change Fascio 3x 1 5 standard 322 Spac Start 2012 20 Raceways 20 1 Dimension Raceways This command allows you to choose the type of raceway according to dimensions brand and model A correct choice is ensured by checking the space occupied by the cables contained in it fill calculation The function requests Select a Section R Search N ot dimensioned Selecting a section on the drawing at the start the function shows H Q 3 x gt the available raceway database stored in the L_tratte dat file If you fail to select the section because it is perpendicular to the current view use of the Search function is necessary which makes it possible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it Selected raceway for the section TR9 The choice of the raceway is Al manufactures A A Feceway 27 carried out when possible Manufacturer Code Descriptio Sub Sect Size m directly when drawing the RIX TUBO PIEGH MEDIO LILLA FK15 16 Diam section see par 18 1 RIX TUBO PIEGH MEDIO LILLA FK15 20 Diam RIX TUBO PIEGH MEDIO LILLA FK15 25
318. itional Tagging Sheet Scan horizontal or vertical is not active in Positional mode O Symbols with the Type attribute containing I or IGNORE are rejected from the list 102 Spac Start 2012 Parent reference with same name d When the list of repeated names includes Parent symbols the Automatic referencing button is automatically frozen for safety It is firstly necessary to confirm Parent reference with same name to continue The contacts sub element symbols are all associated with one of the parents with repeated reference Pay attention to the following message Caution the Contacts of Parents with the same name KA2 have been given to Parent KA2 in Sheet 6 3 CAUTION The presence of this message indicates the need to update or re process the Cross Reference see par 7 1 When Parent symbol references appear among the repeated names in the list it is advisable to solve the problem on the drawing Use Current Prefix File During both Automatic 1 and Manual 2 Re referencing the prefixes to be associated with the component references can have two different origins Each symbol keeps its own original prefix Le the one pertaining to the Prefix file used during drawing or better during insertion of the symbol on the drawing During Re referencing it is possible to choose whether to use the original prefix or the one indicated in the Current Prefix file if
319. iver concerning the SmartKey plugged in Then press Update to check version and activity of the driver and close SDI Run SCC EXE from the DVD from Key Utility folder Open the Multilan Servicer section Enable the ANP option Press the Browse button is enabled in the same group as ANP Select from the hard drive the sub directory entitled ANP see point 3 and press Open A composite path example c Anp should appear in the Edit control box to the left of Browse set the Timeout s value to 15 Press Apply and then OK If the errors ANP error or ANP or network error appear you need to configure server and client O via the TCP IP protocol described below Installation and configuration of the licensed client ANP O N Ser es FS YS 9 Operating system Windows XP Vista Logon as Administrator Insert the DVD Run SCC EXE from Key Utility folder Open the Client section Select Windows program category from the Configuration settings for Press Add select ANP shared directory OK Browse Search in select Network resources select the name of the computer licensed server on which you have shared the ANP directory select the shared directory ANP press Open OK and then Apply 10 Disable option Use local protocol as last resource OK If the errors ANP error or ANP or network error appear you need to config
320. k with the table This represents the basic configuration of the output fields where applicable Pressing Default the current configuration is stored in local mode see par 4 2 for subsequent uses If confirmed without pressing Default the configuration is considered as occasional and used only once PRELLI HWmv k SPEEDY FLAM 450 750 PRELLI MOTO SPEED FLAM 450 750 PRELL MOK SPEED HAN 450 7650 3 PEEDY HAN 450 150 x Co Cte PRELL WK SPEEDY FLAM 450 750 Example of Cable List made in table form 19 Cables 319 19 3 Modify Cables This command allows you to change or delete the cables present in the sections The section concerned must be selected lf you fail to select the section because it is perpendicular to the current view use of the Search function is necessary which makes it possible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it The function requests Select a Section Search selection or R Typing S search the function extends the selection possibilities in fact Select a Section Node or an Element selection Cables laid in the section xl The list shows all the cables A installation inserted in the section processed aasi Aiia Selecting one of the cables obtains the list of all the sections in which the cable runs Select last path is helpful during Cable Laying see par 19 1 for the Use last path function M
321. ked for the ZONE dwg symbol insertion point and selection of the components to be associated When Associate is pressed for a zone already present in the list you are asked to select only the symbols With Disassociate the reverse function works and the symbols return to Zone 0 Change Delete Details View Drawing Prot IP This allows you to change the descriptive data of a zone already present in the list pressing this button the function ends automatically updating the label symbol on the drawing The zone selected in the list is removed together with its label symbol The symbols that were part of it are assigned automatically to the zone called Zone O All the components that form part of the zone selected are listed All the components that form part of the zone selected are viewed This command proceeds with the graphic creation of a summary table of all the zones present in the planimetry according to the drawing scale proportion The more frequently used protection values can be selected from the list All the other combinations not contained in the list must be composed by the user according to the following table for example for the additional letters of CEl Std 70 1 dated 1 11 92 against access to dangerous parts Spac Start 2072 is compatible with the zone management generated with the previous versions The only difference consists in the name which could be indicated with a reference of 6 c
322. ks and Connectors command The Table parameters are used to establish the maximum size of the terminal block during automatic generation of the drawing 25 The Start is the coordinate where the first Return Terminal Block is inserted configured in Terminal and Connector Database in the same page horizontally or vertically the same number will be inserted as set in Terminal No at the same distance as the Clearance this value must be the same as the height of the return terminal block At the end of the first column of terminals strip the terminal block continues on the next sheet if the Number of Columns is set at 1 or on the same sheet with a new strip that starts at the distance indicated with Clearance between columns Terminal block drawing configuration The Return Block default symbol is set with the name of a symbol existing in the Symbols folder you can choose pressing the button Always use the Default Symbol Terminal Block with Standardised graphics The terminal block on the drawing is On generated using only this symbol Used only for terminals on table Tab Mor Terminal Block with Detailed graphics the default symbol is used only in cases in Off which a terminal does not have the return block configuration in the database PANEL Op TERMINAL BLOCK M1 ale mie new i l g them in the same General panel terminal black directory as those
323. lation software The results can be imported on the graphics of the Single feed diagrams still developed using Spac en mm C Planimetric Diagram Calculation single feed Diagram The data flow schematically shown here represents the complete combination of the 3 steps It is however possible to develop only the documents necessary and therefore execute only Planimetry and Calculation or Calculation and Single feed Spac Start can also manage the direct passage from Planimetric Diagram to Single feed diagram Clearly this is obtained without the calculation results so it should be borne in mind that the values given in the tables are not checked by the software 24 Caneco 355 24 2 Caneco Power Feed This command is used to set the data concerning the characteristics of the Panel and its Low Voltage power feed for Isc Without having firstly set the Power feed Spac does not allow you to proceed with association of the Circuits see 24 3 Caneco Circuits Planimetric Diagram The function asks you to Select Power feed or start Panel when intending to change the data of a power feed that has already been drawn to make a new power feed proceed with Return for Options The available options are New power feed and Search the second option is useful for running a scan of the drawing to seek the power feeds already set if they have been drawn graphically in a zone of t
324. le 1 20 1000 cm 20 500 mm the suitable sheet format is A1 horizontal the format of which is 840 x 594 mm 2 Drawing scale 1 25 1000 cm 25 400 mm therefore the minimum usable sheet format is A2 horizontal the format of which is 594 x 420 mm To have a minimum space on the drawing of 30 not occupied by the planimetry it is advisable in any case to choose the immediately higher format A1 3 Drawing scale 1 50 1000 cm 50 200 mm the suitable sheet format is A3 horizontal the format of which is 420 x 297 mm 4 Drawing scale 1 75 1000 cm 75 133 mm the suitable sheet format is still A3 horizontal with abundant space not occupied by the planimetry therefore free for drawing the legend and lists Existing Drawing If a drawing is called containing a planimetry made by others it is necessary to trace the sheet format the drawing scale with which it has been drawn and the unit of measure with which the measurements have been expressed To facilitate the restore configuration operation it is wise to start from the unit of measure using the Calculate lt button This way it will be simpler to then choose the suitable sheet format CAUTION It is essential for the imported drawing to have been made in scale 1 1 mm cm or m otherwise it is necessary to use the AutoCAD Scale command to convert it to the required format 250 Spac Start 2012 17 2 Symbol SETTINGS This command allows you to assoc
325. lements connected is requested The elements that exceed this value are indicated in a specific report file Log file The elements placed at a higher distance than that allowed do not however represent_an error it is simply a matter of location warning Location range of Elements and Sections in cm lt 10 gt Audit procedure started please wait Log file saved in JOBORDERS EXAMPLE2005 Audit csv Audit procedure ended The procedure ends showing the list of converted traces List of Sections drawn please wait Answering No conversion does not take place The drawing is opened only for consultation or printing Use of the 18 1 Laying Sections and 19 1 Cable laying commands is not allowed At every attempt to change the structure of existing sections the function reminds you of the need to firstly Disegno realizzato con una precedente versione run Trace Converter Si rende necessaria la conversione del disegno Utilizzare d comando Conversione Tratte in Implanto gt Utility Tratte O Changing drawings made with previous Spac Start versions is not allowed without firstly executing the Trace Converter CAUTION In the event of need it is possible to recover the original drawing copy of the dwg file made before conversion The copy is contained in the job order Save folder 18 Sections e 309 310 Spac Start 2012 19 Cables 19 1 Cable laying This command is used to indicate the qu
326. lly increases the next wire number the increment is a value set in the settings With this type of numbering it is possible to number several wires at the i same time simply enter the first number in the empty field and the fence mode selection is activated automatically EE EE EEN 100 101 102 Wire selection in fence mode It is possible to generate several fences before confirming The point in which the wire is selected or the fence selection line are used as position for inserting the number Le ft Ch 3 4 4 100 IO 102 103 104 105 When wires already numbered previously are selected the request to update is shown see Renumbering 108 Spac Start 2012 Local Prefixes or This method is used when wanting to number the wires with a provisory Suffixes prefix or suffix local without acting on the configuration A single prefix or suffix can be enabled to be used for all the wires in the following example numbering has started from no 1 Several prefixes or suffixes can be enabled simply inserting them separated by a space in the example numbering has started from no 1 LH e WA Prefixes separated by spaces It is possible to select wires simultaneously in fence mode The enabling of local prefixes is added to the parameters set in the settings of Advanced Options Renumbering To update the wire numbers already present on the drawing there is no n
327. ls etc O This setting is not active during the use of Multiple terminals O CAUTION It is not possible to make the Terminal Box if it does not contain any element 6 Terminals and Connectors 121 Multiple terminals Multiple terminals are shelf terminals In practice the same connections as two or more normal terminals are made with just one multiple terminal They are often used in cases in which the space is limited or in specific conditions Spac graphically manages multiple terminals subdividing them into various terminals In practice every shelf level of the multiple terminal is drawn on the diagram as if it were a normal terminal To identify all the terminals that form part of the same multiple terminal they are automatically associated with the same NumM value terminal number Multiple terminals NumM 100 tr DM 101 Er DM Level The example in the figure shows a terminal with two shelves levels on this double terminal it is important to note that there is the same NumM value The terminals are inserted after choosing the type of terminal panel and terminal block It is possible to select one wire at a time or enter a point in the blank space and the fence mode selection is activated automatically The programme asks you to choose the level for each terminal When all the levels of a multiple terminal are used the programme proposes a new terminal that has the value of the
328. lt all the current parameters are stored to be re proposed as such the next time the function is used Raceway When the configuration is confirmed it is SEO possible to select all the sections concerned by it Text insertion point Return for current point Cancel If you continue with Return the point used for R10 41x19 16 selecting the section 1 point is also used for a inserting the text 1 o pt In this case the information is always drawn parallel to the piece of section selected o Entering the insertion point 2 point the 2 pt information is drawn in the position required by the H ZO 3 1x 15 K user A line between the 1 and 2 point simplifies association between the section and its information The text is always orthogonal it is drawn horizontally when the angle measured between the 17 and 2 point is between 45 and 315 or between 135 and 225 the text is vertical in the other cases 18 Sections e 295 If the point used for selecting the section 1 point is not correct it can be cancelled pressing A The information is automatically kept updated at the end of every 19 1 Cable laying and 20 1 Dimension Raceways command see par 19 1 and 20 1 Update With update you can adjust the information already present on the drawing following changes in the Settings valid for text color height and style The color of the lines can be changed acting directly on t
329. ly according to the material description Pressing again the order changes from increasing to decreasing and so on O The data are stored in the Last Materials Mat file present in every job order folder See Macros C Seecodes 7 See macros Press on See macros to access the new list The list of Available macros is composed automatically keeping the codes that are taken time by time from the macros database in the list The selection of a material code involves the automatic selection of all the codes associated with the same macro To remove useless macros from the list press the Delete button O The data are stored in the Last Materials Mat file present in every job order folder Update identical symbols The function is the same as described previously the only difference consists in the fact that the association of the material is proposed for all the symbols that are the same as the one selected To completely cancel the operation turn_off the variable OK for every code and press Cancel only once OK for every Code Active by default this parameter is helpful for consulting all the symbols one at a time that the function has counted being the same as the one selected The operation of Update and Cancel becomes absolute for all identical symbols turning off this variable 8 Bill of Materials 173 8 3 Bill of Materials Using this function it is possible to quickly obtain a list of all the m
330. m Function2 Second line of function 1 The standard value of the PRES attribute requires in addition to the letter F the addition of further characters to specify the type of sub element as per the Pres identification for Sub element symbols table 222 Spac Start 2012 Pres identification for Sub element symbols The following table shows all the possible combinations for describing the Pres attribute of a symbol of the Sub element category PRES Description EA Normally open contact FC Normally closed contact pap Open power contact Closed power contact Triple contact power Triple contact power Fs Transfercontact IO Module No position Used for special applications F sub element A open P if power n number of contacts P RE del make C closed n number of contacts F F sub element T triple F subelement S transfer F sub element L lamp Ed sub element _RD del break Pd RER del makelbreako CAUTION Some conditions can be obtained also through different combinations for example FT power triple sub element is the equivalent of FAP3 15 Symbols e 223 Element Symbol A block that does NOT comprise an attribute with the PRES tag consequently also without Reg attributes is considered as an Element symbol Blocks like lamps fuses resistors transformers W condensers solenoid valves etc do not have the
331. m the destination inserted 0 or 90 returns are inserted 0 or 90 Power Feed Returns It is advisable to graphically distinguish the Power Feed return from the one for Connections a These are power feed returns The presence of this return imposes that the Ap number of the wire connected cannot in any way have a value other than the one set on the return l An In practice it is the wire that receives the number from the return During the drawing and or numbering of wires the presence of Power Feed Returns Is easily Ti recognisable as the wires take a different colour default 1 red the power feed Ap color parameter is chosen with 4 1 Setting Use this type of return when you want to block the numbering on power feed lines 80 Spac Start 2012 Connection Returns It is advisable to graphically distinguish the Connections return from the one for Power Feeds 100 These are the returns on connection wires that continue on other sheets The value on the return depends on the wire number The return automatically D takes its value when the wire is already numbered In any case it is the number Ka of the wire connected that always imposes the value on the return In practice it is the return that receives the number from the wire During the drawing and or numbering of wires they keep the same colour default 9 grey the wire color parameter is chosen with 4 1 Setting
332. macrocode it is necessary to indicate all the manufacturer names separated from one another by the semicolon character with the same order as the codes in the TYPE attribute e DESCRIPTION contains by default a generic description of the component in the presence of several codes macrocode they will all be associated with a different description for all the codes which form the same macro it is necessary to indicate several descriptions separated from one another by the semicolon character with the same order as the codes in the TYPE attribute Undimensioned or uncoded sections are not shown in the Bill with the same code O The list includes all the symbols that have at least the NAME and TYPE attributes symbols containing I or IGNORE in the TYPE attribute are rejected Calling the function the following dialog window is shown Bill of materials Processing takes place for the aS Elements Cables and Sections pressing Scan Drawing With Use last Scan you can quickly load the data processed with the last search This is particularly useful for changing selections and sequences without repeating new Scans Depending on the various requirements it is possible to sort the list data according to 2 sorting criteria e List by TYPE e List by ZONE The two sorting modes have a further possibility of compact viewing lt is possible to make the bill of materials for specific Zones using a filter on the eleme
333. mand 4 General commands 81 Preferences This is a series of settings to customize operation of the Spac functions e Spac test e Dialog windows status Spac test This acts during the scanning or processing of certain functions During the scan all the data processed are viewed in sequence making it possible to N intercept the point that causes any interruption debug Off The scans are decidedly faster as no datum is shown advisable choice Dialog windows status This allows you to store the status of the dialog windows dcl Let us take the example of the dialog window of the 8 3 Bill of Materials command the default of which is proposed with the sequence set on Reference we now set the sequence on Type and look at the various cases Do not save The next time the command is used the sequence remains on Reference Store for Job The next time the command is used the sequence will be set on Type but order only for the current job order Store Default The next time the command is used the sequence will be set on Type Storage of the new dialog window status takes place only if the command is confirmed or completed 82 Spac Start 2012 Wire and Terminal Numbers se This configuration allows you to customize operation of the 5 1 Number wires and 6 1 Insert Terminals commands Wire and Terminal configuration The Height concerns the wire number normally 2 mm
334. mands 91 Function legend This is the configuration for inserting data in the table it is automatically inserted on the drawing when the 12 1 Function legend command is executed see par 14 1 Function legend configuration The table symbol used as default LEGENDAF is LegendaF dwg in the symbols folder In the same folder 3 table symbols are available diversified Colour from one another in the number of columns 2 3 and 4 columns E F T The use of any different table Function 2 symbols is possible provided that Panel i 8 Sheet they are stored in the same folder O The configuration in the figure corresponds with the one stored as default 92 Spac Start 2012 4 3 Panel Setting This is for storing the list of references to be given to panels pushbutton panels boxes zones etc During the insertion of any component terminal or connector on the drawing the name of the Panel it belongs to is requested On board Control and signalling Panel Main panel Mainparel ee z Panel Setting Window Level 1 To insert new Panel references max 14 characters simply type in the name and then press Add to list Pressing Edit it is possible to assign a description to each Panel Press the Save button to confirm the changes made to the list A Panel value can be deleted only if it is unused The Update function serves to change the panel value on symbols alrea
335. mer etc Each symbol must correspond with an image slide with the same name and stored in the same folder for viewing in the dialog window The creation of blocks symbols takes place through the AutoCAD Mblocco or Wblock command The creation of images slides takes place through the AutoCAD Gendia or Melde command 17 General commands 249 Prefix File This allows you to directly choose the file that contains the symbols library configuration The correct setting of the prefix file is of fundamental importance to simplify symbol insertion operations on the drawing the contents of the PRI file can be viewed from 17 2 Symbol SETTINGS lt is advisable to generate a new prefix file for every brand and series of components intended to be used for example IMPIANTI_Ave Noir PRI IMPIANTI_Ave Blanc PRI IMPIANTI_Vimar Linea PRI IMPIANTI_Bticino Living PRI IMPIANTI Bticino Magic PRI etc New Drawing Let us Suppose we have to draw the planimetry of an appartment of about 100 sq m with indicative dimensions of 10 x 10 metres For practical reasons we decide right from the start to express the various sizes wall length wall thickness etc in centimetres so we set the unit of measure to lt cM gt Now we have to choose the most suitable sheet format for the drawing scale concerned In our example there are the following possibilities calculated on the width of the 1000 cm layout 1 Drawing sca
336. mjad aggancio ur FPL 10 16 ALE El DJ tes Add To file a new code it is essential to type the values for Manufacturer Type Description and Section when the terminal is normal the Number of levels must be added when it is a multiple terminal Manufacturer Type Description and Pin Sequence for a connector plug Type The choice between Terminal Multiple Terminal Plug and Accessory allows access to the fields for compiling the data Terminal activates the terminal Section field Multiple Terminal activates the Section and Levels fields Plug activates the Pin Sequence With Accessory no further fields are activated Manufacturer Morsetti Dat Terminals Dat is an ASCII file in which every line corresponds to Type an article code Type with the relevant values and descriptions It is also possible Description to act manually on the file carefully respecting the order and structure of the already existing fields Import Allows you to import data contained in database files provided by specific manufacturers or from the Morsetti Dat Terminals Dat database file of previous Spac versions Example of record that describes a code related with the Normal Terminal BRAND TERMINAL TYPE SECT BLK M DESCR BLK R Example of record that describes a code related with the Multiple Terminal BRAND MULTIPLE TYPE SECT LEV Seq BLK M DESCR BLK R Ex
337. mmand Create connections This command is used to switch a standard connection to serial or parallel The function asks you to a D Create type of connection Select the first wire 1st point 1 Select the second wire 27 point 2 D You are asked to choose Parallel or Serial It is always necessary to check that the Tee intersection Change from Standard to Parallel or 1 as been drawn with only two lines Serial 100 Spac Start 2012 Edit connections This command is used to switch a serial connection to parallel or vice versa D D Change from Serial to Parallel and from Parallel to Serial Shielding The function asks you to Change the type of connection Select sloped line lt Enter Quit gt It is always necessary to select the sloped line as shown in the example in the figure This command is used to draw the shielding of a cable 3 Shielding drawing The connection point appears automatically if the 3rd point is indicated on an already existing wire The function asks you to Select first point lt Enter Quit gt select second point to point 3rd point to point 4th point etc The size of the shielding drawing is proportioned on the basis of the Passo Fili Wire Clearance configured using 4 1 Setting 4 General commands 101 4 7 Component references The list of all the references of drawn components is obtained This also allows you
338. multaneously change the laying height of several symbols In the presence of the node the change is also valid for all the elements that are hooked to the one that has just been changed see par 28 2 Therefore a component hooked to a free element without node is released after the use of this command as the second symbol keeps the original laying height 21 Elements 329 Multiple laying height This is similar to the Laying height command but it allows you to change the vertical position laying height of several symbols at the same time updating the length of all the sections connected The function requests Change element height Select Elements selection The function places all the symbols selected and the heights defined in the list Defined heights These are the various laying heights of the symbols selected and placed in the list Laying Height cm Presa 164 2P PE Presa 104 2P PE This is the new height value to be changed The new value can be taken from the list of Defined heights Add This is used to repeat the selection and add further symbols to the list Delete This is used to remove the selected symbols from the list View The View button is particularly useful for tracking the position of a symbol on the planimetry In fact it is highlighted to facilitate its recognition The function requests Zoom Zoom End Return Pressing and
339. mum of 20 blocks the dialog window can show a max of 20 windows NOTE Deleting a block compromises the viewing of the numerically subsequent ones Terminal Box The box is a system for speeding up the insertion of the terminals on components that belong to panels other than the default one In addition to insertion of the terminals a rectangle is drawn around the component with the colour and linetype of the graphic features set During execution of the 6 1 Insert Terminals command with box option you are asked for the name of the panel it belongs to this value is a text inserted with the characteristics configured in Height and Text Color 4 General commands 87 Terminal and Connector Database The terminal and connector database is opened that is stored in the Morsetti Dat Terminals Dat file in the settings folder The list in the figure shows the data concerning the terminals to see those concerning the connectors or multiple terminals select Type i The database is used during the 6 1 Insert Terminals and 6 2 Insert Connectors functions Teminal and Plug Connector Configuration wl Manufacturer pe Sect block Terminal 5FO 4 6 VLM 10 16 VL 16 FPL 10 16 H FU710 00 FPL 10 16 L EIK3 EIKS ElK6 EIK10 EIKT4 EIKT10 EIKS 14 EIKE4 FIKE10 UK 2 5 N UKSN UKEN UK 10 N UKH 50 UKH 95 USLK 2 5 N USLK5N CABUR Morsetto portafusibile con LED Fus diam 6 32 m
340. n KA2 the reference Att n has revealed the error Jh Pins on sub elements Jv Pins on Components Error Max no of FC closed contacts exceeded Report Ce Parents C Elements Ref arrows Output tease zs zen _ The fault detected is Exceeded Max No of closed contacts FC 148 Spac Start 2012 Parent KA2 Y x Pressing Preview it is seen that this is Contact PinB PinC limited to only one NC contact 12 in fact in the Reference Not eeh associated only the closed contact that has caused the error is present see figure Pressing Legend the abbreviations used for the various types of contact are consulted The problem can be solved in 2 different ways Replace Contactor Clicking on Contactors or Auxiliary for switches selector push buttons etc a new reference other than 12E is chosen which can accommodate the third closed contact 03E or 13E etc When the new reference is confirmed the error message is removed immediately Contactors and Auxiliary are symbols contained in the two folders of Libraries Ref Cnt and Ref Aux Replacement of the contactor also involves replacement of the type of material this solution is valid only when the Bill of Materials has not been established yet see par 8 1 Add Head The additional head allows you to increase the number of contacts keeping Reference 12E unchanged Clicking on Heads a Reference to be add
341. n This mode allows the creation of variable attributes but not requested during insertion of the block When a block is inserted that comprises a preassigned attribute the value of the attribute is not requested and the default value is assigned automatically or no value if a standard value has not been established previously The Spac symbols libraries use the Preassign mode extensively to ensure that in the drawing stage only the minimum indispensable data are requested O These variables are described in detail in the AutoCAD User Manual Slide A slide file is a raster image of the current work window In the model space a slide file is created only of the current window In the paper space a slide file is created of the view in the paper space including all the windows and the relevant contents The parts of the drawing located outside the screen or deactivated or frozen layers are not included in the slide The slide is the image that is shown by the insertion menus of the symbols Slides are files with SLD extension and must be stored using the AutoCAD Gendia command in the same folder in which the symbol to be represented is resident To respect the proportions of the rectangular box for inserting symbols see par 15 3 the image is to be proportioned with a width height ratio of 1 0 75 aspect_ratio 0 75 Many slides of the Spac symbols are grouped in libraries Slidelib files with SLB extension These
342. n of protections dimensioning of raceways cables and circuit networks Caneco has a total calculation function to define the protections and cables of all the circuits This function simplifies the designer s tasks and design times in case of changes to inputs cable lengths etc The assignment of loads on phases in the single panel and for the whole installation is also optimised automatically or manually The power still available in the panel for every circuit is re calculated and shown Caneco also calculates the inputs of all the panels or busbars up to the power feed starting from the terminal circuits according to the use coefficients of every circuit and every distribution and of the simultaneity coefficients between users within the same circuit All the data and main results of the calculation can be viewed in a single window Other pieces of information give details of all the parts of the calculation characteristics of the protection IKs selectivity The first role of Caneco is the design of circuit cables and protections Forcing these data it is also possible to use it as check software CANECO is an independent programme It runs all the calculation operations autonomously and automatically builds the graphics in single feed form without the use of further graphic software However it is possible to dialog with Caneco extracting the data from the planimetric drawing developed with Spac Start they are processed by the calcu
343. n the following example numbering is supposed starting from Num 1 DN Y w Prefixes separated by Mi Mi Mi spaces 120 Spac Start 2012 The terminals are inserted after choosing the type of terminal panel and terminal block It is possible to select one wire at a time or enter a point in the blank space and the fence mode selection is activated automatically D ST E EEN S d 100 02 199 101 102 Wire selection in fence mode It is possible to generate several fences before confirming The point in which the wire is selected with the fence is used as position for inserting the terminal Terminal Box This option allows you to draw a rectangle box that encloses all the elements to be assigned to a panel other than the current one all the wires connected to 102 the elements contained in the box are assigned a Mi terminal The components in the box are edited as Panel value The function works after entering two points for creating the rectangle as shown in the figure 405 X When the terminal is_inserted from the Box on an Mi 90 already numbered wire it always acquires the value from the wire For the graphic construction consideration is taken o of the specific settings configured see par 4 2 1st and 2nd point for building the Box Normally the box is used to show the components that are located on push button panels desks on board machine external pane
344. nal symbols A block that comprises the following series of attributes is considered as a Terminal symbol by convention the invisible attributes are defined with height 1 mm and color 3 green with height 2mm for the others Label Default Type Description Panel P Panel the terminal block belongs to Terminal P Terminal block the terminal belongs to Block Cross section Kr Cross section in mm of the terminal Numi Input wire number or name Numm Terminal number or name Numo Output wire number or name Level Notem IP Available for the list of components connected upstream Kr Indicates the shelf of a multiple terminal Notev P Available for the list of components connected downstream Usage IP Main usage component see par 6 4 Rep Number of repetitions in terminal block Wire interruption parameter If Radius 1 the wire is interrupted by 2mm Support Optional for data extraction Note the data marked with are examples Type P Preassign Type I Invisible The attribute is present only in symbols that represent multiple terminals 226 Spac Start 2012 Panel Terminal Block Cross section Numi Numm Numo Level Notem Notev Usage Rep Radius The PANEL attribute contains the reference of the electrical panel in which the terminal block of the terminal is physically located in the diagram This makes it possible to differentiate processings according to the electr
345. nces see par 4 2 the option Cross in line Start and Destination is set during the insertion of a start return it is possible to also insert the corresponding destination return on the chosen page Returns cannot be inserted in blank spaces but only after selecting a wire or line To change the data of a return only the 5 7 Ddattef command can be used it is not correct to use the AutoCAD Eattedit or Ddatte commands Note lt is of fundamental importance to correctly distinguish on the drawing the use between returns for Connections and returns for Power feeds see par 4 4 4 General commands 99 4 6 Drawing Utilities Single feed aspect grid Create connections Edit connections Shielding Single feed aspect grid The activation of this command changes the Snap and Grid values to suggest the values helpful in simplifying the insertion operation of single feed macro blocks on the drawing The example in the figure shows how the grid ar gt 2 gt S4 respects the same spacing between the E various symbols and between the data tables Snap Interval 12 5 x 5 Grid Interval 10 x 5 LE Ji D NOTE The values suggested are valid for traditional tables circuits 6 Some title blocks might not be aligned with this setting The OFF option restores the start situation It is possible to edit or create different Snap and Grid spacings using the AutoCAD Ddimodi co
346. nd connectors the signal names of Returns as well as information on Cables and Terminal Blocks that have been used in the job order This database is fundamental for obtaining perfectly consecutive references it is advisable to update its database every time substantial changes are made to the drawing especially when they are made without using Spac commands The database file DoSpac mdb is generated as new when a new job order is created while at the opening of already existing job orders and prior to version 2012 it is generated by the standardization and consequent conversion of the following files 1 Do Drawing Mdb database of the job order data of the previous versions 2 ldSymbol List Sig component reference index 3 Terminal List Mor terminal and connector index 4 Signal List Fre Returns signal name index 5 Cables Used Cav cable index The original files are renamed with 2004 extension to retain compatibility with the previous Spac versions The Scan Multi sheets command works automatically during drawing replacing the function performed manually by the Ricostruire File Sigle Rebuild Reference File Ricostruire File Morsetti Rebuild Terminal File and Ricostruire File Rimandi Rebuild Returns File in the previous Spac versions 106 Spac Start 2012 9 Wire numbering 5 1 Number wires On multiwire electric diagrams the various connections are identified ref
347. ndow is accessed where any drawings already present are listed lt is possible to access one of these with the Open button or create new ones with the New button Creating a multi sheet also automatically creates the folder that has the same name as the job order Besides the drawings also all the other configuration supporting and backing files generated for that job order will be saved in this folder Job Order multi sheet s EXAMPLE2008 Xx To open a multi sheet No Multi sheet name Pref Multisheet descriptio drawing double click on PLANIMETRIA Planimetric the corresponding item EDIFICIO ARTIGIANALE Planimetric Diagram LAYOUT_PLANIMETRIC Print Layout or select it from the list LINIFILARE Singlefeed Functional Diagram and press the Open MULTIFILARE Multiteed Functional Diagram button For every multi sheet the date time and name of the designer who created it are shown This information IS stored in the Job Description SP file present in every job order folder Job Order Multi sheets dialog window Each multi sheet is numbered consecutively starting from No 1 this numbering order determines the sequence of the files e processing priority and order of the sheets with the same name same number but with different prefix To change this priority use of the Move function is necessary it moves the multi sheet selected one position at a time With Edit it is possible to change the descriptive data
348. necessary in the group of System Printers Always check that the default AutoCAD printing parameters have been configured for this type of setting The files are positioned in the Pdf folder of the job order directory 344 Spac Start 2012 23 Bill of Materials 23 1 Material Database Management of the materials database takes place through the specific Materials database programme In the drawing environment it is possible to access and use the materials database directly to associate the catalogue codes with the symbols on the diagram see par 23 2 Materials database can manage several database files on opening the default one is shown see par 8 1 It is the user s task if considered necessary to generate more suitable databases customized for specific requirements 23 2 Associate Materials This allows you to associate a material code or macrocode with one or more components present on the diagram Firstly access is necessary using the 8 1 Material Database command to select the article code to be stored with Errore L origine riferimento non e stata trovata afterwards this function triggers the request to select the components on the drawing with which to assign it 1 Access to Database Call up the Materials database programme that must be kept open at the same time as the drawing programme Select the Manufacturer and Family in sequence to select the Code concerned and store it pressing Associate
349. nent SS1 simply click on the End button from the options window the function requests DESTINATION Select Element Section or Node Return for options GER point the destination symbol or point is to be selected NOTE in the certain presence of a destination element we could have done without indicating the 4 point as the selection of the symbol SS1 5 point would have automatically drawn with H 0 the part of section at laying height Ocm After selecting DESTINATION the section reference window opens automatically After confirming the data of the section the command ends The three dimensional view of the section drawn with the previous example shows the result obtained lt can therefore be concluded that Freely is a mode Suitable for connecting 2 components with non standard paths The length of the section is always calculated automatically also in the case of changes using the AutoCAD Stretch command However Freely is also used to draw the sections before drafting the symbols To change the path of sections use of 18 5 Change laying height and 18 6 Change laying height at ends is necessary Compared with the previous Spac Start versions some Laying modes are no longer present including Derivations Spac Start 2072 allows you to make derivations in a simple manner as you simply select an already existing section as start point of a new section with any of
350. next NumM There are 3 possibilities for choosing both the NumM and the level to be used Consecutive values Multiple terminals 1 172 e Only those available Mer When continuing in the conventional manner xj pressing OK Terminals window the function proposes the NumM values immediately consecutive to the last one used level and In the example of the figure on the left the last terminal inserted is shown NumM 1 Level 1 the information 1 2 indicates that 1 level of the 2 available has already been used from the general Insert Level So the programme proposes NumM 1 visible Cancel in the title of the window of the figure on the right and Level 2 Pressing the New button of the figure on the right the programme would propose NumM 2 or in any case the consecutive value to the previous one shown in the title of the figure on the right and Level 1 leaving in any case NumM 1 Level 2 available Use those available Multiple terminals 122 Spac Start 2012 Consulting the list of all the multiple terminals already used it is possible to note that some of them still have levels available 1 2 means that 1 level is available 2 2 means that no level is available terminal complete The View those available setting acts as filter on the list leaving in view only the terminals that have at least one level available Hew Cancel Pressing the
351. nfi blocks storing them in the same folder as those already existing The block name must be consecutive to the names already existing Blinfi4 Blinfi5 etc for a maximum of 20 blocks the dialog window can show a max of 20 windows Deleting a block compromises the viewing in series of the numerically subsequent ones If the Blinfi is already on the drawing updating is obtained of all the values contained with the following request Summary already inserted keep Spares value lt Yes gt No Pressing S Y the maximum number for spares remains unchanged Pressing N a new value is calculated on the basis of the configuration default 10 Using the AutoCAD Eattedit or Ddatte commands you can change the symbol values manually Always check that the value of the declared spares value is real as the numbers might be occupied in other pages 5 6 Delete numbers This command allows you to remove the wire numbering on the Wire selected on the whole Sheet or on the current Multi sheet Removal does not only involve the number graphics symbol containing the wire number but it acts internally on the line data freeing it of the current wire value Numbering the wire subsequently in fact does not require updating of the value as would take place with a simple graphic removal This command is also used before storing the sheets neutrally master 114 Spac Start 2012 5 7 Ddattef The Ddattef command is used
352. ng in the Symbols folder you can customize new blocks storing them in the same directory as the existing ones from MO BLK1 to 24 Section This is the value in mm This datum for the already existing articles has been obtained from the manufacturer s catalogue Levels This field is used to describe the numbers or names of the levels present on the multiple terminal Let us see an example of double terminal 1 2 or A B It is not possible to describe the levels with names that contain spaces as the space character is used to separate one value from the next Pin This field is used to describe the numbers or names of the connections present on Sequence the connector wiring pin Let us see an example of a plug with 6 poles T 123 4 5 6 PE or RED BLACK YELLOW GREEN BLUE WHITE PE It is not possible to describe the poles with names that contain spaces as the space character is used to separate one value from the next Accessories Database composed of fastening terminals terminal plates separators etc The accessories are used only during customization of terminal blocks with Edit terminal block For each of the types Terminal Multiple Terminal etc there are neutral configurations in the database associated with the manufacturer None 4 General commands 89 Terminal Block f This serves to define the graphic features of the drawing of the terminal block generated by the 6 3 Terminal Bloc
353. ns Insert Node This command is used to insert one or more nodes on the drawing regardless of the use of the 28 2 Symbol insertion command A new node can be inserted in any position on the drawing so not necessarily on an already existing wall see Select Wall The function requests Insert Node in planimetry Select insertion point or Wall select ell Lastly it is necessary to indicate the node laying height in cm GED Vale oy The nodes are positioned on the drawing at real height Nodes are of considerable importance as they are used to indicate the real position of the components for this reason they must be placed on the drawing with suitable accuracy se See Insert Node par 28 2 O The nodes are automatically positioned on a specific Nodes layer 306 Spac Start 2012 3D Sections The sections drawn normally are already in 3D graphics This command simply obtains the enlargement of the thickness of the lines equalling the real dimensions of the section the command has two states ON and OFF The polylines that define the sections are drawn with the thickness indicated during Dimension Raceways to make their real size clearer The position of the components is simulated with the drawing of a box placed at the suitable laying height This condition is considered for consultation and is not valid for normal work The initial viewing is restored
354. ns 2 point Next point current H 270 cm Return for options 3 point Next point current H 270 cm Return for options Return After the insertion of each point the function shows the laying height value Press Return to change the laying height and access the options From the options menu besides Change height it is also possible to use Cancel useful for deleting a point that has been entered incorrectly Undo Cancel The 3 point of the section is positioned at H 270cm Now to draw a path down to the floor a double click is necessary on Change height the function shows the height window You need to type the measurement in cm of the destination point of the downward path To go down to the floor the value is 0 SPAC Request Search E NOTE Pressing on lt Get value when active you can click on a symbol only to copy its height value otherwise this value must be typed on the keyboard This window is also used when no destination element exists at the end of a section see 5 point it allows you to indicate a position point not restricted by element which practically replaces selection of the destination element Next point current H 0 cm Return for options 4 point Next point current H 0 cm Return for options Return 288 Spac Start 2012 The 4 point of the section is now positioned at H 0cm Now to draw the last path up to compo
355. ns belonging to the various installations clicking on the coloured rectangle opens the window that shows all the available colors Using Delete it is possible to remove the names that have not been used in the drawing The names and colors of the installation families are stored in the Impianti cfg Installations cfg file in the settings folder 294 Spac Start 2012 18 2 Information This command is used to insert the reference and other information concerning sections on the drawing The function requests Select a Section Return for options The first time the command is used it is wise to access the Options to be able to select using Settings the most suitable graphic form The various items of the Options can be quickly activated double clicking with the mouse avoiding use of the Ok button This accesses the specific configuration window where it is possible to select the data forming the information these settings are used for the Height Color Style and Width factor of the information which during drawing are automatically associated with the Information layer of the same name Section information settings The information is the composition of all the data which with Add have been selected and configured in the list of Fields sorted by output Pressing Remove a datum can be removed from the list The next re insertion will then take place as last datum sorted by output Pressing Defau
356. nsioning PFC and FPC are the abbreviations of Prefix Sheet and Segment Separator This is the dividing character essential in PFC makeup usually the dot is used while it is superfluous for FPC see par 4 7 Final Zero The final zero is an additional suffix which is optional and not incremental The prefix file see Symbol Configuration associated with 4 1 Setting acts on variable P O prefix while the value of Sheet Dimensioning acts on the variable Cat segment Free Tagging During the insertion of symbols on the drawing a tag is proposed which derives from one of the 4 previous settings This tag can be changed manually by typing any value Tags entered manually are not retained when the programme is asked to regenerate all the referencing see par 4 7 Manual Tagging free eee See 15 3 Symbol insertion If the symbol prefix is not configured empty no tag is proposed and the manual procedure is followed free typing from keyboard Panel Prefix Option that allows you to associate the component reference with the panel name The character chosen by default is used to The two figures show the same incremental tag KM1 associated firstly with panel QG and then with panel BM CAUTION Manually editing the string contained in the job order configuration file Spac_cfg ini see par 2 5 you can redefine the separation character Symbols Tagging Prefix P
357. nswering the question Do you want to go back to the initial view No lt Yes gt shown in the command row View materials This is used to turn the window with Associated materials list on or off PickAdd Check on the objects selection method If this is off the last object selected replaces the one selected previously which is removed by the selection This is the condition for working with the automatic filter If it is activated every object selected is added to the current selection group In this condition the filters on the database are not updated automatically with Apply filters active Configure filters This is used to turn the window with Filters on or off Apply filters This is activated automatically when a filtered viewing of the materials database is in progress Pressing the Apply Filters button again takes you back to view the complete database Help The help on line is activated Go back to 8 4 DbCenter 8 Bill of Materials e 187 8 5 LibCenter LibCenter is a specific programme to quickly insert symbols lt can be used as an alternative to the traditional method where symbol insertion is carried out through the pop up menu of the library chosen In the LibCenter the symbols are divided up into groups and sub groups searching for a component is easy due to the tree view structure of the programme and it is possible to browse down to selection of the symbol visible
358. nts e or for specific Installations making a filter on cables c and raceways t 348 Spac Start 2012 Bill of materials filters Enable ercuits filter With the example of the figure pressing Select the elements of zones 1 3 and 4 with the A C E le cables and raceways of the GM leien Electrical and Distribution y l za me Pressing the All button the START ___ Selection __Aan__ _ Ga gt HONGE Late bill is total List by TYPE The list by type is divided into 3 groups Elements Raceways and Cables In each group the various manufacturers are sorted in alphabetical sequence lastly for every Manufacturer materials are sorted according to the product code contained in the TYPE attribute of the symbols the codes that form part of the same component macrocode are thus not listed consecutively At the end of the scan of the drawing the list is shown on the screen example with compact view Fall of materials by type Cassetta di connessione denvazione da incas Cassetta di connessione dervazione da paret Punto luce PLAF EMERG 11W IP40 1H PLAF INDUSTR PROIETTORE SERIE 20 SERIE 40 SERIE 44 PRESA INT BL NOW 1x1 5 BK NOVV K 1x1 5 BN PLAF PAR LAM VERN IP40 2X36W PROIETTORE ESTERNO 150W JM IP55 PRESA 2P T 164 CENTRALINO INCASSO 24MOD C SPO IP4 CASSETTA PARETE IN PVC 10010050 IP PRESA INT BL PAR ISOL 3X16A C FUS IP5 SPEEDY FLAM 450 750V SPEEDY FLAM 450 750V NOVV K 1x15 B
359. nwards it is necessary to indicate O and 10 x y Rotation The attributes are rotated by the inclination expressed in degrees Text style This is the list of text styles created by the AutoCAD Style command stored in the current drawing Width factor The value 1 is the width factor of the original font values below 1 obtain compression of the text and over 1 expansion Attributes visibility This command allows you to change the visibility status of the attributes Selecting a drawing component a list is shown with the condition of all the attributes that form part of it Select the attributes to be changed in the Attribute Selection list then press the Add button to insert them in the Attributes to edit list Pressing Add the function automatically switches the visibility status but the status can also be set manually Press Change to change the characteristic of an attribute already inserted in the list of those to be changed and Delete to remove it Change attribute visibility x Only selected symbols NOME Name veer Te FUNZIONET change Visbiltyto VISIBILE Panel INVISIBLE FUNZIONE2 change Visibilty to VISIBILE the change takes place only for FUNCTION1 INVISIBLE NOME change Visibility to INVISIBILE th bl k t d Function2 INVISIBLE Manufacturer INVISIBLE e OCKS Selected INVISIBLE INVISIBLE Identical to selection acts on all the blocks equal to the one selected
360. o Protezione Quadra a monte OGBT sl Fees Sottoquadro Tipo Cont Ind Riferimento Cava Tipo stile Illuminazione s Alimentazione E Contenuto Pah FE Descrizione Illumin interna fila 1 Anima Polo Descrizlone Azsorbirn PLAF PAR POLLIPES 258 PLAF PAR POLI IPE5 2458 PLAF PAR POLI IPE5 2458 PLAF PAR POLIIPES 258 PLAF PAR POLLIPES 258 Elimina Aggiungi Modifica Assorbim Totale utilizzatori 5 1 Utilize mt Lungh rm 2557 oe gt The type of protection and type of cable are proposed by default based on the style of the circuit selected You can change these values each time The circuit length in metres and the distance of the first equipment are calculated automatically Using the Add and Delete buttons it is possible to increase or decrease the number of equipments of the circuit The Input is calculated with the formula Load x No of Equipments on the basis of the load value associated with the first element that is selected as equipment If return is pressed at the request to select equipment a circuit with Sub Busbar style is generated The data entered during this operation are stored in the job order folder in the DefCaneco Ini and InterfacciaCaneco Mdb files The accidental deletion of the file causes the loss of all the information Caneco There are no checks during the drawing session O Consistency between the information entered w
361. o make a start configuration coincide with every customer When a customer is associated during the creation of a new job order Spac seeks a stored start configuration with the same customer name to be able to propose it as default configuration In any case It is possible to choose a start configuration other than the one proposed by the programme In the start configuration besides the settings related with the customer master title block thus dimensions segments position of page numbers see par 3 15 etc also all the settings concerning symbols numberings terminals and tables are stored see par 4 2 etc Customer and Configuration aligned The example figure shows the customer SDProget aligned with the configuration SDProget This is the ideal condition for starting a new job order all the settings are already set SDPROGET according to the customers specific requirements right from the start Customer and Configuration not aligned The example figure shows the customer SDProget and the configuration Base SDProget This condition allows you to start a new job with all the settings but not set according to the customer s requirements This obliges the user to check all the settings at the start of the new drawing The start configurations are stored in the files with INI extension in the Spac Libraries Cfg folder When a new job order is started the start configuration is automatically copied and stored
362. o selected component Scegliere il filtro da applicare all archivio the filter linked to the selected component Scelta filtro Filtro associato al componente selezionato IS d isp ayed Dato 1 Rel Industriali als a n Dato 2 Bobina 110 VAC Filter defined in the Filtro ini file Dato 3 Montagaio su Zoccolo Filtro definito nel fle Fe bt Not used Dato 1 8 r e Dato 2 gt Other filter defined in database Dato 3 Altro filtro definito in archivio Select a filter configured with Define a Tee filter Dator Date e fPulsanteria Dean o Rel Industriali Bobina 48 VDC Montaggio su Zoccolo ES Bobina 110 VAC The Materials Database is filtered when OK is clicked and only the components that satisfy the filter parameters will be qe displayed Rel Industriali Montaggio su Zoccolo Aanulla hito corente nnulla Just click on Clear filter to restore the display to the complete database 168 Spac Start 2012 Find codes This function is useful for quickly finding a code within the current file The search is conducted within an individual manufacturer when specified otherwise all manufacturers in the file are considered In the example the code to be search for is 601280 under the indicated manufacturer The code number is incomplete and finishes with the wildcard character This causes the search to find
363. ociation will take place automatically during the opening of new jobs Change Start Cfg The command opens the list of all the local configurations choose the name of the configuration intended to be changed then select which settings keys you intend to transfer to the start configuration 4 General commands 69 Import Settings This function is used to import the settings contained in a Start Configuration partially or totally into the Spac_cfg ini file of the local job order configuration It is also possible to import directly from a Local Configuration of another job order taking the settings from the Spac_cfg ini file in the job order Cfg folder zl The command opens with the choice of Dati_Alimentazione Settaggi_Alimentazione Rimandi_Alimentazioni Rimandi_Collegamenti Numerazione_Filo_Morsetti Configurazione_Loop Diagram Prefissi_Suffissi Box_Morsetti Output_Morsetti Output_Multipli Qutput Spi i Configurazione_Rientro_Morsettiera Configurazione_Rientro_Morsettiera_Ltenza Configurazione_Legenda_Funzioni Configurazione_Legenda_Simboli Configurazione_Legenda_Cross Reference Dati alimentazione Settaggi alimentazione Rimandi Alimentazioni Rimandi Collegamenti Numerazione Mili e Morsetti Configurazione Loop Diagram Frefissi suffissi Box Morsetti Output morsetti Output morsetti multipli Output spin i Configurazione entro morsettiera Configurazione Rientro Morsettiera Uten
364. of curves Fill xi The Linked section list is empty only if the elements chosen start or destination have not already been used for other sections H the elements have already been used to link other sections the Linked section list will show the list of the references of the common sections The list allows you to choose the creation of a new section or of a sub section Normally the use of sub sections is Suitable for the main or more complex paths while it is necessary in cases in which the section serves several elements placed in array Choosing an already existing Reference from the list a sub section is generated It is also possible to choose a New Reference from the list This selection is used to generate a new independent section Reference The section reference is proposed automatically and is composed of a prefix default TR and an incremental number It is possible to set new prefixes and regulate the start number see Options 18 1 or use free names Installation Each section belongs to a family installation It is possible to generate several families to obtain more subdivision of the sections In so doing it is possible to print the drawing reserved to the alarm system or TV system or cable radio etc see Options 18 1 Turning on or off the view of a family is also particularly helpful during the drawing of particularly complex installations or wher
365. of each multi sheet The multi sheets marked with an asterisk are consideration as default by Spac processings Each time it is however possible to choose the multi sheets to be processed changing the default list This setting is enabled during the creation of a New Multi sheet with the setting To manage during processing O NOTE Planimetric diagrams ignore the Sheet prefix parameter 2 Basics e 29 New Multi sheet Creating a new multi sheet means creating a new dwg file the file name can be chosen freely or be composed of the job order name plus a number It is then possible to associate information like the description and designer s name with the new multi sheet There are 3 ways to establish the name of a new multi sheet 1 Number requires only entering a number 2 Name 3 Model requires the choice of a file zl The information of the drawing description designer date prefix etc is stored in the Job Description _SP file present in the job order folder SPAC START EXAMPLE the prefix is associated with all the sheet numbers created in the new file New Multi sheet dialog window The Number mode requires only entering a number from 1 to 99 for example typing the no 1 automatically obtains the name of the Multi sheet that is composed of Job Order Number 2 digits therefore Example200601 the O is added automatically The Name mode allows yo
366. of the sheet multi sheet or job order All symbols all the blocks are changed on the sheet multi sheet or job order that possess at least one of the attributes to be changed Pressing Default the current configuration is stored in local mode see par 4 2 for subsequent uses of the same command If confirmed without pressing Default the configuration is considered as occasional and used only once 198 Spac Start 2012 Replace value Individual attribute value replacement This command allows you to replace characters in strings of attributes In Search within Attribute the datum to be changed is inserted the name of the most common tags can be taken from Attributes list this list is not user implementable Name In the figure in the example we have written CR in Find and KA in Replace with the following result e E Y e ke Pressing the Save button the combination is stored in local mode in the Spac_cfg ini file for subsequent uses see par 2 5 D Ce sf A arial A Ene et Pressing the Delete button deletes a stored combination NOTE the character keeps the numerical prefix or suffix unchanged When intending to replace only a part of the string turn off Full attribute value in the figure in the example we have written KAT KA2 KM 1 KM2 A in Find and M in Replace with the result shown in the figure The Upper 1 Lower case le
367. of the wall is known e g 70 cm as in the second figure 17 General commands e 257 The position of the 2nd point is fundamental for indicating the direction of the door or window The X change edge option is used to exchange the right point of measurement with the left one or top with bottom If the 2nd point is entered inside the wall the function warns you with the following message Error select at least two lines On walls drawn with lines that are not parallel the door takes the same inclination as the first line selected O Materials for Spac Render optional set the type of material to be assigned to the object drawn Pressing Select object it captures the kind of material to an existing object while Change is already associated with the material change 258 Spac Start 2012 17 7 Stairways This command is used to draw stairways both in the normal way with a single flight and in more complex forms composed of several flights joined by landings For these drawings Spac uses the specific layer called Stairways Stairway Features pap The more frequently used Stair SCH wl Width in cm and Number of steps Ce are stored pressing the Default Number of steps button S PAS They will then be proposed the next or N time the command is used Olet Center O Right K The Stair generating line is helpful for setting the base point and the Elevation direction of the graphic development
368. ogramme or remove components already installed Changing the current setup proves to be particularly helpful above all for adding Symbol Libraries or Material databases not installed originally Pressing Edit when Spac has already been installed as Secondary Installation allows you to change the path of the shared Job Order and Libraries folders in the LAN Restore setup Running the setup procedure Setup when Spac Start is already installed opens the maintenance programme Pressing Restore the current setup status is checked to be able to allow re setup only of the components installed previously replacing any damaged or missing ones Remove setup To remove an installed Spac Start the Windows automatic uninstall procedure should be used from the Control Panel group the function is activated pressing the Add Remove programs button then select Spac Start 2012 from the list of applications that can be deleted Choose Remove and press Continue to start the uninstall process All the files belonging to the installation will be removed from the disk except the new ones created by the user and those with changes with respect to the original condition O Choose the item SPAC Start including installation folder and language EN 20 Spac Start 2012 1 3 Release 2012 new features The list below gives the main new features of Spac Start 2012 compared with the previous 2010 ve
369. oid overstepping the margins of the master title block with the table On the basis of the maximum number of lines foreseen and the height of the texts the maximum total height of the table is calculated This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Height to avoid overstepping the margins of the master title block with the table This represents the basic configuration of the output fields where applicable Pressing Default the current configuration is stored in local mode see par 4 2 for subsequent uses If confirmed without pressing Default the configuration is considered as occasional and used only once The function asks you to Select the table insertion point The configuration of the previous figure corresponds with the following graphic result Multisheet IEC ie RE Sfest AD IEC Library 2107 Cad ble SCHEMA Elettric En Cadthle 2D ENT 14138 pI ate avour D M2I0 5 33 1 HP E T TE materials TARN 16 26 o ade E HACCHINA Example of Canfigurator SSC 15 08 2117 15 33 Example of job orders table The configuration for drawing the table includes the following options Insertion Point Request Space Row x2 Sheet Character CSV File When several sheets are needed to complete the drawing of the table you can choose whether to change the point of insertion of the table on the pages following the first one or not The space occupied by every line is calculated in proportion with the c
370. oject that b has just been started in de origine o H 1 int NTR Jt Brech Be the job order folder Risultati forzabil containing the IMP files A el to be imported Kpross M fos LI PEN hRS d It is advisable to consult Frequenza C 50H2 o Cis the specific instructions for Ree OCC CCC Use manual provided with Il D IN 4 ICC3 Max A 0 ID A 0 the product Frezza U IM ff a vuoto O ICC Max 4 0 ICC 172 Min A To import the data exported from the planimetry in the IMP files select the Import Export command from the File menu and then Text From the window in the figure a choose Import Spac Export SPAC O To import the data contained in the Linee txt Lines txt and Utilizz txt Use txt of the previous Spac Start 4 x versions select the Import Export command from the File menu and then SPAC CAUTION With this operation Caneco imports the IMP files found in the folder in which the project is saved It is therefore fundamental to save the Caneco project in the current job order before importing the data 242 Spac Start 2012 Exporting data from Caneco This is used to export the results of the calculations and checks executed with the Caneco programme to Spac Start for making the Single feed diagram In the Caneco environment select the Import Export command from the File menu and then Text From the window in the figure choose Export Spac
371. on Adapt Width lt is necessary to set the total height of the stairway difference in height in the example it is the same as the height of the wall therefore 270 cm The width and height of the steps are calculated automatically by the function which requests Stairway initial point 1 point Stairway direction 2 point Type the stairway length lt 300 cm gt Enter or other value Adapt Elevation Width 20 cm It is necessary to set the total height of the stairway difference in height in the example it is the same as the height of the wall therefore 270 cm The height of the steps is calculated automatically by the function which requests Stairway initial point 1 point Stairway direction 2 POLNE In this example and also in the previous one the elevation height is 27 cm Elevation 20 cm Adapt Width It is necessary to set the total length of the stairway in the example it is the same as the length of the wall therefore 300 cm The width of the steps is calculated automatically by the function which requests Stairway initial point 1 point Stairway direction 2 2 point Type the stairway length lt 300 cm gt Enter or other value 260 Spac Start 2012 Elevation 20 cm Width 20 cm The width and height of the steps are indicated by the user therefore the stairway total height and length are calculated automatically and the function req
372. on the diagram as if it were a normal terminal To identify all the level terminals that form part of the same multiple terminal they are automatically associated with the same NumM value terminal number So the change of the NumM is extended to all levels of the terminal Change level E This is used to change or invert the position of the levels It is firstly necessary to select the terminal line to be changed then choose the new level to be occupied from the Level list Normally the level chosen is duplicated therefore select one of the double level lines and use the Level list to restore the level left available Pressing Change Values all the changes made to NumM Model Usage Notes and Return Block are assigned to the respective terminals With Save all the operations are stored and Update states them on the drawing in the symbols in replacement of the obsolete values CAUTION The choice or change of the Return BIk must be made among the compatible ones The association of a symbol not provided or not made with the appropriate characteristics compromises the development of the Multiple Terminal Drawing 6 Terminals and Connectors 133 Edit connector The Edit function allows you to make changes to the connector or plug This tool is used to change the brand and model of the connector to alter its pin sequence formation the existing graphics and output It is also possible to assign notes and usage
373. on the drawing using the Update function The Filters option is very practical especially when working with very substantial lists as it allows you to customize the data to be viewed The filter is not stored in such a way as to view the complete list at every access to the command This button is active only when changes have been made to the data of sections pressing Change The drawing can be updated with the new changes 18 Sections e 297 Testing This allows you to test in detail all the sections of the drawing in order to check for any faults or inconsistencies such as Laying type not uniform this could occur in the case of complex sections formed of several sub sections with different laying types Installations not uniform this could occur in the case of complex sections formed of several sub sections with different types of installation Raceway to be dimensioned this occurs in the case of undimensioned sections Raceway not uniform this could occur in the case of complex sections formed ol several sub sections with different raceway types Section with repeated name this occurs in the case of sections that have the same reference or sub sections that are not part of the same main section The references marked with an asterisk are those with repeated names Disconnected section this occurs in the sections that have at least one of the ends unused CSV Errors Pressing this button it is possible to sto
374. onal for programming uses The instructions are contained only in the helps available on line for each function Delete This is used to remove a print template Print Auto composition CR 21 After choosing a print set up from Select the manufacturers and the relevant families to print those available continue with S Forward gt gt to determine the anutacturers Families SC manufacturers and families LIGE CI RELE TERMICI C Merlin Gerin ALTAR 08 concerned C Moeller ALTIVAR 11 l l l Gran Y ALTIVAR 18 Follow the instructions given on the _ Pilz ALTIVAR 28 C Rockwell Automation 1 ALTIMAR 38 58 screen C Siemens COALTAR 66 68 Telemecanique LJ ALTRI ELEMENTI DI COMANDO E SEGNALAZIOF AVIATOR A GIORNO e Select all Backward Forward gt Delete The set up of new print templates is an operation that is advisable only for users with programming experience 8 Bill of Materials 161 Inserting a code Before being able to manually insert a material item the names of the manufacturer and family group it belongs to must already be present Insert Manufacturer o Meri Information SE read A PUE l A new Manufacturer can be added by right clicking on the name of a database file and selecting Add Manufacturer from the popup menu Right clicking on the name of a new Manufacturer opens the menu for retrieving Information first and then Inserting Family a Inform
375. oncerned symbols must be selected The symbol of the example in the figure is located at 18 cm from the ground Off The initial situation is restored When the components are inserted in the planimetry they are without the laying height value you can simply reconfirm the Or state to standardise the situation on all the symbols 21 7 View Links This command allows you to graphically highlight the objects that are connected to one another The function requests Select a Node an Element or a Section selection Total Elements and Sections connected to the reference Node No Node Selecting a node obtains the view of the links with all the symbols hooked to the same node and also of all the sections that lead from the various components Element Same as for selecting the node Section The point used for selecting the section is used to highlight the links upstream or downstream of the section this depends on the selected point in relation to the middle point The function automatically runs a zoom on the area concerned of the drawing Zoom Zoom End Return Pressing and you can control the enlargement while with Return the function is ended keeping the current zoom or restoring the initial view 21 8 Empty Nodes This command lists the empty nodes all the nodes without components and sections connected to them are considered empty nodes From the list that is shown when the command is sta
376. one you can type the command X on the keyboard Compared with the traditional Copy command of AutoCAD these functions allow you to obtain all the automatisms based on the category of the symbol X and XX are taken also pressing the central button of the mouse for mouse with 3 buttons or pressing the right hand button of the mouse together with Shift on the keyboard for mouse with 2 buttons Clone This is used to copy by selecting the symbols on the drawing with the same procedures and characteristics already seen for the previous command Copy Symbols with Selection X Clone Symbol differs as all the original information of the symbol to be copied is kept such as material data Functions 1 and 2 Register reference codes and settings concerning the Ignore Symbol list O You can quickly call up the function also typing the command XC on the keyboard Edit This function is used to change the data that have been entered in the symbol during insertion on the drawing In practice it replaces the use of the AutoCAD Eattedit and Ddatte commands simplifying the viewing and changing of the data contained in the attributes O You can quickly call up the function also typing the command XS on the keyboard 238 Spac Start 2012 Move This function is used to move a component symbol from one wire to another automatically restoring the connections Let us Suppose moving
377. one family or another it is therefore very important for the difference to be attributed correctly when the block is being created The symbol categories are e Parent Symbol e Register Reference Symbol e Sub element symbol e Element Symbol e Return Symbol e Accessory Symbols e Terminal Symbol e Plug Symbol e Terminal block symbol For all the categories indicated the block must be drawn completely on LAYER 0 there are no restraints concerning the colors and types of line that can be used even if for reasons of homogeneity it is preferable to refer to the symbols already made CAUTION The DALAYER logic color is not to be mistaken with color 7 white as the Dalayer is used by the programme for drawing wires distinguishing the colour of the two entities wire and symbol is particularly effective when drafting the diagram 15 Symbols 217 Parent Symbol The Parent symbol is fundamental for all operations including Cross Reference see par 7 1 During this procedure the programme lists on the parent symbol all the registers sheet and segment position of the Sub element symbol with the same name and vice versa OF1 124 L Blocks of relay coils switches thermal devices pushbuttons selectors etc have the attribute Pres M therefore they are Parent symbols d The AutoCAD Ddatte command allows you to check the attributes contained in the symbols to check the family they belong to Exampl
378. one positioned horizontally crossing their signals This is the function commonly used to connect a vertical component to a power feed The number of wires branched is the one set in No of wires the function checks that more wires than power feed lines are not branched The node take the color and line type from the already existing power feed lines This works in the same way as described previously for Node and serves to connect a multipolar component rotated 90 to a power feed drawn horizontally You are advised to work with Orto and Snap always active This works in the same way as described previously for Node and serves to connect a multipolar component rotated 90 drawn horizontally inverting the signal sequence This works in the same way as the Wire command but the operation is repeated from left to right according to the specification in No of connections at the distance indicated with Clearance between connections This function is used when a symbol is deleted from the wiring diagram and it is necessary to re connect two wires that have been separated Selecting them obtains a single connection This is used to insert the connection points on a Tee intersection of two lines The function controls the exact position of the point and checks that the Tee intersection has been drawn with only two lines The block used for the connections is stored in the symbols directory with
379. onfigured height of the texts This parameter allows you to double this space to allow the insertion of two lines of text This condition is particularly advantageous for inserting translations When several sheets are needed to complete the drawing of the table you can choose whether to continue on numerically consecutive sheets new or already existing or whether to generate numerically intermediate sheets e g 1 1A 1B etc Pressing on CSV File activates the configuration for generating a data extraction file The configuration procedure is the same as described previously for the table form 2 Basics 33 Customer Management Every Spac job order is associated with a customer Through this association it is possible to obtain some automatic functions such as for example automatic title block insertion and relevant compiling of the attributes with the job order data executing the 4 1 Setting command In addition it is possible to make a start configuration coincide for every customer Below is the sequence of operations for inserting a new customer 1 Press on Customer Management to access the specific window 2 Press on New type the CUSTOMER name on the keyboard and press Edit 3 Select the Master Title Block field press the Master Title Block button and choose the most Suitable one for the new customer among those available see Master Title Blocks par 3 18 Repeat the operation selecting the Squadratur
380. onnects the two components The three dimensional view of the section drawn with the previous example shows the result obtained This type of laying is particularly useful for drawing sections that are normally perpendicular to the normal working plane view thus difficult to see on the drawing if not in three dimensional view When it is necessary to select one of these sections Options is accessed to use the Search function which makes it possible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it To change the path of sections use of 18 5 Change laying height and 18 6 Change laying height at ends is necessary Start and destination elements Every section laying mode requests at both the start and for the destination point the selection of the respective start and destination components select element this selection is nil when no symbol to connect exists therefore a free section is generated select point Within the possible limits it is advisable to connect the sections to the components as the subsequent 19 1 Cable laying operation will be simplified considerably CAUTION The sections not connected to start and destination elements limit the automatic path search function during cable laying 18 Sections e 293 Options ll The Options button accesses the following dialog window This function allows both the management of the prefixes used for the s
381. or even on a new sub 1 d panel n The function requires the indication of the following points Specify the line s starting point Specify the intermediate point N 1 Specify the intermediate point N 2 P 3 The request of intermediate points could be finished by pressing Enter from the keyboard T DV selecting Arrival it is possible to design a new line Arrival On the final point 5 a Start Return is inserted Geen By selecting Return a new line is designed or a new sub 7 panel is defined 1 The function requires the indication of the following points g Specify the line s starting point Specify the line s end point On the final point 2 a Start Return is inserted 2 Return By selecting Terminal a new line is designed with the 7 characteristics of the terminal block OF 14 The function requires the indication of the following points 10 Specify the line s starting point Specify the line s end point On the final point 2 a Terminal is inserted 2 8 The terminal is associated to the Panel and Terminal Block configured Terminal During the execution of the single feed design the single feed tables are automatically filled The definition of the table to be filled is done by identifying the table aligned vertically to the first point point 1 of each drawing see section 9 3 Single feed Data tables Obviously the filling of the table is execut
382. or import export By pressing Detail you can display the parameters of the highlighted model Files from previous versions of Spac Start can be imported by selecting the specific item from the model present in the list 88 02 Import rel 2001 database We Import rel 9 databaze Details Import delimited rest file METEL 010 Import fixed text locked METEL 020 Import fed text locked Import Access database Export delimited text file Export field text locked Access export database Hew export Forward gt gt Delete 2 Backward It is advisable to carry out the various imports in new amw files so that the database is empty thus more suitable and quicker for importing data Export of databases takes place in two possible file formats ASCII delineated or with fixed fields and ACCESS the configuration of these parameters is obtained pressing Details Details This allows you to analyse and configure the already existing Import Export items For some types of import customizations are not allowed these items are indicated as Blocked Model New It is possible to generate a new material database import or export function optional for programming uses Delete This is used to remove an Import Export function The composition and customization of new Import Export models is an operation that is advisable only for users with programming experience
383. or importing these files Importing data to Caneco It is necessary to access the Caneco environment so after calling up the calculation programme open a new job following the instructions for use manual of the product from the Caneco File menu choose the command New Ctrl N The following dialog window is shown with the various settings to be entered by the user These settings could be changed by the subsequent importation of data IMP file Modifica le alimentazioni Pressing the Calculate Ret Alimentazion Collegament button and then Riferimento JALIMENTAZION Tod Trasfo sl Lunghezza im fro confirming with Ok you Regime del N TN C 5 i SE del File EI Tipo Cor reach the table of the General Panel LV which Norma cees lo UTESSZTR y Anima Rame y e completely empty Tensione BT Wu 2 420 Yoo trastor BEEN E a It is important to save Pot HT di CC MWA a00 Potenza KWA 400 sl File di cavi the Caneco project dv origine fo E N 1 Elon f Ema NIK zchl that has just been SES S started in the job Rizultati forzabil em O ESCH pe FP gris geng folder containing the IMP Koos C bim CP Aris d files to be imported Risultati de O IN I D ICDS Max 6 0 ID A O Prezzo O IN Vo a vuoto O ICC Max 4 U ILC 172 Min A To import the data exported from the planimetry in the IMP files select the Import Export command from the File menu and then Text From the window
384. or laying list Manufacturer PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM SM CV PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM 450 750V PIRELLI NOV SPEEDY FLAM SM GV PIRELLI NOK SPEEDY FLAM ANM NV PIRELLI ND AR SPEEDY FLAM 450 50V PIR HOSV K PEED Y 30000 IRELLI HOSV K SPEEDY 300 500V PIRELLI NOA ETUX PWL LLI KIK RETOA PVC PIRELLI NOA Gi RETOA PVC RELLI ND W K RETOA PVC PIRELLI NOV ch RETOX PVC PIRELLI NOVV K i RETOA PVC PIRELLI NI AAR RETOA PVC When the section has been drawn it is possible to change and check the appropriate capacity the type of raceway using the 20 1 Dimension Raceways command With any type of raceway the section is drawn with the same graphic features color and linetype Pressing the Default button the selection remains in storage for subsequent uses of the command For prefab conduits and busbars the Laying prefabricated raceways command is recommended see par 18 7 In the case of Sub sections the Select button is not operational as the sub section always acquires the characteristics of the main section 18 Sections e 279 Laying modes The laying mode is one of the various possibilities for obtaining the drawing of a section or sub section Several consecutive sections with the same reference are identified in sub sections The drawing of sections normally starts after positioning the components on the drawing A logic path is usually followed starting from the gener
385. osition of the tree access to the Find function is possible Pressing the right hand mouse button on the material code you can view the details of the codes selected As an alternative to the materials in this window it is also possible to view the Macros contained in the database groups of materials pressing the See macros button in the DbCenter toolbar In this case navigation takes place on the list of the macros defined whose code and description are shown For every macro the manufacturer code and description of the materials that form it are shown As for the codes TreeView pressing the right hand mouse button you can view the details of the macro code selected Pressing See macro again the view switches to the codes TreeView You can run the search in the whole database within a single manufacturer or for a specific family depending on the position on the tree in which the right hand mouse button Is pressed You can enter the string to be sought or use the character for multiple searches To view all the codes found in sequence press the F3 key on the keyboard Associated materials list This shows the materials already associated with a component of the drawing This window is activated by Manufact pressing the View materials button in the DbCenter BIZ ACC MECE Telemecani Telemecani Code HL1 toolbar The window can be positioned in the drawing area
386. otes Available to the user The contents can be seen on the terminal block on the basis of the state of visibility of the attributes H Note MO on the return block Output notes Available to the user The contents can be seen on the terminal block on the basis of the state of visibility of the attributes R_Note VA on the return block Return Block This is the symbol used for representation in the terminal block The whole terminal block can be drawn graphically using the same symbol or changing the output graphics as required The default value is the one set during configuration see par 4 2 It is possible to attribute a new return block simultaneously for all the terminals selected pressing Change Return BIk Pressing Change Values all the changes made to Repetition NumM Model Usage Notes and O Return Block are assigned to the respective terminals With Save all the operations are stored and Update introduces them on the drawing in the symbols in replacement of the obsolete values Terminal details Details allows you to see all the possible data of a terminal together 132 Spac Start 2012 Edit multiple terminals d The Edit function allows you to make changes to multiple terminals This tool is used to change the brand and model of terminals to change the output graphics in the terminal block with return block and to assign Usage and miscellaneous notes Edit terminal board XBM X Rep Section Numl NumM NumO Usage
387. ow A E C D 1 Type Manufact Descriptions Crty A 15 a 455710 AWE INTERRUTTORE BIPOLSRE 164 NOIR 2 EENS AWE INTERRUTTORE BIPOLARE 204 NOIR a SA 2 5459907 AVE PRESA UNEL 2410164 C TLAT CENTR 1 P 4440 3 BTICING living presa UNEL 2P T 10 16A tipo P30 1 V EIEE FINDER PONTICELLO RITENUTA 2 o 095650 2 FINDER TARGHETTA IDENTIFICAZIONE A 3 45619024 FINDER RELE C S FASTON 250 2 1015624205 GEWISS SCATOLA 3 POSTI INS METALLIC 1 1111055 VIMAR PRESA NOVA 2P T 164 P17 M a 12 NOFW K 192 65 CELESTE PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM 450 2750 11 02 mt 13 NOFW K 192 5 GIALLOAVERDE PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM 450 750 11 02 mt 14 NOP YK 1x2 5 MARRONE PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM 450750 11 02 mt 15 0 65 mt 16 9550 BOCCHIOTT COLONNA IN ALL OFF POLE 10082 14 51 mt 17 40220 DIELECTEIK TUBO ISOL RIG PIEG FRED HO 2 mi 18 40225 DIELECTRIx TUBO ISOL RIG PIEG FRED RKS 25 3 5 mt From this condition it is easy to make changes on the fields and manage the data storing them in the most suitable way for the exchange of information with other types of software 354 Spac Start 2012 24 Caneco 24 1 Caneco CANECO is a calculation programme OPTIONAL for electrical networks to European standards intended for dimensioning and checking every type of low voltage installation The modular structure of the programme makes it possible to simultaneously manage the general graphics of the installations single feed diagrams computations and documentation related with the calculatio
388. ows you to draw the bill of materials in table form Depending on the type of sorting chosen by Type Reference etc the parameters for drawing the table vary according to requirements Pressing on Table after viewing the required sorting on the monitor the tables are drawn with the data configured as output fields parametric mode Field Title Type Description Manufacturer Panel Qty Intemal Code Db Notes Db Price Db Every datum Tag contained in the Available fields is information which pressing Add is inserted in the Output fields to represent a column of the table Each Tag possesses two variables the width and the column title which can be changed by pressing the Edit button Number of Lines Texts Height Titles Height Table Width Table Height Standard 180 Spac Start 2012 This value is used to split the table in several parts also on different sheets because after completion of the maximum number of lines a new insertion point or continuation on the next sheet is requested This is the height of all the texts contained in the table This parameter affects the height of each line proportionately thus the total height of the table This is the height of the column titles This parameter affects the calculation of the total height of the table This is the total sum of the widths assigned to each output field The size is expressed in millimetres This value must never exce
389. p of the active Orto mode F8 Changing the 1 point with the 2 the result is the development of a specular view Looking at the previous example in the figure it can be noted how the installation dimensions see par 22 3 are valid also for the projection The dimension style used is the one set in the current mode using the AutoCAD Ddim command For details on how this configuration command works reference should be made to the specific instructions for use manual The dimensioning placed automatically on the development drawing can be changed using the normal edit dimension tools 342 Spac Start 2012 22 5 Symbol Legend All the symbols used in the planimetry are sorted in a legend on the drawing They are sorted according to the name of the symbol dwg file the description used is the one contained in the Legend attribute of every planimetric symbol of Spac Start In the configuration window it is necessary to insert the distance between the symbols pitch and the height of the description texts The values are proposed according to the scale value set This legend is drawn respecting the planimetry scale in proportion in table form with the same contents as shown in the configuration list Every datum Tag contained in the Available fields is information which pressing Add is inserted in the Output fields to represent a column of the table Each Tag possesses two variables the wi
390. pdate the already DESCRIZIONE Indicatore luminoso Rosso 30mm existing Code with Overwrite or Association of single material code associate several codes to create a macrocode using Add 346 Spac Start 2012 Let us suppose that the component in question is an illuminated pushbutton composed of 3 codes Manufacturer Type Description KLOCKNER B1K92 PILOT LIGHT KLOCKNER B1LOW PRESETTING DEVICE KLOCKNER B1L1A CONTACT Associate Materials or pressing Database of a macrocode inserts the following 3 groups of data Costruttore KLOCKNER KLOCKNER KLOCKNER The Type contains the catalogue Ss codes separated by the semicolon HES ITT character as also Manufacturer and Descrizione GEMMA LUMINOSA PREDISPOSITORE CONTA Description Macrocode association If the macrocode is composed of elements that pertain to various manufacturers the Manufacturer attribute contains the various Brands separated from one another by the semicolon character These values can also be inserted manually giving particular care to the sequence in which they are arranged example the 2nd code B1LOW corresponds with the second description and with the second Manufacturer and so on A See 8 4 DbCenter The data associated with the symbols during Associate Materials are written in the Manufacturer Type and Description attributes so account must be taken of the maximum limit of the data that can be entered As
391. peatedly the Text or the Attribute of which AUXILIARY CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY you intend to change increase or reduce the width factor T O You can quickly call up the Increase width and Bring width also typing the commands T and T on the keyboard Import Attributes This command is used to re import the file Attributes Csv containing the information changed outside the drawing environment which took place following the Export Attributes command W er See Export Attributes CAUTION It is fundamental to immediately check the consistency between the imported data compared with those contained on the drawing to be able to cancel the operation if necessary This operation is not advised for the less expert users 270 Spac Start 2012 Export Attributes This command is used to export a file Attributes Csv containing the information stored in the attributes taking it directly from the symbols on the drawings according to the configuration The data are extracted from the sheets in the list pressing Add Pressing on Entire Job Order all the sheets are added automatically in the list It is possible to change the list of sheets to be processed removing one sheet at a time Delete sheet or all of them together Clear list IMPO38 remm IMPOS7 i CARICO IMPOSO IMPOGO TRUTTORE IMPO062 Ed DESCRIZIONE E See Import Attributes The data are
392. pins selected pressing Change Return BIk Pin details Details allows you to see all the possible data of a connector pin together including the page number sheet item where it is positioned dwg item In this window note that the cross section value is not taken into consideration as it deals with connector pins 6 Terminals and Connectors 135 Update terminals With Edit terminal block Edit multiple terminals and Edit connector we have seen the possibility of making changes to the data lists These changes are stored pressing Save In the case of a new Scan i e a new extraction of data from the diagram the changed values will not coincide with the new values extracted To avoid this inconsistency it is fundamental before new extractions to use Update to make the data stored unequivocal with those in the symbols of the diagram If the changes saved are not given on the drawing with Update the next scan will present the list of Terminal Blocks Saved and not Updated The example in the figure A shows how to recover the TERMINAL BLOC XM2 changes not updated on the TERMINAL BLOC XM3 drawing of terminal blocks XM2 and XM3 For the remaining terminal blocks and connectors the data changed previously with the Edit function are lost List of Terminal Blocks Saved and not Updated Use the Ctrl key on the keyboard to make multiple selections Update acts replacing the
393. ple manner as you simply select an already existing section as start point of a new section with any of the laying modes available The length of the section is always calculated automatically also in the case of changes using the AutoCAD Stretch command To change the path of sections use of 18 5 Change laying height and 18 6 Change laying height at ends is necessary 290 Spac Start 2012 The previous example shows an interruption made on a horizontal section derivation can also be performed with start from a vertical section in this case the exact height for coupling is required Working with the plane view access the options and use the Search function gt Let us suppose we select the piece of section that runs along a column vertically the height of the position of the interruption shown in the figure at lt gt 1 point is set in the following window Difference in vertical height Dislivello Yerticale NI Inserire altezza maggiore uguale a O cm e minore uguale a 0 cm Altezza cm l 1 pt Annulla The function automatically calculates the minimum and maximum value that can be accepted for the break 6 Duplicate Section Duplication allows you to draw a new section that has the same path as a section already existing on the drawing The function requests Select the Section to duplicate Return for options If you fail to select the section because it is
394. ponents in question When only one possible path exists the function ends the search completely automatically Conversely if there are more possible paths the shortest one is chosen At the same time the path selected is shown on the drawing Cable laying Selections done NOTE the components can be connected or disconnected at any time using the specific command 19 3 Modify Cables PELL ro Pressing the Lay button the PIRELLI FROR 4504 750V xe Bl PIRELLI FGTOR 0 6 1 kV BR cables are inserted in the PIRELLI FGOR 0 67 kW D de AER g sections An Incremental PIRELLI NO7V k BU reference modifiable is PIRELLI IA GN e PIRELLI NO7V K 3 IN E associated automatically to every cable laid PIRELLI PIRELLI PIRELLI At the end of the operation the Cable laying performed correctly message is shown Using Cancel starts again from the Cables and Bundles to lay list The path of the sections that has just been selected is not lost and can be re used pressing Use last path Using lt Change Cable Reference it is possible to change only the reference of cables that are about to be laid for those already contained in the section use of the 19 3 Modify Cables command is necessary Two sections free of connected elements with the start of the first and the destination point of the second coinciding in the same coordinate are not considered consecutive 19 Cables 315 Link
395. r Loop Diagram I N B Command not enabled in Spac Start Aone Mare LO HOME QuadroPaneh QW OR FUN EINE HNZONE LD_ Motor Symbol Front Panel Panel back N B Command not enabled in Spac Start LYPIt_8 Symbol Pin Configuration This can be performed only on Parent and Element category symbols In practice it is the configuration of wiring numbers pins present on the components The pins configured in the prefix database are associated with the symbols during Cross Reference operations see 7 2 Pin marking CAUTION Inserting an unconfigured symbol or with Prefix empty a provisory reference is requested while with unconfigured Reference default RIF1 is used O The Bik and Common symbol libraries can avail of only one prefix database which is always in use at the same time as the current one set for the symbols library 74 Spac Start 2012 Pin Configuration This can be performed on all Parent and Element category symbols In practice it is the configuration of wiring numbers pins present on the components these can be seen at the end of Cross Reference carried out with pin marking see par 7 2 As example let s take the configuration of the pins of the relay coil KM1 symbol If we analyse the symbol exploded we note the presence of two pin attributes PinA1 and PinB1 Block pin configuration KM1 PIN Value NOME KM a PINAT EN D eg et If the first pin is attribu
396. r Job order _DB Mdb The accidental deletion of the file causes the loss of all the information O Consistency between the information entered with this procedure is only checked by 356 Spac Start 2012 Caneco There are no checks during the drawing session 24 3 Caneco Circuits This command is used to set the data concerning the Circuits which are identified in different styles Motor Sockets Lighting Heating Various Panel Sub Busbar Busbar Capacitor and Transformer Without having firstly set a Power feed see 24 2 Caneco Power Feed Spac does not allow you to proceed with association of the Circuits Planimetric Diagram The function allows you to create a New circuit Change an existing circuit or remove one using Delete New circuit The Circuit represents a portion of installation to be checked and protected Below we are going to define some basic concepts for the definition of a circuit within Spac Start and the related importation at a later stage to the Caneco calculation programme The function asks you to select the distribution upstream To simplify selection on the drawing all the symbols that represent a distribution are highlighted and then Select equipments for the circuit one at a time or through the windows it is necessary to select all the elements that form part of the circuit This way the number of equipments and total input is established Caneco Stile Circuito Circuit
397. r of the Sub element symbol corresponding to the parent with which the reference is associated REG Is preassigned with the type of Pres of the sub element Example if Reg FA an open Sub element contact will be registered if FC closed By convention we have chosen to associate even Regs with open contacts and odd ones with closed contacts and switches Pres Offset The PRES R attribute is the one that assigns the Register reference symbol definition to this block This attribute is used to indicate the position x y for insertion of an additional reg reference block always described in the Code attribute like Additional heads Tsa The standard value of this attribute e g 0 10 0 indicates where the reference symbol added will be positioned considering the Parent block insertion point the three values to be expressed are divided by a comma and respectively indicate increment in coordinate X from the parent insertion point increment in coordinate Y from the parent insertion point rotation of register reference symbol 15 Symbols e 221 Sub element symbol During Cross Reference operations the Sub element symbols are registered with their position sheet and segment on the Parent Symbol with the same name and vice versa e ay Blocks of contacts auxiliary elements of switches additional elements of pushbuttons selectors etc KM KM KMS have the attribute Pres F therefore they are
398. r terminal blocks for connectors output in table form is advisable 128 Spac Start 2012 Multiple terminal drawing This is the option that allows you to draw the terminal blocks of multiple terminals according to the parameters set in the Spac settings under Terminal and Connector Database see par 4 2 Pressing Output to Drawing after selecting one or more terminal blocks from the list the terminal blocks are generated with the graphics configured showing only the required data Panel QG Multiple terminals Terminals block Group A Multiple terminals Double terminal blocks drawn with return block MM 2LIV Connector Drawing With Edit you can choose the required graphics for each terminal After confirming the sheet is chosen on which to carry out the drawing If the page stated is occupied the message Status Contains entities is shown and the next page iS proposed This is the option that allows you to draw the Connectors according to the parameters set in the Spac settings under Terminal and Connector Database see par 4 2 Pressing Output to Drawing after selecting one or more plugs from the list the connectors are generated with the graphics configured showing only the required data P1 CNE Canmtral Panel Connector y e Connector drawn with return block TAB CONN With Edit you can choose the required graphics for each connector After confirming the sheet i
399. r the local user You can quickly call up the function also typing the command XG on the keyboard XG is also called up quickly pressing the central button of the mouse for mouse with 3 buttons or pressing the right hand button of the mouse together with Shift ft on the keyboard for mouse with 2 buttons 240 Spac Start 2012 16 Caneco 16 1 Caneco d CANECO is a calculation programme OPTIONAL for electrical networks to European standards intended for dimensioning and checking every type of low voltage system The modular structure of the programme makes it possible to simultaneously manage the general graphics of the Starts single feed diagrams computations and documentation related with the calculation of protections dimensioning of raceways cables and circuit networks Caneco has a total calculation function to define the protections and cables of all the circuits This function simplifies the designer s tasks and design times in case of changes to inputs cable lengths etc The assignment of loads on phases in the single panel and for the whole installation is also optimised automatically or manually The power still available in the panel for every circuit is re calculated and shown Caneco also calculates the inputs of all the panels or busbars up to the power feed starting from the terminal circuits according to the use coefficients of every circuit and every distribution and of the simultaneity
400. rag 8 4 The symbol configured in the Other Blocks field is used in the two following cases O 1 When a different library other than IEC or Single wire is used 2 When using the current library IEC or Single wire no symbol is configured 166 Spac Start 2012 Define a filter Associating filters Apply filter Find codes Hide information Hidden component management Import file Terminals DAT Options Define a filter T Creating new filter Defines filters for combining materials in the database Enter data for new filter All components in a file that do not New data Data already exist correspond to the configured type are Industrial Rela hidden when using Apply filter This mooo way specific simplified searches can be moa carried out to determine objects categories se See Apply filter There are three levels of filters Item 1 Item 2 and Item 3 It is not necessary that a filter have all three data thus a filter that has only item 1 can therefore be created The dialogue window appears with two columns one for entering new data and the other for selecting already existing data this gives congruence to the entries Creation of a filter for socket mounted industrial relays having a 110 VAC coil is illustrated in the example A filter using the same ltem 1 and Item 3 but Item 2 for a 24 VDC coil could be successively created Filter configuration is stored by clicking on
401. ration can be Type changed locally only for the command in progress pressing Settings see par 4 2 The list of codes can be sorted in 4 different ways Pressing on Type Sect or Category or on the indicator the list is sorted alphabetically according to the selection If pointing takes place on already numbered wires the terminal always takes the values of the wire If pointing takes place on un numbered wires the terminal data Numi and NumoO are also introduced on the wire Numo is calculated on the basis of the configuration of Increment 6 Terminals and Connectors 119 Hence the input and output wire numbers Num and NumO are considered only if the wire has not been numbered previously the wire automatically acquires the number from the terminal while the value of NumM is always considered i e the terminal Number it is increased automatically at every insertion Terminal Number assigned to the wire Un numbered wire Terminal Number acquired by the wire Already numbered wire NumI and NumO Panel Choose the Panel from the list to which the terminals to be drawn belong New panels can be inserted pressing the New button or using the special command see par 4 3 Terminal Block On the basis of the panel selected all the terminal blocks it contains are shown Pressing the New button new terminal blocks are created max reference 8 characters It is possible to ins
402. re copied from the Libraries Blk folder of the previous version Cfg Folder The ini files are retrieved but only those with a different name from the standard ones installed with the current version Customer Folder The Abbina tag and Clienti dat files are replaced with those of the previous version those of the Current version renamed in bak Common Symbols All the dwg and sld files are copied without overwriting Documents Folder All the doc and pdf files are copied if necessary overwriting those installed by the previous version Sheets Folder All the dwg sld and abb files are copied if necessary overwriting those Stored Sheets installed by the previous version The Lista dat list is updated according to the Sheets retrieved Aus Cnt Tsa Symbols All the dwg and sld files are copied without overwriting Ref Folder Symbols Folder All the dwg and sld files are copied without overwriting Return Symbols All the dwg and sld files are copied without overwriting Symbols Folder CAUTION To execute migration after setup use of the SpacMigrator exe programme is necessary which is in the Spac Program SpacMigrator folder 1 Setup 19 Setup change Running the setup procedure Setup when Spac Start is already installed opens the maintenance programme Pressing Edit when Spac Start has already been installed as Primary Installation allows you to add new components to the pr
403. re the report obtained at the end of Testing in a Csv file O The scan of Testing might require a few minutes wait Update This button is active only when changes have been made to the data of sections pressing Change or in the case of re referencing It allows you to update the drawing with the new changes In the details of the section the fill value is highlighted as percentage value This datum can be checked using the 20 1 Dimension Raceways command When the value 0 is shown this means that no cable crosses the already dimensioned section If nothing is shown it is because the section has not been dimensioned regardless of whether it contains cables or not d Re referencing This function is fundamental for sorting the references of sections consecutively xj The command opens with the request for the prefix of the sections to be AL re referenced renumbering increases starting from number 1 The information placed on the drawing using the 18 2 Information command is automatically updated at the end of renumbering Only one prefix can be selected at a time Annulla BE See Prefix revision in Options par 18 1 Update This button is active only when changes have been made to the names of sections The drawing can be updated with the new References 298 Spac Start 2012 CSV File Pressing on File activates the configuration window for generating an ASCII data extraction
404. ree point This works in the same way as the AutoCAD multiple Copy function In practice after selecting the component to be copied EL100 the following parameters are requested Insertion point Enter for options i point Insertion point Enter for options 200 point Insertion point Enter for options Enter The figure shows the result obtained pt with the previous example Pressing Enter accesses the Options AN window BE SCH From the options choose whether to e d cancel the last copy operation without ae Ki op interrupting the whole copy a a e pi procedure or close the command Ze session The function allows you also to copy several symbols at the same time keeping the tags sequenced incrementally as well as the data associated with the Bill of Materials 21 Elements 335 336 Spac Start 2012 22 Utilities 22 1 View management This command allows you to check which installations are to be visible on the planimetry The view can be further filtered according to the subdivision by zones see par 17 13 or circuits see par 24 3 m a Ka HA e 8 IR IH l H k a a ara II Mi dl 3 Ho Sai ax Wi 1 CUCINA CAMERA DA LETTO gd ai 20 A KE INGRESSO gt E 20 E Il 26 iH ml Bh Ka AY A ER A E IS m um d r S ol YE The opposite figure shows a part of a plamimetry divided into 4 zones on this drawing the Distribution Electrical
405. res of the symbol to be deleted on the new one Press Enter to access the Options Select Insertion point Wall Node Section or Element Enter for options Enter It is necessary to choose the item Replace Element among the various options then you are asked for Select the Element to be replaced The symbol selected is deleted the new symbol is inserted keeping the same position and laying height The figure shows the replacement of a 10A Socket with a 16A Socket the tag XS6 connection to the node connection to the section and laying Wi 164 height are kept unchanged as on the Ab Wi previous symbol Example of Element Replacement 382 Spac Start 2012 Automatic Insertion This allows you to insert several symbols in series at the distance set lt works in the same way as the 21 10 Series of Elements command rectangular series Press Enter to access the Options and activate the function Array elements insertion Firstly the parameters needed for the Main direction are required Insert the wanted quantity of symbols 4 and then press the Select button to set their distance The function requests Example of inserting 8 symbols in series Select the main direction Initial point at top right Select point End point at top left type 1200 It is possible to indicate the Top left end point either selecting a reference point on the drawing or entering the distance
406. ressing on Prefix or on the indicator the list is sorted alphabetically on the prefixes Pressing again the order changes from increasing to decreasing and so on This is the general description of the symbol in 10 different languages besides Italian pressing on the f button the window for inserting or changing is accessed 4 General commands 73 Put Character Inserts or removes with only one operation a character before all the Before prefixes in the list example etc Reference This defines the Register Reference Symbol to be associated with the Parent_symbols defining the pins on the corresponding sub element symbols This datum is written in the Code attribute on all Parent symbols In practice it represents the availability of the component to receive Sub element symbol registers With the symbol 11P in the figure relay coil KM1 is made available for the association of 3 open power contacts FAP 1na FA 1nc FC The choice takes place using the CNT and AUS buttons see par 7 2 and par 15 2 Press Edit to confirm a name typed manually Reference 11P CNT Contactors This allows you to choose a Register Reference Symbol contactor category among those in the Libraries Symbols Reference Cnt folder AUS Auxiliary This allows you to choose a Register Reference Symbol auxiliary category among those in the Libraries Symbols Reference Aus folde
407. ribute to the current project From this moment all the files generated will have the name indicated No more than 8 characters may be used state the height of the room in metres The default value proposed is 3 20 clicking on the color selection list the colors available for association with the floor are shown Selecting the required color with the mouse in the Reflectance the value corresponding to the color chosen is forced this datum can be changed directly from the keyboard clicking on the color selection list the colors available for association with the walls are shown Selecting the required color with the mouse in the Reflectance the value corresponding to the color chosen is forced this datum can be changed directly from the keyboard The color chosen is valid for all the walls of the room 26 LiteSTAR 365 Ceiling color clicking on the color selection list the colors available for association with the ceiling are shown Selecting the required color with the mouse in the Reflectance the value corresponding to the color chosen is forced this datum can be changed directly from the keyboard Work area state the work area height in metres The default value proposed is 0 80 height Automatic this setting makes the procedure automatically break up a curved wall into Calculation of segments The number of separations is calculated by the programme curved wall separations No of curved disabling the previous
408. rint sheets aida a 57 PTOTECU EE 152 POLS CIO Risto sido a ici eto edo 266 Frotechonm DON crio 16 FACCWAY E 207 279 323 KWR le lat 130 Se Sol e ARA EAA sia 262 Rectangular Channel 325 Referente OO nosni 331 Reference Gvmbol 220 REMOVE SO UP sosise ine a A 20 Rename Panel ninio iii a 93 Henumberng 109 Keel Ende ME 384 Replace Element 382 383 Restore Database oocooccnccnccnncnncnnconccnncnncnnnnnnoncnnnnnns 170 Return SS YMDO tesis Geseent 80 146 225 Revision Jegend 61 91 REVISION SY ae acia da 60 Same name relerences 103 Scale acia e ae ed ctu ee mace tel Dog on 376 Scan Multi Sheets c cceceeeceeceeceeceececeeeeeeeeeeeees 106 Search CONMCCION A eed es tee ea ata 202 STEE EE EE 202 PROTO O E EEE EE N A E 202 RRC VI EE 202 Sec dis 273 380 Section e a En acia adobo 309 DECHON MO serrano 307 AA O ea ROE ot ed eae at 297 Select Element inicia aia AR ENER ec 380 Select Section cooccoccoccocccccnnccnconccncnnnnnnnnnnnncnncnnncnnnns 380 A A A O A CONE Rr ee Setar 95 100 Series of Elements 334 A A 67 Setting Terminal ccccccccccoconcccnncccnononnccnnnnonononanonons 84 Ue ee 13 SA A A A RE OTTO RE EET 267 SINC EE 26 247 Sheet EE EE 44 Sheet Claseificaton aE 50 Sheet Dimensioning sssannnnnennsennnnnnnnsennnnnnnenennnennnee 71 Sheet e Tu EE 247 250 Sheet regende 64 SMES Lee WEE 91 Sheet REVISION see 60 SECU slidas ose ebe oes cua ees eege 66 Sheet ie 43 63 Sheets Backward E
409. rminal blocks etc of one panel at a time Description The DESCRIPTION attribute contains a generic comment of the component This datum does not include the various settings of the component This datum is used by the symbols legend see par 14 1 Code The value of the attribute with CODE label is the name of the Register Reference Symbol present in the reference folder to be associated with the Parent element after the Cross Reference operation to contain the position registers of the Sub element components see par 7 1 The code value is pre established on the various components for example the default value of relay coils is RIF1 while for switches of any type the default value decided is RIF2 clearly these data can be changed in symbol configuration see par 4 2 Some parent blocks do not have a code because the REGn attributes are directly included for the register of the position of the sub elements Parents with Fixed Reference Offset This attribute is used to indicate the position x y for insertion of the register reference block described in the Code attribute The standard value of this attribute e g 0 10 0 indicates where the reference symbol will be positioned considering the Parent insertion point the three values to be expressed are divided by a comma and respectively indicate increment in coordinate X from the parent insertion point increment in coordinate Y from the parent inser
410. rsion The functions marked with an asterisk are new the others are evolutions or improvements of existing functions COMMANDS FOR PLANIMETRIC DIAGRAM Funei n pesn ooo Walls Columns New materials management for Spac Start Render Pr Lkesssztassees A SPAC Start Render 18 1 Sections Laying General improvements as the Free Laying according to the Osnap and new working options Project Center x Project Center is the new design system that consents a fast composition of the boxes with the electrical components associated in the plan Enhanced with products catalogues ABB and Bticino Project Center is compatible with SPAC Mobile COMMANDS FOR FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM fumen Jos oooO 3 16 Print Sheets Command completely renewed and simplified The Page Settings is now integrated inthe new command the PDF DWF and JPG print settings use the PC3 configurations of the Autodesk print drivers Creation of the Job Order DWF format Labels Counting of the threads number even on single feed drawings Interface with 2 new brands Cembre Genius and Cabur MarKing only for PLUS version Pro LINKS 1 OPTIONALS MODULES Function eem oS Spac Start Render SPAC Start Render is a new optional module for the management of H the materials and the visualization of a render in 3D Spac Start EasySol Designs a photovoltaic system directly on SPAC YouProject SPAC Start was chosen from Bticino as
411. rted you can select and highlight the node using the View button If there are no empty nodes the following message is shown All the Nodes contain at least one Element or one Section Empty nodes are considered useless therefore they can be deleted 21 9 Disconnected elements This command lists the components that are not connected to any cable The connection between cable and component is obtained during Cable Laying see par 19 1 when the Select elements option is active or with the Modify Cables command see par 19 3 where the Connect and Disconnect buttons are present This association is a purely optional datum for the programme and you are advised to perform this operation only when it is strictly necessary to complete the compilation of the Cable List see par 19 2 21 Elements 333 21 10 Series of Elements This command is used to make multiple copies of components The term multiple means 2 or more copies since for copying a single component there is the specific Copy Symbol or X command see par 28 2 After selecting the symbol or symbols to be copied in series on the drawing the function continues with the request for the copy mode Copy in series It works in the same way as the AutoCAD rectangular Series function In practice after selecting the component to be copied EL100 the following parameters are requested Number of rows lt no gt
412. rtion point of the next component when the Offset is set to 0 the next component is next to the one drawn previously O The component reference is inserted manually 208 Spac Start 2012 Terminal Block This is used to draw the terminal block dimension on the panel internal plate After setting or choosing the dimensions Width x Depth press the Draw button and you will be asked Terminal block start point Terminal block end point Terminal block reference XM1 type value O The terminal block reference is inserted manually Options Before using any of these functions it is necessary to firstly select the drawing group on which to intervene raceway component or terminal block Move This function is used to move a raceway a component or a terminal block of the value indicated under Offset distance a value in real millimetres that is then converted according to the scale value set Copy A copy is made of a raceway component or terminal block Same features as Move Guide Guideline calls up the function that allows you to draw the axis for inserting components The line is automatically drawn in red with Axis line type dot character This function helps the designer to locate the middle point between two raceways and possibly moving it Texts This is used to change the height of the reference texts of all the raceways all Height components or all terminal blocks Cut Table The Racewa
413. s because after completion of the maximum number of lines a new insertion point or continuation on the next sheet is requested This is the height of all the texts contained in the table This parameter affects the height of each line proportionately thus the total height of the table This is the height of the column titles This parameter affects the calculation of the total height of the table This is the total sum of the widths assigned to each output field The size is expressed in millimetres This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Width to avoid overstepping the margins of the master title block with the table On the basis of the maximum number of lines foreseen and the height of the texts the maximum total height of the table is calculated This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Height to avoid overstepping the margins of the master title block with the table This represents the basic configuration of the output fields where applicable Pressing Default the current configuration is stored in local mode see par 4 2 for subsequent uses If confirmed without pressing Default the configuration is considered as occasional and used only once ab KD CENTRAUMO PARETE S M00 C SPD FE dn PULSANTE UNIPOLARE EAR H TE PULSANTE UNPOLARE 41 164 HA mn He H LLL Tit TIC TIE Tit ti IN PRESS TAL PRESA INTELPAREOL ZA CAB IPE Te PRESA INTAL PRESA INTALPAREOL 3064 CS PSS Bo E
414. s up to the designer advisable operation on complex drawings New symbols can be customized using the space provided for ABLK user symbols see 27 2 Ablk Symbols Example of application of symbols O A sudden change to the Drawing scale see par 17 1 does not compromise the proportion between these symbols But take care not to change the unit of measure 264 Spac Start 2012 17 13 Zone Management This command allows you to subdivide a very complex planimetry into various zones useful for obtaining total lists or bills or detailed ones for every single zone If no zone is defined all the symbols of the planimetry are identified as belonging to the general zone called Zone 0 Every zone on the drawing is Protection identified with a number from 1 to 999 and a description When a UFFICI E SERVIZI new zone is generated the insertion point for the identification label symbol is requested This label symbol must never be removed from the drawing as it would cause the loss of REPARTO LAVORAZIONE the zone that was identified on it Pressing Associate the new zone is stored together with the selection of the components that form it The function starts by viewing the list of already predefined zones To create a new zone a new reference and a more detailed description must be assigned to the zone to be generated the IP Degree of protection is optional then pressing Associate you are as
415. s already connected No to terminals The Receive condition is used to block the values on terminals inserted before wire numbering The data on the terminals will no longer be changed or updated with new values When a wire is selected upstream of the terminal the wire receives the input number contained in the terminal attribute Numl selecting the wire downstream it will be numbered with the value contained in attribute NumO O Force Wire in terminal with Input same as Output is the combination that allows you to work in the simplest way and have the highest number of automated features Terminal Properties Input same as During insertion of terminals on still un numbered wires we can set for the Output values of Numl terminal input wire number to be the same as NumO output wire In normal working conditions the input wire is always the same as the output wire Input different from During insertion of terminals on still un numbered wires Numl and NumO Output are differentiated NumoO is increased by the value contained in Increment usually 1 Color Management This is a simple filter to determine the choice of the colors of the wire to be numbered With All except the lines drawn with the colors in the list are not considered as wires therefore the functions that concern the numbering of wires and terminals various processings etc do not act on these lines With
416. s chosen on which to carry out the drawing If the page stated is occupied the message Status Contains entities is shown and the next page Is proposed 6 Terminals and Connectors 129 RailDesigner 2 This Output function allows dialog with Weidmuller RailDesigner 2 software Data exporting takes place only for terminal blocks that are entirely associated with Weidmuller material codes generating a specific file Ascii compatible for the interface In the Spac Libraries Databases folder there is the Weidmuller Dat file complete database with about 900 articles that can be replaced entirely or imported to the current terminals database see Import command of Terminal and Connector Database par 4 2 Product description RailDesigner 2 allows detailed construction of the terminal block with photorealistic graphics where the transversal connections references terminal plates separation walls fastening terminals empty spaces external wire jumpers etc are represented both graphically and in the form of ordering or assembly lists With the Assembly warnings function you can quickly detect assembly mistakes All the terminal blocks used are shown accurately in a navigation window A data import interface is available for data exchange with Spac Start Ordering the terminal block takes place directly by the RailDesigner programme by electronic mail or disk Software learning is facilited by the multime
417. s etc The visibility status turning on and freezing of these groups is obtained using the AutoCAD Layer command INSTALLATORE PROGETTO LEGENUA Epresa TEA PFE 9 Prema por torio 3 Presa per telefono Intesruttore bipolar x Purto Lg Purto bee a parola 0 Gota d crmembre h ken Garo gema E Cerirale Koboio alamme 2tdrupure Tal oer Wa mn da pree oriri Amratore em atidinentata con lanpeggetore Decodicalore per ipmh atrini DI ESEMPIO Example of Planimetric Diagram On the same layout it is possible to see all the systems that have been drawn at the same time or use specific commands to select the circuits required So a drawing is obtained that can be printed in different forms 24 Spac Start 2012 Functional Multi sheet In practice the possibility has been used of structuring the drawing in an unlimited number of Layers making every Layer or level correspond to a sheet of the electrical documentation The result is that sheet 1 is drawn on the Layer with name 1 sheet 2 is drawn on Layer 2 and so on this Multi sheet structure has no theoretical page limits The programme handles this structure so that the monitor views only one sheet at a time while all the others are frozen to make them invisible The only Layer that is never frozen is the Layer named 0 this Layer is not allowed to change its name Therefore on Sheet 0 of Spac it is possible to insert everything that is graphically common
418. s needed to complete the legend are consecutive to the one indicated at the start If the destination sheet is occupied Status contains entity the function asks you if you want to continue just the same or if you prefer to indicate a new page number Enabling Clear Current Sheet deletes all the entities contained before drawing este new sheets automaticaly For the sheets after the first one you will be asked to confirm each time If the destination sheet is new the function proceeds with no further requests The sheets after the first one are automatically created consecutively The page numbering on the new sheets is proposed automatically at the end of the command The table symbol used as default is LegendaF dwg present in the symbols folder The use of any customized tables is possible provided that they are stored in the same folder 196 Spac Start 2012 12 2 Attribute Changes Graphic changes Replace value Attributes visibility Force value Fast Attedit Copy Attributes Adapt Width T and T Import Attributes Export Attributes Graphic changes This command allows you to change the text height color position rotation and style of the chosen attributes Insert the name of the attributes to be changed in the Attribute field then press the Add button to insert them in the list Press Change to change the characteristics of an attribute already inserted in the list an
419. s new sheet is cancelled if you quit using the Cancel command Autocomposition It is possible to create an automatic composition of complete electrical documentation making several stored sheets correspond with a number of sheets on which to insert them The preparation of this association is obtained repeating several times the Associate operation described previously for inserting only one sheet In practice a list of pages marked with the symbol gt is obtained After confirming you are asked for the insertion mode as for a single insertion with the additional possibility of choosing between the Replace or Add option sheet by sheet Decide sheet by For every associated page you are asked for the insertion mode sheet Choosing Superimpose Add the entitities on the page concerned by the insertion are not removed so the new sheet will be superimposed on the already existing content Choosing Replace the entitities on the page concerned by the insertion are removed automatically to leave their place to the new sheet This function only works on sheets belonging to the current work multi sheet If the sheets stored have been created in master mode or in any case created with adequate criteria and the various compositions are saved in associations it is easy to realise that the system with autocomposition is the fastest design tool Save Association An autocomposition association of several sheets can be stored
420. s not found in the reference Sub element symbols have been detected on the drawing that have different pin values from those possible the possible ones are described on the register Reference The problem is fixed automatically This is a warning to indicate that the existing Pin values will not be able to be Protected 33 Error new and obsolete References Similar to the error of point 20 The parent symbol in question contains a register reference that is not updated to the current programme version The problem is solved replacing the reference with an updated Contactor without intervening graphically on the drawing The symbols with this message are in any case valid for Cross reference provided that it is without Pin marking 34 Error Sub elements with incorrect Pin sequence A Pin attribute has been cleared manually on the Sub element symbol This is a warning to indicate that the existing Pin values will not be able to be Protected O It is always necessary to check on the drawing components indicated during Cross Reference by Errors or Caution 156 Spac Start 2012 Errors detected on Return symbols 1 Error Unnamed return In the position indicated there is a Return symbol Pres P or A with empty signal attribute the message can be seen in the initial Report 2 Error Return with incorrect Pres In the position indicated there is a Return symbol with invalid Pres attribute Pres A on des
421. s of homogeneity to refer to those already made e Avoid using the DALAYER logic color not to be mistaken with color 7 white as the Dalayer is used by the programme for drawing wires see 4 7 Setting Differentiating the two entities wire and symbol in color is particularly effective when drafting the diagram e They must be drawn with snap 2 5mm and proportioned with the wire pitch 7 5 or 10mm The name of the symbol must be chosen in relation to the name of the free box to which it is required to be associated from BLK1 to BLK400 For each one an image slide is associated for viewing in the window stored with the same name as the block to be represented The BLK symbols and the relevant slides are stored in the special folder Spac Libraries Blk se see 15 1 Symbol Categories To make sure that the new Blk symbols are suited for the Spac Start functions during building it is necessary to follow the specific rules concerning the Parent Sub element Element categories of symbols etc It is in any case possible to generate any type of symbol even if not belonging to the categories mentioned previously If a Blk contains the correct attributes it is treated in every aspect like a normal symbol of the other libraries it is therefore necessary to implement the Prefix File each time to configure both its referencing parameters and the various descriptions the symbols not configured will be asked each time for an
422. s possible to access and use the database processed here to associate the material codes with the symbols on the diagram see par 8 2 Associate Materials Materials database can manage several database files on opening the default one is shown 5 Materials database Programmi SfeaCAD 2007 Librerie Archivi DbMaterials2007 amw 15 x A Dlel Dels ol vi C Programmi SfeaC4D 20074Librerier a ACCESS CAVI BERO ITL er ACCESS X INT AUT APERTI er ACCESSORI CAVI BERO er ACCESSORI CAVI x BERO Gw ACCESSORI CAVO X BER S ACCESSORI X CONTATTO er ACCESSORI XCONTATTORI A Sr ALIM C C SIMOREG ERA ALIM C C CARTELLE RICAM SH ALIMENT 44 S ALPHA 125 SCIOLTO ALPHA 630 SCIOLTO Sr ALTRI INTERR E PRESE Sr APP NON AUTOMATICI SIST Sr APP NON AUT SIST N Sr APPARECCHI DI SICUR OTTII er AVVIATORI COMBIN SENZA F AA COMBIN SE Sr AVVIATORI ELETTRICI AZION STANDARD III GEN M AZION STANDARD III GEN M moam om mamam Qs 3411100841 H Merlin Gerin 3RA11100C 1 d dee 3R411100D41 in ial 3RA11100E41 H Rockwell Automation 3RA111 00F A a Siemens 37411100641 37R411100H41 IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION STARTER IEC COMBINATION START
423. s setting acts on the PICKBOX system variable Break Start The activation of this option allows you to End automatically make cuts on the hook of existing walls at each final hook the Wall command ends automatically OFF ON Floor This command consents the design of an area surface the function asks to introduce the points that represents the perimeter of the area to be drawn SPAC designs the Floors on a specific Layer called Pavimenti First point Enter for options select Following Point Enter for options select or Enter If you want to abort the command or design an arc press Enter to access the Options menu O Material for SPAC Render optional module Allows de definition of the material type to associate to the designed object Pressing Select on Drawing you can get the material type from an existing object or use Modify to change the material already associated 254 Spac Start 2012 17 4 Columns This command allows you to enter the pillars in the planimetric diagram in both rectangular and circular shape The insertion point of the pillars can be the centre or an edge Spac draws the columns on the specific layer called Columns Eege I The more frequently used Type of CARIBE 7 column and height are stored pressing the Default button and they will be proposed the next time the E Center O Comer command is used Height 270 eig 2mo o t is possible to
424. s solved associating a new Contactor or Auxiliary valid without intervening graphically on the drawing The inconsistent reference is removed from the drawing automatically 154 Spac Start 2012 20 Caution Obsolete reference The parent symbol in question is associated with a register reference that is not updated to the current programme version In the cases in which it is possible automatic replacement is carried out The problem is solved associating an updated Contactor or Auxiliary valid without intervening graphically on the drawing The symbols with this message are in any case valid for Cross reference provided that it is without Pin marking Note Do not confound with the error described in point 33 21 Error Reference with incorrect Offset The contents of the register reference attribute do not comply with the syntax recognised by Cross Reference Offset indicates in which position to insert the additional head in relation to its insertion point such as for example valid default value on 12E 0 14 valid default value on 11P 0 22 The symbols with this message must be rebuilt 22 Error Exceeded max number of Open contacts FA Error Exceeded max number of Open contacts FAP or FT In the register reference block indicated in the Parent Code attribute the Reg attributes with even number are insufficient for containing the registrations of the necessary open contacts The register reference is not inserte
425. sage Caution Section cannot be connected to the previous one Two sections are consecutive when the start of the first and the destination point of the second are connected with the same component or node Pieces of a section interrupted due to a derivation see par 18 1 5 are in any case always considered consecutive Two sections free of connected elements with the start of the first and the destination point of the second coinciding in the same coordinate are not considered consecutive The sections selected must be confirmed each time pressing Forward gt as shown in the dialog window of the following figure It is possible to go lt Backward by only one section If present it is in any case possible to indicate the Start and Destination elements connected Cable laying section selection ll When Return End selection is Installation SC pressed the function ends showing the ILLUMINAZIONE 5 list of all the sections selected ILLUMINAZIONE 5 ILLUMINAZIONE 5 Pressing the Lay button the cables are inserted in the sections An incremental reference is associated automatically to every cable laid Using Cancel starts again from the Cables and Bundles to lay list The path of the sections that has just been selected is not lost and can be re used pressing Use last path At the end of the operation the Cable laying performed correctly message is shown It is important to note that
426. screen example with compact view Bill of materials by type and zonecircuit Manufacturer Cassetta di connessione derivazione da paret 1 gt PLAF EMERGENZA BEGHELLI PLAF EMERG 24W IP40 2H PLAFINDUSTR DISANO PLAF PAR POLILIPES 2X58 1 PROIETTORE DISANG PROIETTORE ESTERNO 150WJM IP55 1 gt SERIE 20 GEWISS PULSANTE UNIPOLARE 10 164 1NA 1 SERIE 40 GEWISS CENTRALINO FARETE MMOD C SPO IP5 1 gt SERIE 44 GEWISS CASSETTA PARETE IN PVC 10010050 IF 1 gt PRESA INT BL ILME PRESA INT BL FAR ISOL 34164 C FUS IP5 1 IMP082 SS Cassetta di connessione dervazione da incas 2 e PL we Punto luce PLA EMERGENZA BEGHELLI PLAF EMERG 11 P40 1H 2 PLAF INDUSTR DISANO PLAF PAR LAM VERN IP40 2xX36W 2 e SERIE 20 GEWISS PRESA 2P T 164 2 e SERIE 40 GEWISS CENTRALINO INCASSO 24MOD C SPO IP42 gt IMPO082 Kee Cassetta di connessione denvazione da incas 3 e PLAF INDUSTR DISANO PLAF PAR LAM VERN 1P40 1X36WV 3 SERIE 20 GEWISS PRESA 2P T 164 3 gt SERIE 20 GEWISS INTERRUTTORE UNIPOLARE 10 164 4 Jt S SSO SN NNN oN mn NO7WK 1x1 5 BK PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM 450 750V ILLUMINAZIONE NO7WK 1x1 5 BN PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM 450750V ILLUMINAZIONE NO7WK 1x1 5 BU PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM 450 750V ILLUMINAZIONE NOW 1x1 5 GNYE PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM ANM GV ILLUMINAZIONE NO7WK 1x1 5 GY PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM 450750V ILLUMINAZIONE gt NO V K Tx 1 5 BN SPEEDY FLAM AN 750V ILLUM EMERG NO V K 1x15 BU SPEEDY FLAM 430 790V ILLUM EMERG NOAVRbI3GNE PIRELLI SPEEDY FLAM 450 750V ILL
427. sequent request for Settaggi Impianto System Settings see par 17 1 needed to configure the drawing format and scale the squaring title block is positioned automatically on the new drawing The system variable USERR5 3 stores the activation of this choice Selecting FUNCTIONAL Diagram causes the subsequent request for 4 1 Setting to choose the symbol Afterwards it is possible to execute the 3 1 Create Multi sheet command to create the required quantity of pages The system variable USERR5 3 stores the activation of this choice NOTE If the new multi sheet is a model the title block and related data are already present Opening an existing multi sheet when an existing multi sheet is opened the settings kept with the last save are found Settaggi Impianto System Settings or Configuration are not enabled automatically CAUTION lt is not possible to open drawings of the multi sheet using the AutoCAD Open command The special 2 5 Spac Job Order Management function must always be used 2 Basics 31 Job Order Table This function allows you to draw or export the list of job orders in CSV format It is necessary to select the job orders to be processed This allows you to obtain the specific list for some of them or complete list of all those selected suggested choice The required job orders are then presented in a list with all the details available on the multi sh
428. setting In the hierarchy example applied it is defined that the terminal blocks of panel QG receive BM as usage While the terminal blocks of BM receive the elements contained in the panel itself as usage On the basis of the hierarchy configured the terminals of the example automatically take the following usage values U1 Terminal block XG d Terminal block XG is contained in panel QG which according to the hierarchy set must receive the usage from panel BM In this case the direction of the usage is sought downstream where there is a connection with BM through terminal U1 NumM 1 of terminal block XM1 This information composes the usage reference BM XM181 The presence of the brackets indicates that the usage is a terminal The presence of the brackets indicates that the usage is a contact sub element symbol U1 Terminal block XM1 Terminal block XM1 is contained in panel BM which according to the hierarchy set must receive the usage from elements contained in the panel itself In this case the direction of the usage is sought downstream where there is a connection with BM through pin U of motor M1 This information composes the usage reference BM M1 U The character separates the reference from the connection pin in this case there are no brackets so the usage is a component 6 Terminals and Connectors 137 Assign usage This function allo
429. shdadidbeidaduied Mdalidbaidadied tdnladadia 104 LET TUE DEE 104 HICK OINICIN Eeer EE 105 Positional 1 AQ QING ti tin olde ADS atid e EE AE AAA AAA 105 AG SCAN MULTE SHEE E 106 5 WIRE NUMBERING 1 ais 107 AR A UE II AN 107 NS eege 107 ss A O 109 Numbering wires connected to ermmals 110 Numbering wires connected tO Returns ccooccccoccoccnnoccnnconnonannononnnonnonannononnnnnnonnnnennnonannonans 110 5 2 NUMBERING FOSTON errean aaa a a 111 576 USED NUMBERS L Tiida di da iaa 112 Bs GORY WIRE Te aorta 113 5 S NUMBERSUMMAR eege 114 500 DELETE NUMBERS ere AE eet ENEE a e ae l oud det ae 114 A A EE 115 E A reednen ness coe ae nace A A veranda ete ene Ae eee 115 lee 116 Reger DIA sal 117 6 TERMINALS AND CONNECT ORG cnica 119 List of Contents 3 Eck INSERT TERMINALS si ni 119 ii A O ora ana oraian eae ee ees 121 MUELO US e E 122 62 INSERT CONNECTORS yatana an A 124 6 3 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND GONNECTORS cuisine acia 126 VOTA A DIOS OLIVIA aed tated ada teat taeda Matin latte 128 Multiple EE A AI 129 CON CO AVI EE 129 AUDE SIONO A O A A ull avauanainuselavausanaianuiets 130 EE ee 130 EITC MNR EE 130 Explode REP E WUOMS lnea 131 A A 132 Terminal detal ara oa 132 EOI TAUMIDIC TO UNAS iaa a a O E EA ATTE ATA AEREA AER AA REA AAA 133 AAA o ee 133 change o mA tet 133 EE ee E A a e od 134 NOAA Cell REN 135 e LB Cte LO CABRIO CE ROO O a nee 135 dE ERT O rece Pe eee ee ae Pe 136 Ee ee 136 SE Ne 137 Ee EE 138 Beete KE AOS rara dis
430. sheet size of 297x210 mm Format A4 in centimetres with scale 1 10 corresponds to a sheet size of 297x210 mm same as before Format A4 in centimetres with scale 1 100 corresponds to a sheet size of 2970x2100 mm In the example of the following figure the A3 sheet format in centimetres takes 3 different scale values Scale 1 20 Scale 1 25 Scale 1 50 It is important to note that the graphic content within the 3 remains unchanged It is therefore essential for the planimetry to be made in scale 1 1 the unit can correspond to 1 millimetre 1 centimetre or 1 metre CAUTION The drawing scale can be changed at any time also when the planimetry has already been started but pay attention to the symbols insertion scale 248 Spac Start 2012 Update Master The information contained in the squaring attributes are updated according to the Title Block data of the Customer associated with the job order info Search scale The Search Scale is calculated automatically and depending on the planimetry size the maximum scale factor is proposed Adapt can only be used with an already started or existing planimetry Before using Adapt it is necessary to set the correct unit of measure mm cm or m Units of The unit of measure of the entities to be drawn or already drawn is selected in measure millimetres mm centimetres cm or metres A new drawing is normally generated in centimetres An imported drawing dra
431. sheets that possess this jolasik neutrality characteristic All the sheet File Name Description Classification Classifications List Change Delete The command works on the current sheet indicated With All the entire content of the current sheet is stored except for the title block and other entities resident on sheet 0 the symbol containing the sheet title is also stored while the page numbers are automatically excluded Using Select lt it is possible to determine the parts of the current sheet to be stored except for the title block and other entities resident on sheet O which are in any case rejected Before activating Select All must be excluded Type the name of the sheet to be stored max 20 characters and the relevant description the sheet is filed in dwg format in the Sheets folder At the same time as the drawing in a file with sld extension the corresponding image that can be viewed during insertion is stored The classification is a name max 15 characters with which it is possible to subdivide into various groups the sheets in the database to facilitate searching for them during use When entering the data of a sheet to be stored it is advisable to scroll through this list to take the name of the classification directly from those already existing The change of the description and group is done pressing the change button all changes are effective only after confirming wi
432. sion legend commands the status of revised sheets is not stored Revision symbol d It is possible to associate the revision symbol with every sheet present in the job order This is helpful for identifying the sheets that have undergone any updates in a complex documentation These symbols are provided with 1 2 3 4 or a maximum of 5 banks of attributes therefore max 5 revisions REV_NUM_n Indicates the progressive number or code of the revision change REV MOD_n Brief indication of the type of change made on the sheet concerned REV DAT_n Date on which the change was made REV FIR_n Name of the person who made the change The content is inserted or changed manually using the AutoCAD Eattedit or Ddatte commands The block is inserted automatically in coordinate 0 0 a customized Revision block corresponds to every type of title block The use of these blocks allows you to obtain a list of all the revisions carried out using the Revision legend command Revision Symbol with 3 banks of attributes for 3 revisions The revision blocks are stored in the Spac LL f LUpreies umgpeks folder Le each dwg block corresponds EE SEE with an image slide sld with Index revision 09 01 SDP the same name for viewing in MODIFY DATE Signature the dialog window Symbol _ REVIS complete with 2 revisions You can customize the new blocks storing them in the same folder as those already existing The blo
433. site always taking account of the correct position of the insertion point e a a Break fine Always make sure that the Break lines are directed with the same horizontal or vertical arrangement The symbol BIk3 in the example cannot break the wires as it does not comply with ALK the rule described previously A symbol that possesses reference lines but is without attributes is always inserted in the conventional manner without interrupting the wires This condition is shown by the following message The Block inserted does not possess attributes Always use the AutoCAD Base command to check the insertion point of symbols This is fundamental during insertion for the break wires action 214 Spac Start 2012 14 2 MbIk Macro symbols Macrosymbol means a symbol that contains other symbols within it Create macro is helpful for storing the parts of circuit already complete with connections A similar result is obtained using 3 8 store Sheet the difference lies in the use stage because with the macrosymbol it is possible to attribute the references of the components forming part of it immediately When a new macrosymbol is generated the following rules must be adhered to e tis essential for macros to be built on LAYER 0 e The connections must be drawn in DALAYER logic color this color is used by the programme for drawing wires see 4 1 Setting e They must be drawn with snap 2 5mm an
434. sively on the components and not on the sections Eis Normally the decision to filter the zones on the drawing is due to the need to make Lists or Bills of materials detailed for the zones chosen to make visible The filter on the zone is independent of the one related with the type of installation lt often occurs that in order to better carry out this identification work it is firstly chosen to freeze all the types of installations in the planimetry to avoid seeing components tied to the installation but not to the zone Installation View Fl The window shows that no H installation Electrical Burglar BCEE alarm etc has been AR Elements Circuit 0 REPARTO LAVORAZIONE j j DISTRIBUZIONE UFFICI E SERVI selected while requesting to FORZA i 3 TOILETTE CH see only the components that ILLUM EMERG zi have been assigned to Zone 2 Press on Select to obtain the graphic result of the following figure It is now possible for example to make the specific list of the components only for Zone 2 The Bill of materials can be filtered by zones also when they are all present at the same time on the drawing View All requests the complete view of the project all the installations and all _ the components of the various zones A LS Wi EI zi e E A O Au Fig 3 Complete installation of Zone 2 338 Spac Start 2012 d Normally the decision to filter the circuits on the drawing is essentially
435. slator is an optional software of Spac Automazione 200x The translator blocks normally contain 4 attributes from Texti to Text4 the first two are to be completed with the phrase in the original language while the last two are to be completed with the translated phrase The two pairs of attributes are drawn with different text inclination and color the attributes for the translation have the text in magenta color sloped by 15 to better differentiate the texts No limitation exists to the number of lines contained in the blocks the 4 lines of the symbol Trad2 dwg can also be used to contain 4 different languages The Trad symbols are stored in the Symbols folder each dwg block corresponds with a sld image slide with the same name for viewing in the dialog window You can customize new symbols storing them in the same directory as those already existing The block name must be consecutive to the names already present Trad6 Trad7 etc for a maximum of 20 symbols the dialog window can show a max of 20 windows O Deleting a symbol compromises the viewing of the numerically subsequent ones 12 Utilities e 203 204 Spac Start 2012 13 Layout 13 1 Cabinet Exterior This command is used to quickly draw the electric panel topographic layout The mostly used dimensions in real millimetres can be stored separately using the Insert key The various functions operate by default in scale 1 10 so that the draw
436. sociate Materials same blocks This function is the same as described previously the only difference consists in the fact that the association of the material is proposed for all the symbols that are the same as the one selected To completely cancel the operation turn_off the variable OK for every code and press Cancel only once OK for every Code Active by default this parameter is helpful for consulting all the symbols one at a time that the function has counted being the same as the one selected The operation of Add Replace and Cancel becomes absolute turning off this variable se See 8 4 DbCenter 23 Bill of Materials e 347 23 3 Bill of Materials Using this function it is possible to quickly obtain a list of all the materials associated with the components and sections thus cables and raceways that form part of the planimetry without performing any data import export Uncoded components are in any case contemplated in the list and it is not indispensable to take the material codes from the database as they can also be attributed manually using the Edit Symbol command XS see par 28 2 or using the AutoCAD Ddatte command so it suffices to complete the following attributes e TYPE contains the catalogue code of the element or macrocode i e the sum of several codes separated from one another by the semicolon character e MANUFACTURER contains the material brand in the presence of several codes
437. ssible to directly import the IMP files generated by the Export Data IMP function of Spac Start Planimetric Diag Single feed Diag To automatically obtain completion of the data tables with the calculation results obtained by Caneco Data Export from Caneco is necessary O Caneco is an optional software not supplied with Spac Start 244 Spac Start 2012 iagram d Base och Kiesch D Q p pb 0 C amp LL 16 Caneco 245 246 Spac Start 2012 17 General commande 17 1 Installation SETTINGS This function is activated on entering a new drawing see Open Multi sheet par 2 5 for the general setting of the drawing format and scale Drawing Format and Scale Cl Correct sheet format setting is of 1 Units of measure fundamental importance for the work of Clim lon Im Delad cslanos from existing plan Spac Start This must be carried out both in the case of SD SE a new job and when starting with the base AS of an already existing planimetry drawn by 3 Sheet Formal rm others mp RL AJA E Confirming the configuration obtains title a Insertion poin block insertion according to the scale and 4 vk Ill Seber the values to be used as print scale factor are indicated 2 ran scale Simuaing insetion Hock Update Master THe block A Parame es Duck scale E Tes haghi Ed Cunent Friele Fie Grap IMPIANTI IEC PAL
438. sting file Assign Pens Each item in the drawing is associated with a color Depending on the type of plotter each color can be printed using a different pen and a different type of line and width The software features a default configuration Default ctb sf Print Style Table Editor Sfea ctb Some devices such as laser or electrostatic printers can print lines that vary in thickness or density General Properties Print Styles Style Properties Color IIe entity color sl To load the default configuration press Dither On sii then select Default ctb from the Plot Grayscale Style table pen assignements Pen tt 1 To view or edit default configurations Virtual pen 1 access the AutoCAD command Plot Style Screening 1100 H A Manager Linetype Use entity linetype y Adaptive On w Lineweight Use entity lineweight e Minor 16 i x o Line end style Use entity end style v Description Line join style Use entity join style si Fill style Use entity fill style z i SfeaCAD does not yet use the variables that are marked with an asterisk Edit Lineweights Save As O The software has no print configurations using stored STB styles 3 Sheet Management 59 3 17 Sheet Revision This function is used to manage sheet revisions in the job order Only manual management of revisions is possible using the Revision symbol and Revi
439. stomise material technical data and to manage selection filters by pressing the Define Filter and Pair Filter keys Cut Delta Cut Colour Code and Thermal Dissipation Support attribute are examples of possible attributes contained in the symbol Code corresponds to the name of Registration Reference Symbol from the Cross reference use the Cnt Aus and Tsa keys to browse the available options The user is allowed to associate information to any attribute present in the symbol by configuration of the attribute name TAG and its respective value Value Attributo TAG FU NZIOME 1 ll Valore Moto Protection Add Used to create a new association TAG Value Change Used to confirm changes in an existing association Delete Cancels the current association View Opens the list of associations Example l during a Pairing Materials operation the user wishes to insert Motor Protection together with other commercial data of the Manufacturer Type and Description in the attribute Function1 of the symbol it is necessary to configure the fields TAG Value as shown in the previous figure previous versions of Spac WARNING Technical Notes is a field used to insert comments used freely and is no longer O The configuration TAG Value substitutes the system value Attribute Information adopted in O valid for the system value Attribute Information as used in
440. t the changes carried out cannot be transferred to the multi sheets that are in use All the Update functions writing on drawings are limited to multi sheets that are not in use by other users Some Commande like Print Sheets see par 3 16 immediately warn the designer of the presence of multi sheets in use by other users excluding them from the control CAUTION The Job Orders Path must absolutely not contain spaces or punctuation mark characters 2 Basics e 37 38 Spac Start 2012 E o O O O o O p O D 2 Basics 39 40 Spac Start 2012 3 Sheet Management 3 1 Create Multi sheet This command is used to create pages in the drawing The function starts automatically after creating a New Multi sheet using the 2 5 Spac Job Order Management command Create MULTI SHEET DATI PROGETTO LISTA FOGLI ALIMENTAZIONE ALIMENTAZIONE AUSILIARI MOTORI AUSILIARI 1104 AUSILIARI 24V INGRESSI PLC USCITE PLC MORSETTIERE CONNETTORI ESTERNO ARMADIO INTERNO ARMADIO DISTINTA MATERIALI DISTINTA MATERIALI DISTINTA MATERIALI AUSILIARI 24V 24V AUXILIARY Example of creating multi sheet pages In the dialog window under Sh To be created it is necessary to state the number indicative of pages required for the current multi sheet while the start number is automatically suggested in the First Sheet which can be changed according to requirements number 1 will be
441. t4 If you want to interrupt the command press the Enter key twice Other point lt Enter for arc or quit gt click with the mouse in correspondence with the vertex Pt5 If you want to interrupt the command press the Enter key twice Other point lt Enter for arc or quit gt click with the mouse in correspondence with the vertex Pt6 If you want to interrupt the command press the Enter key twice This sixth point is the vertex that precedes the curved wall we are now in the condition of having to select the arc drawn Other point lt Enter for arc or quit gt press the Enter key to access select arc lt Select arc lt Enter to quit gt use the mouse to select any point on the arc Pt7 which represents the curved wall During this stage the procedure divides the arc selected into a number of segments calculated automatically if the option Automatic calculation of curved wall separations is enabled or if this option has been disabled in the number defined by the operator in the initial dialog window Other point lt Enter for arc or quit gt click with the mouse in correspondence with vertex Pt8 With this last point we have completely defined the room as we have gone through all the vertexes that identify it in the counter clockwise direction Press Enter twice to end the export procedure The drawing on which you have performed the procedure is enhanced by a new Layer named in our example CADY_P
442. take the exploded objects will be viewed simultaneously on all the pages this situation is restored using the 3 13 Move between sheets command to take the objects in question from sheet 0 to the correct destination sheet 3 11 Split Multi sheet This command is used to create a single file for every page of the current multi sheet This takes place in the file format chosen between Dwg and Dxf of the different versions of AutoCAD Split Sheet extraction into individual files To create a customized list of the pages to o be extracted they must be selected from RE the list of sheets of the current multi ALIMENTAZIONE sheet ALIMENTAZIONE AUSILIARI MOTORI SE All selects all the sheets of the current AUSILIARI 24V multi sheet l NGRESSI PLE elias With None all the sheets to be processed ES TERNG ARMADO are removed from the extraction list The Include sheet 0 title block option is helpful for storing the pages complete with BEER title block always positioned on sheet 0 If Save all entities on Sheet 0 is active both the title block and all the entities of the sheet on a single O layer are extracted recommended The files extracted dwg and dxf are positioned in the Split folder present in every job order directory with the following check messages Sheet 1 saved in SPLIT 1 DWG 200x Sheet 2 saved in SPLIT 2 DWG 200x Sheet 4 saved in SPLIT 4 DWG 200x Sheet 5 saved in SPLIT 5 DWG 200
443. takes place on the replacement of the CEET EE ouput reference symbols Pressing Update the data processed are shown on the drawing only valid ones On the Sub element symbols contacts the position is given sheet and segment of the related Parent while next to the Parents coils the reference blocks Heil A4 and 12E are inserted set in the Code in the position indicated by Offset The reference block contains the sh segment registration of the positions of the Sub elements present During this processing error and fault messages may occur see par 7 3 This example has been made without pin marking Situation on Sh 1 after the cross reference 7 Cross Reference 145 Cross Reference on Return Return Signal The components used to manage the returns of wires and or power feeds between one sheet and the next of the diagram are defined as return symbols This option allows you to process one or all Return symbols in the job order detecting the position of the ones at the start where the destination sheet and segment is indicated and of the corresponding destination Returns indicating the start position Correspondence is determined by the presence of certain attributes see par 15 2 e The SIGNAL attribute indicates the name of the wire or power feed to which it is connected the returns take place between start and destination signals of the same name e The attribute LINE BRANCH is compiled
444. tation and the data tables see section 9 3 Single feed Data tables The functionality Import Single Feed Scheme uses the txt files on the current Job Order folder These files are created by SPAC Impianti in planimetrics mode or by Caneco calculation software optional results obtained by the calculation CANECO EN It is important to save the Caneco project on the Job Order Calcolo Unifilare folder with the files _IMP TXT to be imported The files created by Caneco calculation software optional allow the automatic filling of the data tables with the The configuration of the Y Coordinates corresponds with the components position as indicated on the figure Import Schema Unifilare da CANECO Coordinate r Barratura Protezione Polarita LT ON Carichi CDATI10 4 Delta Sotto Quadri Scelka Tabella Partenza Normale LI Ordine di mentro A Da Caneco Default E E OO Uuglnszburg appartamente Areadone ago Frese d corrente The size of the Table with 10 circuit data tables requires the use of an adequate template see section Master Title Blocks Master Unif and Master3 are appropriated symbols because they have a useful length of 400mm while symbols of the MasterO 1 and 2 templates are not adequate because of their reduced dimensions Order of Returns The design starts in the current sheet and continues when requested on those consecutives The circuits plac
445. ted value A1 and the second value A2 after execution of the Cross Reference with pin marking option the values given in the figure can be seen on the component W er See 7 2 Pin marking Prefix File For every symbols library there is at least one Prefix File that takes its name The file is automatically proposed as default when the current symbols library is set or changed using the 4 1 Setting command From Symbol Configuration it is possible to customize or create new databases pressing the button as shown in the figure It is also possible to import files with Pre Pfr Lpd and Des extension containing any customizations made with previous Spac versions se See New Prefix File and Compatibility with previous versions The following figure shows the files associated with the IEC symbols library It should be noted that the name of the files starts with the same name as the associated library this relation must serve as a rule for creating new files Example for the IEC library the file can be called IEC standard IECn ECG name etc Use of the character is not allowed Singlefeed Library IEC 750 1 2 char Availing of several files for each symbol Bik User Library allows you to save various combinations of material and pin references This way it red i ible to customize the IEC 61246 Lay 1 char Ss POSSID u Singlefeed Library EC 750 1 2 char characteristi
446. ter 72 Spac Start 2012 Symbol Configuration Configuration opens with the database set initially by the 4 1 Setting command There is at least one Prefix File for each library but it is possible to create further and different databases in order to meet differentiated graphic rules depending on the standards complied with The databases are contained in the Description Lib Mdb file in the Libraries Databases folder Besides containing the prefix to be associated with the symbols each database also contains the Cross Reference register Pin configuration and description in several languages Symbol A Prefix Al Description up lt r rekt Pare Oral ae DD deit Pr Kaal G LOL e Cancel This is the name of the electrical symbol dwg file with which the following parameters are associated Pressing the Libraries folder is paged through If a Sub element symbol is selected it is only possible to insert or change the generic description Pressing on Symbol or on the indicator the list is sorted alphabetically on the names Pressing again the order changes from increasing to decreasing and so on see Parent Symbol and Element Symbol par 15 3 This is the component reference the symbol KM1 is a relay coil with prefix KM so on the drawing the following types of references will be associated KM1 KM2 etc if incremental 1KM1 or KM1 1 if positional etc P
447. th Save changes Use this function after choosing the sheet to be removed from the list of the existing ones Actual deleting takes place only when confirming with Save changes Confirming with Store or Save changes the data of the database are updated in the Lista dat File O The asterisk character indicates the sheets present in the Lista dat file but which are not present in the Sheets folder 3 Sheet Management 49 Lista dat File As specified previously this file contains all the information related with the sheets stored The file structure is shown in the following example SHEET1 CLASS A Distribution SHEET2 CLASS B Motor power Every storage is a new record composed of 3 fields File Name Classification and Description lt is also possible to act manually in the file respecting the syntax indicated O CAUTION Removal of the Lista dat file involves the clearing of the list of stored pages Sheet Classification Classification is fundamental for a tidy subdivision of the pages stored time after time On the basis of this parameter it is possible to view during insertion only certain classes to facilitate searching for the page concerned Example of subdivision into classes by type of machine Interlock All the pages power and auxiliary that concern the circuits for interlocking Processing All the pages power and auxiliary that concern the processing circuits
448. the Wire Ddattef command The button serves to change the return block symbol to represent the terminal on the terminal block taking from those available in the Terminal and Connector Database Any changes made manually to the Usage field must take account of the syntax envisaged for this string of information see 6 4 Usage 5 Wire numbering 117 118 Spac Start 2012 6 Terminals and Connectors 6 1 Insert Terminals The insertion of terminals on the electric diagram normally takes place at the end of wire numbering because except for particular cases the terminal always receives or takes the values dictated by the numbering see Wire and Terminal Numbers par 4 2 This command allows you to insert the terminals either one at a time or in multiple mode on several wires with the fence or box modes All the lines drawn on the diagram are considered as wires hence available for the insertion of a Terminal Symbol with the exception of e Non orthogonal lines Polylines and Multilines e Neglected lines i e those of the color not to be processed see Color Management par 4 2 Particular operating cases are considered e Un numbered lines From the dialog window it is possible to choose A and enter all the terminal be Ginle those avalane data after confirming you are asked to select the wire on which to insert them The parameters set in the configu
449. the multi sheet name see par 2 3 For every new job order a new folder is created with the same name indicated by the user max 20 characters and the new folder is generated in the Job Order Path stated during setup Example job order structure Job Order Multi sheets dwg file Description EXAMPLE2008 Planimetry dwg Building Planimetry without diagram Building_Artisan dwg Electric diagram on planimetry Layout_Planimetric dwg Planimetry Printing layout Single feed dwg Single feed functional diagram Multi feed dwg Multi feed functional diagram This structure is managed by the specific command 2 5 Spac Job Order Management 2 Basics e 23 2 3 Multi sheet Spac Start stores the graphics of several electric diagram sheets within a single file with dwg extension and this is called a Multi sheet This structure is used to simultaneously handle a large number of pages without having to generate a large number of files e Planimetric Multi sheet e Functional Multi sheet Planimetric Multi sheet The planimetric diagram is used for the drawing of the building layout and of the related electrical system the same layout drawing is also used to draw the audio video burglar alarm security emergency home automation systems etc Spac automatically generates the Layers required by the drawing to logically subdivide the various graphic groups walls doors and windows components sections conductor
450. the job order automatically giving the sheet number the number of the next and previous sheet and the total number of sheets according to choice in coordinates that can be defined by the user Sheet NUMBERING kl Id E Renumbering involves the replacement of previous page numbers even if in a different position only on drawings made with release 8 x or later ones For each datum the position is determined justification of the text in the middle setting the X and Y coordinates using the Sel lt button The text height is between 2 and 10 se Summary see par 3 1 Rotation 0 90 Total Sheets Delete sheet numbering Sheet Multi sheet or Job Order Add Prefixes Examples of numbering Determines the orientation of the numbers the setting is common for the 4 data This is active only when Total Sh is active the value suggested is that of the highest sheet number among those existing at the moment Selecting this option it is possible to delete all the sheet numbers already present Renumbering would in any case cause the automatic replacement of the existing data on the drawing With this option it is possible to determine whether the Sheet Numbering or Delete sheet numbering is to be carried out only on the current sheet on the current multi sheet or on the whole job order all the multi sheets The multi sheet prefix is inserted see New Multi sheet
451. the laying modes available 18 Sections e 289 5 Break Section This is a utility of the laying types that allows you to break an existing section into two sub sections thereby offering the possibility to insert in the break point a new element or generate a branch The function requests Select the Section to break Return for options 1 point Distance from edge in cm lt gt X change edge Return or type the exact distance from the interruption point Interruption of Sections executed If you fail to select the section because it is perpendicular to the current view access to Options and the use of the Search function is necessary which makes it possible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it It is now possible to insert a new element in the insertion point The three dimensional view of the section drawn with the previous example shows the result obtained From the point of interruption where a new element has been inserted a downward path is made from 230 cm height of the existing section to 30 cm the destination point has been inserted selecting component E1 O The reference of the sub sections obtained with Break sections remains the same as the origin section Compared with the previous Spac Start versions some Laying modes are no longer present including Derivations Spac Start 2012 allows you to make derivations in a sim
452. the sections in which the cables have been laid The guided choice of the sections that form the path is interrupted automatically when an element is met which is considered as destination It is important to note that semiautomatic laying allows you to select the path of consecutive sections without making any selection on the drawing At the end of the operation the Cable laying performed correctly message is shown Semiautomatic laying is limited in its potential by the presence of free sections i e sections drawn without connection to any element on the drawing The presence of a non consecutive section not connectable to the previous one involves the end of the path selected up to that moment in the semiautomatic mode 314 Spac Start 2012 Automatic Laying The Automatic section selection mode requires only the selection of the elements to be connected start and destination the function automatically selects the shortest path After completing the list of Cables and Bundles to lay and pressing Forward gt the function asks for the selection of the first start element and then the selection of the destination element Cable laying 3 1x1 5 Automatic laying mode Select Start Element or Return Selection Select Destination Element or Return Selection The function automatically seeks the path of the sections necessary only in the case of consecutive sections to connect the two com
453. therefore to insert a component in the same position as another already existing one but at a different laying height After selecting a node 1 point the function requests ELEMENT insertion point 2 point Angle of rotation lt 0 gt 5 poin then Enter to confirm 1 This system is used for the insertion of components that are positioned in the same point in the planimetry but placed at different laying heights GE To check which symbols are associated to a node it is necessary to use 21 7 View Links In these cases it is advisable to view the height of 2 CN L L o SS the elements see par 21 6 Since the Node indicates the real position of 10 164 10710A the 2 components it must be placed on the d C4 i drawing with suitable accuracy existing symbol 28 Symbols e 379 Select Section This mode is used to insert a free symbol without node with the same laying height as the end point of a section This system is used for the insertion of components on sections that have been drawn with the Freely mode see par 18 1 4 After selecting a point on the section 1 point the function requests Free ELEMENT insertion point Enter for options 2 point Angle of rotation lt 0 gt 3 point then Enter to confirm In the Element Features dialog window the laying height detected in the section end point is restrained The laying height of the component is therefore t
454. tial for the graphic part of a block to be drawn and stored in scale 1 1 with unit of measurement in millimetres mm e The symbols must be drawn inside a box dim 8mm x 8mm except particular cases such as fluorescent tubes or for symbols from IMP220 to IMP225 The name of the symbol must be chosen in relation to the name of the free box to which it is required to be associated from IBLK1 to IBLK100 every symbol must be associated with an image for viewing in the dialog window The slide must be stored with the same name as the symbol to be represented and in the same folder The IBLK symbols and the relevant slides must be stored in the special folder Spim Libraries Blk The blocks and slides are created using the AutoCAD Mblocco and Gendia commands Consult the specific manual for operating details To make sure that the new IBIk symbols are compatible with the Spac Start functions during building it is necessary to follow the specific rules see par 28 1 For an IBIk symbol to be treated in all aspects like a normal symbol of the existing library it is necessary to implement the prefix file PRI each time for setting the references see 17 2 Symbol SETTINGS for unconfigured symbols the data and an occasional reference are requested each time During insertion Pressing this button activates Symbol Configuration see par 4 2 related with the type of block selected to change or insert the descrip
455. tible with operation of the Spac Start application The various symbols are subdivided into requirements and characteristics during the categories every category has different attribute insertion of a symbol there is no visual difference between a block belonging to one family or another it is therefore very important for the difference to be attributed correctly when the block is being created The symbol categories are e Furnishing Symbols e Installation Symbols e Thermal Symbols UNI 9511 For the categories indicated the graphic part of a block must be drawn on the appropriate LAYERS there are no restraints concerning the colors and types of line that can be used even if it is preferable for reasons of homogeneity to refer to those already made Furnishing Symbols The Furnishing symbol is a simply graphic block its presence on the planimetry of an electrical project is entirely optional However should the need arise to generate new customized symbols it is wise to follow a few rules see par 27 2 To generate a new symbol it is necessary to draw on a neutral sheet set to scale 1 1 and millimetres mm making every millimetre drawn correspond to a centimetre of the real measurement It is essential that the graphic part of a block be drawn on the Furnishing LAYER while the 3D form is advised for homogeneity with already existing symbols even if it is not essential Furnishing symbols are
456. tination returns Pres P on start returns values other than A or P are not accepted the message can be seen in the initial Report 3 Error single Start Return In the page indicated there is a start return that does not have a destination on other sheets In this case the signal registration is cleared the message can be seen in the initial Report The problem is solved removing the symbol from the drawing 4 Error single Destination Return In the page indicated there is a destination return that does not have a start on other sheets In this case the signal registration is cleared the message can be seen in the initial Report The problem is solved removing the symbol from the drawing 5 Error Returns with the same X coordinate Same signals have been detected in the same X coordinate of the same sheet The problem can be solved inserting a branch value for every signal repeated using the AutoCAD Ddatte command In this case the signal registration is cleared This check is carried out when in Sheet sizing see par 4 2 the segment in abscissa is set 6 Error Returns with the same Y coordinate Same signals have been detected in the same Y coordinate of the same sheet The problem can be solved inserting a branch value at every signal repeated using the AutoCAD Ddatte command In this case the signal registration is cleared This check is carried out when in Sheet sizing see par 4 2 the segment in ordinate
457. tion point rotation of register reference symbol Functioni This is used the data in the symbol on its function in the system This value will be used for the creation of the Functions Legend the value given in the tables will be the sum between Function1 and Function2 Function2 Second line of function 1 Support Optional 15 Symbols 219 Register Reference Symbol The R Reference symbol or register cross is fundamental for Cross Reference operations During this procedure Spac deals with associating it with the Parent Symbol which must receive the list of the positions sheet segment of the various Sub element symbol The criterion with which the References are associated is very simple the Parent symbol contains a Code attribute whose value is the name of the reference to be received and an Offset attribute whose value describes its position in coordinates corresponding to the actual Parent insertion point All the blocks are stored in the Reference folder 1 Cnt contains the references to be used for all types of coils 2 Aus contains the references for switches pushbuttons selectors etc 3 Tsa contains the additional heads Blocks of register crosses and additional heads have l 54 gal the attribute Pres R therefore they are References 1 AA zal e 24 SC eem ene These symbols are placed on the drawing 5 4 BA Sg automatically by the Cross Reference function 7 5 JI KN O The AutoCAD Ddatte
458. tion reference window opens automatically The function requests Select side to make the Section orthogonal 3rd point 284 Spac Start 2012 The 3 point optional draws the end section orthogonally and the position defines where towards the inside or outside of the direct section Pressing Return the direct section drawn temporarily becomes final ending the function The section ends automatically with the entry of the eN point The command continues considering the previous destination symbol or point as start for a new section consecutive to the one that has just been drawn DESTINATION Select Element Section or Node Return for options To end the command definitively press Return and click on End The three dimensional view of the section drawn with the previous example shows the result obtained It is important to remember that in this mode the laying height is taken automatically from the destination component This is the mode normally used for ceiling light spots for working with the automatic filter The length of the section is always calculated automatically also in the case of changes using the AutoCAD Stretch command To change the path of sections use of 18 5 Change laying height and 18 6 Change laying height at ends is necessary 18 Sections e 285 3 Floor from wall to wall passing to laying height This laying type allows you to select any point to sp
459. tions gt Pressing this button accesses the window of the next group if existing Pressing this button takes you back to the window of the previous group Preferiti The block selected is inserted in the group of favourites This contains the most frequently used symbols see 75 5 Favourite Symbols 27 Customizations e 371 27 2 Abik Symbols With Spac Start you can customize new symbols through the ABLK library left free exactly to be available to the user who can use it to increase the library with all those furnishing symbols for planimetric diagrams that are not contemplated by the existing library When a new ABLK symbol is generated the following general rules must be adhered to e lt is essential for the graphic part of a block to be drawn on the Furnishings LAYER there are no restraints concerning the colors and types of line that can be used even if it is preferable for reasons of homogeneity to refer to those already made e 3D form is advised for homogeneity with already existing symbols even if it is not essential e It is essential for the graphic part of a block to be drawn and stored in scale 1 1 with unit of measurement in centimetres cm The name of the symbol must be chosen in relation to the name of the free box to which it is required to be associated from ABLK1 to ABLK200 an image must be associated with each symbol for viewing in the dialog window and the slide must be stored with t
460. tly the Sub element symbols of the Parent in question are without in the same way REF1 44 also takes the name of generic reference as it is neutral of pin marking restraints The Pins have been given as configured on HL1 and HL2 Element symbols In the case of substantial changes to the electric diagram a new Cross Reference processing is of course necessary O CAUTION To completely remove the pin marking a new Cross Reference processing is necessary deactivating Execute Cross Reference with Pin marking and Protect Pins 7 Cross Reference 151 Protect Pins The values of the Pins on the drawing are updated completely after every processing In the case of changes on the diagram some pin values might therefore be assigned to other components To avoid this the Protect Pin function should be activated Save backup When Pins on Sub elements is activated the function keeps the I Pins on sub elements previous values only on the symbols of this category V Pins on components Activating Pins on Sub elements the previous values are kept on all the Parent and Element symbols To completely remove the pin marking from the diagram a new processing is necessary deactivating Cross Reference with Pin marking from the settings and both Protect Pins functions 152 Spac Start 2012 7 3 Errors Cross reference see par 7 1 and Pin marking see par 7 2 are provided with drawing
461. to be tested for example ceiling lamps 2x36W FD G13 After confirming the type of device and the type of lamps contained in it enter the Lighting level completing the Livello lllumnamento window in the figure with the data requested The BY Lu Scelta App calculation of the devices necessary ends with the Distanza dal pavimento following window 200 mi 2 Calcolo CIE 8 Coeff Manutenzione Sha 22 E Colonne 4 e Drettodlndretto Annulla annulla Now from the Calculation command window select Start to run the lighting engineering calculation based on all the data entered until now If no calculation is made no import of devices is possible to the Spac planimetry Calculation Export for Spac LiteStar produces this view to check the aiming direction of the various devices arranged in the room This arrangement is exported to the Spac Start environment through the Scl files to obtain the same graphic result directly on the planimetry drawn by you To simplify the image we have approximated the arc to one line 368 Spac Start 2012 26 4 Import devices This function is used to import to the planimetry the position of the devices that have been calculated using LiteStar selecting the corresponding Scl file File da importare zi 2lsi The data from the lighting engineering calculation are Cerca ir HIDDEN e DI e ES e H imported immediatel
462. to change all the laying heights indicated when drawing the section The height of connection points end points remains unchanged The function requests Select a Section Return for options selection or Return If you fail to select the section because it is perpendicular to the current view access to Options with Return and the use of the Search function is necessary which makes it possible to restore the selection of the section through the node or symbols connected to it In fact Select a Section Node or an Element selection In the example in the figure the section runs at a laying height of O cm floor Let us suppose we want to change its path and pass above the door h 230 The section of the example runs at only one laying height 0 cm so the function shows this value The replacement of 0 with the new laying value 230 causes the result of the second figure Laying height 0 cm lt is important to remember that the end anchor points on the symbols remain unchanged In the case of more complex sections that run at different laying heights the function always works in the same way one piece at a time The item Next is used to scroll the various laying heights one at a time which can be changed using Change The 3D view of the installation is very effective for immediately seeing the result obtained with this Laying height 230 cm operation H 30 Two pieces of the same
463. to change the numbering of wires and power feeds with the relevant terminals always keeping the data consistent with one another The command differs on the basis of the entity selected in the following cases e Wire Ddattef e Ddattef Power feeds wire connected to a power feed _Alim e Terminal Ddattef plug or connector Wire Ddattef This is used to change wires already numbered or connected to Connection Returns see par 4 5 Change wire characteristics x You can click on any segment of the wire but not on the text of the number Any Non Coinciding Values message is due to the different content between number wire or terminal Confirming a new value all the data are updated unequivocally solving the inconsistency The button is used to change the wire data When the current data of the wire are not in the wires database the message Cable not in database is shown in the description It is possible to intervene only on wires that have been previously selected with the wire numbering or insert terminal commands on wires that are still empty the following message is shown in the command row Caution the wire selected has not been numbered yet The Number Content is nil when a number is graphically deleted The Wire Content represents the real value attributed to the line If the Number content does not coincide with that of the Wires the case is that of Non
464. toolbar and can be positioned in the drawing area or coupled to the right or left of the AutoCAD drawing window There are 2 types of filter e Filters defined in database in this mode it is possible to use if present the filters already defined in the database i e Datum1 Datum2 or Datum see par 8 1 Define a filter Once the filter has been set press the Apply filter button to start the search Manual filters in this mode the filter is composed of a maximum of 3 successive strings in the three text boxes which are sought as subsirings in all the catalogue codes or in the description of each material In addition this search can take place on only one manufacturer selecting it from the corresponding menu Once the filter has been set press the Apply filter button to start the search The application of a filter causes a re processing of the materials database Materials database TreeView changes its background colour to remind the user that the materials viewed are fewer in number than those of the whole database because they are filtered The Apply Filters button in the DoCenter toolbar is activated automatically to indicate that a filtered view of the data is in progress Pressing Apply Filters takes you back to view the complete database The TreeView background color returns to the standard one The filter contents remain unchanged and it will suffice to press the Apply filter
465. ts circuits for TV circuits for telecommunications Sheathless cables in protective pipes or single 73 wire cables with sheath or multiwire laid in door jambs Sheathless cables in protective pipes or single 74 wire cables with sheath or multiwire laid in window jambs For any type of laying the section is drawn with the same graphic features color and linetype Pressing the Default button the chosen type of laying remains in storage for subsequent uses of the command After choosing the laying Type it is necessary to indicate the commercial characteristics brand model and dimensions of the Raceway O In the case of Sub sections the choice of the Laying Type is not operational as the sub section always acquires the characteristics of the main section 278 Spac Start 2012 Raceway The Select button allows access to the list of available raceways this list is stored in the L_Tratte dat file contained in the Libraries Databases folder At the first time of use No Selection is shown this condition indicates that the type of raceway to be applied to the new section must necessarily be set pressing the Select button Using the Manufacturer s Name and Raceway Type filters it is possible to restrict the search field of the raceway model required In the bill of materials the metres of raceway will be counted according to the length of the section Select cables f
466. ts also on different sheets because after completion of the maximum number of lines a new insertion point or continuation on the next sheet is requested This is the height of all the texts contained in the table This parameter affects the height of each line proportionately thus the total height of the table This is the height of the column titles This parameter affects the calculation of the total height of the table This is the total sum of the widths assigned to each output field The size is expressed in millimetres This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Width to avoid overstepping the margins of the master title block with the table On the basis of the maximum number of lines foreseen and the height of the texts the maximum total height of the table is calculated This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Height to avoid overstepping the margins of the master title block with the table This represents the basic configuration of the output fields where applicable Pressing Default the current configuration is stored in local mode see par 4 2 for subsequent uses If confirmed without pressing Default the configuration is considered as occasional and used only once The function requests Seleziona il punto di inserimento tabella Select the table insertion point The configuration of the previous figure corresponds with the following graphic result Mame Manufacturer Type Description
467. tters parameter acts SC search In the Hours We have E e gt E e written KA in Find and KM in Replace For the replacement to occur it is necessary to turn off Upper 1 Lower case letters Example of application When the quotation mark character is used in attributes Size Function1 or 2 Description etc in certain conditions it causes errors during processing The figure shows how to set the command to replace the quotation mark character with a hyphen When intending to replace only a part of the string as in this case turn off Full attribute value CAUTION Replacement of the NAME attribute on Parent symbols is stated on the relevant Sub element symbols when setting All symbols of the Job Order 12 Utilities e 199 Force value This command is helpful for making changes HI HL HL3 HL1 common to many symbols simultaneously VERLE NERO GIALLO BLU Force Value of an Atribute E COLORE COLORE Colour F nus HT amsa EE peso EF posso TT Tara LOK Ga The command is suitable for quickly changing for example the brand or model of a group of components Fast Attedit This command allows you to quickly change the position and rotation of an attribute chosen among KM ae those in a block E By default the command is set to work on the NAME Sa attribute Copy Attributes Utility for copying the contents of attributes among symbols The funct
468. turn Press Return to quit the selection of intermediate points The command continues considering the previous destination symbol or point as start for a new section consecutive to the one that has just been drawn DESTINATION Select Element Section or Node Return for options To end the command definitively press Return and click on End The three dimensional view of the section drawn with the previous example shows the result obtained The laying height at 0 cm was necessary to cross at floor level lt can therefore be concluded that From wall to wall passing to laying height is a mode suitable for connecting 2 components already present on the drawing using floor paths The length of the section is always calculated automatically also in the case of changes using the AutoCAD Stretch command To change the path of sections use of 18 5 Change laying height and 18 6 Change laying height at ends is necessary 18 Sections e 287 4 Freely This laying type allows you to draw any section path All the various laying heights are indicated by the user and only the start and destination heights are taken automatically by selecting any components linked Example of application to connect EL1 with SS1 the function requests START Select Element Section or Node Return for options 1 point the start point or symbol is to be selected Next point current H 270 cm Return for optio
469. tware installation You can check status and version of the hardlock key driver by launching the program SDl exe found in the folder Key Utility on DVD 1 Setup 15 Stand alone hardlock The hardlock USB usually doesn t need any configuration if connected during software installation If the New hardware guided installation for the SmartKey USB peripheral driver window appears during installation proceed with the suggested choices until selection of a driver search path Select only the Specify path option and use the Browse button to locate D Key Utility Replace D with the letter of the configured DVD unit The hardlock can be checked and configured any time after the installation 1 From the installation DVD run SDI Exe in folder Key Utility 2 Use USB section 3 Press Install to update or install SmartKey drivers 4 Then press Update to check version and activity of the driver 5 Sometimes it s necessary to press the Uninstall button before proceeding from point 1 O Run Test32 exe or SPinfo exe in folder Key Utility of the installation DVD to get all information about the installed SmartKey Network hardlock Network hardware protection key with multiple floating license means e Network hardware protection The hardware protection key for the program is installed on a different computer to that on which the program runs e Multiple
470. u to assign a free name to the multi sheet with a maximum length of 20 characters with certain limitations punctuation characters and special characters like quotation marks apostrophe percentage sign etc are not allowed Spaces are allowed The Model mode allows you to start on the basis of an already existing file the file to be used has to be chosen pressing the button This method is particularly helpful in the case of repetitive drawings The multi sheet can be associated with a prefix max 6 characters that will be associated with all the page numbers generated using the special command see par 3 1 Example with prefix A generating 10 sheets starting from no 1 obtains A1 A2 A3 etc The prefix is used when there is the need to differentiate equal page numbers but present on separate multi sheets for example Multish No 1 DIAGRAMO1 Prefix A Sheet no A1 A2 A3 etc Multish No 2 DIAGRAMO2 Prefix B Sheet no B1 B2 B3 etc Multish No 3 LAYOUT Prefix LY Sheet no LY1 LY2 LY3 etc NOTE Planimetric diagrams ignore the Sheet prefix parameter The prototype drawing used to create new multi sheets is Spim2007 dwt contained in the folder Spac Program User for any customizations 30 Spac Start 2012 Multi sheets marked with an asterisk This depends on the setting To manage during processing which establishes if the drawing is taken into consideration by the processin
471. uests Stairway initial point 1 point Stairway direction 2 paint 1 point O The function does not allow the generation of circular stairways winding Landing The landing in the figure has been drawn initially setting the same height as the last step of the stairway using the lt Get value button to facilitate reading The stairway width is 120 cm same value that has to be set as landing width Then the length must be indicated in the example the user has entered a size of 100 cm which added to the 20 cm of the last step form a square shaped landing The function requests Initial landing point 1 point Landing direction 2 point Landing length lt 100 cm gt Landing width lt 120 cm gt Landing drawing side Direction To generate the drawing in the figure the drawing side has been indicated by a point on the edge of the step direction of the width The 120x120 cm landing allows you to draw the next flight of stairs with the same width as the previous flight Alternating single flights and landings with the procedures of the previous examples allows you to obtain drawings of more complex stairways 17 General commands 261 17 8 Wall space and Lifts This command is used to draw chimney flues and lift wells For these drawings Spac uses the specific layer called Columns Features of ducting columns and lift wells ch The sizes related with the Width and
472. um total height of the table is calculated This value must never exceed the size of the Sheet Height to avoid overstepping the margins of the master title block with the table This represents the basic configuration of the output fields where applicable Pressing Default the current configuration is stored in local mode see par 4 2 for subsequent uses If confirmed without pressing Default the configuration is considered as occasional and used only once 23 Bill of Materials e 353 pu NAS NCR CS ASTON BO TACO TEO ETE TAM oom Example of Bill of Materials sorted by Type compact Gerd CS wl el ad Be ej dl end e A 3 D O 3 a mt CSV File This option allows you to generate an Ascii file for extracting data of the Internal Bill of Materials Pressing on CSV File after showing the required sorting on the monitor the following dialog window is shown Standard is the basic configuration of the output fields if active Every datum present in the Available Fields list that using Add is taken to Fields sorted by output represents a column of the file Default is used to store the customization of the output fields for subsequent uses The name and folder with which to store the new file are chosen by the user To migrate data to other programmes for example warehouse management it is advisable to use Windows Microsoft Excel when the CSV file is opened it is as shown in the figure bel
473. umber the segment and a value that increases starting from 0 When Numbering Position is set in the Spac settings it is necessary to bear in mind that it is a configuration recommended for use with the automatic numbering command Non automatic wire numbering is used only in the case of changes to the diagram or when made necessary by particular requirements Positional wire numbering xj Unlike the other types of numbering with positional the start wire number is not present in the dialog window as the numbering always starts from 0 for every new segment In addition it is not possible to filter the wires numbered previously using the option Protect numbering wires already numbered To simplify work Indicate un numbered wires views the wires that remain to be numbered on the current page Available only with non automatic numbering CAUTION Owing to limitations due to the rules of this numbering method use of this configuration is advisable only in cases in which it is really necessary The operating features are the same as those already described for non positional Automatic Numbering Accurate reading of the segment number is ensured by the configuration of Sheet Dimensioning The following example refers to wire numbering on sheet 1 110 111 112 in segment no 2 the wires are 120 121 122 This type of numbering is correct only when the title block is formed o
474. umbering The selection points correspond to the insertion points of the wire numbers copied Delete Numbers this command deletes the wire number copies on the entities selected or on the branches indicated Only the number of the original wire is kept Update Numbers thus is used following any changes to wire numbering lt allows you to align the copies with the new number values The 5 6 Delete numbers command does not remove the copied wire numbers duplicated in this way Use this command only when it is really necessary as Wire Numbering ignores copies of numbers during numbering updates 5 Wire numbering 113 5 5 Number summary This function is used to manually insert the Blinfi block on the current sheet automatic numbering inserts them automatically This symbol contains the value of the first and last wire number used on the sheet in addition to the available numbers for any changes This symbol is not managed in the case of positional numbering or with the sheet prefix enabled BLINFI block selection xi The symbol used is the one configured in the automatic numbering parameters see 4 2 Settings The blinfi are stored in the Spac Libraries Symbols directory each dwg block corresponds with a sld image slide with the same name for viewing in the dialog window AUDE AL MET ES H Fire ee EEN l Insertion takes place in coordinate 0 0 You can customize new bli
475. unction allows you to simulate sections originally drawn with a continuous type of line with a different type of dashed line The sections are made by Spac Start using the continuous type of line Continuous This parameter cannot be changed this is why simulation is performed as the 3DPOLY entity cannot take different values from this one The required linetype needs to be configured for stilo Linel every family of installation choosing each time DISTRIBUZIONE from the list and associating it pressing the a LLUMINAZIONE Bee NUOUS 0 Change button A Gs EE EE EE any type of FORZA CONTINUOUS line remain continuous Conversion takes place pressing Explode This condition is considered valid for making particular prints of the drawing simplifying its CONTINUOUS H consultation and is not valid for normal work ec The figure shows an exploded section with dashed lines In S 7 normal conditions not exploded the sections are drawn with ae y polylines E o To return to the normal state of the drawing call the function and press the Restore button ZAN E Simulation of the dashed line is left to continue normally with the SCH job ea The size of the dash is adjusted by the system variable SCALATL _Ltscale O It is advisable not to store the drawing final with the exploded sections Number of conduits The sections that are divided into conduits are graphically represente
476. updated in consecutive order on all the sheets KA1 KA2 KA3 etc Incremental The increment starts from 1 again for every prefix Positional Tagging The symbol prefix is associated with its own position on the drawing for this reason it is important to execute Sheet Dimensioning correctly see par 4 2 The new reference associated with the Parent Symbol is stated also on the corresponding sub element symbols The page and segment column are added to the symbol with KAI KATZ prefix KA so KA1 1 on sheet 1 in segment 1 KA1 2 on sheet 1 in segment 2 KA2 1 on sheet 2 in segment 1 etc PFC references In the example figure the references are of the PFC type Prefix Sheet and Segment In the case of 2 parent symbols with the same prefix in the same segment the function distinguishes them by a letter KA1 1A KA1 1B etc avoiding generating unwanted same names O The prefix file see Symbol Configuration associated with 4 1 Setting acts on the variable P prefix while the Sheet Dimensioning value acts on the variable Cat segment 4 General commands 105 4 8 Scan Multi sheets This command is used to update or create as new when it does not exist the database of the job order information and data contained in the file DoSpac mdb present in every job order folder The database contains the list of panels the index of all the component references the index of the terminals a
477. ure server and client O via the TCP IP protocol described below 1 Setup 17 Installation and configuration of the licensed server TCP IP Operating system Windows XP Vista Logon as Administrator Insert DVD and run SDI EXE from Key Utility folder Use USB section Press Install to install the local driver concerning the SmartKey plugged in Then press Update to check version and activity of the driver and close SDI Run SCC EXE from the DVD from Key Utility folder Open the Multilan Service section Enable the TCPIP option Set the Port value with the number of a port not used by any other applications for example 5500 Setthe Timeout s value to 15 SA SS A O Press Apply and then OK or If there is a firewall on the licensed client computer remember to open the port to be used for both the TCP and the UDP protocols Installation and configuration of the licensed client TCP IP Operating system Windows XP Vista Logon as Administrator Insert the DVD Run SCC EXE from Key Utility folder Open the Client section Select Windows program category from the Configuration settings for Press Add select TCPIP OK Enter in the field Server name or IP address computer name licensed server configured in the preceding section if the server IP address varies as it is obtained automatically DHCP service enabled or enter the IP address
478. used as default is LegendaR dwg present in the symbols folder The use of customized tables is possible provided that they are present in the same directory 3 Sheet Management 61 Sheet Sequence For every sheet all the revisions it contains are inserted consecutively With this sorting procedure it is possible to exclude from the list both sheets that do not have a revision and those with empty revision symbol Multi sheet Sheet Revision Change Date Signature EXAMPLE10 01 EXAMPLE10 01 EXAMPLE10 01 EXAMPLE10 01 Replacement of GD1 06 04 99 S Franchino Control lamps 06 04 00 C Maritano EXAMPLE10 01 Removed External Line 16 05 99 S Franchino Control lamps 06 04 00 C Maritano EXAMPLE10 01 Replacement of GD1 06 04 99 S Franchino EXAMPLE 10 01 Example of Revision Legend sorted by Sheet Revision Sequence For every revision number all the pages it contains are inserted consecutively This sorting procedure automatically excludes from the list both sheets that do not have a revision and those with empty revision symbol Multi sheet Sheet Change Date Signature EXAMPLE10 01 Replacement of GD1 06 04 99 S Franchino EXAMPLE10 01 Removed External Line 16 05 99 S Franchino EXAMPLE10 01 Replacement of GD1 06 04 99 S Franchino EXAMPLE10 01 Control lamps 06 04 00 C Maritano EXAMPLE10 01 Control lamps 06 04 00 OC Maritano Example of Revision Legend sorted by Rev No 62 Spac Start 2012 3 18 She
479. ut they are used differently The descriptions with the slanted character show the differences from the terminal symbol 228 e Spac Start 2012 d O Terminal block symbol This category of symbols is tied to the 6 3 Terminal Blocks and Connectors operation which automatically draws the terminal blocks according to the quantity and type of Terminal symbols placed on the electrical diagram The Terminal block symbol or more commonly called Terminal Return is normally stored with a precise sequence of the attributes for uniformity and to make data consulting easier in the previous Spac versions the sequence of the attributes was compulsory for operating matters The various models of terminal block symbols available in the library differ from one another only graphically and for the position and state of visibility of the We attributes Example of symbols in terminal block In a block of a Terminal block the sequence is the same as the one with which they are selected one at a time during creation If the block is stored with a single selection window the attributes will be sorted in reverse order to that of their creation A block that comprises the following series of attributes is considered as a Terminal block or Terminal Return symbol Label Default Type Description During automatic terminal block drafting between the terminals that require it the jumper is drawn polyline 0 5 mm in th
480. ute containing I or IGNORE are rejected Bill of materials xi Processing for all the components present in the multi sheets selected in SCHEMA BN On Board LAYOUT Control and signalling Panel the list LISTE QG Main Panel OPZIONI MACCHINA QG A1 Main Panel Panel Door Terminals Connectors and Raceways are counted only on request as also any symbols not assigned to any panel with Symbols without Panel lt e Enabling Process current sheet the list is executed by single page CR While with the option Sort by sheet the list is executed complete but sorted by single page S Summary see par 3 1 To meet all requirements it is possible to sort the list data according to 4 criteria e List by reference e List by Panel and Reference e List by Type available also in Compact View e List by panel and Type available also in Compact View 174 Spac Start 2012 At the end of the scan of the multi sheets the list is shown on the screen The result of this list can be drawn in Table or extracted into a CSV File Bill of materials sorted by reference Code Al TSXDEY16D2 TSXDSYO8R5 TSXRKY4EX XUKTIKSML2 i ml eh ek eh LR201314 DF6AB08 TSXPSY2600M ABL UEQ24200 XB5K5B 013702480 710011 0101 XB4BWG1 ZBY0101 XBABWB5 FBY0101 MB4BVB5 FBYOIN cani XB4BVBA4 igue 7 FBY0I01 i XB4BWB1 ecani 7 ZBY0101 elemecanique XBABVE3 elemecanique 10 BY0101 cani
481. utes Export Attributes Graphic changes This command allows you to change the text height color position rotation and style of the chosen attributes Graphic altribute changes Insert the name of the attributes to be 1 changed in the Attribute field then press the Add button to insert them in TAGLIA Size i the list Press Change to change the characteristics of an attribute already inserted in the list and Delete to remove it tsi m m In the Attributes List there are only the names of the more common tags the list cannot be changed Only selected symbols the change takes place only for the blocks selected Identical to selection acts on all the blocks identical to the one selected of the sheet multi sheet or job order All symbols all the blocks are changed on the sheet multi sheet or job order that possess at least one of the attributes to be changed In the figure of the example the attributes tags Name and Size become color 4 with heights of 3 5 and 3 mm While the fields concerning text Position x y Rotation Style and width are not considered You can use the character as suffix of the attribute name Example to change the attributes Reg1 Reg2 Reg3 etc in a single operation simply indicate reg Pressing Default the current configuration is stored in local mode see par 4 2 for subsequent uses of the same command I
482. utput an Ascii file is generated in the job order folder called CrossRef M csv with the same contents as those on the screen This option allows you to show in detail faults that were not visible in the Report it is also the only one in which changing is allowed or data correction View All processing related with Element symbols is filtered Elements Pressing Output an Ascii file is generated in the job order folder called CrossRef E csv with the same contents as those on the screen View returns All processing related with Returns is filtered Pressing Output an Ascii file is generated in the job order folder called CrossRef S csv with the same contents as those on the screen Editing It is possible to change data only and exclusively in the View Parents condition This edit possibility is helpful for solving part of the faults that Cross Reference has detected during job order processing avoiding intervening graphically on the drawing The Code present on symbol KA2 has a value of 12E This means that the parent component is sized to accommodate as many Sub elements as are allowed by Reference 12E FA opi FC e It should be noted that 12E makes it possible to accommodate 1 NO contact open and 2 NC contacts closed while on the drawing there are 3 NC contacts and 1 NO the error consists in one NC too many Cross reference All parents and signals From View Parents it is GE A noted that o
483. view can be noted only on the list of elements e for cables c and raceways t the two modes do not change the result Technical Manual Pressing this button the function performs a search operation in the Spac Libraries Documents folder Depending on the code selected in the list the search will be for a file with Doc or Pdf extension If for example the code FINDER 60123048 is selected the function seeks if available the relevant technical documentation in file 60123048 doc or 60123048 pdf lf more than one technical reports exist the function seeks and opens documents 60123048 01 doc 60123048 02 doc 60123048 03 doc etc up to a maximum of 20 documents If no technical report exists no file with the same name as the code a warning message is shown Any unfound documents are listed in the Spacdoc Log file in the User folder The documents cannot be edited They can only be seen or sent directly to the printer with the same order they have in the Bill O To open and print PDF files the setup for Acrobat Reader 4 0 ITA in the Reader folder is available in the Spac Start CD ROM 352 Spac Start 2012 List Table This option allows you to draw the bill of materials in table form Pressing Table proceeds with the drawing of the Bill in table form parametric mode This option allows you to draw respecting the planimetry scale in proportion a table with the same contents as shown in the list Every datum Tag cont
484. w You can customize new symbols storing them in the same folder as those already existing Libraries Panel The block name must be consecutive to the already existing names present Lypint_18 Lypint_19 etc for a maximum of 20 blocks the dialog window can show a max of 20 windows Insertion is envisaged with scale 1 1 lt is possible to set new or different scale values only by customizing the menu see par 16 3 Deleting a symbol compromises the viewing in the chosen window of the numerically subsequent ones Symbols Pushbutton panel rear This function accesses the symbols library helpful for drawing the layout of the pushbutton panel rear These are symbols complete with attributes completed manually during insertion on the drawing using the AutoCAD Ddatte command These symbols are used both when intending to draw manually and for automatic processing 210 Spac Start 2012 13 5 Panel Utility e Modular Cabinets e Modular Panels This is a library of symbols that allows you to quickly draw the structural steelwork of standard cabinets and panels using the symbols of glass or sheet metal doors double doors front base plates etc The various panels can be formed manually or using a library of precomposed panels for the most common requirements otherwise a set of symbols depicting the general dimensions of switches and relays and other components is available to represent any compos
485. wiring diagram Owing to limitations due to the rules of this numbering method use of this configuration is advisable only in cases in which it is really necessary CAUTION The use of position numbering is unadvisable when the master title block is dimensioned with a quantity of segments above number 9 4 General commands 83 Wire Properties Increment A whole number must be set This is the automatic increment of the values that are forced in the attributes of terminal Numl and NumO during insertion of terminals on un numbered wires The same increment is used by non positional wire numbering normally the increment is 1 Force Wire No This determines the priority when a wire is numbered that is already connected to terminals The Force condition is the most common one as it allows more homogeneous distribution of the numbers When a wire is selected on which terminals are connected they receive an update with the new value regardless of the fact that they are numbered or not If in the terminal properties different or same Input Output Same is active the wire number will be forced both in the attribute Numl input number and in the attribute NumO output number of the terminal If Different is set during numbering it will be necessary to select both the previous wire upstream at the terminal and the next one downstream Receive Wire This determines the priority when a wire is numbered that i
486. wn by others might have been drawn with any unit whatsoever which must be traced for example by checking the thickness of a wall 1 a zzz If with the help of the Calculate function the wall thickness measured is 15 units it is easy to presume that this means 15 centimetres so the unit used for drawing is the centimetre Detect This function asks you to select 2 points to measure their distance expressed in distance units and help you to recognise the unit of measure Symbol Scale This is the value used to insert symbols to make them proportionate on the drawing This value is clearly conditioned by the drawing unit of measure and scale However the Symbol Scale insertion factor can be changed to make the symbols more or less evident in relation to the value calculated automatically Texts Height This is the default value proposed for the height of texts This value corresponds to texts with a height of 3mm on the printed drawing Snap amp Grid These 2 parameters are calculated automatically to obtain on the drawing the grid of 1 real metre the snap proposes a pitch of 25 real cm Squaring Title Blocks You can customize new title blocks storing them in the same folder as those already existing Libraries Symbols The name of the symbol must keep the same prefix as the default ones for example A2_HORIZ original A2 HORIZ_FirmName A2_ORIZ_Customer etc A2 VERT original AO VERT_ _FirmName AO VERT Custo
487. ws you to assign the usage value to terminals This function allows you to assign the usage value to terminals manually The command asks if you want to operate on all the terminals of the page or only on those that still do not have the usage then the function starts showing the first terminal now it is necessary to select the destination element or terminal on the diagram and so on The panel and name of the component or terminal selected together form the usage value which is stated in the attribute of the same name in every terminal List without usage This command generates the list on the screen of the sheets where use of the Assign usage command is necessary The terminals without usage value are indicated for every sheet 138 Spac Start 2012 6 5 Terminal Ddattef d ps This is used to change the data of the terminal associated during insertion on the drawing It is used to change the data of terminals or of connectors and plugs see par 6 1 avoiding using the AutoCAD Eattedit or Ddatte commands incorrect operation Selecting a terminal all the data that have been assigned to it during insertion on the drawing are shown At this stage it is possible to change the Panel Terminal Block and characteristics of the material Terminal characteristic modification On Board Control and signalling f Main Panel Main Panel Panel Dol WEIDMULLER WEIDMULLER WEIDMULLER WEIDMULLER WEIDMULLER
488. x Every new extraction replaces any files extracted by previous operations with no further requests The original multi sheet must always be kept O CAUTION The single files extracted with this procedure are not valid for reversing the path O Turning off Save all entities on Sheet 0 every dwg file is composed of 2 layers the original one with the number of the sheet and the 0 which is always present either empty or with the title block 3 Sheet Management 53 3 12 Copy between sheets This command allows you to copy objects from one sheet to another Variable Position This is the case in which the objects on the destination sheet must have a different position than the one they have on the start sheet After selecting the objects to be copied the destination sheet must be indicated multiple selections are possible to copy on more sheets at the same time Use the mouse to indicate the start point and then the destination point on the chosen page First moving point Destination point In the case of multiple selection more than one destination sheet selected the command is cyclic for all the following sheets The Variable Position copy type only works on sheets belonging to the current multi sheet Fixed Position This is the case in which the objects on the destination sheet must be copied in the same position as on the start sheet After selecting the objects to be copied the destination s
489. y and also the walling part keeping the characteristic data of the various elements unchanged It will then be possible to edit the parts that are variants if necessary The function requests the copy prefix formed of a maximum of 10 characters Supposing we insert the prefix AULA1 the result obtained is of the type in the figure TRAO TU SAT AULA TRAO TU SAT Example of application of the Copy installation command All the references of sections and components that are in the new part of drawing copied are automatically updated with the prefix AULA1 written between square brackets Example reference TR1 0 copied becomes AULA1 TR1 0 However it can occur in some cases to copy a part of installation which in turn derives from a previous copy the function requests the prefix Supposing we insert the prefix 1 PIANO the copy of the previous section AULA1 TR1 0 takes the name 1 PIANO AULA1 TR1 0 and so on 340 Spac Start 2012 22 3 Installation dimension This command is a customization of the traditional AutoCAD dimensioning important for automatically dimensioning the installation in the parts useful for practical development Dimensioning takes place on all the components with reference to the related node point when present if not the symbol insertion point is detected The function requests Select Nodes and Elements Select lt All gt Quit Return Press S to make a
490. y Cut table is created which summarises all the information of the raceways drawn for each Panel or according to those selected on request RACEWAY CUT TABLE Panel d No Long ui mm e Ces wa ww z Ja Jee SC 2 Jm wa we 2 Ia ma we Cut Table Every datum Tag contained in the Available fields is information which pressing Add is inserted in the Output fields to represent a column of the table Each Tag possesses two variables the width and the column title which can be changed by pressing the Edit button Standard is the basic configuration of the output fields where applicable Pressing Default the current configuration is stored in local mode see par 4 2 for subsequent uses lf confirmed without pressing Default the configuration is considered as occasional and used only once N B The command is not enabled in some versions of Spac Start 13 Layout 209 13 4 Panel Symbols This function accesses a symbols library helpful for manually drawing the layout of pushbutton panels These are symbols complete with attributes completed manually during insertion on the drawing Symbols Pushbutton panel front This function accesses the symbols library helpful for drawing the layout of the pushbutton panel front xi The blocks are stored in the Panel folder each dwg symbol corresponds with a sid image slide with the eee same name for viewing in the dialog windo
491. y existing inverting the sequence of the returns X shaped branch a Like the L shaped branch but the sequence of the returns is not inverted The various functions can be drawn with different types of connection For all three the connection point is optional Standard The traditional system is surely the easiest and quickest way to draw but it involves some limits as it is not graphically shown how the connection is actually made Some Spac functions are affected by this shortcoming limiting the processing potential Parallel In this mode the type of connection is specified in detail Dm we CN z a LEI OP 1 The example in the figure shows that components QF1 and QF2 receive the power feed directly from the terminal block Serial EI EE DEI OPE a The example in the figure shows that component QF1 receives the power feed directly from the terminal block while QF2 is powered through a jumper made from QF1 4 General commands 95 Power Feed Returns This command is used to insert the return symbols one at a time in the points selected by the user With Automatic Position see par 4 2 on the basis of the selection point and line inclination the function chooses where to insert a start return or a destination return with rotations at 0 or 90 The return is inserted in the end point nearest to the point used to select the line When the line select
492. y on the Edificio Artigianale sel SE D 5pim2003 Program Lite DATA HIDDEN planimetry Nome file Edificio Artigianale scl Tipo file ES Annulla Individua Trova file The symbols imported respect the proportions of the device of both rectangular and circular shape For this reason it is not possible to automatically insert the same symbols of the library The imported symbols are in any case valid and compatible with all the functions of Spac Start It is now possible to view the same result generated by LiteStar in the graphic environment The 3D graphics have been obtained with the 3D View and Hide commands see par 17 14 To simplify the image we have approximated the arc to one line Any change made to the devices in the AutoCAD environment is not considered by the LiteSTAR programme just as no change to the shape of the room made in LiteSTAR is taken into consideration by AutoCAD 26 LiteSTAR 369 26 5 Import Isolux Curves This function is used to import to the planimetry the drawing of the Isolux Curves that have been calculated using LiteStar after performing export data from LiteStar select the corresponding Pnt file The function continues with the request of the Isovalue Parameters immediately afterwards the data of the Pnt file from the lighting engineering calculation of LiteStar are imported on the planimetry Parametri Isovalore x Walor
493. y present Title3 Title4 etc for a maximum of 20 blocks the dialog window can show a max of 20 windows Deleting a symbol compromises the viewing in the insertion window of the numerically subsequent ones 3 Sheet Management e 63 Sheet legend The Sheet Title legend is a function to be used only after having checked the presence and correctness of the titles associated with every sheet better if after job order completion with the description of the page content The symbols of the titles are inserted on the drawing using the Sheet title and 3 1 Create Multi sheet commands x Every change made to already existing titles involves the subsequent updating of the legend UNIFILARE by the user MULTIFILARE For each page consideration is also taken of the content of the last sheet revision contained in the Revision symbol sheet At the start it is necessary to select the drawings to be processed this allows you to obtain the specific legend for each multi sheet or complete one of the whole job order advisable choice The sheets processed are then presented in a list like the one in the following figure In the first column the name of the multi sheet is given to distinguish the position of any sheets that have the same page number Sheet title list Translation Revision DATI PROGETTO INFORMATIONS PROJECT LISTA FOGLI INDEX SHEET ALIMENTAZIONE POWER SUPPLY ALIMENTAZIONE AUSILIARI MOTORI AUSILIARI 11
494. you to access change for all the characteristics of the symbol Edil Symbol see par 28 2 It is not possible to intervene on Laying height and in zone management see par 17 13 values that can only be changed using the specific commands 21 3 Reference Index This function checks the highest number that has been used for each component prefix present on the current drawing in order to rebuild a new index essential for proposing the immediately successive values for the references of the new symbols that will be inserted Supposing we delete the symbol XS8 16A socket from the drawing New index If this command is used immediately after deleting XS8 the index is restored The name of the next 16A socket will be XS8 or in any case a consecutive value to the highest one detected by the drawing Previous index The deletion of XS8 is ignored The name of the next 16A socket will be XS9 so the references will no longer be consecutive In the presence of the node the change is also valid for all the elements that are hooked to the one that has just been changed see par 28 2 Therefore a component hooked to a free element without node is released after the use of this command as the second symbol keeps the original laying height 21 Elements 331 21 4 Element tagging On drawings that have undergone many changes it can occur that the component tags are no longer consecutive eg X
495. za Legenda Funzione Legenda Simboli Legenda Cross Reference the configuration file the default list proposes the content of the Libraries Cfg folder in which the Start Configuration files are present To select a Local Configuration file page through the job order Path folder choosing Other After choosing the file the list is opened of the keys settings contained select from the list the settings you intend to transfer to the local configuration Legenda I O PLC Legenda Titoli Legenda Revisione Plottatura automatica multifogli Numerazione Fogli Output commesse Configurazione_Legenda_ IO PLE Configurazione_Legenda_Titoli Configurazione Legenda _Revisioni Stampa_Fogli_Automatica Numerazione_Fogli Loss Reference Output Commesse The message NOT IMPORTABLE Configuration less complete than current one indicates that importing the keys highlighted all those with the asterisk is not allowed as they are less updated or complete than those contained in the Spac_cfg ini of the current job order After importing it is advisable to always check that the data are correct In the case of partial d imports it is necessary to check the compatibility of the imported data with the existing data 70 Spac Start 2012 Sheet Dimensioning Dimensioning must be carried out or checked for every new drawing or immediately after inserting the master title block on sheet 0 Th

Start 2012 - User manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents